Академический Документы
Профессиональный Документы
Культура Документы
Financial Services
Workbook
While every possible care has been taken in type-setting and printing this book, the ICFAI
University welcomes suggestions from students for improvement in future editions.
Contents
2
• The money market involves high volumes and is dominated by a relatively small number of
players, namely: Government of the country, central bank, banks, financial institutions,
corporates, mutual funds, foreign institutional investors, discount houses, acceptance
houses and market makers (primary and satellite dealers).
• The main money market instruments are: Government and Quasi-Government securities,
banking sector securities and private sector securities.
• Government and Quasi-Government securities include Treasury bills and Government
dated securities or Gilt-edged securities.
• Banking sector securities include Call and notice money market securities, Term money
market securities, Certificates of deposit and Participation certificates.
• Private sector securities include Commercial paper, Bills of exchange, Inter-corporate
deposits/Investments and Money market mutual funds.
• Repo transactions are popular mechanisms to deploy/borrow short-term funds in the money
market, by selling securities to another party with an agreement to buy back the same at a
later date.
• The main risks associated with money market instruments/investments are: Market risk,
interest rate risk, reinvestment risk, default risk, inflation risk, currency risk and political
risk.
• The main money market securities in the US market are: Government securities (T-bills),
Municipal notes, Federal agency securities, Call loan market, Repos and reverses,
Certificates of deposit, Eurodollar deposits and Eurodollar CDs, Yankee CDs, Loan
participations, Bankers’ acceptances, Commercial papers, Euro commercial papers in
Europe and commercial bills.
• The main objectives of the monetary policy are: Price stability and economic growth.
• The most critical factors in a monetary policy are: Money supply, interest rate stability and
exchange rate stability.
• Monetary contraction can be resorted to control inflation, by adopting one of the following
measures: Increase the statutory reserves (CRR and SLR), undertake repo transactions or go
in for open market operations.
• The RBI controls the money market in India by adopting the following measures: Changes
in CRR, changes in SLR, open market operations, reduction in bank and repo rates.
• There are two types of dealers in the Indian money markets, namely, primary dealers and
satellite dealers.
• The main objectives of the primary dealers are: Enhance liquidity of the money market,
become underwriters and market makers for government securities, activate the secondary
market for government securities and aid the RBI in open market operations.
• Subsidiaries of nationalized banks, FIs and security business companies can become
primary dealers, if they have a minimum of Rs.50 crore as net owned funds. Subsidiaries of
FIIs can become primary dealers subject to permission from the FIPB.
• The RBI extends the following support to the PDs: Liquidity support, permission to borrow
and lend in the market, access to current and subsidiary general ledger accounts, repos and
refinance, permission to raise funds through commercial papers and permission to transfer
funds from one center to the other.
• Satellite dealers support the functions of the primary dealers.
• The main objectives of the satellite dealers are: Further increase the depth of the secondary
market of government securities; enhance the liquidity of the same and provide a retail
outlet to the government securities due to their wide branch network.
• Subsidiaries of nationalized banks, FIs and security business companies can become
satellite dealers, if they have a minimum of Rs.5 crore as net owned funds.
3
• The RBI extends the following support to the SDs: Access to current and subsidiary general
ledger accounts, permission to borrow and lend funds in the money market and recommend
the government of India to enter into ready forward transactions in securities with eligible
institutions.
Call Money
• The call money market is the part of the money market where the surplus funds of the
banks are traded on a daily basis. Borrowers use funds to match short-term mismatches of
assets and liabilities and to match the CRR requirements. This market is a measure of the
liquidity of the overall money market.
• Maturity period varies from 1 to 14 days.
• Money that is lent for a day is called overnight money.
• All private sector, public sector and co-operative banks, term lending institutions, insurance
companies and mutual funds participate in this market. Primary dealers, DFHI and STCI
can participate only in the local call money markets.
• Interest paid on call loans is known as call rates and is calculated on a daily basis.
• Call money markets are located in the cities that have the major stock exchanges in India,
namely Mumbai, Kolkata, Delhi, Chennai and Ahmedabad. Mumbai has the largest market
in India.
• The RBI acts as a regulator of the call money market, but neither borrows from nor lends to
it. It uses repos and open market operations to control the market.
• An efficient call money market should be less volatile and provide an opportunity to the
players to transact at comparatively stable rates of interest.
Treasury Bills
• Treasury bills are issued by the government to raise short-term funds in the money market.
They are a major portion of the borrowings of the Government of India.
• The RBI acts as the banker to the Government of India to issue the T-bills.
• The main investors in T-bills include: Banks (to meet their SLR requirements), primary
dealers, financial institutions (for primary cash management), insurance companies,
provident funds (as per the investment guidelines), non-banking finance companies,
corporations, FIIs, state governments and individuals (to a very minor extent).
• T-bills are issued in the form of promissory notes or credited to the SGL account. They are
for a minimum of Rs.25,000 and multiples thereof, issued at a discount and redeemed at par
and do not carry any yield.
• At present there are five types of T-bills in India: 14-day, 28-day, 91-day, 182-day and 364-
day, out of which the 28-day T-bills have not yet been launched. The bills are available in
paper as well as in scripless form.
• Ad hoc T-bills are issued in favor of the RBI when the government needs to replenish the
cash balances and to provide temporary surpluses to state governments and foreign central
banks. These are not available to the public.
• On tap T-bills were issued by the RBI to investors on any day and with no limit on
investment. They were for a minimum of 91 days and the discount rate was around 4.6%
redeemable at par. They were discontinued from April 1, 1997.
• 14-day and 91-day T-bills are auctioned weekly on Fridays and payment in respect to the
allotments is made on Saturdays.
• The auction for 182-day and 364-day is held weekly on Wednesdays and payment in
respect to the allotments is made on Thursdays.
• T-bills are important market instruments in the US, where the minimum denomination
is $10,000 and in multiples of $5,000 thereof. The American T-bills are mainly
classified as ‘regular-series T-bills’ and ‘irregular-series T-bills’.
4
• Regular-series of 13-week, 26-week and 52-week maturities are issued weekly or monthly
while irregular-series are issued for a special cash need of the treasury.
• The US T-bills are sold in auctions and issued at a discount to face value.
Commercial Paper (CP)
• Commercial Papers (CPs) are a short-term unsecured usance promissory notes issued at a
discount to face value by reputed corporates with high credit rating and strong financial
background.
• CPs are open to individuals, corporates, NRIs and banks, but the NRIs can invest on non-
repatriable/non-refundable basis. FIIs have also been allowed to invest their short-term
funds in CPs.
• The features of CPs are: They do not originate from specific trade transactions like commercial
bills. They are unsecured, involve much less paper work and have very high liquidity.
• CPs have a minimum maturity of 15 days and a maximum maturity of 1 year. They are
available in denomination of Rs.5 lakh and multiples of Rs.5 lakh and the minimum
investment is Rs.5 lakh per investor.
• CPs can be direct paper if issued directly to the investors by the corporate or dealer paper if
issued through an intermediary/merchant banker. CPs are usually placed with the investors
by issuing and paying agents.
• Secondary market trading takes place in lots of Rs.5 lakh each usually by the banks. The
transfer is done by endorsement and delivery.
• The main reasons for poor development of the CPs market are: Restricted entry of
corporates, tendency to issue CPs only if the total cost is lower than the PLR of banks, high
minimum investment of individual investors and no tax benefits.
• In the US markets, CPs are defined as short-term, unsecured usance promissory notes
issued at a discount to face value with fixed maturity by financially strong companies with
high credit ratings.
• The main purpose of issuing CPs in the US is to finance current assets.
• The main features are: High liquidity and safety, high quality instruments negotiable by
endorsement and delivery, issued in multiples of $1,000 as bearer documents at a discount
to the face value. They are unsecured by nature and tailored to the user requirement as far
as maturity period is concerned.
• There are also two types of CPs in the US: Direct paper (issued directly by the corporates
and large banks) and dealer paper (issued by the dealers on behalf of their corporate
clients).
• The innovations in the American CP market are: Master note (financial paper issued by
finance companies to bank trust departments with interest pooled by the investors),
medium-term notes (unsecured obligation papers with maturity of 9-10 months issued by
investment grade corporations at fixed rate) and asset-backed commercial papers (packages
of pooled loans or credit receivables with lower rates of interest and placed with a special
purpose entity).
Certificate of Deposits (CDs)
• Certificate of Deposits (CDs) is a usance promissory note, negotiable and in marketable
form bearing a specified face value and number. Scheduled commercial banks and the
major financial institutions can issue CDs.
• Individuals, corporates, trusts and NRIs are the main investors on CDs (on non-repatriable
basis).
5
• The features of CDs are: It is a title document to a time deposit, riskless, liquid and highly
marketable, issued at a discount to face value, being part of the time liabilities of banks,
either in registered or bearer form, freely transferable by endorsement and delivery. It does
attract stamp duty.
• The benefits of issuing CDs to the banks are: Interest can be determined on a case to case
basis, there is no early maturity of a CD, rates are more sensitive to call rates.
• To the investors the benefits of subscribing to CDs are: It is a better way of deploying
short-term funds as higher yield is offered, secondary market liquidity is available and
repayment of interest and principal is assured.
• CDs are issued for a period of 15 days to one year (normally one to three years by the
financial institutions) at a minimum amount of Rs.5 lakh and in multiples of 1 lakh
thereafter with no upper limit.
• There is no specific procedure to issue the CDs. It is available, on tap, with the bankers.
• CDs are the largest money market instruments traded in dollars. They are also issued by
either banks or depository institutions, mostly in bearer form enabling trading in the
secondary market.
• Individuals, corporates and other bodies also buy the CDs in the US.
• The features of American CDs are: They are bearer instruments, negotiable, with a
minimum denomination of $100,000, maturity of 30 days to 5 years. CDs with more than
one year maturity are known as term CDs.
• CDs have undergone various innovations: Asian dollar CDs, jumbo CDs, yankee CDs,
brokered CDs, bear and bull CDs, installment CDs, rising rate CDs and foreign index CDs,
all with different features. Many more innovations are expected in this uprising market.
Bill Financing
• Monetary policy refers to the use of the official instruments under the control of the central
bank of the country to regulate the availability, cost and use of money and credit.
• The bank standard rate is the rate at which the bank is prepared to buy or rediscount bills of
exchange or other commercial paper eligible for purchases.
• A bill of exchange has been defined as an instrument in writing containing an unconditional
order, signed by the maker, directing a certain person to pay a certain sum of money only
to, or to the order of, a certain person or to the bearer of the instrument.
• The specific features of a negotiable instrument are: There must be three parties to the
exchange, namely drawer, drawee and payee, the instrument must be in writing, containing an
order (not a request) to a certain person to pay, unconditionally, a certain sum of tender legal
money, duly signed by the drawer and presented to the drawee for acceptance. It should also
have date, number, place and other considerations found in the bills of exchange.
• Bills of exchange can be classified as demand or usance bills, documentary or clean bills,
D/A or D/P bills, inland or foreign bills, supply bills or government bills or accommodation
bills.
• Bills can also be classified as traders bills, bills with co-acceptance, bills accompanied by
letter of credit and drawee bills.
• Originally discounted bills can be rediscounted by banks for their corporate clients with
financial institutions, as long as such bills arise out of genuine trade transactions.
• The RBI has instructed banks to restrain from rediscounting bills outside the consortium of
banks and initially discounted by finance companies and merchant bankers. Further
discounting should be only for the purpose of working capital/credit limits and for the
purchase of raw materials/inventory. Accommodation bills are not to be discounted under
any circumstances.
6
DEBT MARKET
Gilt-Edged Securities Market
• Gilt-edged securities mean securities of the best quality, where the repayment of principal
and interest is secured by the government. They are risk-free investments.
• Government securities are issued by central and state governments, semi-government
authorities and government financial institutions.
• Individuals, corporates, other bodies, state governments, provident funds and trusts are
allowed to invest in government securities.
• Government securities play a vital role in the open market operations conducted by the
central bank of the country.
• The minimum investment is Rs.10,000 and multiples thereof and they can be long-
dated, medium-dated and short-dated, with maturities of 10-20 years, 5-10 years and
less than 5 years respectively.
• In the primary market, government securities can be issued through auctions, pre-
announced coupon rates, as floating rate bonds, as zero-coupon bonds, as stock on tap, as
stock for which payment is to be made in installments or as stock on conversion of
maturing treasury bills/dated securities.
• There is a huge demand for government securities in the secondary market as they are the
first choice of banks to comply with the SLR requirements.
• The RBI usually undertakes the following transactions with banks: Open market operations,
repo transactions and switch deals.
Repurchase Agreements (REPOs)
• Repos are ready forward deals or agreements involving sale of a security with an
undertaking to buy-back the same security at a predetermined price and time in future. To
the seller, it is known as a repo and to the buyer it is known as a reverse repo.
• The market participants in repos are: Banks, DFHI, financial institutions, non-banking
entities like mutual funds that hold current and SGL accounts with the RBI.
• The operational aspects of a repo depend on: Size of the loan, selection of security, interest
rate and settlement system.
• The procedure to issue repos involves the acceptance of tenders, announcement of auction
results and the payment.
Public Deposits
• Corporates prefer public deposits to bank loans because as they are unsecured debts and the
funds can be deployed at the discretion of the company.
• Non-banking finance companies have been defined as loan companies or hire purchase
finance companies or investment companies or equipment leasing companies or mutual
benefit financial companies, while non-banking non-financial companies are those involved
in manufacturing, trading or service sector.
• Public deposit is any money borrowed by a company, but does not include advances,
guarantees from any government, bank borrowings, security deposits, funds from the
promoters or directors, share capital or debentures funds.
• Public deposits should be of 12 to 60 months tenure.
• The maximum rate of interest is decided by the RBI and the brokerage paid to the agents
depends on the duration of the deposit. The maximum amount of deposits cannot exceed
25% of the paid-up capital and free reserves. In addition, the company can accept deposits
from shareholders up to 10% of the paid-up capital and free reserves.
7
• The company must maintain liquid assets to the extent of 15% of the deposits maturing by
the end of the financial year (March 31). The liquid assets can be deposits with scheduled
banks without any lien, unencumbered securities of central and state governments, other
unencumbered securities or bonds of HDFC. The liquid amount can never fall below 10%
of the maturing deposits.
• Receipts of deposit must be issued within 8 weeks of acceptance and premature deposits are
allowed after a period of 3 months from the date of deposit, subject to the penalty for early
withdrawals.
• Every company accepting deposits should maintain a register of deposits at the registered
head office with the basic details of each depositholder, for a period of 8 years from the
financial year in which the latest entry is made.
• A company inviting public deposits must advertise the details of the company and the
profitability in an English and a local language newspaper.
• In order to market its public deposits successfully, a company has to develop a mix of the
following factors: Product differentiation, pricing, promotion, quality service and distribution.
Financial Guarantees
• A guarantee is a contract to perform or to discharge the liability of a third person in case of
his default. There are three parties involved in a guarantee: The lender, the borrower and
the guarantor.
• There are three major types of guarantees: Personal, governmental and institutional (usually
by financial institutions, banks, insurance companies, etc.).
• The government of India has also set-up two specialized public guarantee institutions:
Deposit Insurance and Credit Guarantee Corporation (DICGC) and Export Credit and
Guarantee Corporation (ECGC).
• While DICGC undertakes insurance of deposits on banks, guarantee for credit extended by
banks to priority sector and guarantee for credit extended to small scale industries, ECGC
offers cover to exporters against commercial risks and political risks.
• The main services offered by ECGC are: Standard policy, small exporters policy, specific
policy, guarantees to banks and special schemes (transfer guarantee, overseas investment
insurance and exchange rate fluctuation risk).
CAPITAL MARKET
An Overview of the Capital Market
• Of late the following broad trends like disintermediation, institutionalization, globalization
and modernization are being observed in the capital markets in India.
• The primary markets in India have observed the following major changes: Free pricing of
instruments, introduction of entry norms, improvement in the quality of disclosures,
introduction of the book building process to price new share issues, streamlining all the
procedures and registration of intermediaries like merchant bankers, registrars and share
transfer agents, brokers to issue, bankers to issue and debenture trustees.
• The secondary markets in India have observed the following major changes: Computerized
trading system, depository participants and dematerialization of issues, settlement of
clearing corporations for the stock exchanges, change in the settlement system, banning of
carry forward system, introduction of the margin system, minimum capital norms for
brokers, implementation of a vibrant secondary market for debt issues, review of the share
indices, strict regulations to maintain integrity of the markets, introduction of derivatives
and latest introduction of the daily rolling settlement process.
8
Regulation of the Capital Market
• SEBI was instituted by the Government of India to perform disciplinary (disincentives and
penalties for errant and unfair behavior) and developmental (incentives for constructive
activities) roles.
• The main objectives of SEBI are: Protection of the interests of investors in securities,
development of the securities markets in India and regulation of the securities markets.
• The activities of SEBI are divided into: Primary market department, issue management and
intermediaries department, secondary market department, institutional investment
department, investigation department and legal department.
• The major steps initiated by SEBI include: Registration of intermediaries, redressal of
investors’ grievances, improvement in the functioning of primary and secondary markets,
regulation of takeovers, emergence of institutional investors and entry of private mutual
funds in the markets, maintenance of fairness and integrity of the markets.
• The main objectives of the International Organization of Securities Commissions (IOSCO)
are: Promotion of high standards of regulations, exchange information on past experiences,
establishment of standards of conduct and provision of mutual assistance for promotion of
integrity.
• IOSCO has three types of members: Ordinary members, associate members and affiliate
members and various committees that meet every year to discuss important issues relating
to international securities and futures markets.
MERCHANT BANKING
An Overview of Merchant Banking
• Merchant bankers act as intermediaries between the issuers of capital and the ultimate
investors who purchase the securities. Merchant banker means a person who is engaged in
the business of issue management either by making arrangements regarding selling, buying
or subscribing to securities as manager, consultant, advisor or rendering corporate advisory
services in relation to such issue management.
• The scope of merchant banking in India covers: Management of debt and equity issues,
placement and distribution of investment proposals, corporate advisory services, project
advisory services, loan syndication, venture capital and mezzanine financing, mergers and
acquisitions, divestitures of assets, takeover defense activities and financial engineering.
• Merchant banking mushroomed in India in the ‘80s and ‘90s when the entry barriers were
low and many issues by dubious promoters were being floated.
• In order to control this trend, SEBI came up with stricter guidelines, like making the same
rules for all classes of merchant bankers, increasing the net worth requirements and the fee
structure. This resulted in some control over the mushrooming trend of fly-by-night
operators in the capital markets.
• Entry barriers in the merchant banking business are still low; competition is high; pressure
from substitute options is fast growing; bargaining power of buyers (clients) is very high;
and the bargaining power of suppliers (merchant bankers) is very low.
Management of Public Issues, Initial Public Offerings and Pricing of Various
Instruments
• An Initial Public Offering (IPO) is the first public offer of equity shares by a company since
its inception.
• An IPO is used as a financing strategy (to raise funds) or as an exit strategy (to offload
holding to the general public).
• There are various advantages and disadvantages of going public. It is to be noted that
despite so many issues hit the Indian markets, most of them get subscribed.
9
• The eligibility norms for IPO are: The company should be in existence for the last 5 years
with dividend payment for at least 3 years or the project for which funds are required
should be appraised by a bank or financial institution who should invest in at least 10% of
the equity or debt capital of the company. The issue size does not exceed 5 times the pre-
issue net worth.
• The company has to appoint various intermediaries like: Merchant bankers, registrars and
share transfer agents, bankers to the issue, debenture trustees (if applicable), advertising
agency and printers of stationery, underwriters to the issue, brokers to the issue, auditors
and legal advisor to the issue.
• The contribution of the promoter should be 20% of the post-issue equity capital. The
percentage of holding for a new company coming out with an issue at a premium depends
on the size of the issue. The lock-in requirement for the promoters’ holdings is 3 years.
• Contribution of the promoters should not include: Shares issued within one year of filing
prospectus with SEBI if the price is below the issue price; bonus shares out of revaluation
reserves; shares issued in consideration other than cash.
• SEBI has made some special mandatory provisions for debenture issues: Mandatory credit
rating; appointment of SEBI registered debenture trustee; creation of debenture redemption
reserve; option of redemption in case of roll-over of NCD/PCD; optional conversion of
debentures above 18 months; availability of optional conversion of debentures after 18
months or before 36 months for debentureholders; no issue of FCD for more than 3 years
without optional conversion with put and call option facility.
• The marketing of a public issue depends on: Timing of the issue, retail distribution
network, reservation portion in the issue and advertising campaign for the issue.
• The allotment of shares in case of oversubscription should be tilted towards the small
investors (those with applications up to 1000 shares) in order to avoid concentration of
power in few hands. There ought to be at least 5 investors per Rs.1 lakh of equity capital.
• In case of undersubscription of less than 90% of the issue size, the company must refund
the proceeds to the investors. In order to avoid refunds, the company can take the help of
underwriters who have to subscribe to the balance shares as per their pre-decided
commitments.
• While designing the capital structure of a company, the following points must be kept in
mind: Type of asset being financed, nature of the industry in which operating, degree of
competition, obsolescence of one’s products, product life cycle, financial policy and
past/current capital structure.
• While deciding about the financial instrument, the following points must be kept in mind:
Purpose of the offer, debt servicing, tax considerations, credit rating, asset cover and
dilution of ownership.
• The Indian capital markets have seen the following innovative financial instruments in the
recent past: Zero-coupon bonds, secured premium notes, deep discount bonds, optional
convertible bonds, third party convertible bonds, zero coupon convertible notes, tax saving
bonds, cumulative convertible preference shares, non-convertible debentures with equity
warrants, floating rate instruments, auction rated debt, zero-coupon bonds with equity
warrants, among others.
• New companies should price their issues at par, but private companies with profitability
track record can price their issues at a premium and listed companies can price their issues
freely. At present, 10% of the issue has to be made by the book building method.
• There are various alternatives to price an issue: Dividend discount model, yield expectation
of the public, book value of share, current market price, past price behavior, Japanese
auction pricing, book building method, brand equity of the company, etc.
• Indian companies tend to justify their premiums through qualitative as well as quantitative
factors.
10
• The pricing of an IPO in the Indian capital market is as follows: Estimation of the
preliminary price, deciding on the price band and determining the actual offer price.
• An issue could be overpriced, rightly priced or underpriced. The factors underlying
underpricing are: Asymmetric information, early fixation of offer price, interest rate float,
liquidity premium, building shareholders loyalty, rewarding the favored clients of the
merchant bankers and to attract the financial institutions.
• The factors responsible for persistent underpricing in the market are: The Winner’s curse,
information disclosure in the pre-selling period, informational cascades, avoidance of
litigation (not in India), signaling for a future issue, information asymmetry between firms
and investment bankers, regulatory constraints, political goals and market incompleteness.
Rights Issues, Bonus Issues, Private Placements and Bought-out Deals
• Rights shares are shares offered to the existing shareholders as a matter of legal right.
• The objectives of Sec. 81 are: Equitable distribution of shares, voting rights not to be
affected, shareholders interest in reserves/net worth not to be impaired.
• SEBI has come out with detailed guidelines for rights issues as well as the action plan on
how to go about a rights issue.
• A rights issue affects the wealth of those shareholders who renounce adversely, but does
not change the wealth of those who exercise their rights or sell the rights to someone else.
• The advantages of a rights issue are: It enables existing shareholders to retain their
proportionate ownership of the company, the company can also concentrate on the existing
shareholders without increasing the shareholder base and its cost of making is lower than
that of a public issue.
• The main disadvantage of a rights issue is that it takes a long time to complete the
transaction.
• Bonus issue is the process of capitalizing reserves to convert the quasi-capital into equity
capital, generally to bring the paid-up capital in line with the capital employed.
• A bonus issue does not affect the wealth of a shareholder.
• SEBI has also come up with a regulatory framework for bonus issues.
• A private placement is a method to raise funds under which companies directly sell their
securities to a limited number of sophisticated and discerning investors.
• The main features of a private placement are: No entry barriers, no need of registration with
SEBI, terms are negotiable between the parties, company has a choice of investors,
transaction costs are low, credit rating is optional and the time lag is shorter.
• Mutual funds, FIs, banks, insurance companies, FIIs, rich individuals and private equity
funds are the players in the placement market.
• The main issuers are: Listed companies, FIs, unlisted companies, closely-held companies,
PSUs and government companies.
• The merits of private placement are: Accessibility, speed, flexibility, lower transaction
costs and confidentiality.
• A buy-out is a process whereby an investor buys a significant portion of the equity of a
company with a view to make it public within an agreed time-frame. It is also known as a
wholesome investment.
• The main reasons for bought-out deals are: Funds requirement in adverse market
conditions, funds requirement when the company is not entitled to an IPO, when the
company cannot go for an IPO at a premium and when the offer of an investor is more
lucrative than an IPO.
• The advantages of a bought-out deal as compared to a public offer are: Price privilege,
quick fix, cost advantage and time to realize the funds.
11
INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
• The Indian companies have many opportunities to raise funds in the international equity
markets for the right kind of usage.
• There are various types of instruments in the international markets like: Yankee bonds,
Samurai bonds, Bulldog bonds, Euro bonds, etc., as well as ADR/GDR/IDRs for equity
issues.
• The major players in the international markets are: Borrowers/issuers, lenders/investors and
intermediaries. The institutional investors can be classified as: Market specific investors,
time specific investors and industry specific investors.
• Intermediaries are mainly: Lead and co-managers, underwriters, agents and trustees,
lawyers and auditors, listing agents and stock exchanges, depository banks, custodians and
lastly, printers.
• Resource mobilization depends on the following factors: Currency requirements, pricing of
the issue, investment, depth of the market, international positioning, regulatory aspects,
disclosure requirements and investment climate.
• The issuance of GDRs requires the following steps: Approval of the shareholders,
appointment of lead manager, finalization of the structure, documentation (prospectus,
depository agreement, underwriting agreement, subscription agreement, custodian
agreement, trust deed, paying and conversion agreement, listing agreement), the launching
of the GDR, marketing and road shows, pricing and finally closing.
• Eurodollars are liabilities denominated in US dollars, but not subject to US banking
regulations. Mostly banks located outside the US issue Eurodollar deposits.
• There are various advantages of Eurodollar deposits, the main being, lesser regulatory
impediments, lower cost of deposit intermediation and less intense supervisory scrutiny by
the authorities.
• The main instruments in the Eurodollar market are: Eurodollar Certificate of Deposits
(CDs), Eurodollar Floating Rate CDs (FRCDs), Eurodollar Floating Rate Notes (FRNs),
Note Issuance Facilities (NIFs) and EuroCommercial Papers (CPs).
• The three basic risks with Eurodollar deposits are: Chances of interference of transfer of
funds by the host country government, potential jurisdiction of international disputes and
soundness of deposits of banking offices of foreign countries with relation to the US.
• Most of the Euroloans are today sourced through a syndicate of banks or lenders. The
process is almost similar to the process of syndication of loans from internal sources.
• The advantages of syndicated loans are: Size of the loan, speed and certainty of funds,
maturity profile of the loan, flexibility in repayment, lower cost of funds, diversity of
currency, simpler banking relationships and possibility of renegotiation.
• The costs associated with the Euroloan are periodic costs (interest charges and commitment
charges on the indrawn portion) and upfront costs (management fees, out of pocket
expenses and agency costs). The largest portion of the management fee retained by the lead
bank is known as ‘praecipicium’.
• Multi-currency loans are loans denominated in one currency with an option to borrow in
one or more currencies. They are basically an expansion of the Eurodollar loans. The
documentation of multi-currency loans is similar to the Eurodollar loans.
• The following are the main types of multi-currency loans: Term loan, revolving credit
facility, evergreen facility, back-stop facility and swingline.
• The fee charged for the multi-currency loans is almost similar to the fee charged on the
Eurodollar loans.
12
• External Commercial Borrowings (ECBs) are borrowings of Indian corporates made
outside India. The advantages of ECBs are: Longer maturity, low borrowing cost, useful in
infrastructure projects and export financing.
• The Government of India has recently liberalized the regulations for ECBs in order to
attract more foreign investment in the country. However, the uses of ECB funds for
investment in the stock market and speculation in real estate is still restricted.
• After analyzing the performance of the Indian issuers, the following factors are identified
for successful international equity/convertible issues: The fundamentals of the company,
the experience of the lead manager, the size of the issue, the innovative packaging of the
instrument, the timing of the issue, the care taken in the pricing, the effectiveness of the
marketing/salesmanship, the after market services and up to date information about the
developments in the global market.
• The sources to raise forex finance in the international markets are: Official channels and
Commercial channels (for equity and debt).
• Corporate finance managers must first ascertain the resource requirements and define the
borrowing criteria and then identify the right sources to borrow funds.
• Foreign Institutional Investors (FIIs) including mutual funds, pension funds, investment
trusts, endowment funds, insurance funds, university funds, charitable societies, etc., can
invest in the Indian stock markets subject to the RBI and SEBI regulations.
• Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) takes place when an investor based in one country
acquires an asset in another country with the intention of managing it. Except arms and
ammunition, atomic energy, mineral oils, atomic energy minerals and railway transport,
FDIs are allowed to invest in most of the industries.
• The Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB) has been set-up specially to: Promote FDI
investments in India, grant speedy clearance to new projects and promote transparency in
the rules and regulations for FDI deposits.
• The Non-Resident Indians (NRIs) are persons of Indian origin, even if born and brought up
abroad, with or without Indian passport, including HUFs, AOPs, partnership firms,
companies, societies, trusts and Overseas Corporate Bodies (OCBs) who maintain accounts
with authorized dealers.
• The NRIs can open savings accounts, current accounts and term deposit accounts (fixed
deposit, recurring deposit and reinvestment deposit).
• The NRIs can open NRO, NRNR, NRE, FCNR and NRSR accounts in India. These
accounts have various features like repatriation of interest, non-taxability of interest and
higher interest rates.
CREDIT RATING
• Ratings serve as a benchmark to the risk involved in a particular instrument of investors. A
good rating can help a company raise money at a relatively lower cost and from a larger
body of individuals, leading to a broader investor base.
• Till recently, ratings were mostly concentrated in the area of debentures, fixed deposits and
other short-term instruments. The changing economic environment has thrown open new
areas like equity rating, individual rating, mutual fund scheme rating, chit funds rating,
country risk rating and a plethora of other new areas.
• There are three factors to be considered while conducting a rating review: One, the
performance of the industry; Two, the performance of the company; Three, the
performance of the stock market of the country.
• While companies sign a mandatory letter from the rating agency wherein they undertake to
provide information regularly, not all do so. While the good ones are more than pleased to
approach their raters with the required information, the rating agencies have to run after the
bad ones to seek information.
13
• Another problem is of rating convenience. A company that is not satisfied with the rating
assigned to its instrument by a rating agency can approach another rating agency for a fresh
rating, and disclose only the second rating to the public, if it proves to be favorable. The
company is free not to disclose the first rating or the fact that it went for a second rating. Unless
a mechanism of transparency is thrown open, rating will lose its charm.
• Today, CRISIL, ICRA and CARE are the main raters in the Indian market, while
STANDARD AND POOR’S and MOODY’S are the main players in the international
markets.
• Rating has become innovative: ONICRA has even started rating individuals in India and
even the banks rate the individuals that come to them for loans. Banks and financial
institutions are also coming forward to being rated; equities are being graded and a bunch
of other players and instruments are being rated.
EVOLUTION OF FINANCIAL SERVICES
• The term Financial Services encompasses all those services that have money as the raw
material.
• Financial Services include:
– Leasing
– Hire Purchase
– Consumer Finance and Installment Credit
– Plastic Money Cards
– Insurance
– Housing Finance
– Venture Capital
– Mutual Funds
– Portfolio Management Schemes
– Credit Rating
– Capital Issue Management
– Factoring and Forfaiting
– Plantation Schemes.
• Leasing and Hire purchase have been the oldest kind of financial services both in India and
around the world. Some of the financial services in India such as venture capital and credit
rating are relatively of recent origin.
• Financial services has been mostly regulated by the Securities and Exchange Board of
India. Some of the services such as banking are regulated by the Reserve Bank of India.
• A few of the financial services such as Insurance, Housing Finance and Mutual Fund are
witnessing better times due to various factors:
• Insurance industry has been opened to private sector participation and the Insurance
Regulatory Authority has been given statutory powers.
• Housing Finance will see increased importance due to changes in the National
Housing Bank Act and changes in the tax treatment for housing loans.
• Mutual Funds industry has witnessed ups and downs. With the savings rate
going up and a capricious equity market, 1997-98 was the best year for mutual
funds.
14
AN INTRODUCTION TO EQUIPMENT LEASING
• While leasing has a history spanning over more than 5000 years, equipment leasing is of a
recent origin. It is said that the practice of equipment leasing began when the rail road
companies in the USA. and Europe resorted to leasing of rail cars and locomotives to
expand their operations. By the mid-sixties, equipment leasing came into popular use in the
developed countries. Today equipment leasing is confined not just to leasing of equipments,
but to large infrastructural facilities, power plants and other capital-intensive projects as
well.
• In concept, an equipment lease is a contractual arrangement under which the owner (lessor)
transfers the right to use the equipment to the user (lessee) for an agreed period of time in
return for rent. At the end of the lease period the asset reverts to the lessor. It is important to
note that in the Indian context a lease cannot be structured with a provision for transfer of
ownership or with a feature of purchase option. Introducing any one of these features can
result in the lease being classified as hire purchase transaction which has a different set of
accounting and tax implications.
• The features of an equipment lease transaction can vary along the following dimensions:
Extent to which risks and rewards of ownership are transferred, number of parties to
the transaction, domiciles of the equipment manufacturer, the lessor, and the lessee.
Based on these dimensions, the following classifications are possible:
– Finance Lease and Operating Lease
– Sale Lease and Operating Lease
– Single Investor Lease and Leveraged Lease
– Domestic Lease and International Lease.
• Of the aforesaid classifications, the classification in terms of finance lease and operating
lease is of fundamental importance to the financial analysis and accounting of leases. The
distinction is drawn on the basis of the risks and rewards of ownership transferred from the
lessor to the lessee. If a lease transfers a substantial part of the risks and rewards it is
classified as a finance lease; otherwise, it is called an operating lease. The Financial
Accounting Standards Board (FASB) of the USA was the first professional body to evolve
the criteria for this classification and these criteria with some minor modifications have
been adopted by the International Accounting Standards Committee (IASC).
• There are various factors which influence the decision to lease. The important ones are:
– Flexibility
– User-Orientation
– Tax Based Advantages
– Convenience
– Expeditious Disbursement of Funds
– Hundred Percent Financing
– Better Utilization of Own Funds.
• A lease is often marketed on the strength of a dubious advantage called the “Off-Balance
Sheet Financing” which purports that a liability off the balance sheet does not affect the
debt capacity of a firm. It must be noted that a finance lease whether on or off the balance
sheet affects the borrowing capacity and increases the financial risk.
• There are of course, deterrents to leasing. These deterrents include the restrictive convenants on
the usage of the asset, the non-cancelable feature of a finance lease which restricts the
flexibility to disinvest, threat to real borrowing capacity and the high cost of lease finance vis-
á-vis most forms of borrowing.
15
LEASING IN INDIAN CONTEXT
• The equipment leasing industry in India came into being in 1973 but did not come of age
until the early eighties.
• The leasing boom of the early eighties propelled a large number of private sector finance
companies, commercial banks and financial institutions into this industry. The Banking
Regulation Act, 1949 was amended in 1983 to permit commercial banks to undertake
equipment leasing operations through the subsidiary route. These subsidiaries have been
recently permitted to undertake hire purchase operations.
• The entry of financial institutions and subsidiaries of commercial banks made the lease rates
more competitive. The fall in the lease rates coupled with high cost of funding and imposition
of sales tax on lease rentals forced many private sector finance companies to close down or
resort to concentric and conglomerate diversification. Today the dominant players in the
industry are the subsidiaries of commercial banks like SBI Caps and Canfina; Financial
Institutions like ICICI and IFCI; and about twenty private sector finance companies like
First Leasing Company of India, Twentieth Century Finance Corporation and Sundaram
Finance. The commercial banks and State Financial Corporations have been recently
permitted to directly enter the business of leasing and hire purchase.
• The equipment leasing industry has grown almost at the rate of 50 percent per annum
during the eighties and is poised to achieve a comparable growth rate in the nineties. The
recent measures of liberalization must accelerate the process of capital formation in the
country, and leasing has a major role to play in the process.
• The business of equipment leasing is not subject to any dedicated legislation. By and large, the
obligations of the lessor and the lessee are governed by the provisions of bailment contained in
the Indian Contract Act, 1872. The Hire Purchase Act which was introduced in 1972 and later
amended in 1989 is yet to be made operational.
• Funding of finance companies is subject to the RBI (Non-Banking Financial Companies)
Directions, 1977. These directions have been considerably revised recently and financial
companies are not required to adhere to the capital adequacy norms similar to those
applicable to commercial banks.
• The conventional sources of funding a financial company include equity, debentures, term
loans, bank borrowings, public deposits, intercorporate deposits and commercial paper. Of
late these companies have been toying with the idea to securitize the lease and hire
purchase receivables.
LEGAL ASPECTS OF LEASING
• In the Indian context, there is no legislation that exclusively relates to equipment lease
transactions. Since the features of an equipment lease transaction closely resemble the
features of bailment, the provisions of the Indian Contract Act, 1872 which govern
contracts of bailment are applied to equipment lease transactions. This enactment defines
the implied obligations of the bailor and the bailee.
• Since the lessor plays the role of a financier in a typical equipment lease transaction, the
implied obligation of the bailor relating to the fitness of the bailed goods is expressly
negated by the lease agreement.
• The lease agreement provides the lessee with a number of obligations which do not form a
part of his implied obligations under the Indian Contract Act. Usually the lessor and the
lessee enter into a Master Lease Agreement which enables the lessee to add on leased
equipment up to a predetermined limit in terms of value. Registration of an equipment lease
agreement is optional under the Indian Registration Act, 1908.
• The lease documentation process is fairly simple. It starts with the submission of a proposal
by the lessee. On approval, the lessor issues a letter of offer detailing the terms and
conditions of the lease. The letter of offer is accepted by the lessee by passing a Board
resolution. This is followed by the lessor and lessee entering into a formal lease agreement.
16
• There are a number of legal issues to be considered before drafting the lease agreement.
Some of these issues are (a) legal relationship between the equipment supplier, the lessor
and the lessee, (b) insurance, (c) usage and maintenance, (d) sub-lease, (e) set-off
provisions and (f) defaults and remedies.
TAX ASPECTS OF LEASING
• The tax aspects of leasing can be divided into two parts – the income tax aspects and the
sales tax aspects.
• The income tax aspects of leasing are primarily concerned with (a) lessor’s claim for
depreciation tax shields on the leased assets; (b) lessee’s claim for lease rentals and to
treat the operating costs of the leased assets as tax-deductible expenses; and (c) tax liability
on rental income in the hands of the lessor.
• The Income Tax Act, 1961 does not explicitly provide for the lessor’s eligibility to claim
depreciation allowance on the leased assets. But this eligibility can be deduced from the
Tribunal and Court judgments on the subject.
• To date, no capital allowances (like investment allowance) have been directly linked to
investment in plant and machinery. Hence, the lessor does not derive any investment related
tax shield other than depreciation tax shields.
• The rental income derived by the lessor is included under the head ‘Profits and Gains of
Business or Profession’ for the purpose of assessing the income tax liability.
• From the lessee’s angle, the rental expense can be treated as a tax-deductible expense. The
costs incurred to insure and maintain the leased asset are also tax-deductible.
• By virtue of a circular issued by the Central Board of Direct Taxes (CBDT) in 1943, the
lease agreement must not provide for a transfer of ownership of the leased asset or a
bargain purchase option to the lessee. Inclusion of either of these provisions will result in
the lease transaction being treated as a hire purchase transaction. The tax implications of a
hire purchase transaction are not the same as those of a lease transaction.
• Leasing can be used as a tax planning device by (a) exploiting the flexibility in
structuring lease rentals; (b) transferring the investment related tax shields from a firm
which has a low appetite for such tax shields to a lessor who can absorb them. The firm
transferring the tax shields can benefit through a reduction in the lease rentals.
• Sales tax affects a lease transaction at the following stages: (a) when the asset is purchased
by the lessor for the purpose of leasing; and (b) when the right to use the asset is
transferred to the lessee for a valuable consideration; and (c) when the asset is sold by the lessor
at the end of the lease period.
• The lessor is at a disadvantage with regard to interstate purchase of equipment because the
concessional rate of Central Sales Tax which applies to such transactions (on fulfillment of
certain prescribed criteria) is not made available to an equipment supplier supplying
equipments to a lessor.
• The Constitution (Forty-Sixth Amendment) Act, 1981 provides for sales tax on the
“transfer of the right to use any goods for any purpose (whether or not for a specified
period) for cash, deferred payment or other valuable consideration”. After this enactment
several states amended their sales tax laws to provide for sales tax on lease rentals.
• The validity of the provision to levy sales tax on lease transactions and the other related
aspects have been challenged by the leasing companies and stay orders have been obtained
from different state High Courts. Consequently, the lessor’s liability to pay sales tax on
rental income remains a contingent liability.
17
LEASE EVALUATION: THE LESSEE’S ANGLE
• A finance lease can be evaluated either as an investment alternative or as a financing
alternative depending upon the a priori information available about the financial
desirability of a capital investment. In the absence of any a priori information about the
financial desirability, ‘Leasing’ and ‘Buying’ are evaluated as two mutually exclusive
investment alternatives. Given prior knowledge of the financial desirability or need for a
capital investment, ‘Leasing’ is evaluated as one of the financing alternatives.
• There are a number of financial models available to evaluate a ‘lease’ and there is no
consensus till date on the most appropriate model. The following four financial models
represent the spectrum of views on this issue reasonably well:
– Weingartner Model
– Bower-Herringer-Williamson Model
– Bower Model.
Barring the first model, the other three models evaluate leasing as a financing alternative.
Initial Investment – P.V. (Lease Rentals) – Management Fee + P.V. (Tax Shield on
Lease Rentals) + P.V. (Tax Shield on Management Fee) – P.V. (Tax Shield on
Depreciation) – P.V. (Net Salvage Value).
b. Lease the equipment if NAL is positive. Buy the equipment if NAL is negative.
The discount rate employed is the marginal cost of capital based on the mix of debt and
equity in the target capital structure. The model assumes that debt includes present and
future lease obligations as well.
• The Equivalent Loan Model, the BHW Model and the Bower Model view ‘Leasing’ as a
financing alternative and is based on the premise that every rupee of lease finance displaces
an equal amount of long-term debt. In other words, these models assume that the debt
component in the target capital structure does not include present and future lease
obligations. So, these models consider the interest tax shields on the displaced debt as an
explicit cash flow in the computation of NAL. The models, however, differ from one
another in terms of the discount rates applied to the components of NAL viz., lease
18
payments, tax shields (shelters) and net salvage value. The following table provides the
different discount rates employed by these models.
Components of
Equivalent Loan Model BHW Model Bower Model
NAL
Lease Payments Pre-tax Cost of Debt Pre-tax Cost of Debt Pre-tax Cost of Debt
Marginal Cost of To be Specified by
Tax Shields* Post-tax Cost of Debt
Capital the Decision-Maker
Net Salvage Marginal Cost of
-do- -do-
Value Capital
* The tax shields include the tax shields on lease payments, management fees,
depreciation and interest on displaced debt.
• We believe the risks that characterize the lease payments on the one hand and the
realization of the tax shelters and net salvage value on the other, are different. Hence,
different discount rates have to be used to discount the two sets of cash flows. For reasons
stated in the current chapter we also believe that the debt-displacement effect of leasing
must be explicitly recognized, and we define NAL as follows:
NAL = Investment Cost – P.V. (Lease Payments discounted at Kd) + P.V. (Tax
Shields on Lease Payments discounted at K) – Management Fees + P.V. (Tax
Shield on Management Fees discounted at K) – P.V. (Depreciation Tax
Shields discounted at K) – P.V. (Interest Tax Shields discounted at K) – P.V.
(Residual Value discounted at K)
Where,
Kd = Pre-tax cost of debt
K = Marginal cost of capital.
Setting NAL to zero and solving the unknown rental value provides the break even rental
from the lessee’s point of view – The maximum lease rental acceptable to the lessee.
• In practice, the decision to lease is significantly influenced by several non-tax based factors
like
– Simple Documentation.
– Expeditious Sanction.
– Absence of Restrictive Financial Covenants in the Lease Agreement.
– No Requirement for Detailed Post-sanction Reporting.
– Flexibility in terms of Structuring Lease Rentals.
– Off-Balance Sheet feature of Finance Lease (which helps maintain the apparent
borrowing capacity of the firm).
• Given the long-term relationship envisaged by a finance lease, the unlimited innovative
ways to structure a lease and the legal and tax complexities that go with such structuring
and selecting the right type of lessor assume special significance. The following factors
must be taken into account while selecting the lessor:
– Role of the Lessor as a Financier
– Financial position of the Lessor
– Experience of the Lessor
– Product Range.
19
LEASE EVALUATION: THE LESSOR’S ANGLE
• The Net Advantage of Leasing (NAL) from the lessor’s point of view can be defined as
follows:
NAL = – Initial Investment + P.V (Lease Payments) – P.V. (Tax on Lease Payments) +
P.V. (Management Fee) – P.V. (Tax on Management Fee) + P.V. (Tax shields on
Depreciation) + P.V. (Net Salvage Value) – P.V. (Initial Direct Costs) + P.V. (Tax
Shield on Initial Direct Costs).
The discount rate to be used is the marginal cost of capital based on the debt/equity mix in
the target capital structure of the lessor. The lease rental for which the NAL is equal to zero
is defined as the break even rental of the lessor – the minimum lease rental the lessor will
charge.
• The bargaining area or the range within which the rentals can be negotiated between the
lessor and the lessee is determined by the break even rentals of the lessor and the lessee.
The upper limit is determined by the break even rental of the lessee and the lower limit is
set by the break even rental of the lessor. Clearly, no negotiable range will exist if the break
even rental of the lessor exceeds that of the lessee.
• Lessors who use the gross-yield approach to price the lease define the gross yield as that
rate of interest which equates the present value of the lease rentals plus the present value of
the residual value of the investment cost.
• The flat rate of interest applicable to a lease is called the add-on yield. The assumption
underlying the computation of “add-on yield” is that the investment in the lease remains
constant over the lease period, which is untrue. The add-on yield is always less than the
(effective) gross yield defined above.
• The Internal Rate Of Return (IRR) on a lease is that rate of interest for which the NAL is
equal to zero. The lease proposal is accepted if and only if IRR is greater than the marginal
cost of capital.
• The total risk of a lease portfolio can be divided into the following types of risk:
– Default Risk
– Residual Value Risk
– Interest Rate Risk
– Purchasing Power Risk
– Political Risk
– Currency and Cross-border Risk.
• The relevant and dominant risk characterizing a finance lease is the default risk. The default
risk is a function of the creditworthiness of the lessee which is influenced by the character
and capacity of the lessee and the collateral value of the asset.
• The overall credit rating of the lessee based on the relevant factors can be determined through
the Explicit Judgemental Approach and the Statistical Approach. These approaches primarily
help in discriminating between the good and the bad lessee accounts and also help in
developing a risk classification table.
• The credit risk can be managed by altering one or more of the lease structuring variables like
lease rentals, lease term or pattern of payment. The lessor can also seek protection against
credit risk by insisting on personal and bank guarantees.
• The relevant risk in the case of an operating lease is the product risk or the risk inherent in
realizing the expected salvage value. In countries like the USA and the UK, insurance
companies offer the residual value of the insurance policies to cover such risks.
20
LEASE ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING
• The first accounting standard for lease accounting was issued by the Financial Accounting
Standards Board (FASB) of the US (FASB Statement 13: Accounting of Leases). Drawing
largely on this standard, the International Accounting Standards Committee (IASC) issued
the IAS:17 on Accounting for Leases. In 1988, the Institute of Chartered Accountants of
India (ICAI) issued a Guidance Note on this subject which favored the adoption of IAS:17
in the long run and recommended a set of accounting guidelines for the interim period
keeping in view the state of the leasing industry in India and the tax framework.
• The IAS:17 requires a finance lease to be reflected in the balance sheet of a lessee as an
asset and as a liability in order to properly account the economic resources and the level of
obligations of the lessee firm. The guidelines require (a) the asset and liability to be
recorded at the inception of the lease at an amount equal to the fair market value of the
asset or, if lower, at the present value of the minimum lease payments; (b) the rentals to be
apportioned into interest and capital contents using the effective rate of interest (actuarial)
method or any other acceptable approximation; (c) expense the interest (finance) charge
and (d) depreciate the asset in line with the depreciation policy pursued in respect of the
assets owned. The leased asset must be fully depreciated over the shorter of the lease term
or its useful life.
• The ICAI guidelines require the lessee to expense the lease rentals payable under the
finance lease on an accrual basis and disclose the details concerning the leased asset and the
unexpired commitments for lease payments, as on the balance sheet date, by way of a note
in the balance sheet.
• The IAS:17 requires a finance lease to be recorded as a receivable in the books of the lessor
at an amount equal to the net investment in lease i.e., gross investment in lease less
unearned finance income. This accounting standard recommends the use of the effective
rate of interest method to allocate the unexpired finance income to the relevant accounting
period.
• The ICAI guidelines for the interim period provide for the disclosure of leased assets in
the balance sheet of the lessor as “fixed assets”. These guidelines require the lessor to
(a) allocate the unearned finance income over the primary lease period on some systematic
basis; (b) depreciate the leased assets over its primary lease period; and (c) disclose the
policies pursued with regard to income recognition and depreciation.
• The accounting standards prescribed by IASC and ICAI are more or less similar to an
operating lease. The lessee is required to allocate the aggregate rental over the lease period
on the straight line basis or on any other systematic basis which is more representative of
the time pattern of the user’s benefit.
• Lease of land where the title is not transferred from the lessor to the lessee on expiry of the
lease term is accounted for as an operating issue. Likewise long-term lease of buildings
where there is a provision to revise rentals periodically must be accounted for as an
operating lease.
• An exploratory survey conducted to assess the reaction of the leasing industry to introduce
accounting standards has revealed that lessors are not opposed to the idea of disclosing the
lease commitments by way of notes in the balance sheet of the lessee. Infact, fifty percent
of the respondents have favored capitalization of lease in the books of the lessee provided
there is a tacit assurance from the income tax authorities that the tax treatment will not be
linked to the accounting treatment.
21
HIRE PURCHASE
• Hire purchase can be defined as a contractual arrangement under which the owner lets his
goods on hire to the hirer and offers an option to the hirer to purchase the goods in
accordance with the terms of the contract. The two distinct features of a hire purchase
transaction are: (i) the option provided to the hirer to purchase the goods at any time during
the term of the agreement; and (ii) the right available to the hirer to terminate the agreement
at any time before the payment of the last installment. Hire purchase plans can be of two
types: (i) Down Payment Plan and (ii) Deposit Linked Plan.
• The rate of interest quoted on a hire purchase transaction is always a flat rate. To convert
the flat rate (F) into the effective rate (i) under a Down Payment Plan we can use the
following approximation formula:
n
i= .2F where n denotes the number of repayments.
n +1
• If the installments are payable at the beginning of each period, the relationship between
i and F is given by the formula:
n
i= .2F
n −1
• In the case of a deposit-linked plan, the effective rate of interest is calculated as follows:
(a) The cash flows over the relevant periods are defined. (b) The rate of interest which
equates the P.V. of the cash inflows to the P.V. of cash outflows is calculated. This rate of
interest reflects the effective rate of interest implicit in the plan.
• If the hirer exercises the purchase option before the payment of the last installment, then the
amount to be paid by him will be equal to the aggregate amount of the outstanding hire
purchase installments less an interest rebate. The true interest rebate can be calculated using
the Effective Rate of Interest Method. Alternatively, it can be calculated as per the Rule of
78 given by the formula:
t(t + 1)
R = xD
n(n + 1)
Where,
R = interest rebate
t = number of installments outstanding
n = total number of installments and
D = total charge for credit.
• The interest rebate calculated under the Rule of 78 will be always less than the true interest
rebate.
• As far as the legal aspects are concerned, the Hire Purchase Act, 1972 provides a
comprehensive coverage. But since this Act has not been made operational, the legal
aspects of hire purchase transactions are governed by the provisions of the Indian Contract
Act, 1872, Sale of Goods Act, 30 and the judgments pronounced by the English and the
Indian Courts from time to time.
• The income tax aspects of hire purchase transactions are governed by the provisions of a
circular issued by the Central Board of Direct Taxes in 1943. According to this circular, the
hirer is entitled to the tax shields on (i) depreciation calculated with reference to the cash
purchase price of the asset; and (ii) the ‘consideration for hire’ or the finance charge
component of the hire purchase installments. The circular provides for an even allocation of
the total finance charge over the term of the hire purchase agreement.
• As per the 46th Amendment to the Constitution, the hire purchase transactions are eligible
to sales tax. However, there are court rulings which state that hire purchase transactions
structured by finance companies (not dealing in the class of goods let on hire) are in
essence financing transactions and therefore not liable to sales tax.
22
• The Finance Act, 1991 reintroduced the Interest Tax Act, 1974 which provides for an
interest tax at 3 percent on the interest income implicit in hire purchase transactions.
• From the hirer’s standpoint the financial evaluation of a hire purchase vis-á-vis a lease is
done by comparing the costs of hire purchase and cost of the lease. The Costs Of Hire
Purchase (COHP) and Lease (COL) are defined as follows:
COHP = Down Payment + Documentation & Service Charges + P.V. (Hire purchase
installments discounted at Kd) – P.V. (Depreciation Tax Shields discounted at kc)
– P.V. (Net Salvage Value discounted at kc) – P.V. (Interest Tax Shields
discounted at kc) – P.V. (Tax Shield on documentation & Service charges
discounted at kc)
Where
COL = P.V. (Lease payments discounted at kd) – P.V. (Tax shields on lease payments
discounted at kc)
If COHP exceeds COL, the asset must be leased; otherwise it can be acquired under the hire
purchase plan.
• From the finance company’s point of view, the financial evaluation will involve comparing
the Net Present Values (NPV) of the two asset-based financing plans. These NPVs are
defined as follows:
NPV (Finance Lease) = – Initial Investment – Initial Direct Costs + Lease Management
Fee + P.V. (Lease Rentals) – P.V. (Tax on Rental Income) –
P.V. (Tax on Lease Management Fee) + P.V. (Tax Shield on
Direct Costs) + P.V. (Tax Shields on Depreciation) + P.V. (Net
Salvage Value)
NPV (Hire Purchase) = – Loan Amount – Initial Direct Costs + Documentation &
Service Fee + P.V. (Tax Shield on Direct Costs) – P.V. (Tax on
Documentation & Service Fee) + P.V. (Hire Purchase
Installments) – P.V. (Income Tax on Finance Income) – P.V.
(Interest Tax on Finance Income) + P.V. (Tax Shield on Interest Tax)
The discount rate used is the marginal cost of capital of the company. If NPV (Finance
Lease) exceeds NPV (Hire Purchase) the finance company must have a product mix
weighted in favor of leasing; otherwise the product mix must be slanted in favor of hire
purchase. In practice NPV (Hire Purchase) tends to exceed NPV (Lease).
• A hire purchase transaction is reflected in the books of accounts of the hirer as follows:
(a) The cash purchase price of the asset is capitalized and an amount equal to the cash
purchase price less downpayment is recorded as a liability. (b) Depreciation is charged on
the cash purchase price in line with the depreciation policy pursued by the hirer for similar
owned assets. (c) The total charge for credit is spread over the accounting periods
(constituting the hire term) based on one of the following methods: (1) Effective Rate of
Interest Method (2) Sum of the Years Digits Method or (3) Straight Line Method.
• In the books of the finance company, the hire purchase installments receivable is shown as
a current asset under the head ‘Stock on Hire’ and the (unearned) finance income
component of these installments is shown as a current liability under the head ‘Unmatured
Finance Charges’. The unearned finance income is spread over the accounting periods
using one of the methods listed above. The direct costs associated with the transaction is
either expensed immediately or suitably amortized over the relevant accounting periods.
23
CONSUMER CREDIT
• The term consumer credit encompasses all types of asset based financing plans offered
primarily to acquire consumer durables. A typical credit transaction is one where the
customer pays a small fraction of the cash purchase price on delivery of the goods and
agrees to pay the balance with interest over a specified period of time.
• The consumer credit industry in India grew at a phenomenal rate in the late eighties, thanks
to the efforts of Citibank and other multinational banks in creating a widespread awareness
of the concept. Consumer credit is made available for cars, two-wheelers, personal
computers and high-value household gadgets like TVs, VCRs, washing machines,
refrigerators, food processors, etc.
• The financing institution screens individual credit applicants on the criteria of gross annual
income, take-home salary and tenure of employment with the present employer. In the case
of business organizations, it looks for a profitable track-record and a minimum level of
sales, net worth, and cash profit.
• The consumer loans usually carry a flat rate of interest that varies between 13%–15% and a
repayment period that varies between 12 and 60 months. The repayment is required to be
made by issuing post-dated cheques at the time of availing the loan. The loan is secured by
a first charge on the asset concerned and is also guaranteed by a guarantor.
• The consumer finance schemes can be of the down-payment type or of the deposit-linked
type. In the deposit-linked schemes, the term to maturity of the deposit is matched with the
credit period. The deposit earns a nominal rate of interest not exceeding 15 percent.
• Consumer credit is not regulated by separate legislation in India. But in most countries
where the practice is in popular use, it is subject to a detailed legislative framework which,
inter alia, seeks to (a) make the customer more aware of the true cost of credit implicit in a
lending scheme; and (b) protect the customer against the unscrupulous ones as soon as the
agreement is made. Examples of such legislations are the Consumer Credit Act, 1974 of the
UK and the Consumer Credit Protection Act, 1968 of the US.
• One of the important steps to manage a consumer credit portfolio is to streamline the
procedure evaluating credit applicants. To pre-screen the credit applicants, mechanical
credit-scoring system can be used. These systems can be developed using sophisticated
statistical techniques like the Multiple Discriminant Analysis (MDA).
• Managing a Consumer Credit Portfolio effectively calls for accounting records that are
accurate and consistent and persistent collective efforts.
24
• Factoring differs from bill discounting in the following respects: (i) In a bill discounting
arrangement, the financial intermediary does not assume the responsibilities of sales-ledger
administration and collection of debts which the factor does under the factoring
arrangement. (ii) Unlike factoring, no notice of assignment is provided to the customers
of the client under the bill discounting arrangement. (iii) The bill discounting arrangement
is with recourse to the client whereas a factoring arrangement can be without recourse.
• The legal relationship between the factor and the client is governed by the provisions of the
factoring agreement. Under this agreement, the client (i) warranties that the debts sold are
valid, enforceable, undisputed and recoverable; (ii) undertakes to settle problems of dispute,
damages and deductions in relation to the bills assigned to the factor; and (iii) provides
copies of all relevant credit sales invoices along with proof of dispatch to the factor. As
between the factor and the customer, the legal status of the factor is that of an assignee.
Once the notice of assignment is served to the customer, he is under a legal obligation to
pay the factor.
• From the client’s angle, factoring offers the following advantages: (i) Factoring reduces
the uncertainty associated with collections thereby reducing the cash float and
improving the velocity of current assets turnover ratio. (ii) Since the factor assumes the
responsibility to collect and credit administration, the firm can sharply focus on market
development. (iii) Unlike other forms of financing, advance factoring does not impair the
current ratio of the firm. In fact, through a judicious use of the funds made available by the
factor, the client can improve the current ratio. Although factoring offers a number of
advantages, a firm which has been managing its receivables must necessarily do a cost-
benefit analysis before resorting to factoring.
• In the Indian context, factoring is still in the pioneering state. Based on the
recommendations made by the High Powered Committee under the Chairmanship of Shri
C S Kalyanasundaram, the Reserve Bank of India has permitted commercial banks to
promote factoring subsidiaries. At the time of writing, the two factoring companies in
operation are the SBI Factors & Commercial Services Limited and the Canbank Factors
Limited. Both these companies offer recourse factoring facility with respect to inland
receivables with a provision for prepayment up to 80 percent of the value of the
receivables. The commission charged varies between 1-2 percent of the value of receivables
and the discount charge varies between 19-22 percent per annum.
• While factoring has a large market to cater, there are some operational problems to be
sorted out before factoring can graduate to the rapid growth stage. First there is a need for
credit information services that will provide reliable credit information for a large number
of business firms. Without this service, the factor will find it extremely difficult to evaluate
the credit quality of his client’s receivable portfolio.
• Second, the funding norms applicable to factoring companies must be clearly spelt out and
these companies must be placed on par with leasing and hire purchase companies in terms
of the eligibility to raise debt. Finally, factoring transactions must be exempted from the
levy of stamp duty (which is now applicable to assignment of any form of debt) so that the
transaction costs are reduced.
SECURITIZATION
• Securitization is the process of selling assets by the person holding them to an intermediary
who in turn will break such assets into marketable securities. Any resource that has a
predictable cash flow can be securitized. The person holding the assets is called the
originator and the entity specially created for the purpose of transfer of assets is called
Special Purpose Vehicle (SPV). The underlying assets should preferably be homogenous in
nature and of same quality, in terms of the risk associated with them or their maturity
periods. The marketable securities are called Pay or Pass through Certificates and the
investors may be banks, mutual funds, government, etc.
• If the process of securitization is backed by assets, it is called Asset-Backed Securitization
(ABS). If the deal is backed by mortgage it is called Mortgage-Backed Securitization
(MBS).
25
• All credit rating agencies rate securitization deals and consider only those assets that are to
be securitized in the balance sheet of the originator. Such ratings will have a ‘SO’ suffixed
to the deal to indicate the instrument is a ‘Structured Obligation’ and has met all the
parameters of credit rating.
• Longer maturity loans can be converted into short-term marketable securities in whole loan
securitization and the rights and responsibilities are transferred to the purchaser. In such a
case, the seller may retain the right to service the loans and also the right to initiate
foreclosure proceedings in case of default.
• Mortgage Participation Certificates are designed to reduce the amount of loan by loan
review that is needed to be performed by a purchaser of a pool of loans.
• Mortgage Pass-Through Certificates are created when mortgages are pooled together and
the undivided interest in the pool is sold. The originator of these certificates can either issue
a private pass-through security or a pass-through security backed by a guarantor.
• Mortgage-Backed Bond is a collateralized term-debt offering, secured by mortgages with a
market value that is far more than the principal amount of the bond. The mortgages are not
sold to the holder of the security, but are used as collaterals for the bonds which are used to
raise finance.
• Advantage of securitization: Securitization provides liquidity to the originators. Securitized
debt is cheaper and with this deal the originator can beat the rating given by the rating
agencies and diversify the credit risk. NBFCs can plan their capital adequacy requirements
by using securitization to reduce the risk weighted assets.
• The concept of securitization has not picked up in India yet due to the absence of an active
secondary market, heavy stamp duties, strict foreclosure norms and other legal and
regulatory aspects.
26
• The amount of principal outstanding at any time is called mortgage balance. The difference
between the current market value of the home and the mortgage balance is called
homeowner’s equity.
• The non-traditional mortgages are also called Alternative Mortgage Instruments (AMI).
They do not have monthly installments and the repayment structure is different.
• In Graduated-Payment Mortgages (GPM), the payments start at a low level, rise for a
specified number of years and then become equal after a specified number of years as per
the mortgage agreement.
• In Pledged-Account Mortgages (PAM) the borrower deposits the portion of the down
payment in a savings account. Hence, the repayment of installments will be structured such
that PAMs appear as GPMs from the borrower’s point of view and traditional mortgages
from the lender’s perspective.
• A Buy Down loan is arranged by the seller of the property. The seller places cash in a
separate account and indirectly fulfills the down payment requirement of the borrower. The
mortgage lender may not allow the inbuilt high cost of the property.
• Adjustable Rate Mortgage has complex features. They can have maturities as well as
interest rates. The mortgage interest rate is based on index rate. Periodic gap and lifetime
gap are two distinct common features of ARMs. The major disadvantage of ARMs is that
they cannot be sold in pooled or security form as there are no standard clauses in ARMs.
• In Share-Application Mortgages the borrower pays a very low interest on the funds but
shares a part of the increase in the property value with the lender when the property is sold
or the loan matures.
• Mortgage Pass-Through Certificates are created when mortgages are pooled together and
the undivided interest in the pool is sold. The originator of these certificates can either issue
a private pass-through security or a pass-through security backed by a guarantor.
• The Collateralized Mortgage Obligations (CMO) are the bonds or debt obligations issued
by mortgage originators by offering whole loan mortgages or mortgage pass-through
certificates as collateral. The cash flows generated by the assets in the collateral pool are
first used to pay interest and then the principal to the CMO bondholders.
REAL ESTATE FINANCING: RISK AND RETURN
• Real Estate Financing is predominant in the West which is done in the form of asset-based
financing.
• A real estate transaction is tripartite involving exchange of economic resources between a
seller, buyer and in most of the cases, a financial entity.
• Three types of properties exist for financing. They are: (a) Property occupied by the
purchaser (b) Property developed to provide for continuous income and (c) Property
developed for sale.
• Real estate differs from other assets in many ways.
• Some of the aspects of real estate are: (a) Durability (b) Require substantial outlay of
funds (c) Transaction cost tend to be higher (d) Takes a large physical space (e) Value of the
real estate depends on various parameters concerning local and regional economic
conditions (f) A good hedge against inflation and (g) Tax treatment is favorable for real
estate investments.
• Real Estate Financing may be done essentially in three broad segments: (a) Acquisition
development or improvement financing (b) Construction financing and (c) Permanent
financing.
• Prominent sources of real estate financing in US are: (a) Commercial Banks (b) Savings
and Loan Associations (c) Life Insurance Companies (d) Pension Funds (e) Real Estate
Investment Trusts (f) Foreign Investors (g) Mortgage Companies.
27
HOUSING FINANCE IN INDIA
• The Indian housing finance industry comprises Housing and Urban Development
Corporation (HUDCO), the National Housing Bank (NHB), co- operative housing finance
societies, insurance companies, commercial banks, co-operative banks and 26 companies
approved by the NHB, the apex financial institution in India for housing loans.
• NHB was formed as a subsidiary of the RBI when the National Housing Policy was
announced in 1988 to regulate housing finance industry in India. The NHB Act stipulates
various norms for other housing finance companies. The NHB provides refinance facilities to
Housing Finance Companies (HFC).
• The NHB prescribes regulatory guidelines for various HFCs relating to the capital
adequacy norms, income recognition norms, loans/lending norms, interest rate ceilings for
loans of various maturities and the procedures to conduct general business.
• HFCs insist on two guarantors as sureties for the proposed loan. HFCs should consider
lending to sound, healthy and viable proposals which satisfy all the eligibility criteria
prescribed by the NHB.
• The loan application will be appraised in three steps – Credit appraisal, Legal appraisal and
Technical appraisal.
• Objective of credit appraisal is to assess the applicant’s sustained repayment capacity over
the loan period.
• In legal appraisal the HFC will scrutinize the documents to confirm that the title to the
property is clean and the applicant can create a charge (mortgage) in favor of the HFC.
• In technical appraisal HFC will verify all the information, records, approvals, clearances,
certificates etc., submitted by the applicant.
• The NHB guidelines prescribe a maximum permissible loan of 70% of the cost proposed
including land cost. The difference between the property cost and the maximum loan
permissible is called the margin or own contribution and it is to be met by the applicant.
• The loan repayment shall be in Equated Monthly Installments (EMI), which cover both
principal and interest components.
• After the appraisals and fixation of loan amount, the HFC accords sanction of the loan.
• The NHB launched the Home Loan Account Scheme to individuals on 1 July, 1989 and the
same is being offered by 28 public sector banks, 24 private banks and select state co-
operative banks and urban co-operative banks.
• The HDFC is the leading HFC in India and offers various housing loans to individuals and
NRIs. HDFC also offers Line of Credit (LOC) to the corporate employees for their homes
in two methods. In LOC ‘Thru’ the employees nominated by the company are the
borrowers. In LOC ‘TO’ the company itself takes the loan and later disburses it among its
employees.
• The LIC Housing Finance is another premier housing finance company in India offering
various housing loan schemes.
• The government is taking various steps to facilitate the growth of housing sector in India.
The housing sector has been accorded the infrastructure status and many concessions exist
in the Income Tax and Wealth Tax Acts for individuals and companies engaged in this
business. The Income Tax Act allows deduction of interest on the borrowed capital meant
for housing purposes of individuals.
• HDFC has securitized housing loans worth Rs.50 crore through IL & FS but securitization
of housing loans has certain constraints such as stamp duty.
• NHB has come out with Pass Through Certificate mechanism for securitization.
• The RBI has relaxed certain conditions in sanctions of housing loans by banks.
28
PLASTIC MONEY
• A credit card (or plastic money) is a payment mechanism which allows the cardholders to
purchase goods/services without paying money immediately. The payment could be made
up-front or over several installments after a specified period of time by availing credit from
the issuer of the card.
• There are four parties to a credit card transaction (i) card issuer, (ii) customer, (iii) member
establishment and (iv) franchiser of the credit card.
• The principal issuers of credit cards are the banks; the customers can be the salaried
individuals, business people and companies. The Member Establishment (ME) is any firm
or outlet that is enlisted by the credit card issuer to accept credit card for the goods
purchased or the services rendered. The franchisers are those that permit the use of their
brand name and act as clearing agencies. Master Card and Visa Card are the major
franchisers in the world.
• Sometimes there would be Member Affiliates (MA) who enter into a tie-up with the issuer
so that they can issue their own cards which are similar to those of the issuer except that the
MA’s name and logo will also appear on the card apart from the issuer’s.
• The principal source of income to a credit card issuer is the percentage commission
collected from the MEs on the goods/services sold through credit cards. The issuer charges
interest on the balance unpaid by the customer for the period beyond the expiry of the credit
period.
• The debit card is a ‘Pay Now’ mechanism whereby the account of the customer will be
debited immediately to the extent of the transaction value.
• Issuers will issue credit cards to the customers after due evaluation of his/her
creditworthiness.
• The credit limit and the payment terms will be determined by the issuer. While issuing the
card, entrance fee and annual service charge are collected. The card becomes operational as
soon as it is issued. When a customer presents it to a ME, the retailer checks the
authenticity of the card by tallying the signature of the customer with the one on the card.
The ME approaches the issuer bank periodically with the sales vouchers and the purchase
statement. The bank pays the amount after deducting a fixed commission on the amount.
• The credit card industry in India is growing fast. To cope with the increasing competition in
the credit card industry, banks in India are offering additional facilities to their cardholders
such as free personal accident insurance, cash withdrawal facility, temporary increase in
credit lines, add-on facility to dependents who are majors, leveraged investment facility, etc.
29
• Similarly, assets of an NBFC are classified as: Standard assets, sub-standard assets,
doubtful assets and loss assets.
• The capital adequacy norms for NBFCs depend on risk weighted capital ratio, preference
shares, revaluation reserves, general provisions and loss reserves, hybrid capital
instruments, subordinated debt, minimum capital funds requirement and risk weighted
assets and off-balance sheet items.
• The capital of the NBFC is divided into Tier I and Tier II capital.
30
Part I: Questions On Basic Concepts
INVESTMENT BANKING, FINANCIAL SYSTEMS AND FINANCIAL
MARKETS
1. Which of the following is/are not the function(s) of the financial system?
a. Mobilize savings to provide a potentially profitable and low risk outlet.
b. Ensure smooth flow of funds from savings into investments.
c. Ensure that savings will transform into the necessary credit for investment and
spending purposes.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. None of the above.
2. Who among the following are the player(s) in the money market?
a. Banks.
b. The Government.
c. Individuals.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
3. Which of the following is/are example(s) of open market?
a. A bought out deal.
b. A car loan.
c. Public issue of securities.
d. Housing finance.
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
4. Financial Markets are said to be perfect when
a. All the information relating to the security is available to all the players in the
market
b. The market price of the security reflects all the available information
c. The participants in the markets have homogenous expectations
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
5. Who among the following is/are the intermediary(ies) in the Capital Market?
a. Underwriters.
b. Primary Dealers.
c. Investment Bankers.
d. Registrars.
e. All of (a), (c) and (d) above.
6. Which of the following is/are consequence(s) of the presence of intermediaries in the
financial markets?
a. Intermediaries ease the funds flow process taking place in the financial markets.
b. The cost of lending and borrowing may rise due to the presence of intermediaries.
c. The presence of intermediaries in a market that is not well regulated increases the
risks to the investors.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
Investment Banking and Financial Services
7. Which of the following is not an important consideration of the issuer while designing an
instrument?
a. Minimizing the cost of funds.
b. Minimizing tax liability.
c. The repayment schedule of the instrument.
d. Market conditions.
e. None of the above.
8. Which of the following is/are characteristic(s) of the money market?
a. It is a wholesale debt market.
b. Only highly liquid and short-term instruments are dealt in the money market.
c. The instruments dealt in the money market constitute high risk.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
9. Which of the following is/are true of the primary market?
a. It is a place for issue of fresh (new) securities.
b. The primary market provides liquidity to the investors.
c. The transactions taking place in the primary market outnumber the transactions
taking place in the secondary market.
d. The securities issued in the primary market will necessarily have to be listed on the
stock exchanges to enable trading activity.
e. Both (a) and (d) above.
CREDIT MARKET
10. The Indian credit market is dominated by which of the following players?
a. Corporates.
b. Mutual Funds.
c. Banks.
d. Individuals.
e. Government.
11. The credit market
a. Operates in a disintermediation stage
b. Allows funds to flow to an intermediary which invests in the securities issued by the
corporates
c. Operates in an intermediate stage due to lack of infrastructural support for direct
flow of funds to take place
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. None of the above.
12. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The overdraft facility is provided to corporates to finance their long-term requirements.
b. In the overdraft facility, the bank will allow the firm to overdraw from its current
account to a predetermined level of credit.
c. Under the overdraft facility, the credit limit is sanctioned against the security of
commodity stocks.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
32
Part I
13. In India, priority sector lending constitutes about ____ percentage of the total funds
provided as loans by banks in that particular year.
a. 10
b. 20
c. 30
d. 40
e. 50.
14. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Consortium lending helps banks to minimize their risk by diversifying their term
loan portfolio.
b. When consortium lending is resorted to, banks have joint appraisal and subsequent
follow-up of projects for which loans are given.
c. In consortium lending, one bank meets the short-term requirements of the corporate
while another bank meets the long-term requirements.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
15. Which of the following statements is/are false regarding cash credit facility?
a. It is provided by banks for financing working capital needs of corporates.
b. It is an unsecured advance.
c. It is repayable on demand.
d. Interest on this facility is charged on the credit limit sanctioned.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
16. Intermediaries base their lending rate decisions on which of the following criteria?
a. Cost of funds.
b. Transaction costs.
c. Required spreads.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
17. Indus Financial Institution has received a loan proposal from a client. Given the following
information what should be its lending rate?
Transaction costs – 1.5 percent
Bank rate – 10 percent
a. 10 percent.
b. 14.5 percent.
c. Bank rate plus required spread.
d. Bank rate plus transaction costs.
e. Minimum of (a) and (b) above.
MONEY MARKET
Introduction to Money Market
18. For its proposed project of constructing a national highway, which of the following
instruments can be used by the Government to raise funds from the money market?
a. 91-day treasury bill.
b. 182-day treasury bill.
c. 364-day treasury bill.
d. Government dated securities.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
33
Investment Banking and Financial Services
34
Part I
26. Which of the following best describes the objective of the Statutory Liquidity Ratio?
a. It restricts the expansion of bank credit.
b. It augments the investment of the banks in government securities.
c. It ensures solvency of the banks.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
27. Which of the following statements relating to short-term fund management is/are true?
a. A financial institution need not be concerned about short-term fund management
since it deals only in large amounts.
b. Banks can manage their short-term deficits by diverting their long-term funds.
c. Government actively participates in lending short-term funds.
d. Short-term fund management of the households affects the liquidity in the system.
e. All the above.
28. For a forthcoming project on public transportation, the government is planning to raise
funds. Which of the following instruments can be used to raise the funds in the money
market?
a. 364/91-day T-Bills.
b. 182-day T-Bills.
c. Dated securities.
d. Both (a) or (c) above.
e. None of the above.
29. Royal Steels Ltd., a highly rated company, requires on an average Rs.5 cr for the next
15 days after which it expects sufficient cash inflows. To meet this short-term deficit, it
plans to issue CPs. The treasurer is against the issue of CPs. Which of the following
statements best argues his case?
a. The maturity period of CPs will reduce the cost of funds for the company.
b. It can raise cheaper funds for 15 days by way of ICDs.
c. It can borrow from the call market on each day as per the requirement as it will
reduce its costs and risks.
d. It can raise a term loan from bank.
e. None of the above.
30. The yields of the money market instruments are closely linked to each other. If CD rates are
ranging between 11-13% and if the bank PLRs are ranging between 14-16%, which of the
following range of rates will hold good for CPs?
a. CP rates will range between 11-16%.
b. CP rates will range between 13-16%.
c. CP rates will range between 11-14%.
d. The floor for the CP rates will generally be set by the PLRs.
e. The ceiling for the CP rates will generally be set by the CDs.
31. Swift Gilts Ltd., a primary dealer in the Indian money market, participated in the T-Bills
auction during the year. If the successful bids to be maintained by Swift Gilts Ltd. is given
as Rs.420 cr., then its commitment to aggregate bidding would have been
a. Rs.1,260 cr.
b. Rs.1,050 cr.
c. Rs.168 cr.
d. Rs.140 cr.
e. None of the above.
35
Investment Banking and Financial Services
32. Swift Gilts Ltd. had tendered bids of Rs.500 cr. in the auction T-bills which were accepted.
Using the information given in question (31) above, state which of the following statements
is/are true?
a. Swift Gilts Ltd. has adhered to its commitments and successful bids.
b. Swift Gilts Ltd. has adhered to its commitments only.
c. Swift Gilts Ltd. has adhered to its successful bids only.
d. Swift Gilts Ltd. has neither adhered to its commitments nor the successful bids.
e. Insufficient data.
33. Which of the following can be expected in a rising interest rate scenario?
a. Monetary restrictions can be imposed in order to contain the interest rate rise.
b. The RBI may enter into reverse repo transactions.
c. The RBI can conduct open market purchases of G-Secs to lower the interest rates.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
34. Which of the following statements can be true for a system having excess liquidity?
a. There may be a rise in the call rates.
b. Banks would prefer to enter into repo transactions to ease the situation.
c. There may be a rise in the statutory reserve requirements.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
35. Which of the following statements will be true, if there is a cut in the bank rate?
a. There may be a fall in the interest rates on CP.
b. There may be a fall in the Prime Lending Rates (PLR).
c. There may be a fall in the interest rates on IBPs.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
36. Market risk in money market investments arises in which of the following cases?
a. If the interest rates are declining at the time of redemption of the money market
investments.
b. If the change in the average prices results in decreasing the purchasing power of the
investor.
c. If there are fluctuations in the rates of instruments in the money market.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
Call Money
37. Who among the following can act only as a lender in the call market?
a. Banking Companies.
b. Financial Institutions.
c. DFHI.
d. STCI.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
36
Part I
37
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Treasury Bills
45. Which among the following is/are the characteristic(s) of a treasury bill?
a. Eligibility for inclusion in SLR.
b. Assured yield.
c. Low liquidity.
d. Negligible capital depreciation.
e. All of (a), (b) and (d) above.
46. Treasury bills are issued for a minimum of ____ days and a maximum of ____ days.
a. 14 and 28
b. 14 and 91
c. 14 and 182
d. 14 and 364
e. 14 and 365.
47. The face value of a 364-day T-bill is Rs.100. If the purchase price is Rs.86, then the yield
on such a bill is
a. 12.45%
b. 13.36%
c. 16.32%
d. 16.56%
e. 17.13%.
48. Which of the following is a characteristic feature of ad hoc treasury bills?
a. They are issued and made available to the public.
b. These bills serve the purpose of replenishing cash balances of the Central
Government.
c. These bills have maturity period of 364 days.
d. They carry a discount of 6.4 percent.
e. They can be extinguished only on maturity.
49. The 182-day treasury bills cannot be purchased by
a. State Governments
b. Provident Funds
c. Individuals Resident in India
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
50. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Treasury bills carry a coupon rate.
b. Treasury bills are issued at a discount.
c. The yields on treasury bills is higher when compared to other money market
instruments.
d. The yields on T-bills are considered as a representative of interest rates in the
economy in general.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
38
Part I
39
Investment Banking and Financial Services
58. Which of the following statements is/are true in case of 364-day T-bill?
a. They are auctioned on a monthly basis.
b. The RBI does not notify the amount in advance i.e. during notification.
c. The RBI does not interfere in the auction of these bills.
d. They are not rediscounted by the RBI.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
59. Ad hoc T-bills are issued to
a. The RBI
b. FIs and Banks
c. Non-competitive bidders
d. General public
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
60. The treasury bills that are available for investment now are
a. Ad hoc T-bills
b. On tap T-bills
c. Auction T-bills
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. All of the above.
61. Which of the following statements is false?
a. Treasury bills are issued by the RBI to facilitate government borrowing.
b. Treasury bills help in OMO of the RBI.
c. Treasury bills serve as a medium for short-term investments.
d. Yields on T-bills are considered as a benchmark for other short-term investments.
e. None of the above.
62. In the US, the strip bills form a part of
a. Irregular series bills
b. Regular series bills
c. Cash management bills
d. Both (a) and (c) above
e. None of the above.
Commercial Paper (CP)
63. Which of the following statements is true regarding commercial paper?
a. Companies raising funds through commercial paper have to satisfy the eligibility
criteria prescribed by SEBI.
b. A commercial paper is a long-term, secured promissory note issued by companies
for raising funds.
c. NRIs can invest in commercial paper only on a non-repatriable and non-transferable
basis.
d. Commercial paper has a maximum maturity of 180 days.
e. The minimum size of each commercial paper issue is Rs.20 lakh.
64. Commercial paper
a. Originates from a specific trade transaction
b. Does not originate from a specific self-liquidating transaction
c. Issued to the investors through intermediaries is called dealer paper
d. Both (a) and (c) above
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
40
Part I
41
Investment Banking and Financial Services
42
Part I
43
Investment Banking and Financial Services
44
Part I
Bill Financing
91. A demand bill
a. Is a bill in which no time for payment is specified
b. Is payable immediately ‘at sight’ or ‘on presentment’ to the drawee
c. Is a bill that is payable at a specified later date
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. None of the above.
92. An inland bill
a. Is a bill drawn or made in India, and payable in India
b. Is drawn on any person resident in India
c. May be endorsed in a foreign country and remain in circulation there
d. Is a bill drawn in India and made payable outside India
e. Both (a) and (b) above.
93. Which of the following is/are true with regard to a negotiable instrument?
a. A negotiable instrument need not be in writing.
b. A negotiable instrument must contain an order to pay and not a request.
c. In some cases, the drawer and the payee of a negotiable instrument may be the same
person.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
94. Under the Bill market scheme introduced in 1952
a. Advances were granted to scheduled banks by way of demand loans on the security
of eligible usance bills
b. The lodgement of bills with the RBI was for the purpose of rediscounting
c. Export bills were not eligible for credit facilities
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. None of the above.
95. Which of the following is a feature of the Bill Rediscounting Scheme, 1970?
a. Under this scheme only genuine bills were eligible for rediscounting with the
RBI.
b. The aim of the scheme was to provide bill finance in such a way that it does not
undermine the selective control policy of the RBI.
c. To provide bill finance throughout the year and not just to meet seasonal
stringency.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
45
Investment Banking and Financial Services
96. The measure(s) introduced by the RBI based on the Vaghul Committee Recommendations
in order to promote and develop bill culture in India are:
a. Approaching the Central Government for remission of stamp duty on bills of
exchanges
b. Permitting a larger number of financial institutions to rediscount bills
c. Setting up the DFHI for the development of money market including the market for
commercial bills
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
97. Which of the following is/are the factor(s) responsible for underdevelopment of the bill
market in India?
a. Other cheaper sources of finance.
b. Domination of the bill market by indigenous bankers.
c. Decrease in the quantum of supply bills.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
98. Which of the following is/are characteristic(s) of a well developed bill market?
a. The supply of bills should be continuous and quite large.
b. Commercial bank’s preference to use a bill of exchange as an instrument for
providing credit to their customers.
c. The number of times a bill changes hands will be higher.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
99. Which of the following is/are the recommendation(s) of the Chore Committee in order to
promote bill culture in India?
a. Making it compulsory for banks to extend at least 50% of the cash credit limit
against raw materials to manufacturing units by way of drawee bills.
b. Setting up the DFHI as a major financial institution for the development of the
money market including the market for commercial bills.
c. Remission of stamp duty on bills of exchange.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
100. The rate at which the RBI rediscounts eligible bills from commercial banks is the
a. Bank rate
b. Hundi rate
c. Bazar bill rate
d. SBI discount rate
e. None of the above.
101. Which of the following is the characteristic of the bills rediscounting scheme of IDBI?
a. The scheme covers bills arising out of the sales and purchases of imported capital
equipment.
b. The bills to be eligible for rediscounting by IDBI should be drawn, made, accepted
or endorsed by an industrial concern as defined by the IDBI Act, 1964.
c. The period of maturity of the bill should not be less than 3 months.
d. The minimum amount of a transaction covering a set of bills eligible for
rediscounting has been fixed at Rs.25,000.
e. Payment from the acceptor is obtained by IDBI on the due date.
46
Part I
47
Investment Banking and Financial Services
DEBT MARKET
Gilt-Edged Securities Market
111. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Government of India securities are debt obligations of the Central Government.
b. GoI securities are debt obligations of the State Governments.
c. GoI securities are debt obligations of financial institutions owned by the Central and
State Governments.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
112. Which of the following is false regarding a gilt-edged security?
a. It is an unsecured financial instrument.
b. The rate of interest on these securities is relatively low when compared to other
money market instruments.
c. The minimum amount of investment in government securities for a single investor is
Rs.10,000 and in multiples thereof.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
48
Part I
113. Who among the following are not eligible to invest in Government Securities?
a. Non-Resident Indians.
b. Overseas Corporate Bodies.
c. Foreign Institutional Investors registered with SEBI.
d. Provident Funds.
e. None of the above.
114. Short dated Government Securities are those securities which mature within
a. 1 year
b. 2 years
c. 4 years
d. 5 years
e. 6 years.
115. Which of the following is/are true?
a. The issue of Government securities helps in implementing the fiscal policy of the
Government.
b. Financial institutions like commercial banks are required to maintain their Statutory
Liquidity Reserve in the form of Government securities.
c. From April 1995, the Reserve Bank has begun auctioning Government Securities
competitively and since then interest rates have been increasingly set at market
determined levels.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
116. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. There is no prescribed settlement period in case of debt market as is found in the
capital market.
b. Stock on tap is issued by the RBI with predetermined price, maturity and coupon
with no aggregate amount indicated in the notification.
c. The secondary market in Government Securities is also known as Telephone
market.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
117. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. In case of floating rate bonds, the stock will carry a coupon rate which will vary
according to the change in the base rate to which it is related.
b. No interest is paid on zero-coupon bonds before maturity.
c. When the RBI undertakes Repo transactions it will be buying the securities in the
first leg and sell them back later.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
49
Investment Banking and Financial Services
119. Who among the following are not eligible to participate in Repo transactions?
a. DFHI.
b. State Government.
c. Banks.
d. Financial institutions which maintain SGL and current account with the RBI.
e. None of the above.
120. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. NBFCs are permitted to enter into repo as well as reverse repo transactions.
b. When RBI enters into reverse repos with banks, it sucks out liquidity from the
system.
c. Repo is an avenue of NBFCs to deploy short-term surplus funds, but not to raise
funds.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. None of the above.
121. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. Repo Transactions may also be undertaken on the NSE Wholesale Debt Market.
b. Interest rate on repo transactions is usually higher than the rate prevailing in the call
money market.
c. All GoI securities and treasury bills in demat form are eligible for Repo
transactions subject to the condition that the transaction takes place at Mumbai.
d. Provident Funds are not eligible to participate in Repo auctions.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
Public Deposits
122. Non-banking non-finance companies include
a. An equipment leasing company
b. A hire purchase company
c. Companies engaged in the services sector
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
123. As per the Companies (Acceptance of Deposit) Rules 1975, which of the following is not a
public deposit?
a. Advance received for supply of goods or services.
b. Any amount received by a company from any other company.
c. Any amount received as a loan from any of the notified financial institutions.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
124. The minimum tenure for which public deposits can be accepted or renewed is
a. 3 months provided such deposits do not exceed 10% of the paid-up capital and free
reserves of the company
b. 6 months
c. 12 months
d. 18 months
e. Either (a) or (c) above.
50
Part I
125. The maximum maturity period for public deposits cannot exceed
a. 12 months
b. 24 months
c. 36 months
d. 48 months
e. 60 months.
126. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Deposits repayable on demand or on notice can be accepted by a company.
b. The interest payable on public deposits cannot exceed 16% per annum.
c. The interest payable on public deposits cannot be compounded for periods shorter
than quarterly rests.
d. Any security deposit received by the company from an employee or an agent falls
under the category of public deposit.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
127. The maximum brokerage payable on a deposit having a tenure between one and two years is
a. 1%
b. 1.5%
c. 2%
d. 2.5%
e. 3%.
128. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. Payment of brokerage on public deposits is on a one-time basis.
b. The total amount of public deposits that can be outstanding at any point of time
cannot exceed 25% of the aggregate of paid-up capital and free reserves.
c. A company accepting public deposits is required to maintain liquid assets to the
extent of 10% of the deposits maturing during the financial year ending March 31,
next.
d. The liquid assets required to be held by a company accepting public deposits can be
in the form of deposits held with a scheduled bank, free from lien or charge.
e. The amount held in liquid assets can be used only for the purpose of repayment of
deposits.
129. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The company shall, on acceptance or renewal of deposit, furnish a receipt within a
period of 8 weeks to the depositor.
b. The deposit receipt issued by a company is negotiable and can be transferred to
another person by endorsement or delivery.
c. When a company makes premature repayment, the rate of interest payable by the
company on such deposits shall be reduced by 1.5% from the rate which the
company would have paid if the deposit had been accepted for the period for which
it had run.
d. The deposit receipt need not contain the address of the depositor.
e. Both (a) and (b) above.
51
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Financial Guarantees
133. The volume of personal guarantees in the organized sector has decreased over time because of
a. Abolition of the managing agency system
b. Rise of a new entrepreneurial class
c. Professionalization of managerial cadres
d. Improvement in the financial and technical appraisal of proposals
e. All of the above.
134. An endorser of a bill is liable as a guarantor to pay the holder with respect to the debt
represented by the instrument. This is a case of:
a. Secured Guarantee
b. Implicit Guarantee
c. Continuous Guarantee
d. Explicit Guarantee
e. Performance Guarantee.
135. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. There are two parties accompanied by a guarantee in a loan transaction.
b. The purpose of seeking guarantee is to reduce the risk of default.
c. A guarantee cannot be oral.
d. A guarantee can be treated as a perfect substitute for tangible security.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
52
Part I
53
Investment Banking and Financial Services
CAPITAL MARKET
An Overview of Capital Market
143. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The abolition of the Control on Capital Issues has given a big boost to the process of
disintermediation in the capital market.
b. The institutionalization of the market has had a negative effect on the quality of
intermediation services and on disclosure standards.
c. The process of globalization of the Indian capital markets started with the opening
of these markets for foreign portfolio investment.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
144. The Malegam Committee was appointed to deal with which of the following areas?
a. Mutual Fund Regulations.
b. Suggest measures to increase the levels of disclosures by Indian Issuers.
c. Problems relating to transfer of shares by companies.
d. Modalities of short selling in Indian stock market.
e. Revamp of securities laws.
145. Which was the first exchange to introduce screen based trading in India?
a. The National Stock Exchange.
b. The Bombay Stock Exchange.
c. Over the Counter Exchange of India.
d. The Calcutta Stock Exchange.
e. The Madras Stock Exchange.
146. Which of the following statements is false regarding dematerialization?
a. Dematerialization enables transfer of securities by book entries.
b. The risk of bad deliveries increases as a result of dematerialization.
c. Transfer of securities through depository does not attract stamp duty.
d. The depository handles all corporate actions like exercising for rights, collection of
dividends, credit for bonus, etc., on behalf of the investor.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
147. Which was the first stock exchange to set-up a clearing corporation?
a. The National Stock Exchange.
b. The Bombay Stock Exchange.
c. Over the Counter Stock Exchange.
d. The Hyderabad Stock Exchange.
e. The Madras Stock Exchange.
148. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. In case of trading in dematerialized securities, rolling settlement has been
introduced.
b. Trading on the National Stock Exchange commences every Tuesday and concludes
on the following Wednesday.
c. Trading weeks which are not uniform give rise to arbitrage opportunities.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
54
Part I
149. Which of the following committees was constituted to work out the modalities for
reintroduction of the carry forward system with proper cheques and balances?
a. The J R Varma Committee.
b. The L C Gupta Committee.
c. The G S Patel Committee.
d. The Chandratre Committee.
e. The Bhave Committee.
150. The Committee which recommended introduction of derivatives in India is
a. The Chandratre Committee
b. The Malegam Committee
c. The L C Gupta Committee
d. The J R Varma Committee
e. The Bhave Committee.
151. The system of margining whereby the difference between the current closing price and the
transaction price is collected from the trading member is called as
a. Concentration Margin
b. Initial Margin
c. Carry Forward Margin
d. Mark to Market Margin
e. Special Margin.
152. The trading cycle on The National Stock Exchange operates from
a. Monday to Friday
b. Wednesday to Tuesday
c. Thursday to Wednesday
d. T + 3 rolling basis
e. T + 5 rolling basis.
153. The office of The Controller of Capital Issue was abolished in the year
a. 1986
b. 1989
c. 1991
d. 1992
e. 1994.
154. The G S Patel Committee was constituted to look into
a. Reintroduction of the badla system
b. Disclosure norms in offer documents
c. Book building
d. Redrafting of The Companies Act, 1956
e. Uniform norms for bad delivery.
55
Investment Banking and Financial Services
156. It is mandatory for all issuers to deposit _____ of the size of the issue as security deposit
with the regional stock exchange.
a. 0.5%
b. 1%
c. 1.5%
d. 1.75%
e. 2%.
157. The maximum time period for allotment has been reduced by SEBI to _____ days from the
closure of the issue.
a. 20 days
b. 25 days
c. 30 days
d. 35 days
e. 40 days.
158. The task of vetting the offer document lies with
a. The Lead Manager
b. SEBI
c. Bankers to the issue
d. Underwriters
e. Either (a) or (b) above.
159. Issues below Rs. _____ in size are permitted to be listed only on the OTCEI.
a. 2 crore
b. 3 crore
c. 4 crore
d. 5 crore
e. 6 crore.
160. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. Trading in dematerialized securities takes place on T+2 basis.
b. Setting up of Trade Guarantee Fund is to ensure timely completion of settlement in
the event of defaults by member brokers.
c. SEBI has introduced the stock lending scheme to facilitate timely delivery of
securities.
d. The limits for listing on regular stock exchanges has been raised to 5 crore by SEBI.
e. Both (a) and (d) above.
161. The upper limit for gross exposure for brokers has been fixed by SEBI at
a. 20 times the base minimum capital
b. 20 times the base minimum capital and additional capital
c. 33.33 times the base capital
d. 33.33 times the base minimum capital and additional capital
e. 50 times the base capital and additional capital.
162. The takeover code is triggered when an acquirer obtains ____ equity stake in a company.
a. 10%
b. 15%
c. 20%
d. 25%
e. 30%.
56
Part I
163. Which of the following Self Regulatory Organizations have been formed in India?
a. Association of Merchant Bankers of India.
b. Association of Mutual Funds of India.
c. Registrars Association of India.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
164. Which of the following intermediaries is not required to be registered with SEBI?
a. Debenture Trustees.
b. Portfolio Managers.
c. Foreign Institutional Investors.
d. Depository.
e. Advertising Agency to the Issue.
165. The maximum intra-day trading limit for a broker, as set by SEBI, is
a. 20 times the base capital
b. 20 times the base capital and additional capital
c. 33.33 times the base capital
d. 33.33 times the base capital and additional capital
e. 50 times the base capital and additional capital.
166. The regulatory body for the securities market of UK is
a. Securities Exchange Commission
b. Securities and Exchange Board
c. Securities Regulatory Commission
d. Securities Investment Board
e. Securities Regulatory Board.
167. The minimum paid-up capital required to enable a company to obtain listing on stock
exchanges was raised by SEBI to
a. Rs.1 cr
b. Rs.3 cr
c. Rs.5 cr
d. Rs.7 cr
e. Rs.10 cr.
168. To enable the process of price discovery, SEBI has introduced the system of
a. Screen based trading
b. Book building in securities
c. Underwriting
d. Vetting of premium issues
e. Dematerialization.
MERCHANT BANKING
An Overview of Merchant Banking
169. Which of the following conditions needs to be satisfied for a listed security to be classified
as a Group A security?
a. The shares should be fully paid-up equity shares.
b. The shares must not be shares of banking companies.
c. The shares must have been admitted to dealings for at least two years on the given
exchange.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
57
Investment Banking and Financial Services
170. Which was the first financial institution in India to offer merchant banking services?
a. IFCI.
b. IDBI.
c. ICICI.
d. IRBI.
e. ECGC.
171. A merchant banker is not permitted to carry on which of the following activities?
a. Underwriting.
b. Advisory services.
c. Bills discounting.
d. Mergers and Acquisitions.
e. Venture Capital Placements.
172. Merchant Bankers in India are classified under which of the following categories?
a. I, II, III, IV and V.
b. I, II III and IV.
c. I, II and III.
d. I and II.
e. Multiple categories of merchant bankers have been abolished.
173. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Registration with SEBI is mandatory for carrying on the business of merchant
banking in India.
b. An applicant desiring to carry on the business of merchant banking should be a body
corporate.
c. The norm that a merchant banker should not carry on any business other than those
connected with the securities market is not applicable to banks and financial
institutions.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
174. The minimum net worth required for an applicant to carry on the business of merchant
banking is
a. Rs.3 crore
b. Rs.4 crore
c. Rs.5 crore
d. Rs.6 crore
e. Rs.10 crore.
175. The certificate of registration issued to merchant bankers by SEBI is valid for a period of
a. 1 year
b. 2 years
c. 3 years
d. 4 years
e. 5 years.
176. Which of the following is a characteristic of the merchant banking industry in India?
a. High entry barriers.
b. Low competition.
c. High bargaining power of customers.
d. Both (a), (b) and (c) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
58
Part I
59
Investment Banking and Financial Services
183. Which of the following is not a function of the Registrar to the issue?
a. Assist the Lead Manager in selection of the bankers to the issue and the collection
centers.
b. Collection of daily subscription figures from collecting branches and reporting the
same to the company and the lead manager.
c. Refund of application money to unsuccessful applicants.
d. Assisting the company in listing of the security on stock exchanges.
e. Redressal of investor grievances.
184. Which of the following is applicable to a banker to a public issue?
a. Issue banking falls under the regulatory ambit of the RBI.
b. It is necessary that a banker to a public issue is a scheduled bank.
c. The maximum number of banks which can be associated with a public issue is 5.
d. Every banker to an issue shall enter into an agreement with the body corporate for
whom it is acting as banker to an issue.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
185. The total outstanding underwriting obligation of an underwriter at any point of time cannot
exceed ______ times his net worth.
a. 10
b. 15
c. 20
d. 25
e. 30.
186. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. Underwriters are paid underwriting commission for assuming the risk of
undersubscription.
b. Underwriting commission is paid on the face value of the security.
c. Underwriting an issue is optional and not mandatory.
d. In case of underwritten issues, the minimum underwriting commitment of the lead
manager shall be to the extent of 5% of the size of the offer or Rs.25 lakh, whichever
is more.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
187. The minimum net worth which an underwriter should have is
a. 5 lakh
b. 10 lakh
c. 15 lakh
d. 20 lakh
e. 25 lakh.
188. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. It is not mandatory for brokers to be registered with SEBI.
b. Any member of any recognized stock exchange can be appointed as broker to the
issue.
c. Appointment of brokers to the issue is not mandatory as per SEBI guidelines.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
60
Part I
61
Investment Banking and Financial Services
62
Part I
202. The market lot depends upon the issue price of the share. For an issue price of Rs.300 the
market lot will be
a. 10 shares
b. 50 shares
c. 100 shares
d. 150 shares
e. 200 shares.
203. An overseas corporate body is a foreign firm where
a. At least 50% of the ownership stake is held directly or indirectly by Resident Indians
b. At least 50% of the ownership stake is held directly or indirectly by Non-Resident
Indians
c. At least 60% of the ownership stake is held directly by Resident Indians
d. At least 60% of the ownership stake is held directly or indirectly by Non-Resident
Indians
e. At least 75% of the ownership stake is held directly or indirectly by Non-Resident
Indians.
204. Alpha Ltd. plans a public issue of Rs.140 cr. Which of the following statements are correct
with reference to this issue?
i. The company can appoint a maximum of 4 Lead Managers
ii. The number of Co-Managers cannot exceed the number of Lead Managers
appointed for the issue
iii. The issue can have only one Advisor.
a. (i) only
b. (ii) only
c. (iii) only
d. All of the above
e. None of the above.
205. Which of the following statements is false?
a. Reservation made to a particular class of investors is called as firm reservation.
b. When reservation on firm basis is undersubscribed, the amount will be added to the net
offer to the public.
c. The class of investors to whom reservations can be made in an issue includes
employees and group shareholders.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
206. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The issue announcement advertisement should be issued at least 5 days before the
opening of the issue.
b. The issue announcement advertisement should be issued at least 10 days before the
opening of the issue.
c. The issue announcement advertisement should be issued at least 12 days before the
opening of the issue.
d. The issue announcement advertisement should be issued at least 15 days before the
opening of the issue.
e. The issue announcement advertisement should be issued at least 20 days before the
opening of the issue.
63
Investment Banking and Financial Services
207. Which of the following guidelines have to be observed with regard to issue advertisement?
a. It is not necessary to highlight the risk factors associated with the issue in the
advertisement.
b. During the period when the issue is open for subscription, no advertisement stating
that the issue is fully subscribed or oversubscribed will be issued.
c. No announcement about the closing of the issue will be made, except on the date of
closure of the issue.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
208. The reservation for employees in a public issue cannot exceed
a. 200 shares per employee
b. 500 shares per employee
c. 1000 shares per employee
d. 5% of the size of the issue
e. 10% of the size of the issue.
209. A new company can price its issue at a premium, only if
i. The promoter company has a 5-year record of consistent profitability.
ii. The promoters contribution is 50%.
iii. The Lead Manager gives a safety net to the investors.
a. (i) only
b. (ii) only
c. (iii) only
d. Both (i) and (ii) above
e. All of the above.
210. Which of the following are important determinants in designing capital structure?
a. Nature of industry.
b. Type of asset financed.
c. Degree of competition.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
211. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Short-term liabilities should be used to create short-term assets and long-term
liabilities for long-term assets.
b. In non-seasonal businesses, investment in current assets assume the characteristics
of fixed assets and hence needs to be financed by long-term liabilities.
c. The risk of financial leverage increases for businesses subject to large cyclical
variation.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
212. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. A business characterized by low level of competition and high entry barriers
decreases the volatility of the earnings stream.
b. A low leverage limits the firm’s ability to respond to an obsolescence crisis.
c. When a business reaches maturation stage, leverage is likely to decline as cash flows
accelerate.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. None of the above.
64
Part I
213. The profit earned by selling a security will be treated as short-term capital gain if the
holding period is
a. Less than 12 months
b. Less than 24 months
c. Less than 36 months
d. More than 36 months but less than 48 months
e. Less than 48 months.
214. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. A new company which is promoted by an existing company with a 3-year record of
consistent profitability can freely price its issue.
b. An existing private or closely held public company can freely price its issue, if it
has a 3-year record of consistent profitability.
c. A new company can price its shares either at par or at premium.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
215. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. Underpricing an IPO deprives the promoter or the company of an opportunity to
raise more funds.
b. Underpricing helps in giving shareholders good returns as an IPO is mainly intended
as a long-term financing strategy.
c. Underpricing could result in a lower net worth on an increased equity, which might
make dividend pay-outs or future investments difficult.
d. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
e. None of the above.
216. Zero-coupon bonds are:
a. Issued at face value and do not carry any interest
b. Issued at a discount to their face value and are redeemed at par on expiry of their
tenure
c. Debt instruments with warrants allowing the investors to subscribe to the equity of
another company at a predetermined price
d. Redeemed by repayment in a series of installments at a premium over the face
value
e. Convertible into equity of the issuer at a price set at the time of issuance.
217. Which of the following is a feature of auction rated debt?
a. These are convertible short-term debentures.
b. Auction rated debts are fully redeemable non-convertible short-term debentures.
c. Auction rated debt is usually unsecured in nature.
d. Auction rated debt is redeemed at regular intervals and then re-auctioned.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
218. Which of the following companies was the pioneer in introducing auction rated debt in
India?
a. TISCO.
b. Vadilal Dairy International Limited.
c. Ashok Leyland.
d. Jindal Photofilms.
e. Reliance Petrochemicals Limited.
65
Investment Banking and Financial Services
219. Which of the following is not used by the Malegam Committee to justify the pricing of a
share?
a. Dividend Discount Model.
b. Earnings Per Share.
c. Price Earnings Multiple.
d. Return on Net Worth.
e. Net Asset Value.
220. Which of the following statements is/are true?
i. A zero coupon bond is issued at a discount to its face value and is redeemed at par
on maturity.
ii. A debenture with a warrant entitling the holder to acquire the shares of another company
is called as third party convertible debenture.
iii. Lyons are zero coupon convertible notes.
a. (i) only
b. (ii) only
c. (iii) only
d. All of the above
e. None of the above.
221. Which of the following statements is/are false?
i. Preference shares cannot carry dividend rate higher than 16%.
ii. Preference shares cannot be irredeemable.
iii. Cumulative preference shares cannot be issued in India.
a. (i) only
b. (iii) only
c. Both (i) and (iii) above
d. Both (ii) and (iii) above
e. Both (i) and (ii) above.
66
Part I
224. In case of a rights issue, if the company does not receive at least 90% of the issued amount
including accepted devolvement from underwriters, within _____ days from the date of
closing of the issue, the amount of subscription received is required to be refunded.
a. 30
b. 35
c. 42
d. 51
e. 63.
225. Which of the following is/are true?
a. The letter of offer pertaining to rights issue should be vetted by SEBI.
b. The rights issue should not dilute the value or rights of the fully or partly convertible
debenture holders.
c. Companies are permitted to retain the oversubscription amount in a rights issue.
d. Along with the rights issue, preferential allotment can be made as well.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
226. Sri Limited is planning a rights issue of equity shares in the ratio of 1 rights share for every
3 shares held. The rights issue is being priced at Rs.16 per share. The current market price
of the share is Rs.25. The value of the rights is
a. Rs.2.20
b. Rs.2.25
c. Rs.2.27
d. Rs.2.30
e. Rs.2.52.
227. Vijay Limited is planning a rights issue of equity shares in the ratio of 1 right share for
every 5 shares held. The current market price of the share is Rs.45, while the rights issue is
being priced at Rs.30. The expected market price of the share after the rights issue is
a. Rs.40
b. Rs.40.5
c. Rs.41
d. Rs.42.5
e. Rs.45.
228. Beta Limited has tapped the markets with rights issue priced at Rs.60 per share. The rights
is being offered in the ratio of 1 share for every 2 shares held. The shares are currently
quoting at Rs.90 in the market. Murthy is currently holding 500 shares of the company. The
change in the wealth of Murthy if he allows his rights to expire is
a. –5,000
b. –10,000
c. +15,000
d. –20,000
e. –25,000.
229. Which of the following guidelines are applicable to bonus issues by companies?
a. Pending conversion of FCDs/PCDs, no company shall issue any shares by way of
bonus unless similar benefit is extended to the holders of such PCDs or FCDs.
b. Bonus shares can be issued out of share premium collected in cash and revaluation
reserves.
c. An issue of bonus shares cannot be made unless the partly paid shares are made
fully paid-up.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
67
Investment Banking and Financial Services
230. Which of the following statements is/are true regarding bonus shares?
a. Bonus shares are always fully paid.
b. Bonus shares are issued to the existing members free of charge.
c. Similar to rights shares, bonus shares may be renounced by a member in favor of his
nominee.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
231. In a composite issue, the gap between the closure dates of the rights issue and public issue
should not exceed
a. 7 days
b. 15 days
c. 21 days
d. 30 days
e. 60 days.
232. The maximum time period for which a rights issue can be kept open for subscription is
a. 10 days
b. 21 days
c. 30 days
d. 45 days
e. 60 days.
233. Which of the following reserve(s) are not eligible for issuing bonus?
a. Revaluation reserve.
b. General reserve.
c. Capital reserve.
d. Share premium.
e. Both revaluation reserve and capital reserve.
234. Which of the following are essential features of the private placement market?
a. The private placement market is characterized by high entry barriers.
b. The company tapping the private placement market has a choice of investors.
c. The transaction costs in the private placement market are very high.
d. Credit rating of debt instruments is compulsory in case of private placement.
e. Both (a) and (b) above.
235. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The issue of shares on a preferential basis can be made at a price not less than the
average of the weekly high and low of the closing prices on a stock exchange during
the six months or two weeks preceding 30 days prior to the general body meeting of
shareholders, whichever is lower.
b. The issue of shares on a preferential basis can be made at a price not less than the
average of the weekly high and low of the closing prices on a stock exchange during
the six months or two weeks preceding 30 days prior to the general body meeting of
shareholders, whichever is higher.
c. The issue of shares on a preferential basis can be made at a price not more than the
average of the weekly high and low of the closing prices on a stock exchange during
the six months or two weeks preceding 30 days prior to the general body meeting of
shareholders, whichever is lower.
d. The issue of shares on a preferential basis can be made at a price not more than the
average of the weekly high and low of the closing prices on a stock exchange during
the six months or one week preceding 30 days prior to the general body meeting of
shareholders, whichever is lower.
e. The issue of shares on a preferential basis can be made at a price not more than the
average of the weekly high and low of the closing prices on a stock exchange during
the six months or two weeks preceding 60 days prior to the general body meeting of
shareholders, whichever is lower.
68
Part I
236. The lock-in period for shares of a listed company privately placed with the promoters is
a. 2 years
b. 3 years
c. 5 years
d. There is no lock-in period
e. The lock-in period will be decided by the issuer company.
237. The lock-in period for shares of a listed company privately placed with investors other than
the existing promoters is
a. 2 years
b. 3 years
c. 5 years
d. There is no lock-in period
e. The lock-in period will be decided by the issuer company.
238. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Buy-outs are nothing but wholesale investments.
b. Buy-outs happen when the company needs money fast and market conditions are
adverse.
c. Buy-outs happen when an investor group makes an offer to a company which is
more lucrative.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
239. Which of the following can be considered as an advantage of bought out deals?
a. Price is not subject to the vagaries of the market place.
b. Funds can be obtained at a minimal cost without fear of undersubscription.
c. The intermediary usually earns a higher return on a bought out deal when compared
to the fee earned on conventional merchant banking services.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
240. In case of warrants on private placement basis, the amount payable upfront should be at
least
a. 1% of the exercise price
b. 2.5% of the exercise price
c. 5% of the exercise price
d. 7.5% of the exercise price
e. 10% of the exercise price.
INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
241. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. In the ADR Level I issue, there are no disclosures required.
b. In the ADR Level I issue, ADRs can be traded only on the US-OTC market.
c. In the ADR Level I issue, the company need not comply with the US-GAAP.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
69
Investment Banking and Financial Services
242. In a depository receipts issue, which of the following will be the role(s) played by the
custodian?
a. To hold the shares underlying the DRs on behalf of the depository.
b. To collect rupee dividends on the underlying shares.
c. To disseminate information from the issuer to the DR holder.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
243. Which of the following statements is/are true regarding the foreign bonds issued in the
international bond markets?
a. Yankee bonds are pound denominated bonds issued in the UK by non-UK firms.
b. Samurai bonds are yen denominated bonds issued in the Japanese market by non-
Japanese firms.
c. Bulldog bonds are dollar denominated bonds issued in the UK by domestic
companies.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
244. Belgian dentist is a term used to describe
a. An institutional investor who makes market specific investments
b. An institutional investor who makes market and industry specific investments
c. An institutional investor who makes time specific investments
d. A high net worth individual investor in bonds/DRs to ensure safety for the surplus
funds
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
245. Which of the following statements describes the Gensaki rate?
a. It is the short-term benchmarket rate used in Japanese markets.
b. It is the benchmark rate used to price the Samurai bonds.
c. It is the long-term prime rate used in the Swiss markets.
d. It is the treasury rate used in the US markets.
e. None of the above.
246. Which of the following statements is/are true in the case of Eurodollar deposits?
a. Eurodollar deposits cannot be owned by individuals.
b. Eurodollars are not subject to US banking regulations.
c. Eurodollar volume is not measured as the dollar denominated deposit liabilities of
banks located outside the US.
d. The sum of a few dollar-denominated liabilities of banks outside the United States
measures the gross size of the Eurodollar market.
e. The net size of the Eurodollar market is constructed by netting all the deposits
owned by individuals.
247. The reserve requirements on the transaction deposits have been reduced from _____ to
_____.
a. 10%, 9%
b. 11%, 9%
c. 12%, 10%
d. 12%, 11%
e. 12%, 10.5%.
70
Part I
248. Which of the following is/are features of Eurodollar Certificate of Deposits (CDs)?
a. It is a negotiable receipt for a dollar deposit at a bank outside the United States.
b. The investors sell the Eurodollar CDs only after they mature.
c. Tranche deposits are issued in very small denominations.
d. They pay a fixed, competitively determined rate of return.
e. Secondary market makers’ spreads for short-term fixed rate CDs have been 5 basis
points for European bank dollar CDs.
249. Which of the following is false in the case of Eurodollar Floating Rate Notes (FRNs)?
a. They are issued by banks and sovereign governments.
b. They are negotiable bearer papers.
c. The coupon or interest rate is set above the LIBOR for sovereign borrowers and
below the LIBOR for US banks.
d. Yields on Eurodollar FRNs range from 1/8 percent under LIBID up to LIBOR.
e. The spread quoted on FRNs in the secondary market is 10 cents per $100 face value
for the liquid sovereign issues.
250. Which of the following is a source of risk not associated with Eurodollar deposits?
a. The interference of the authorities in the movement or repatriation of the principal of
the deposit or the interest paid on it.
b. Blockage of the deposits of the foreign residents by the US Government.
c. The potential for international jurisdictional disputes.
d. Soundness of deposits at banking offices in foreign countries relative to banking
offices located in the United States.
e. Lesser cost of evaluating foreign investments than the local investments.
251. Which of the following is true in case of loan syndication?
a. In direct loan syndication, there is a principal-agent kind of relationship among the
participant banks.
b. The managing banks provide assistance and suggestions to the lead manager in
managing the loan.
c. The lead manager never plays the role of an agent bank in the syndicate.
d. Syndication can be done only on a best effort basis.
e. Merchant banker cannot act as a lead manager.
252. Which of the following is an upfront cost associated with pricing of Eurodollar loans?
a. Out of pocket costs.
b. Commitment charge on the undrawn portion.
c. Interest charges on loan amount.
d. Agency cost.
e. Interest on the undrawn portion of the loan.
253. Which of the following is true in case of multicurrency loans?
a. Multicurrency loans represent a natural expansion of the use of eurodollar loans.
b. Multicurrency loans do not carry any currency risk.
c. “Business day” is any working day.
d. Interest rate for multicurrency loans is based on the LIBOR.
e. None of the above.
71
Investment Banking and Financial Services
72
Part I
260. “Mergers and Acquisitions” and “Greenfield” Investments are part of which form of FDI?
a. Reinvested earnings.
b. Equity capital.
c. Long-term borrowing.
d. Short-term borrowing.
e. Term loans.
261. Which of the following is true in case of a vertical spillover?
a. It occurs when the affiliate has a new technology that is subsequently copied or
learned by competing firms.
b. It occurs when the affiliate transfers free of charge technology to firms supplying
inputs or servicing “downstream” operations.
c. It occurs when technology is licensed by the affiliate to a domestic firm.
d. It benefits the MNC bringing in the technology.
e. It is a kind of diffusion of technology for firms in the host country.
262. Which of the following is false with respect to FDI in India?
a. FDI is in the form of investment from Non- Resident Indians (NRIs) and Overseas
Corporate Bodies(OCBs).
b. FDI is not allowed in the services sector.
c. The automatic route for FDI is not available to those who have joint venture or
technology transfer/trademark agreement in India.
d. Same rules apply to existing companies and new ventures.
e. FERA rules the FDIs in India.
263. Which of the following is not an objective of Foreign Investment Promotion Board?
a. To undertake investment in India and abroad.
b. To facilitate investment in the country through international companies,
Non-Resident Indians and other foreign investors.
c. To delay clearance of proposals submitted to it.
d. To review policy and put in place appropriate rules and procedures for investment
promotion and approvals.
e. To deal in the matters related to FDI.
264. In which of the following forms of bank account is the deposit amount payable on the
maturity date?
a. Reinvestment Deposit.
b. Fixed Deposit Account.
c. Recurring Deposits.
d. Savings Account.
e. Current Account.
265. Which of the following is not a characteristic of Non-Resident Non-Repatriable Rupee
account (NRNR)?
a. Low rate of interest.
b. Exempted from all taxes.
c. Interest income is repatriable.
d. Loan can be availed against deposit.
e. High rate of interest.
73
Investment Banking and Financial Services
CREDIT RATING
266. Fine Steels Limited is planning to raise funds by issue of CPs and gets the security rated.
The rating given by the credit rating agency will indicate
a. The general evaluation of Fine Steels Limited
b. The possibility of repayment of the principal and interest by Fine Steels Limited
c. The credit risk involved in making long-term investments with Fine Steels Limited
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
267. Which of the following aspects is not involved in technical analysis of credit evaluation?
a. Operat ive efficiency of plant.
b. Availability of quality sources for major inputs.
c. Need for modernization.
d. In-house expertise.
e. None of the above.
268. First Invest Limited is an institutional investor and approaches a credit rating agency to
analyze the equity assessment of JP Pharmaceuticals Limited. Which of the following
statements refer to equity assessment process?
a. It is an analysis done upon the request of the investor and the company.
b. It is for the specific purpose of the investor who has requested for the assessment.
c. Instead of a credit rating symbol, there will be a report on the analysis.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
269. Which of the following indicates the steps involved in the explicit judgmental approach
used in sovereign rating?
a. Factors relevant for rating the entity are defined and weights are attached to them for
quantitative assessment.
b. A score is obtained on the basis of the weights.
c. A score is obtained on the basis of quantitative assessment.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
270. HK Limited is an institutional investor assessing the risks that may arise by making direct
investments in overseas companies. Which of the following risks will the overseas investor
be exposed to?
a. Political risks of confiscation.
b. Political risks of expropriation.
c. Risks due to depreciation methods.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
271. In the absence of confiscation, the cash flows to an overseas investor are expected to be
Rs.12 lakh. If the probability of confiscation is 0.05 for the investment period of 5 years,
then the expected cash flow in year 5 after adjusting for this probability will be
a. Rs.0.60 lakh
b. Rs.3 lakh
c. Rs.9.29 lakh
d. Rs.11.40 lakh
e. Rs.11.32 lakh.
74
Part I
272. Real Finance Limited is a consumer finance company planning to get individual credit
rating for its borrowers. Which of the following aspects should be analyzed?
a. Duration of stay in present place of residence.
b. Future job prospects.
c. Financial assets.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
273. Which of the following ratios are used while rating a CP?
a. Total debt/capitalization including short-term debt.
b. Long-term debt/capitalization.
c. Pre-tax return on average long-term capital employed.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
274. If the probability of the firm being confiscated is 0.05, then assess the expected cash flows
for the investment of Rs.12 lakh. Discounted rate is 10%.
a. Rs.6.33 lakh
b. Rs.76 lakh
c. Rs.10.9 lakh
d. Rs.120 lakh
e. None of the above.
275. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Shadow rating need not be disclosed to the public.
b. Formal rating will need considerably lesser information than shadow rating.
c. If the shadow rating indicates a good rating, then there would be no need for formal rating.
d. Both (a) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
EVOLUTION OF FINANCIAL SERVICES
276. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. 20th century Leasing Ltd. is the first leasing company in India which came into
existence in 1973.
b. Normally equipment leasing carries the convertibility clause that can result in
dilution of ownership and control.
c. Equipment leasing provides hundred percent finance.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
277. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. SBI capital markets limited was set-up by SBI, which is the first commercial bank to
set-up a financial services subsidiary.
b. As per the RBI guidelines banks are allowed to provide hire purchase and leasing
services through a subsidiary only.
c. In installment credit, the ownership of the product is transferred to the user after
paying the last installment.
d. The interest rates quoted for consumer finance are based on the effective rate of
interest.
e. None of the above.
75
Investment Banking and Financial Services
76
Part I
77
Investment Banking and Financial Services
78
Part I
295. Which of the following features is/are borne by a financial lease in the Indian context?
a. By the end of the lease term the ownership of the asset will be transferred to the
lessee.
b. The lease term is for a major part of the useful life of the asset.
c. The lease transaction is almost similar to that of the conditional sales agreement.
d. The present value of the lease payments is substantially less than the fair market
value of the asset at the inception of the lease.
e. All of the above.
296. According to the Financial Accounting Standard Board of the US, for a financial lease, the
lease term should exceed
a. 90% of the useful life of the asset
b. 75% of the useful life of the asset
c. 95% of the useful life of the asset
d. At least 50% of the useful life of the asset
e. None of the above.
297. The discount rate to be used by the lessee for the purpose of determining the present value
of the asset in a financial lease is
a. The rate of interest implicit in the lease
b. The rate at which lessee can borrow funds
c. The incremental rate of borrowing
d. The lessee’s weighted average cost of capital
e. None of the above.
298. “Hell or High water” clause means
a. The commitment of the lessor to replace the asset in the face of any event affecting
the usage of the asset
b. The operation of the asset by the lessee over the entire life of the equipment
c. The lessor should take responsibility for repair and maintenance and should pay
insurance
d. The unconditional obligation of the lessee to pay rentals over the entire life of the
asset
e. None of the above.
299. “A fully pay-out lease” is
a. A lease in which a substantial part of the payments are made at the front end of the
transaction
b. A finance lease which operates over the entire economic life of the equipment
c. A lease in which the title would be passed automatically from the seller to the buyer
at the end of lease period
d. Both (a) and (c) above
e. None of the above.
300. Which of the following features characterize an operating lease?
a. Lease term is significantly shorter than the economic life of the equipment.
b. The lease contract can be terminated by the lessor at short notice.
c. The present value of the lease rentals should be greater than or equal to the fair
market value of the asset at the inception of the lease.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b), and (c) above.
79
Investment Banking and Financial Services
80
Part I
81
Investment Banking and Financial Services
313. Which of the following restrictions are applicable to a finance company intending to tap the
intercorporate market?
a. The maximum maturity period of the ICD should not be more than 15 months.
b. The total amount that can be raised by way of intercorporate deposits cannot exceed
two times the free reserves of the company.
c. A minimum liquidity reserve of 15% of the intercorporate deposits is required to be
maintained by the company planning to tap the ICD market.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
314. The issue price (rounded off to nearest rupee) of a cash certificate of face value Rs.3,000,
which is to be redeemed at par after 12 months so as to yield 15% p.a. is
a. Rs.1,492
b. Rs.445
c. Rs.895
d. Rs.1,490
e. Rs.2,609.
315. Which of the following statements is/are true with respect to public deposits?
a. The true yield of a public deposit is influenced by the term to maturity of the
deposit.
b. A leasing company can use the entire finance raised through public deposits for
lease investments.
c. The true yield on a public deposit is always less than the simple interest yield.
d. The compounded yield on a public deposit is always higher than the simple interest
yield.
e. Both (a) and (d) above.
316. A leasing company can raise bank borrowings up to
a. 10 times net owned funds
b. 4 times net owned funds
c. 3 times net owned funds
d. 2 times net owned funds
e. None of the above.
317. Which of the following is not included within the definition of deemed deposits?
a. Intercorporate deposits.
b. Borrowings and monies received from the shareholders of private limited
companies.
c. Borrowings and monies received from the directors of private limited companies.
d. Monies raised through debentures and bonds secured by immovable properties.
e. Funds raised through unsecured non-convertible debentures.
318. There is a ceiling on the interest rate or discount rate given by the leasing companies if they
raise the finance through
a. Public deposits
b. Intercorporate deposits
c. Commercial paper
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
82
Part I
319. The maturity mismatch is more pronounced for leasing companies in the case of
a. Public deposits
b. Bank borrowings
c. Intercorporate deposits
d. Commercial paper
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
320. Which of the following is true regarding bank lending to a finance company?
a. It can be in the form of cash credit only and should not exceed 4 times the NOF.
b. It can be in the form of term loan only and should not exceed 6 times the NOF.
c. It can be in the form of bill discounting only and should not exceed 4 times the
NOF.
d. It can be in the form of cash credit only and should not exceed 6 times the NOF.
e. None of the above.
321. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The implicit cost of the deemed deposits is more than their explicit cost.
b. An exchangeable bond is a combination of debt of one company which is converted
into equity of another company.
c. The provisions of the Indian Contract Act, 1872 governing bailment prohibit the
lessee from entering a sub-lease.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
322. Mr Anand deposited Rs.7,000 under the cumulative deposit scheme of Garg Finance
Limited. The tenure of the deposit is 12 months and the rate of interest is 15% p.a.
(compounded monthly). The annual yield on this deposit is
a. 15%
b. 16.08%
c. 17.52%
d. 18%
e. 18.15%.
323. Kavya deposits Rs.2,000 in a deposit scheme of Sneha Finance Company. The nominal rate
of interest on this deposit is 15% p.a. compounded monthly. If the tenure of the deposit is
12 months, the amount receivable by Kavya on maturity is
a. 2,240
b. 2,300
c. 2,322
d. 2,400
e. None of the above.
324. As per SEBI guidelines, a finance company issuing non-convertible debentures will have to
get the issue rated by an approved rating agency, if the initial term to maturity exceeds
______ months.
a 12
b. 15
c. 18
d. 24
e. 36.
83
Investment Banking and Financial Services
84
Part I
331. The denial of lessor’s responsibility for any defects in the equipment is defined in which of
the following clauses?
a. Description clause.
b. Ownership clause.
c. Exemption clause.
d. Repairs and alterations clause.
e. Default clause.
332. Which of the following is/are true regarding a contract of bailment?
a. Bailment does not commence until the goods are delivered to the bailee.
b. The bailee has an implied obligation not to act in a manner inconsistent with the
terms of the bailment.
c. The bailor need not disclose to the bailee any faults in the goods bailed of which the
bailor is aware.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
333. In a lease agreement, the clause which specifies that upon expiry of the lease term the
lessee must deliver the equipment to the lessor is referred to as:
a. Exemption clause
b. Ownership clause
c. Equipment delivery clause
d. Surrender clause
e. None of the above.
334. The clause in a lease agreement which states that no right, title or interest in the leased
asset shall pass to the lessee is called the
a. Description clause
b. Exemption clause
c. Ownership clause
d. Default clause
e. Surrender clause.
335. Which of the following statements is/are false?
a. The definition of ‘bailment’ under The Indian Contract Act, 1872 closely resembles
the equipment lease transaction.
b. Bailor ‘can be taken as counterpart of the lessor’ and the ‘bailee’ can be taken as the
counterpart of the lessee.
c. The commencement of ‘bailment’ requires the delivery of the goods.
d. If the goods are destroyed, bailee is not liable to indemnify the bailor for loss.
e. The goods must be delivered to the bailor on the expiry of fixed time.
336. The differences between the bailment and the equipment leasing is/are
a. Equipment lease in the Indian context contains a purchase option whereas bailment
does not
b. Bailor has to supply the goods to the bailee according to his specifications
c. ‘Equipment lease’ requires the equipment supplier sometimes whereas the
‘bailment’ transaction does not require
d. Creditors of the bailor can take by law possession of the ‘bailed goods’ from bailee
which is not possible in lease transaction
e. None of the above.
85
Investment Banking and Financial Services
86
Part I
87
Investment Banking and Financial Services
348. The cost of a capital equipment exclusive of sales tax is Rs.60 lakh. The quote of leasing
company on a five-year lease is Rs.27.5 ptpm payable at the end of every month excluding
sales tax. The leasing company is required to pay sales tax at 5 percent on the quoted lease
rental. The lease rental to be collected is
a. Rs.1.92 lakh
b. Rs.1.906 lakh
c. Rs.1.737 lakh
d. Rs.1.815 lakh
e. Rs.1.65 lakh.
349. As per the Income Tax Act, 1961, depreciation is calculated
a. On WDV method only at the rates given in the Act
b. On WDV method or SLM method at the rates given in the Act
c. On blocks of assets by clubbing all the assets of same rate of depreciation together
d. On individual assets
e. Both (a) and (c) above.
350. Which of the following is not considered as a sale under the CST Act?
a. Transfer of property in goods for deferred payment.
b. Hire purchase.
c. Hypothecation.
d. Pledge.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
351. Depreciation allowance on leased assets
a. Is claimed by the lessor
b. Is claimed by the lessee
c. Is claimed by both lessee and lessor in the case of cross-border lease
d. Both (a) and (c) above
e. Both (b) and (c) above.
352. As per the Income Tax Act, 1961
a. Lessee can claim the depreciation tax shields on leased assets
b. Lessee can claim the maintenance costs of the leased assets
c. In a sale and leaseback transaction, the lessee cannot claim depreciation on a cost
which is higher than the book value of the asset as on the date of transsfer
d. A lease where more than ninety percent of the cost of the asset is recovered over the
non-cancellable term is not regarded as a “true lease”
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
353. As per the Section 32 of Income Tax Act, 1961
a. Depreciation is allowed as a tax-deductible expense if the asset is used by the
assessee for the purpose of business
b. Depreciation is computed with reference to the actual cost of the asset
c. WDV method is used for plant and machinery and SLM method is used for the rest
of the items
d. Depreciation is charged not on an individual asset but on a block of asset
e. All of the above.
88
Part I
89
Investment Banking and Financial Services
90
Part I
91
Investment Banking and Financial Services
92
Part I
378. If the tax relevant rate of depreciation is 100% and the lease transaction is set-up at the end
of the financial year
a. The lessor can claim 100% of the first year depreciation as tax deductible expense
b. The lessor can claim 50% of the first year depreciation as tax deductible expense
c. The lessor cannot claim the first year depreciation as tax deductible expense
d. The lessor can claim 25% of the first year depreciation as tax deductible expense
e. None of the above.
379. Negotiation of lease rentals is possible only
a. When the break even rental of the lessor is less than that of the lessee
b. When the break even rental of the lessor exceeds the break even rental of the lessee
c. When the net advantage of lease is positive for the lessor only
d. When the net advantage of lease is positive for the lessee only
e. Both (a) and (d) above.
380. Which of the following will influence the gross yield on a lease proposal from the point of
view of the lessor?
a. Tax shield on depreciation.
b. Tax payable on lease rentals.
c. Residual value of the equipment.
d. Tax shield on displaced debt.
e. All of the above.
381. Add-on yield
a. Is a true measure of the interest rate implicit in a lease transaction
b. Is more or less similar to the effective rate of interest
c. Does not recognize the fact that every lease rental paid under the finance lease has a
capital content and an interest content
d. Is always higher than the gross yield of a lease
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
382. Calculate the add-on yield for the Sumitra Leasing Company which is proposing to give an
equipment costing Rs.36 lakh for lease with a monthly rental of Rs.25 ptpm payable in
advance for 5 years?
a. 10%
b. 12%
c. 15%
d. 19.53%
e. 20%.
383. The hurdle rate for the gross yield is given by
a. Marginal cost of capital
b. Marginal cost of debt
c. Post-tax marginal cost of debt plus a profit margin
d. Pre-tax cost of funds plus a profit margin
e. None of the above.
384. In the explicit judgmental approach to credit rating
a. ‘Zero’ refers to the most favorable assessment
b. The weights assigned to the various factors are subjectively determined
c. Highly complex procedure is involved
d. Rating is based on qualitative analysis only
e. Techniques of statistical analysis are employed to identify the set of factors deemed
relevant for credit rating.
93
Investment Banking and Financial Services
HIRE PURCHASE
389. The ownership is transferred in a hire purchase transaction
a. When the hirer pays the first installment
b. When the hirer pays the last installment
c. When the hirer exercises the option to purchase
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. None of the above.
390. Hire purchase transaction entails the hirer
a. The right to cancel the agreement at any time before the payment of last installment
b. The right to purchase the asset at any time before the payment of last installment
c. The right to own the asset after the payment of the last installment
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
94
Part I
391. The ownership on the asset will be transferred to the buyer on the payment of first
installment in
a. Hire purchase transaction
b. Installment sale
c. Lease transaction
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
392. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. In a hire purchase transaction the buyer is committed to pay the full price.
b. The interest component of each hire purchase installment is always calculated on the
basis of effective rate of interest.
c. A common feature of hire purchase option and conditional sale is the transfer of
ownership on the asset on payment of the first installment.
d. A lease with purchase option can be considered as hire purchase transaction.
e. None of the above.
393. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Effective rate of interest ignores the fact that the original amount of loan is repaid in
installments over the term of loan.
b. For a given effective rate of interest, the equivalent flat rate of interest is always
higher.
n
c. The approximation formula i = . 2f is used to determine the effective rate of
n +1
interest in a hire purchase transaction when hire payments are in arrears.
n
d. The approximation formula i = . 2f is used to determine the effective rate of
n −1
interest in a hire purchase transaction when the hire payments are in advance.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
394. Given the rate of interest of 14% flat, repayment period 4 years, frequency of payment
being monthly in advance, which of the following will reflect the annual percentage rate?
a. 28.6%
b. 14%
c. 27.42%
d. 20.0%
e. 16%.
395. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Change in profile of monthly payments from ‘advance’ to ‘arrears’ will always
increase the effective rate of interest.
b. Flat rate of interest in a hire purchase transaction will reflect the effective cost of
funds.
n(n + 1)
c. The approximation formula i = . 2f assumes that the payments are in arrears.
n
d. The effective rate of interest implied by a down payment plan is generally less than
the effective rate of interest implied by deposit linked plan.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
95
Investment Banking and Financial Services
96
Part I
CONSUMER CREDIT
404. Mr. Gopal purchased a Videocon Color Television set with a consumer loan of Rs.14,000.
He pays an EMI of Rs.780 each for a period of 24 months. Calculate the flat interest
charged from him.
a. 9.50%
b. 16.85%
c. 11.25%
d. 12.00%
e. None of the above.
405. State which of the following statement(s) are false, with respect to Consumer Credit Act,
1974 of the UK.
a. The Act allows borrower to pause and reflect over his decision after signing the
agreement under certain circumstances.
b. It permits the borrower to opt for early repayment.
c. It defines the types of ancillary charges to be included for the purpose of
determining the total charge for credit.
d. It does not insist on a license for the intermediary which provides consumer credit.
e. Both (a) and (d) above.
406. A consumer credit transaction is not structured in the form of
a. Hire purchase
b. Conditional sale
c. Credit sale
d. Lease with an option to purchase
e. None of the above.
97
Investment Banking and Financial Services
407. Which of the following criteria is not considered while extending consumer loans to
individuals?
a. Minimum level of annual emoluments.
b. Minimum take-home salary.
c. Net worth of employing company.
d. Number of years in the present employment.
e. None of the above.
408. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. The difference between the consumer credit and hire purchase is that the hire
purchase is secured through a first charge on the asset while the consumer credit is
not.
b. Consumer credit transaction is always a tripartite transaction.
c. In a conditional sale contract, the ownership is transferred to the customer on
payment of the first installment.
d. ‘Consumer credit’ encompasses all asset-based financing plans.
e. All of the above.
409. Consumer Credit
a. Is asset-based financial plan
b. Allows customer to pay in installments to acquire the asset
c. Is a financing plan offered primarily to buyers of consumer durables
d. Allows customers to choose the repayment schedule based on their convenience
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
410. Effective rate of interest is given by
n
a. 2f, if payments are in advance
n +1
n
b. 2f, if payments are in arrears
n −1
c. The rate of interest which equates the present value of all the cash flows in the
transaction to zero
d. Both (a) and (b) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
98
Part I
99
Investment Banking and Financial Services
SECURITIZATION
422. Which of the following statements is/are true?
a. Any resource with predictable cash flows can be securitized.
b. Securitization means selling old debts in the form of securities.
c. Securitization helps an institution in raising funds out of its debt portfolio.
d. Both (b) and (c) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
423. ‘Special Purpose Vehicle’
a. Originates the assets through receivables, leases, housing loan or any other form of
debt
b. Will issue debt and purchase receivables from the originator
c. Will obtain an investment credit rating and make the transaction attractive to the
investors
d. Is intended to manage the issue of the securities
e. All of the above.
424. Which of the following statements is/are not true?
a. Securitization transforms an illiquid asset on the balance sheet into cash.
b. In a whole loan sale all rights and responsibilities connected with a mortgage loan
are transferred to the purchasers.
c. Whole loan requires the loan-by-loan review by the purchaser.
d. A whole loan sale is always with recourse to the seller.
e. None of the above.
100
Part I
101
Investment Banking and Financial Services
431. Which of the following factors are considered as impediments with respect to development
of securitization in India?
a. Levy of high stamp duty.
b. Restrictions on transfer of property without intervention of the court of law.
c. Strict capital adequacy norms.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
432. The mortgage pass-through securities were designed to serve the following purpose
a. To enhance the creditworthiness of the sale of mortgage loans
b. To create a security that would be more freely tradeable and transferable
c. To create a security that would not necessarily involve the inspection of each loan as
done in case of whole loan sales
d. Both (b) and (c) above
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
102
Part I
103
Investment Banking and Financial Services
104
Part I
449. Which of the following statements is/are false regarding real estate financing?
a. A bow tie arrangement is designed to protect both borrower and the lender against
volatile interest rate.
b. Some large savings and loan associations enter into land acquisition and
construction loans with the developers.
c. S&Ls also lend to cover the difference or gap between the bank construction loan
and total project cost.
d. S&L will not fund real estate development through joint ventures.
e. Both (b) and (d) above.
PLASTIC MONEY
452. Which of the following is false with respect to a credit card?
a. It enables the holder of the card to purchase goods without parting with cash
immediately.
b. There is a provision for spreading the payment over several installments.
c. The card is generally issued by business houses.
d. The interest charged on the credit allowed after the initial no-interest period is
generally much higher than interest on loans.
e. None of the above.
453. Which of the following statements regarding credit card and debit card is/are false?
a. The former is a ‘pay later’ product and latter is a ‘pay now’ product.
b. The former provides a credit for 35-50 days, while the latter does not.
c. In former, sometimes it is essential to open a bank account, whereas it is not
necessary to the latter.
d. In the former, sophisticated telecom network is essential, whereas such network is
not required by the latter.
e. Both (c) and (d) above.
105
Investment Banking and Financial Services
454. Which of the following statements regarding the difference between charge cards and credit
cards is false?
a. The former is issued mainly on the basis of account designated for charge and the
latter is always based on the creditworthiness of the applicant.
b. The former provides a credit period of 30 days after purchase, whereas the latter
extends a revolving credit of 45 days.
c. The former entails an interest rate of 2.5%-3%, whereas the latter does not call for
any interest.
d. Both annual service charges and commission are charged on the former, whereas
only annual service charges are levied on the latter.
e. None of the above.
455. Which of the following is a ‘pay before’ card?
a. Charge cards.
b. Credit cards.
c. Merchant cards.
d. Travel and Entertainment cards.
e. Traveller’s cheques.
456. Which of the following is a ‘pay now’ card?
a. Charge card.
b. Credit card.
c. Merchant cards.
d. Debit card.
e. Travel and Entertainment card.
457. Which of the following is a ‘pay later’ card?
a. Charge card.
b. Traveller’s cheques.
c. Merchant card.
d. Debit cards.
e. None of the above.
458. Which of the following is/are the features of a credit card?
a. This is built around the revolving credit concept.
b. The card does not have any pre-set limit for spending.
c. The holder has to pay 75% of the outstanding value of the purchase at the end of the
month.
d. The balance outstanding at the end of a month carries a rate of interest of not more
than 18% per annum.
e. Both (a) and (d) above.
459. Which of the following is/are the features of a charge card?
a. There are no interest charges collected by the issuer from the holder.
b. The discount collected from the member establishments is the principle source of
income for the issuer.
c. The cardholder has to make a consolidated payment to the issuer for all purchases
effected during a specified period.
d. Both (a) and (b) above.
e. All of (a), (b) and (c) above.
106
Part I
107
Investment Banking and Financial Services
466. Which of the following the RBI recognized credit rating agencies rate domestic NBFCs?
a. Duff & Phelps, CARE, ICRA, CRISIL and MDRA.
b. Duff & Phelps, CARE, ICRA, CRISIL and Department of Supervision at RBI.
c. CARE, ICRA, CRISIL and MDRA.
d. CARE, ICRA, CRISIL and Department of Supervision at RBI.
e. None of the above.
467. A financial services company is involved in the activity which can be simply said to be of
the nature of pooling money from the members every month to give to the neediest person
of the lot at the cost of foregoing his right to claim the money in future. Such a company is
regulated by:
a. The RBI under the Section 24 of the RBI Act
b. The RBI under Non-Banking Finance Companies, 1972 Act
c. SEBI under the SEBI Act
d. Company Law Board under Section 56B of the Companies Act
e. None of the above.
468. What is/are the profitable option(s) available to a depositor who holds a FD at a NBFC at a
lower rate than the rate that is being offered by the NBFC now?
a. Prematurely withdraw the deposit and redeposit it at a higher rate for the remaining
maturity.
b. Allow the fixed deposit to mature and deposit the matured amount at a higher rate.
c. Ask the NBFC under Section 54B (ii) through form 15I to appropriately adjust the
rate.
d. Renew the deposit for a longer maturity through prescribed form.
e. None of the above.
469. The minimum maturity for a deposit at a NBFC is:
a. 1 year and 1 day
b. 2 years
c. 1 year
d. 364 days
e. 365 days.
470. General Provisions and Loss Reserves of a NBFC are Rs.150 crore. What is the
contribution from this head towards the Tier II capital if the risk-weighted assets of a bank
are Rs.240 crore?
a. Rs.1.875 crore.
b. Rs.450 crore.
c. Rs.3 crore.
d. Rs.4.5 crore.
e. Rs.4.875 crore.
471. I deposited Rs.10,000 at Aarti Financial Services that is offering 15% per annum as interest
rate calculated at monthly rests on 31st December, 20x0. If I approach the NBFC for a loan
on 4th April, 20x1, which of the following may be said by Aarti Financial Services?
a. Eligible for a maximum of Rs.7,000 with an interest of 15%.
b. Eligible for a maximum of Rs.7,500 with an interest of 17%.
c. Eligible for a maximum of Rs.7,500 with an interest of 15%.
d. Eligible for a maximum of Rs.10,000 with an interest of 16%.
e. Not eligible for a loan before 30th June, 20x1.
108
Part I: Answers to Questions on Basic Concepts
INVESTMENT BANKING, FINANCIAL SYSTEMS AND FINANCIAL
MARKETS
1. (e) The financial system, through the savings function, policy function and credit function
aims at mobilizing resources from the surplus sections of the society and re-distributing the
same to the deficit sectors of society.
2. (e) The money market comprises of banks, government and financial institutions, as well
as individual investors.
3. (c) In the open market, the securities will be offered to a large number of investors who can
buy and sell them any number of times. A public issue mobilizes funds from a vast number
of investors through the open market system.
4. (e) A financial market is said to be perfect when options (a), (b) and (c) are satisfied.
5. (e) The role played by investment bankers in the capital market is to provide corporate
advisory services, issue of securities. Underwriters provide subscription to unsubscribed
portion of securities. Registrars handle issue securities to the investors on behalf of the
company and the share allotment and transfer activity.
6. (e) Financial intermediaries ensure the smooth transfer of funds from the lenders to the
borrowers, but their presence may increase the risk to the investors, who may invest in
risky securities on their advice and they definitely increase the costs of lending and
borrowing.
7. (e) Issuers ensure that the cost of raising funds should be minimized. Instrument is designed
in such a manner by the issuer to get certain tax incentives for the company and to the
investors.
8. (d) The money market is a wholesale debt market for low-risk, highly liquid, short-term
instruments. Funds are available in this market for periods ranging from a single day up to a
year.
9. (e) The primary market is a place for the issue of fresh securities. Corporates, banks, FIs
and government can issue new securities and raise funds for investment and pending
purposes from the primary market.
CREDIT MARKET
10. (c) Banks play a critical role in the Indian credit market by mobilizing the small savings
and routing them for corporate investment.
11. (c) The credit market operates in an intermediation stage to fulfill the credit requirements of
the different sectors of the economy as the lenders and borrowers are not directly connected
to each other.
12. (b) In the overdraft facility, the bank will allow the firm to overdraw from its current
account to a predetermined level of credit. The credit limit should be set based on the
security offered by the firm. Credit facility will generally be short-term in nature not
exceeding a year, and need not be only based on commodity stocks as security.
13. (d) For a developing economy such selective credit control becomes essential to ensure the
proper use of institutional credit since a major portion of the savings lie with these
intermediaries as loanable funds.
14. (d) Where the project is very large and the funds cannot be provided by a single institution
consortium lending will be resorted to. Two or more intermediaries will join together to
finance large project proposals.
15. (e) The interest charged will be on the daily outstanding in this account and will generally
be paid on a quarterly basis. The CC limit is usually secured on stocks and book debts of
the company.
Investment Banking and Financial Services
16. (e) The sources of funds will determine the cost of funds for the intermediaries. Transaction
costs will depend mostly on the efficiency with which the transfer of funds is enabled. The
lending rate fixed by the intermediaries will also include a certain percentage as a spread
for making the lending activity profitable.
17. (b) The bank will decide its lending rate based on the cost of funds + transaction costs + its
required spread (margin). So, in this case, the lending rate is 11 + 1.5 + 2 = 14.5%.
MONEY MARKET
Introduction to Money Market
18. (d) These are medium to long-term government securities and carry a coupon rate. These
instruments set a benchmark for long-term interest rate. The other instruments are too short
for such a huge project.
19. (e) As these instruments are issued by the RBI on behalf of the government.
20. (e) As the investment done by MMMF will generally be in high quality securities
i.e., government/banks/highly rated corporates, which carry low risk and high rate of return.
21. (d) Investors who park their funds in short-term instruments will, at the time of redemption,
have to reinvest these funds at lower rate of interest. Default risk is non-existent in
government securities.
22. (b) This will reduce the liquidity of banks since there will be transfer of assets in the form
of cash into securities and lead to monetary contraction.
23. (c) The Primary Dealers should have net owned funds of a minimum of Rs.50 crore. Net
owned funds are owned funds, represented by paid-up capital, free reserves, balance in
share premium account and capital reserves, less accumulated loss balance and book value
of intangible assets, if any.
24. (e) As both are issued by corporates.
25. (b) The minimum success ratio for the PDs should be 33.33% for G-secs.
26. (e) SLR objective is to maintain a certain level of liquidity.
27. (d) The short-term fund requirements of the corporates and other borrowers are initially met
by short time lenders and short-term depositors of funds into the financial system.
28. (c) Dated securities carry a coupon rate unlike the T-bills which are issued at a discount and
they are long-term instruments. These instruments set a benchmark for the long-term
interest rates.
29. (a) CP is basically issued by highly rated corporates and it is cheaper than the bank interest
rate and so that cost of funds can be reduced.
30. (a) CP rate will be between the rate of CD and bank PLRs. Rate of interest on CD and CP
will be alike, rate of interest on CP will be lower than the PLRs.
31. (b) The minimum success ratio for the PDs should be 40% for T-Bills.
32. (c) Only the successful bids will be included in final bidding.
33. (c) The RBI may alter the interest rate structure by using open market operations and
through proper pricing of the OMOs, by purchasing G-secs.
34. (c) By increasing the statutory reserves, banks will have to transfer their loanable funds into
cash reserves for meeting the CRR or convert it into SLR securities. Both these actions will
reduce the extent of liquidity in the system.
35. (e) As all the money market instruments are interlinked, any changes in any one will lead
the changes to whole equation. Reduction in one will lead to reduction in all.
36. (c) Arising due to the fluctuations in the rates of the instruments, this type of risk should be
of prime concern in money market investments. This is a result of large volumes of funds
and the speed of the transactions taking place.
110
Part I
Call Money
37. (b) Financial institutions (and mutual funds) can only lend in the Call Market, but cannot
borrow.
38. (e) All the three options given under (a), (b) and (c) speak about the main objectives of the
Call Money Market.
39. (d) Call loans are unsecured and demand varies according to seasonal demand.
40. (d) Term loan is lent for more than 14 days.
41. (b) The funds borrowings for a period of one day up to a fortnight but they do not have a
specified repayment date when the deal is entered. The lender will simply issue a notice to
the borrower 2–3 days before the funds are to be repaid.
42. (c) Intermediaries like DFHI and STCI have been permitted to operate both as borrowers
and lenders in the call money market.
43. (e) The call money market is the most liquid of all short-term money market segments and
the maturity period of call loans vary from 1-14 days.
44. (d) Borrowers of federal funds include securities dealers, corporations and government.
This is a unique market that performs the functions listed in (a) and (b).
Treasury Bills
45. (e) These instruments have distinct features like zero default risk, assured yield, low
transactions cost, negligible capital depreciation, high liquidity and are eligible for
inclusion in SLR.
46. (d) Treasury bills are issued for minimum of 14 days and maximum of 364 days.
⎛ 100 ⎞ 365
47. (c) Yield = ⎜ − 1⎟ x = 16.32%.
⎝ 86 ⎠ 364
48. (b) It serves to replenish cash balances of the central government, and to provide a medium
of investment for temporary surplus funds of the state governments.
49. (d) The state governments and provident funds were not allowed to participate in these
auctions.
50. (e) Treasury bills are issued at a discount and yields on T-bills are considered as a
representative of interest rates in economy.
51. (a) Tenders were invited for competitive bids, bids will be allotted to both competitive and
non-competitive bids. But T-bills are issued by the RBI on behalf of GoI only.
52. (d) In US non-competitive bids are submitted by small investors, and their bidding amount
is limited to $1 million or less.
53. (d) T-bills constitute a major portion of short-term borrowings by the Government of India.
54. (c) T-bills are supposed to be high liquid as they are backed by the Government of India.
55. (d) T-bills have distinct features like zero default risk and high liquidity.
56. (e) T-bills are issued in the form of promissory notes or finance bills, through credit to the
SGL account.
57. (d) The bids are accepted at the weighted average of the successful bids if the notified
amount is not fully subscribed to.
58. (e) The RBI neither discounts these bills nor participates in the auction, and does not notify
the amount in advance.
59. (a) Ad hoc T-bills are issued in favor of the RBI when the government needs cash.
60. (c) These T-bills are issued through auctions conducted by the RBI on every Friday for a
notified amount.
111
Investment Banking and Financial Services
61. (e) T-bills are issued by the RBI to facilitate government borrowing, when the government
needs money, to help in OMOs, as a medium for short-term investment of temporary state
government funds, and the yield of these bills is a benchmark for the rates of other short-
term investments.
62. (a) Strip bills are a package of bills requiring investors to bid for an entire series of bills
with different maturities.
112
Part I
83. (c) CDs are issued in the form of usance promissory notes and due to their negotiable
nature, they are also known as negotiable certificate of deposits.
84. (e) All the features mentioned above are features of CDs.
85. (d) Being time deposits, banks have control over the amounts invested with them and can
lend the same for specified periods. This is basically control over the funds.
86. (d) The minimum maturity period for a certificate of deposit is 15 days.
87. (e) All the features mentioned above are true for CDs.
88. (e) All the characteristics mentioned above are false for CDs. CDs are always issued at
discount to face value, no premature buy-back is allowed, no loans can be granted on them
and no grace period is allowed on repayment.
89. (a) CDs are traded in the secondary market, after the lock-in period of 15/30 days from the
date of issue, unlike fixed deposits, which cannot be traded in the secondary market.
90. (a) The ceiling on amount raised on CDs has not been fixed, as CDs have been developed
to deploy short-term surplus funds.
Bill Financing
91. (b) A demand bill is a bill payable ‘at sight’ or ‘on presentment’ to the drawee.
92. (e) An inland bill must be drawn or made in India and must be payable in India or drawn on
any person resident in India.
93. (e) A negotiable instrument must contain an order (and not a request) to pay and the drawee
and payee may be the same person.
94. (a) Under the Bill Market Scheme, 1952, the RBI made demand loans to eligible schedule
banks against the security of usance promissory notes of their constituents.
95. (e) The Bill Rediscounting Scheme, 1970 was started to bring out some control on the bill
rediscounting system. Points (a), (b) and (c) are the main features of the scheme.
96. (e) The features mentioned under (a), (b) and (c) are some of the measures introduced in the
bill discounting market based on the Vaghul Committee recommendations.
97. (d) The bill market is not organized in India and is mostly dominated by indigenous
bankers with limited resources. Also, cash credit and bank overdraft are cheaper sources of
finance.
98. (e) All the options mentioned above are the characteristics of a well developed bill market.
99. (d) Chore Committee stressed the importance of increasing the share of bank credit granted
in the form of bill finance, particularly drawee bills by making it compulsory for banks to
extend at least 50% of the cash credit limit against raw materials to manufacturing units by
way of drawee bills.
100. (a) Bank rate is the standard rate recognised by the RBI for discounting bills.
101. (b) The scheme of bill rediscounting scheme introduced by IDBI in April, 1965 has the
main condition as mentioned in point (b).
102. (a) The bank rate or the discount rate, is the standard rate at which the bank is prepared to
buy or rediscount bills of exchange.
103. (c) The drawee or payee who is in possession of the bill is called the holder of the bill and
can endorse it.
104. (e) DA are bills on the basis of whether the documents are deliverable just against
acceptance and become a clear bill immediately after for delivery of documents. When a
bill is accepted by the drawee without receiving consideration it becomes an
accommodation bill.
105. (b) In post-shipment finance, all documents of export should be routed through an
authorized foreign exchange dealer within 1 day of shipment of goods. Even a minor detail
unnoticed/ignored while scrutinizing the documents will entail heavy penalty.
106. (c) Banks can rediscount the bills arising out of genuine trade transactions, which were
originally discounted with them by their corporate clients.
113
Investment Banking and Financial Services
107. (c) The borrowing banks under this scheme had the facility to withdraw any number of the
bills lodged as also to replace them by other eligible bills.
108. (b) From January 1975 banks were allowed to rediscount bills with other financial
institutions and commercial banks.
109. (e) Remission of stamp duty and setting up of DHFI were two of the major achievements of
the Vaghul Committee recommendations.
110. (d) The scheme covers bills/promissory notes arising out of the sales and purchases of
indigenous capital equipment and machinery only.
DEBT MARKET
Gilt-Edged Securities Market
111. (e) In India, Government of India Securities (GOI Secs) include debt obligations of the
central government, state government and other financial institutions owned by Central and
State Governments. Gilt-edged security means ‘security of the best quality’.
112. (a) It is absolutely secured financial instrument which guarantees the capital as well as the
income.
113. (e) All are eligible to invest in the Government Securities.
114. (d) Short-dated securities are those which mature within 5 years.
115. (d) These instruments facilitate implementation of the fiscal policy of the Government. The
major investors such as commercial banks, NBFCs, insurance companies hold GOI
securities for meeting their statutory requirements. In spite of low yields, they are bound to
invest in these bonds.
116. (d) There is no prescribed settlement period in case of debt market as is found in the capital
market. Hence, the deals may be entered for settlement on the same day or 1 or 2 days after
the date of trading.
117. (d) In floating rate bonds, the stock will carry a coupon rate which will vary according to
the change in the base rate to which it is related. Zero-coupon bonds are issued at discount
and redeemed at par, thus implying no payment of interest till maturity.
Public Deposits
122. (c) These include all manufacturing companies, trading companies and companies engaged
in the services sector.
123. (e) As per the definition of the Companies (Acceptance of Deposit) Rules 1975, options
(a), (b) and (c) are not termed as public deposits.
124. (b) The minimum tenure for which public deposits can be accepted or renewed is
12 months, or 3 months if such deposit do not exceed 10% of the aggregate of paid-up
capital and reserves.
125. (e) The maximum maturity period for the deposits cannot exceed 60 months.
126. (b) NBFCs cannot pay more than 16% per annum.
114
Part I
127. (b) The maximum amount of brokerage payable for soliciting public deposits between one
and two years is 1.5%.
128. (c) The company shall maintain liquid assets to the extent of 15% of the deposits maturing
during the financial year ending 31st March next. The amount held in liquid assets shall not
at any point of time fall below 10% of the amount of outstanding deposits maturing before
31st March next.
129. (a) The company shall on acceptance or renewal of deposit, furnish to the depositors a
receipt within a period of 8 weeks.
130. (d) Every company shall file a return of deposits with the Registrar of Companies, on or
before 30th June every year. A copy of the return shall be simultaneously filed with RBI.
Every company intending to invite deposits shall issue an advertisement in a leading
English and a vernacular newspaper circulating in the state in which the registered office of
the company is situated.
131. (e) All the options are permitted investment for the company in Public Deposits to contain
liquid assets.
132. (a) Every company shall file a return of deposits with the Registrar of Companies and one
copy with the RBI.
Financial Guarantees
133. (e) The abolition of the managing agency system led to the disappearance of reputed,
creditworthy guarantees, risk of new entrepreneurial and professional appraisal of the
project by the managerial cadre reduced the need for personal guarantees.
134. (b) The Lender seeks a guarantee, a form of security demanded by the creditor to reduce the
default risk.
135. (b) As per the Indian Contract Act, Sec. 126, ‘a guarantee is a contract to perform or to
discharge the liability of the third person in case of his default’.
136. (d) Insurance companies issue generally guarantees extended to non-financial contracts,
and extend guarantees on behalf of hire purchase companies to banks and other institutions.
137. (a) The premium payable for the insurance is at the rate of 2.5 paise per half-year for every
100 rupees.
138. (c) DICGC undertakes: Insurance of deposits of banks, guarantee for credit extended by
banks to priority sector, guarantee for credit extended by banks to small scale industries.
139. (e) These are some of the regulations regarding the SSI Scheme of DICGC.
140. (c) ECGC does not cover the risk of exchange rate fluctuations.
141. (c) Standard policy which is also known as shipments policy, is designed to cover risks in
respect of goods exported on short-term credit not more than 180 days.
142. (d) Banks extended post-shipment finance to exporters through purchase, negotiation or
discount of export bills or advances against such bills qualifying for guarantee.
CAPITAL MARKET
An Overview of Capital Market
143. (e) In the year 1992 abolition of the control on capital issues lead corporate sector access
the market and as due to globalization of Indian capital market, process of foreign portfolio
investment started.
144. (b) Malegam Committee was appointed to suggest measures to increase the levels of
disclosure by Indian issuer, an attempt is being made to bring out disclosure norms in
conformity with global standards.
145. (c) Over The Counter Exchange of India (OTCEI) was the first exchange to introduce
screen based trading in India.
146. (b) Due to the dematerialization, risk of bad deliveries is totally eliminated.
115
Investment Banking and Financial Services
147. (a) NSE was the first stock exchange to set-up clearing corporation named as NATIONAL
SECURITIES CLEARING CORPORATION. It assumes the counterparty risk in all
trading deals made on the exchange.
148. (d) Rolling settlement has been introduced in demat stocks and the settlement week has
been changed in the NSE from Wednesday–Tuesday to Monday–Friday to match the
settlement week of BSE and avoid wide arbitrage opportunities.
149. (c) G S Patel Committee was set-up to work out the modalities for reintroduction of the
carry forward system.
150. (c) The L C Gupta Committee recommended the introduction of options and futures in the
Indian Markets.
151. (d) Mark to Market Margin is the difference between the current closing price and the
transaction price and is collected from trading member.
152. (a) Trading period starts from Monday to Friday.
153. (d) 1992.
154. (a) To work-out the modalities for reintroduction of the system with proper checks and
balances.
MERCHANT BANKING
An Overview of Merchant Banking
169. (d) The fully paid equity shares and security should not be of banking sector shares.
170. (c) In 1973 ICICI started providing Merchant Banking services.
116
Part I
171. (c) Main area - instrument designing, pricing the issue, registration of the offer document,
underwriting support, marketing of the issue, allotment, refund and listing on stock
exchange.
172. (e) There is a single uniform category – Merchant Banker, following the abolition of
multiple types.
173. (e) For merchant banking, permission and registration with SEBI is mandatory and it
should be a corporate body, no other business except merchant banking can be conducted
and it excludes banks and FIs as they are connected to securities market, and thus can carry
on other activities too.
174. (c) The applicant should have a minimum net worth of Rs.5 crore.
175. (c) SEBI will grant the certificate of Registration and it is valid for a period of 3 years.
176. (d) Merchant banking industry in India is characterized by low entry barriers, high
competition, and high bargaining power of customers.
177. (c) Videocon Leasing and Industrial Finance Ltd. introduced the concept of Bought-Out
Deal for the first time for raising capital for Patheja Forgings Ltd.
117
Investment Banking and Financial Services
193. (c) Shares issued for consideration other than cash wherein the transaction involved
revaluation of assets or capitalization of intangible assets, during the preceding
3 accounting years, are not eligible.
194. (c) Promoters can invite their friends and relatives to subscribe the promoters’ quota.
195. (c) In case of issues above Rs.10 crore there should be at least 30 mandatory collection
centers.
196. (b) An issue should be kept open for a minimum period of 3 days and maximum period of
10 days.
197. (d) The applicant is required to quote his Permanent Account Number (PAN) in the
application form if the size of the application exceeds Rs.50,000.
198. (d) The minimum amount of application money should not be less than 25% of the issue
price.
199. (d) The minimum subscription required for an issue is 90% or the entire collection is to be
refunded.
200. (b) Appointment of SEBI registered Debenture trustee is mandatory if the maturity period
of the instrument exceeds 18 months.
201. (e) No issue of FCDs having conversion period exceeding 36 months unless conversion is
made optional with put and call options is allowed and in case the issuer company fails to
get the minimum subscription, including devolvements on the underwriters, the entire issue
amount should be refunded to the investors.
202. (b) For an issue price between Rs.100 to Rs.400 the market lot is 50 shares.
203. (d) An overseas corporate body is a foreign firm where at least 60% of the ownership stake
is held directly or indirectly by Non-Resident Indians or an overseas trust in which at least
60% of the beneficial interest is irrevocably held by such persons.
204. (d) All the options given are applicable.
205. (d) If the reservation is made for a particular class of investors, it is called reservation on
competitive basis and in case of undersubscription of the portion reserved on firm basis, the
amount has to be brought in by the promoters with 3-year lock-in period.
206. (b) Issue announcement advertisement must be published at least 10 days before opening of
the issue. This advertisement contains an abridged version of the prospectus.
207. (d) No advertisement stating that the issue is fully subscribed or oversubscribed will be
issued during the period when the issue is open for subscription, nor about the date of
closure, except on the date of closure.
208. (e) The reservations for employees of the issuer company cannot exceed 10% of the total
size of the issue.
209. (d) The promoter company must have a 5 year track record of profitability and the
promoters’ contribution must be 50% of the issue.
210. (e) The nature of industry specifies the need of capital and the capital structure is decided
according to the nature of business.
211. (e) Capital structure is to be designed so as to integrate well with the financial goals at the
corporate level and all the factors mentioned in (a), (b) and (c) should be considered.
212. (b) Excessive leverage can limit the firm’s ability to respond to such crisis.
213. (a) The holding period is less than 12 months, it will be treated as short-term capital gains.
214. (b) As per SEBI clarifications, the company should have made profits after providing for
interest, depreciation and tax as per the audited accounts in 3 of the preceding 5 years with
profits in the last 2 years prior to the issue.
215. (e) Underpricing can be related to timing of the issue and prevailing market conditions
particularly in the secondary market. As a result of underpricing the promoter or the
company loses the opportunity to raise more funds.
216. (b) These bonds are issued at discount to their face value and are redeemed at par on expiry
of their tenure. There is no payment of interests on these instruments.
118
Part I
217. (e) They are fully redeemable non-convertible short-term debentures, secured by specific
movable and immovable assets of the company. It is redeemed at regular intervals and then
reauctioned. Interest rate will be determined by the market.
218. (c) Ashok Leyland is the pioneer in launching this investment in India.
219. (a) Dividend discount model is not used by Malegam Committee to justify the pricing of a
share.
220. (d) LYONS are convertible into equity of the issuer at a price set at the time of issuance. If
the investors choose to convert the notes into equity they forego all interest.
221. (b) Cumulative preference shares can be issued in India.
119
Investment Banking and Financial Services
236. (b) SEBI has issued a clarification according to which the lock-in period will not be
applicable to preferential issues except in those cases where preferential issues are made to
the promoters and even in such cases lock-in period is for 3 years.
237. (d) There is no lock-in period.
238. (e) A buy-out is a process whereby an investor or a group of investors buys-out significant
portion of the equity of an unlisted company with a view to make it public within an agreed
time frame. It is nothing but wholesome investment.
239. (e) For the issuer with a good project, it means obtaining funds upfront at a minimal cost
without the fear of undersubscription in a depressed market.
240. (e) An amount equivalent to at least 10% of the price fixed would become payable for the
warrants on the date of their allotment.
INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
241. (d) In this instrument only minimum disclosure is required to the SEC and the issuer need
not comply with US GAAP. This type of instrument is traded in the US OTC market.
242. (d) In a depository receipt issue the roles played by the custodian is to hold the shares
underlying the DRs on behalf of the depository and to collect rupee dividends on the
underlying shares.
243. (b) These are bonds issued by non-Japanese borrowers in the domestic Japanese markets.
244. (d) Belgian dentist is a term used to describe a high net worth individual investor in
bonds/DRs to ensure safety for the surplus funds.
245. (a) Gensaki rate is short-term benchmark rate used in Japanese markets.
246. (b) Eurodollars are bank deposit liabilities denominated in US dollars but are not subject to
US banking regulations.
247. (c) Recently reserve requirements have been eliminated on all time deposits in the United
States and have been reduced from 12 to 10 percent on transaction deposits.
248. (a) The Eurodollar Certificate of Deposit is an important Eurodollar instrument and it is a
negotiable receipt for a dollar deposit at a bank located outside the United States or in a US
IBF (International Banking Facility).
249. (c) The coupon or interest rate is set below the LIBOR for sovereign borrowers and below
LIBOR for US banks.
250. (e) Owing to the risk factors, the cost of evaluating foreign investments is greater than the
cost of evaluating the domestic investments.
251. (b) Since the managing banks provide a larger share than the other participating banks, their
share is also larger.
252. (d) Only agency cost is an upfront cost. The reimbursement of out of pocket costs is an
upfront charge but not out of pocket costs. The remaining two costs are periodic costs.
253. (a) Multicurrency loans are used to take advantage of the growing international economy
and a part of them are a natural expansion to the use of Eurodollar loans.
254. (b) Legality is not one of the provisions. Illegality is considered as one of the provisions. It
is intended to address the possibility that the bank’s lending office in foreign country may
restrict the branch from accepting the deposits required to the loan or from making the loan.
255. (c) Revolving credit facility gives the borrower more flexibility about the outstanding
principal during the loan’s life.
256. (a) The speed and certainty of funds is one of the advantages of syndicated loans.
257. (e) Earning profits is not the objective of External Commercial Borrowings.
258. (b) The “all-in-cost ceilings’’ for infrastructure projects is 400 basis points over six months
LIBOR.
259. (b) The main objective of the Foreign Direct Investment is to stimulate economic growth in
many of the world’s poorest countries because of the expected continued decline in the role
of development assistance and the resulting search for alternative sources of foreign capital.
120
Part I
260. (b) The equity capital category of FDI includes both “mergers and acquisitions’’ and
“greenfield’’ investments, which are the latest facilities available.
261. (b) A vertical spillover occurs when the affiliate transfers free of charge technology to firms
supplying inputs or servicing “downstream’’ operations like distribution and retailing.
262. (b) FDI is freely allowed in all sectors including the services sector, except where the
existing and the notified sectorial policy does not permit FDI beyond a ceiling.
263. (c) Early delivery of proposals submitted to it through purposeful negotiation and
discussion with potential investors.
264. (b) In fixed deposit account, the interest is payable every quarter and the deposit amount is
payable on the maturity date.
265. (a) Low interest rate is not a characteristic of NRNR.
CREDIT RATING
266. (e) All the characteristics listed are the benefits of credit rating.
267. (b) Except (b) all options are taken into consideration while doing the Technical Evaluation
in Credit Rating.
268. (d) The equity assessment process commences at the request of an investor and the consent
of the company being assessed. The end result is not in the form of a symbol but an
assessment report specific to the investor’s need.
269. (e) The set of factors, deemed relevant for rating purposes is clearly defined. The weight
assigned to these factors are specified. A quantitative assessment is made of the rated entity
on each of the factors. A numerical credit score or index is arrived at on the basis of the
weights and quantitative assessments.
270. (d) The overseas investors are exposed to the political risks of confiscation and
expropriation.
271. (c) Probability of Non-confiscation is:
(1 – p) t CFt = (1 – 0.05)5 x 12 lakh = (0.95)5 x 12 lakh = 9.29 lakh.
272. (e) The borrower’s years of residence in present place, future prospects in his current jobs
and his financial assets will be examined.
273. (e) The key ratios – Pre-tax interest coverage, pre-tax interest and full rental coverage, cash
flow/long-term debt (%), cash flow/total debt (%), pre-tax return on average long-term
capital employed (%).
CF(1 − P) 12(1 − 0.05)
274. (b) Probability of Non-Confiscation is V = = = 76 lakh.
(re + P) (0.05 + 0.10)
275. (a) The issuer will not have to disclose the rating to the public.
121
Investment Banking and Financial Services
122
Part I
313. (c) The alternatives (a) and (b) are wrong because the maximum maturity period of the
intercorporate deposit should not exceed 12 months and the total amount that can be raised
cannot exceed two times the net owned funds. Only (c) is correct.
3, 000 3, 000
314. (e) The issue price is (Face value)/FVIF(k, t)= = = 2068.69 i.e., (app) 2069.
FVIF 1.15
(15%,1)
315. (c) The true yield is the compound yield. It is always lesser than the simple yield. So,
alternative (d) is wrong. Alternative (b) is wrong because a firm cannot use hundred percent
of finance raised through public deposits for lease investments. Alternative (a) is wrong
because a true yield is influenced by the maturity value of the deposit, initial amount of the
deposit and number of months to maturity.
316. (b) The maximum amount that can be lent by a bank to a leasing company cannot exceed
four times the net owned funds of the company.
317. (e) Deemed deposits do not include funds raised through unsecured non-convertible
debentures.
318. (a) If the leasing companies raise finance through public deposits, there is a ceiling on the
interest rate or the discount rate given by them.
319. (c) The maturity mismatch is more pronounced when lease and hire purchase investments
are funded via intercorporate deposits because the deposits have a shorter maturity than the
underlying assets being financed, thereby leading to the refinancing before the maturity of
the assets.
320. (a) The bank lending to a leasing company can be only in the form of cash credit facility
and should not exceed four times the Net Owned Funds (NOFs).
123
Investment Banking and Financial Services
322. (b) The yield that can be calculated from the given data would be a simple yield. If
compounded monthly, you get compound annual yield.
The relationship between the effective annual rate of interest (r) and the nominal rate of
interest (i) per annum compounded “m’’ times a year would be
(1 + r) = (1 + i/m)m
i = 15%, m = 12
(1 + r) = (1 + 0.15/12)12
r = 16.08%
323. (c) Calculate r in the same manner as above. After one year, she would be getting 2000
(1 + 0.1608) = 2321.6. i.e., (app) Rs.2,322.
324. (c) The SEBI guidelines permit a finance company to issue non-convertible debentures at a
rate of interest freely determined by the issuer for any desired maturity period. However,
the debentures must be rated by an approved rating agency if the initial term to maturity
exceeds 18 months.
325. (e) Only alternatives (a) and (b) are advantages of securitization.
326. (c) According to prudential norms for NBFCs, all loans and advances, which have
remained as NPAs for a period not exceeding two years are classified as sub-standard
assets.
327. (c) Issue price = 2000/FVIF (15%,1) = 2000/0.8696 = Rs.1,739.
328. (c) According to credit rating symbols given by CRISIL, adequate safety of timely
payment of interest and principal is indicated by the symbol ‘A’.
124
Part I
340. (a) The responsibility of taking delivery of the equipment solely lies on the lessee.
341. (d) A finance lease agreement invariably requires the lessee to insure the equipment. The
description clause provides the description of the lessor, the lessee, the equipment and the
locations where the equipment is to be installed. The lessor usually stipulates that the
equipment shall not be removed from the described location without its prior permission.
342. (e) They do not protect the rights of lessee.
125
Investment Banking and Financial Services
366. (d) The method for allocating the unexpired finance charge is known as the Effective Rate
of Interest Method or the Actuarial Method.
367. (c) The lessee treats the lease rental payable over the lease term as a charge to the profit
and loss account. IAS 17 states that the lease rentals must be allocated to each accounting
period in a manner that is representative of the time pattern of the user’s benefit.
368. (e) Allocating the unexpired finance charge is known as Effective Rate of Interest Method
or the Acturial Method. There are two other methods for allocating the unexpired finance
charge and they are the sum of years – Digit Method and Straight Line Method.
369. (b) Sum of Digits Method also known as Rule of 78.
126
Part I
383. (d) The cut-off rate or the hurdle rate is determined as the pre-tax cost of funds plus a profit
margin, the latter being a subjectively determined figure.
384. (b) An explicit approach is to define the subjective probability distribution for the residual
values and use the expected value of the probability distribution as the input for computing
the gross yield.
HIRE PURCHASE
389. (d) In a hire purchase transaction, the ownership is transferred to the hirer only when he
exercises the option to purchase or on payment of last installment.
390. (e) All the alternatives are correct.
391. (b) In an installment sale, the ownership of the asset is transferred to the buyer on the
payment of first installment.
392. (e) A buyer is committed to pay full price in a conditional sale. The interest component of
hire purchase installment is calculated on the basis of flat rate of interest. In hire purchase,
ownership is transferred on the payment of last installment. A lease contract with a (call)
purchase option is considered as a hire purchase contract.
393. (e) The approximation formula is used to calculate the effective rate of interest per annum
as an alternative to the trial and error method. But the formula used is different when the
payments are in arrears and in advance.
n
394. (a) x 2F ⇒ n = 48(12 x 4)
n −1
48
∴ iapp = x 2 x 0.14 = 28.59 ≈ 28.6%
47
395. (d) Because in a deposit linked plan, the rate of interest reflects the effective rate of interest
implicit in the plan.
t(t + 1)
396. (d) Interest rebate to the borrower can be x D obtained by applying ‘Rule of 78’
n(n + 1)
method.
t(t + 1) 12 x13
397. (a) xD= x 300 = 35.14
n(n + 1 36 x37
(t − α) (t − α + 1) (12 − 2)(12 − 2 + 1)
398. (b) xD= x 318 = 26.26.
n(n + 1) 36 x 37
399. (d) Alternative (c) is wrong because the rebate calculated using the ‘Rule of 78’ is less than
the rebate calculated using the effective rate of interest method. Modified ‘Rule of 78’
includes the deferments also.
400. (b) If there is a third party, then a contractual relationship exists between the hirer and the
dealer. Thus, the hire purchase contract is hampered.
401. (b) It is one of the rights provided to the hirer by the hire purchase agreement.
127
Investment Banking and Financial Services
402. (e) Apart from the provisions of HP Act, 1972, legal aspects of the HP transaction have to
be ascertained from the provisions of the Indian Contract Act, 1872, Sale of Goods Act
(1930) and the judgments pronounced by the courts on the issues related to such contracts.
403. (e) Depreciation is charged on the cash purchase price of the asset and the unearned
finance components of the installments or the unmatured finance income is shown as a
current liability in the books of the finance company.
CONSUMER CREDIT
404. (b) Repayment period = 24 months.
Total charge for credit = (780 x 24) – 14000 = 4720
Annual charge = 4720/2 = 2360
2,360
Flat rate of interest = x100 = 16.85%
14, 00
405. (d) The Act requires every intermediary, which provides consumer credit or acts as a credit
reference agency, debt collector or credit broker to obtain a license from the Office of Fair
Trading (OFT) to carry on business.
406. (d) A consumer credit transaction can be structured in the form of hire purchase,
conditional sale or credit sale transaction.
407. (c) The eligibility criteria for individual borrowers include a minimum level of annual
emoluments, minimum no. of years in the present employment and minimum take-home
salary. For partnership firms and companies, the criteria include a profitable track-record,
minimum levels of sales and net worth.
408. (d) The term ‘consumer credit’ encompasses all types of asset based financing plans
offered primarily for acquiring consumer durables.
409. (e) The alternatives (a), (b) and (c) are true. The alternative (d) is not exactly true because
in most cases the consumer finance schemes may be of two types: Down-payment type or
of the deposit-linked type.
410. (c) The effective rate of interest implied by the deposit schemes will be that rate of interest,
which equals the present value of the cash flow stream to zero.
128
Part I
420. (c) Under full factoring, the factor provides the entire spectrum of services – collection,
credit protection, sales-ledger administration and short-term finance.
4
421. (b) = [(1 + 0.0475 – 1] x 100
∴annualized interest rate = 20.397%
(or) approximately 20.40%.
SECURITIZATION
422. (e) All the options are true.
423. (b) Transfer of assets by the originator to a person specially created SPV. SPV is a separate
entity.
424. (d) A whole loan may be with or without recourse to the seller.
425. (a) A mortgage-backed bond is a collateralized term-debt offering.
426. (e) The average life of mortgage pass-throughs and mortgage-backed bonds depends on the
prepayment experience of underlying mortgages, while in the case of collaterized mortgage
obligations, the prepayment is more predictable for fast pay bonds.
427. (e) The revolving credit asset-backed securities are usually backed by credit card
receivables for specified period. Those ABS do not amortize principal. These ABS offer
investors an undivided interest in a trust formed by the issuer. All the loans on automobiles
of credit card are pooled to create the trust.
428. (d) By Securitization, the capital adequacy ratio can be improved. A NBFC may increase
its capital adequacy ratio by securitizing some of its homogeneous assets, thus decreasing
the risk weightage of the assets while fulfilling the regulatory guidelines.
429. (e) STRIP security is created by taking the cash flows from the underlying collateral and
splitting them into two or more classes that have the same maturity as the underlying
collateral.
430. (a) A whole loan sale may be with recourse or without recourse to the seller.
431. (d) Any asset securitization deal will have to pay hefty stamp duties thereby increasing the
overall cost of the deal process and foreclosure norms that restrict the transfer of property
without the intervention of court of law.
432. (e) The mortgage pass-through securities were also thought to be made more attractive to
capital market investors by subjecting these securities to credit rating.
129
Investment Banking and Financial Services
442. (e) A feature of GPM is that mortgage balance increases for a short period of time because
smaller payments in the initial years do not even cover the interest.
⎢ 350000 x 0.145 ⎜ 1 + ⎟ ⎥
1 ⎢ ⎝ 12 ⎠ ⎥
450. (d) = Rs.4,480.
12 ⎢ ⎛ 0.145 ⎞
240
⎥
⎢ ⎜1 + ⎟ −1 ⎥
⎣ ⎝ 12 ⎠ ⎦
451. (e) All the options mentioned are essential while applying for housing finance for self-
construction from a HFC.
PLASTIC MONEY
452. (c) The card is generally issued by banks as they are called principal issuers.
453. (c) For debit card you have to open an account and no need to open a bank account in
credit card.
454. (c) There is no charge or interest on charge cards and for credit card interest is between
2.5%-3%.
455. (e) All other cards are ‘buy now pay later’.
456. (d) It debits the bank account directly.
457. (c) Merchant Card, which is a kind of credit card.
458. (a) Credit cards offer the benefit of revolving credit. This facility permits the cardholder to
choose the manner in which he wants to pay for the amount due at the end of a billing
cycle.
459. (e) No interest charge, commission or annual payment and whatsoever be the amount will
have to pay at the end of month otherwise penalty will be imposed.
460. (d) If cardholder wants to purchase anything and he uses his card before that he should
have so much of balance otherwise transaction will be declined, as his account will be
debited directly.
461. (c) As the banks are principal issuer of credit cards and have a pact with clearing agency
like Master Card International.
130
Part I
131
Frequently Used Formulae
MONEY MARKET
Introduction to Money Market
1. Annual Turnover of Primary Dealer/Satellite Dealer
Total Purchases and Sales during the year*
=
Average month-end stocks during the year
* Purchases include primary market purchases and sales include redemption of maturities.
Treasury Bills
⎛ Face Value ⎞ 365
1. Yield on T-bill = ⎜ − 1⎟ x
⎝ Price ⎠ Days to Maturity
Commercial Paper (CP)
F
1. P=
(I x N)
1+
100 x 365
Where,
P = Issue Price
I = Effective interest rate p.a.
F = Face/Maturity in days
N = Usance period in days.
Par Value − Purchase Price 360
2. Rate of Return = x
Par Value Days to Maturity
133
4. Market Value of each Right after the Rights Issue
Pe − S
R=
N
5. Value of shareholding after subscription = NP0 + S.
LEASE EVALUATION: THE LESSOR’S ANGLE
1. Cost of funds to lessor:
⎛ E ⎞ ⎛D ⎞
K′ = Ke x ⎜ ⎟ K d (1 − T) x ⎜ +E⎟
⎝ D+E ⎠ ⎝ D ⎠
Where,
K′ = Marginal cost of funds
Ke = Marginal cost of equity
Kd = Marginal cost of debt
D:E = Debt-equity ratio of the lessor
T = Tax rate.
2. Present value of rental stream:
⎛ (1+ j) ⎞
PV = L x ⎜ ⎟ + PVIFA (j,n)
⎝ (1+ i) ⎠
Where,
PV = Present value of rental stream where rentals increase/decrease at constant rate p.a.
L = Lease rental per period
n = Duration of lease in years
j = [(i – g)/(1 + g)]
i = Pre-tax yield p.a.
g = Constant rate of increase/decrease p.a.
3. IRR based pricing:
i = iF + ie + id
Where,
i = Adjusted rate of return
iF = Risk-free rate of return
ie = Premium for the risk characterizing the existing lease investments
id = Premium for the differential risk characterizing the lease investment under review.
CONSUMER CREDIT
1. Index of Creditworthiness:
Z = aX1 + bX2
Where,
Z = Index of creidtworthiness
X1 = Take-home monthly income (in Rs.)
X2 = No. of years spent in the current job.
134
HOUSING FINANCE IN INDIA
1. Disbursement Amount:
CC PC LC
RD = AV x AV x + AVx − BC − CM
100 100 100
Where,
RD = Recommendation for Disbursement in Rs.
AV = Aggregate Value = LC + CC
PC = Progress of Construction in % points
LC = Land Component
CC = Cost of Construction + Overheads + Profits
BC = Borrower’s Contribution
CM = Cumulative Disbursement Made.
2. Equated Monthly Installements:
1 ⎛ Lr(1+ r)n ⎞
⎜ ⎟
12 ⎝ (1+ r) n − 1 ⎠
Where,
L = Loan
r = Rate of interest in decimals
n = Period.
135
Part II: Problems
MONEY MARKET
Introduction to Money Market
1. a. TRQ Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. are primary dealers operating in the Indian money markets.
The commitment of TRQ Ltd. and XYZ Ltd. for the aggregate bidding for G-Secs
is Rs.1,000 crore and Rs.1,200 crore respectively. What would be the required
amount of successful bids for each of these PDs for the year?
b. If the tendered and accepted bids for an auction of G-Secs by each of these PDs are
given below, then would they be meeting the requirements for their commitments
and successful bids?
(Rs. crore)
TRQ Ltd. XYZ Ltd.
Tendered bids 800 1,400
Accepted bids 700 1,000
2. The required amount of successful bids for STL Ltd. in a T-bills auction was assessed
at Rs.315 crore. What should be the minimum amount of tendered and accepted bids
that this PD should maintain if it has to adhere to the requirements?
3. The notified bid amounts for G-Secs and T-Bills were Rs.3,700 crore and Rs.2,200 crore
respectively. Sterling Gilts Ltd. which is participating in this auction has an underwriting
commitment with the RBI to an extent of 10% of the shortfall in case of G-Secs and 5% of
the shortfall in case of T-bills. If the bids received and bids accepted are as given below,
then assess devolvements on all PDs, RBI and on Sterling Gilts Ltd.
(Rs. crore)
Bids received:
G-Secs 4,000
T-Bills 2,700
Bids accepted at cut-off price
G-Secs 3,100
T-Bills 1,800
4. The commitment for aggregate bidding for G-Secs and Auction T-Bills of 4 PDs are as
follows:
(Rs. crore.)
P Ltd. Q Ltd. R Ltd. S Ltd.
G-Secs: 800 900 600 400
Auction T-Bills 900 1,200 1,500 1,700
The bids tendered and accepted are as given below:
(Rs. cr.)
P Ltd. Q Ltd. R Ltd. S Ltd.
G-Secs:
Tendered 850 1,000 500 600
Accepted 300 250 150 300
Auction T-Bills:
Tendered 1,000 700 1,700 1,900
Accepted 300 250 620 750
Part II
137
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Treasury Bills
7. The RBI offers 91-day T-Bills to raise Rs.5,000 crore. The following bids have been
received.
Bidder Bid rate Amount
(Rs. crore)
A 98.95 1800
B 98.93 700
C 98.92 1,000
D 98.90 1,200
E 98.90 600
F 98.87 200
G 98.85 350
H 98.85 150
Who are the winning bidders and how much of the security will be allocated to each
winning bidder?
Calculate the yield for each of the winning bidders.
If this auction is a single price auction, what is the price to be paid by the winning
bidders?
8. If the face value of a 364-day T-Bill is Rs.100 and if the purchase price is Rs.91.35 for a
treasury bill, what is the yield on such a bill?
9. Sun Limited has offered the following bond for subscription.
Face Value – Rs.10,000
Tenure – 6 years
Each bond would be paid Rs.2,750 for the first 5 years from the date of allotment. The
amount of Rs.2,750 would consist of both interest and principal portion. The amount
would be first adjusted towards the interest on principal outstanding at the time and
the balance towards principal. The last payment would be made at the end of year 6 towards
the interest and the balance principal outstanding.
The interest would be computed at a mark up of 3% over the yield on 364-day treasury bill.
According to CMIE, the yield on 364-day T-bills is expected to be as follows:
Probability
0.3 0.5 0.2
Year
1 11.0 11.5 12.5
2 10.0 10.5 11.5
3 10.5 9.5 10
4 9 9 10.5
5 8.5 9.5 11
6 8.0 8 9.5
If the yield is in fraction of a percentage, it should be rounded off to the nearest half
percentage (i.e. in multiplies of 50 basis points only). The minimum interest rate is
11.5% and the maximum interest is 14.5% during the entire tenure of the bond.
You are required to compute the cost of the bond to Sun Ltd. if its average tax rate is
17.5%.
138
Part II
10. On November 2, the RBI issued a tender notification for 182-day T-Bills for Rs.600
crore. There were 4 competitive bidders – A, B, C and D – who responded to the
notification of T-Bills. Based on the data given below you are required to determine the
successful bidders and the amount of T-Bills allotted to them. Also calculate the
weighted average yield for the issue as well as the average yield for each successful
bidder.
Sl. Name of Price Amount Cumulative
No. bidder (Rs.) (Rs. in cr.) amount
(Rs. in cr.)
1 B 98.93 50 50
2 A 98.91 100 150
3 B 98.90 120 270
4 A 98.89 180 450
5 C 98.85 300 750
6 A 98.85 200 950
7 A 98.70 100 1,050
8 B 98.65 150 1,200
9 C 98.50 100 1,300
10 D 98.45 200 1,500
11 C 98.43 250 1,750
12 D 98.41 300 2,050
11. What should you pay for a $1 million, 5-year zero coupon bond, now assuming the
appropriate interest rate to be 8%?
12. If the face value of a 182-day T-bill is Rs.100 and if the purchase price is Rs.92.05 for
treasury bill, then what is the yield on such a bill?
13. A 2-year zero coupon bond with a face value of $10,000 is selling for $9022.87. What
interest rate would you earn if you held it to maturity?
14. What is the yield to maturity of a 8%, 5-year bond with face value of $1000, with semi-annual
coupons if its market price is $850.75?
Commercial Paper (CP)
15. Mr. Anil purchased a commercial paper of Zenith Inc. issued for 6 months in the market for
$9,61,000. The company issued the CP with a face value of $10,00,000. Determine the rate
of return which Mr. Anil earns.
16. Star Ltd. is planning a CP issue of Rs.25 lakh. Given the following details, you are required
to calculate the issue price of commercial paper.
Face Value = Rs.25 lakh
Maturity period = 3 months
Effective interest p.a. = 10.5%.
17. Given the following details you are required to calculate the effective interest p.a. as well as
the total cost of funds to Rajdeep Textiles Ltd. which is planning a CP issue.
Issue price of C.P. = Rs.98,250
Face value = Rs.1,00,000
Maturity period = 3 months
Issue Expenses:
Brokerage 0.025% of issue amount (for 3 months)
Rating charges 0.5% p.a.
Stamp duty 0.125% (for 3 months).
139
Investment Banking and Financial Services
18. The maturity value of a 45-day CP is Rs.5 crore. The effective interest per annum is 14%.
a. At what price should the CP be issued?
b. What would be the stamp duty chargeable on this issue?
c. What can be the maximum permissible brokerage on this issue?
d. If the issuer pays the maximum permissible brokerage and he pays rating charges @ 0.5%
per annum, what is the effective cost of the CP to the issuer?
Certificate of Deposits (CDs)
19. Suppose a bank offers a 6-month CD at an Annual Percentage Rate (APR) of 11.5%
compounded monthly and a 1-year CD with an APR of 11.3% compounded weekly.
You are required to find out which of them offers a higher rate of interest.
20. Given the following details, you are required to compute the cost of funds to Secunderabad
Bank Ltd.
Face value of CD – Rs.15 lakh
Issue price – Rs.14,45,000
Tenure – 5 months
Stamp duty – 0.25% of face value.
Bill Financing
21. Naveen Financiers Ltd. discounts the bills of its clients at the following rates.
Clean bill – 25% p.a.
Usance bill – 23% p.a.
Calculate the effective rates of interest implied by a clean bill with a usance period of 60
days.
22. Rajeev Finance Ltd. discounts the L/C backed bill of its clients at the rate of 23% p.a.
Calculate the effective rate of interest implied by an L/C backed bill with a usance period of
90 days.
MERCHANT BANKING
Management of Public Issues, Initial Public Offerings and Pricing of Various
Instruments
23. Surety Venture Fund is a leading American Venture Capital Fund. The fund has
specialized in providing finance mezzanine to companies planning public offering of
their equity. The time horizon of all the investments made by this fund is 1 year. The
fund has recently opened a branch office in Mumbai. The fund has received an
investment proposal from Redmond Ltd. The company is an existing profit making,
dividend paying company. The company proposes to increase its capacity by 30% by
adding certain balancing equipment. The company has requested the fund to finance
the program with an equity of Rs.3.5 crore. The current EPS of the company is Rs.7. The
expected growth in EPS for the next year is as follows:
Growth in EPS Probability
(in percent)
0 0.15
10 0.25
20 0.20
30 0.30
40 0.10
140
Part II
Based on the study of Indian capital markets, the research wing of the fund has forecasted
the P/E ratio for the industry in which Redmond operates as follows:
P/E ratio Probability
6 0.15
8 0.25
10 0.40
12 0.20
The fund is expected to price its divestment at the industry P/E ratio. The target return on
any investment made by the fund is 35%. The fund invests only in those proposals where
the probability of getting the target return is at least 0.74. What should be the price at which
the venture fund would make the investment in Redmond Ltd.? Clearly state your
assumptions.
24. Digital Software has been set up by a team of young technocrats. The team has developed a
new software package. The estimated project cost is Rs.2 crore. The team is able to invest
only a sum of Rs.80 lakh as equity at a face value of Rs.10 each. The balance is proposed to
be financed through venture capital. The company offers two alternative investment
packages to the VC firm.
a. Straight equity investment
b. Fully convertible debentures with a coupon of 18%. At the end of 4 years the
FCD would be converted into equity. The conversion would take place at a P/E
ratio of 11 on the weighted average EPS of the preceding 3 years with weights 1,
2 and 3 for the EPS of 2nd, 3rd and 4th year respectively.
The company plans to tap the capital market with an IPO at the beginning of the 6th
year. The IPO is expected to be priced at a P/E multiple of 12.5 on the EPS of the 5th
year. The VC firm intends to divest its holding at the time of the IPO.
The company proposed to maintain a dividend pay-out of 10% for all the 5 years.
The expected EBIT for the 5 years is
Probability 0.2 0.3 0.5
(Rs. in crore.)
Year 1 1.2 1.35 1.02
Year 2 1.4 1.70 1.30
Year 3 1.7 1.75 1.45
Year 4 1.8 1.85 1.50
Year 5 2.5 2.60 2.80
Ignore taxes.
You are required to choose the alternative investment to be made by the VC firm if its
required rate of return is 15%.
25. Lavanya Textiles Ltd. proposes to go for a backward integration project at a cost of 36 crore
which is entirely financed by equity capital.
Total capital structuring is as follows:
(Rs. crore)
Total size of the issue 36
Less: Subscription by promoters 10.5
Offer through prospectus 25.5
Reservation for FIIs (competitive basis) 3
Reservation for mutual funds 4.5
(firm basis)
Reservation for Banks 1.5
141
Investment Banking and Financial Services
142
Part II
27. Care Bank Ltd. recently tapped the primary market with an IPO of Rs.160 crore. The
IPO was priced at par because of the moribund state of the capital markets. The low
pricing created a lot of interest in the issue and the issue was oversubscribed.
The following reservations were made in the issue.
Category Type of reservation No. of shares No. of shares applied
reserved
Mutual Firm 1,00,00,000 90,00,000
funds
NRIs Competitive 50,00,000 30,00,000
FIIs Firm 2,00,00,000 2,00,00,000
Banks Firm 1,00,00,000 60,00,000
Employees Competitive 1,00,000 Nil
The subscription pattern in the issue was as follows:
Category No. of
applications
200 4,40,000
500 2,20,000
800 1,00,000
1000 1,00,000
2000 60,000
5000 10,000
10,000 2000
You are required to
Compute the detailed basis of allotment showing the number of applicants in each category.
28. Premier Automobile Ltd. enters the capital market with a public issue of 260 lakh of shares
of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.30 per share. The company has the following reservations
in the issue.
• 24 lakh shares reserved for mutual funds on competitive basis.
• 18 lakh shares reserved for FIIs on competitive basis.
After the closure of the issue, the Registrar to the issue collected the following subscription
figures.
Reserved Portion
Category No. of applications Total no. of shares
Mutual funds 8 16,00,000
FIIs 14 4,00,000
Public portion (applications for below 1000 shares)
Size of the application No. of applications
(Shares)
200 40,000
400 20,000
600 15,000
800 10,000
1000 8,000
143
Investment Banking and Financial Services
On the basis of the above statement, draw a detailed basis of allotment statement giving the
following information.
a. The number of shares available for allotment to each category;
b. The number of successful applicants in each category; and
c. The number of shares allotted per applicant for each category.
29. Excel Ltd. has made a public issue of 220 lakh equity shares at par. The subscriptions
received for 1000 and less shares are as given below. Calculate the number of proportionate
shares available to each category of 1000 shares or less and number of successful applicants
and the number of shares allotted per applicant. The issue was oversubscribed 6 times.
Category Applications received
200 30,000
300 25,100
400 20,000
500 15,000
600 11,000
700 9,200
800 3,700
900 2,600
1000 2,000
1,18,600
30. Consider the following information in respect of a public issue of equity shares, through
prospectus, of Rs.10 each for cash at par to Indian public.
Particulars No. of shares Face Value Issue Price
(Rs.) (Rs.)
Net offer to the resident Indian public 10,70,000 10 10
Add: Unsubscribed portion reserved for mutual 1,09,000 10 10
funds on competitive basis
Net shares available to Indian public 11,79,000 10 10
Total number of shares applied for against the 2,50,81,600 10 10
total public offer
The following details are also available to you in respect of applications for 1000 shares
and below.
Sl. No. of shares No. of applications % of total
No. applied for received
1 500 1397 12.59
2 600 418 3.77
3 700 220 1.98
4 800 395 3.56
5 900 682 6.15
6 1000 7980 71.94
11,072 100.00
Based on the information provided above you are required to draw up the following
schedule for the basis of allotment.
144
Part II
31. PI Ltd. has made a public issue by prospectus of equity shares of Rs.10 each for cash at a
premium of Rs.40 per share. The following information was collected by KC Ltd., the
Registrars to the issue, for the purposes of determining the basis of allotment.
No.of shares offered through prospectus 5,00,00,000
No.of shares subscribed and allotted to IDBI, 1,00,00,000
UTI, MFs and FIIs on firm basis
No.of shares subscribed and allotted to the 1,00,00,000
employees of PI Ltd. and other group companies
No.of shares subscribed and allotted to NRIs on 50,00,000
repatriation basis
Subscription as multiple of the entire net offer to 6000 times
public
For the category of applicants who have applied for 1000 shares or less, the following
information is available:
No. of shares applied for No. of
(category-wise) applicants
100 1,60,000
200 1,00,000
300 50,000
400 25,000
500 22,950
600 12,000
700 8,000
800 7,000
900 6,500
1000 6,000
From the information given above, you are required to calculate
a. The number of proportionate shares available to each category of 1000 shares or
less, and
b. The number of shares that could be allotted to each allottee in each of the applicant
category of 1000 shares or less.
32. Power Mats Private Ltd. has made an Initial Public Offer (IPO) of 25,00,000 equity
shares of Rs.10 each at par. The issue was underwritten by MB Financial, ICI Finance
and Global Bank for 30%, 30% and 40% respectively. Applications for a total of
23,00,000 equity shares were received. The marked applications received for the three
underwriters were 3,50,000 shares, 4,00,000 shares and 13,50,000 shares respectively.
Prepare a statement showing the underwriters’ liability to the IPO of Power Mats
Private Ltd.
33. Excel Fabrics Limited has made a public issue of Rs.100 crore by prospectus of equity shares
of Rs.10 each for cash at a premium of Rs.40 per share. Of the issue the following
reservations were made:
Mutual funds 25%
Financial institutions 15%
Employees 5%
145
Investment Banking and Financial Services
The total applications received for 1000 shares or less categories are as follows:
No. of shares No. of applicants
applied for
200 30,000
300 25,100
400 20,000
500 15,000
600 11,000
700 9,200
800 3,700
900 2,600
1,000 2,000
From the information given, you are required to calculate the number of successful
applicants and number of shares that could be allotted to each successful applicant in each
category of 1,000 or less shares.
34. Meena Automobiles Ltd. enters the capital market with a public issue of 220 lacs of shares
of Rs.10 each at a premium of Rs.40 per share. The company has the following reservations
in the issue:
20 lacs shares reserved for Mutual Funds on competitive basis; and
15 lacs shares reserved for FIIs on competitive basis.
After the closure of the issue, the Registrar to the issue collected the following subscription
figures:
Reserved Portion
Category No. of Applications Total No. of Shares
Mutual Funds 6 12,00,000
FIIs 17 3,00,000
Public Portion (applications for below 1000 shares)
Size of the Application No. of Applications
200 Shares 50,000
400 Shares 25,000
600 Shares 20,000
800 Shares 10,000
1000 Shares 10,000
On the basis of the above statement, draw a detailed Basis of Allotment statement giving
the following information:
a. The number of shares available for allotment to each category;
b. The number of successful applicants in each category; and
c. The number of shares allotted per applicant for each category.
35. Prompt Service Bank Ltd. recently tapped the primary market with an IPO of Rs.144 crore.
The IPO was priced at par because of the moribund state of the capital markets. The low
pricing created a lot of interest in the market and the issue was oversubscribed.
146
Part II
147
Investment Banking and Financial Services
opportunities due to shortage of capital. To overcome this problem, the firm has decided to
corporatize itself and make a public offering of its shares. The firm intends to have a post-issue
paid-up capital of Rs.25 crore. The current proprietor Mr. Totharam intends to hold 40%
stake in the company after the public issue. Taking advantage of the latest SEBI Guidelines,
the company decides that its shares will have a face value of Rs.5 and will be offered at par.
The firm made the following reservations in its IPO:
Category Type of No. of shares
Reservation reserved
Mutual Funds Firm 25,00,000
NRIs Competitive 50,00,000
The response to its IPO is as follows:
Category No. of applications
400 shares 10,000
500 shares 8,000
800 shares 5,000
1,000 shares 5,000
2,000 shares 1,000
10,000 shares 500
20,000 shares 200
50,000 shares 100
The response in the reserved category is as follows:
Mutual Funds 20,00,000 shares
NRIs 25,00,000 shares
You are required to compute the basis of allotment as per the current SEBI Guidelines.
Rights Issues, Bonus Issues, Private Placements and Bought-out Deals
38. Stanford Export Ltd. has proposed to expand its operations for which it requires funds of
$3.75 million, net of issue expenses which amounts to 2.5% of the issue size. It proposed to
raise the funds through a GDR issue. It considers the following factors in pricing the issue.
i. The expected domestic market price of the share is Rs.250.
ii. 4 shares underlie each GDR.
iii. Underlying shares are priced at 15% discount to the market price.
iv. Expected exchange rate is Rs.40/$.
You are required to compute
a. The number of GDRs to be issued.
b. Cost of GDR to the company if the dividend expected to be paid is 15% with a
growth rate of 10% p.a.
c. Gain/loss to a holder of 100 GDRs, if the company proposes a rights issue after the
GDR issue in the ratio of 1:2 at a subscription price of Rs.150 per share. Assume the
GDR holder exercises the rights and sells his entire holdings at the prevailing GDR
price which will be at a premium of 20% to the prevailing domestic price.
Assume the Rs./$ exchange rate at the time of rights issue and sale by GDR holder to be
Rs.48/$.
148
Part II
39. Ravi Cements decides to capitalize its reserves. The details of the same on March 31, 20x1 are
as follows:
Rs. crore
Authorized Capital
2,00,00,000 shares of Rs.10 each 20,00,00,000
Paid-up Capital
90,00,000 shares of Rs.10 each 9,00,00,000
Reserves & Surplus
General reserve 17,00,00,000
Share premium 7,00,00,000
Revaluation reserve 7,00,00,000 31,00,00,000
The company had allotted 15 lakh 15% FCDs of Rs.150 each on March 31, 20x1. The
terms of the issue were as follows:
• Part A of Rs.30 would be converted into 2 equity shares of Rs.15 per share, 12 months
from the date of allotment.
• Part B of Rs.120 would be converted into 3 equity shares of Rs.40 per share, 24 months
from allotment.
The company had purchased plant and machinery worth Rs.4 crore during April 20x1. The
purchase consideration was paid in the form of allotment of 12,00,000 equity shares to the
vendor.
You are required to
a. Compute the maximum permissible bonus ratio as per current SEBI guidelines.
b. Discuss further specific measures which this company would require to take.
40. The balance sheet of M/s Machine Tools Ltd. as on 31.3.20x1 is as follows:
Liabilities Rs. in crore Assets Rs. in crore
Authorized capital 20.00 Land 6.00
2 crore at Rs.10 face value
Issued and Paid-up Capital Building 4.00
0.5 crore fully paid-up 5.00 Plant and Machinery 27.00
0.3 crore – Rs.5 per Miscellaneous
share paid-up 1.50 6.50 Fixed Assets 10.00
Reserves and Surplus Investments 5.00
General Reserve 4.00
Contingency Reserve 2.50 Current Assets 20.50
Capital Reserve 1.50
Share Premium 9.00
Dividend Equalization 1.00
Reserve
Revaluation Reserve 17.00 35.00
Term Loan 17.00
Current Liabilities 14.00
72.50 72.50
The finance director of the company has given the following additional information.
i. The company had purchased a machinery worth Rs.7 crore in May 20x1. The entire
purchase consideration was paid in the form of allotment of 15 lakh equity shares to
the vendor. The vendor had sold 5 lakh equity shares in September 20x1 and 6 lakh
equity shares in January 20x2 to other investors through the secondary market. The
vendor currently holds only the balance of 4 lakh shares originally allotted to him.
149
Investment Banking and Financial Services
ii. The finance director also informs you that the company has secret reserves of
Rs.10 crore, which is not currently disclosed in the balance sheet. The company
follows extremely conservative accounting policies and had created secret reserves as
a buffer to meet any unforeseen eventualities.
iii. The finance director also informs that the company is not interested to make any call
on the partly paid-up shares but is interested in capitalizing its huge reserves.
You are required to
a. Compute the maximum permissible bonus ratio as per the current SEBI guidelines.
b. Discuss the specific measures the company has to take.
c. i. Explain the concept of secret reserve and how it can be created.
ii. It is the contention of the finance director that secret reserves can be treated as
eligible reserves for computation of bonus ratio, if the company discloses the
same through an advertisement in a newspaper. Do you agree with the
finance director? Give reasons.
41. The balance sheet of Megha Ltd. is as follows:
(Rs. in lakh)
Liabilities Assets
Share Capital 35 Land 20
General Reserve 20 Buildings 25
Share Premium 15 Plant & Machinery 48
Revaluation Reserve 35 Misc. Fixed Assets 20
Capital Reserve 14 84 Closing Stock 43
16% Debentures 25 Receivables 27
Current Liabilities 47 Cash 8
191 191
The company intends to declare a bonus issue. Compute the maximum permissible bonus
ratio.
42. The balance sheet of M/s Aryan Ltd. as on 31.3.20x1 is as under:
(Rs. in crore)
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
Share Capital 6.00 Land 8.00
Reserves & Surplus Buildings 12.00
General Reserves 20.00 Plant & Machinery 24.00
Share Premium 9.00 Misc. Fixed Assets 7.00
Contingency Reserve 4.00 Investments 1.50
Capital Reserves 3.00 Inventory 8.50
Revaluation Reserves 10.00 46.00 Sundry Debtors 12.00
12.5% Convertible 2.00 Cash 3.00
Debentures
T. Loan 12.00
Current Liabilities 10.00
76.00 76.00
The following information is provided.
a. The company had issued 12.5% FCDs (Face value = Rs.10) on 1st July, 20x0. The
debentures would be converted into equity at par, after 12 months from the date of
allotment.
150
Part II
b. The company purchased a building worth Rs.3.5 crore during 20x0-x1. The
purchase consideration was paid by allotting 10 lakh equity shares.
(You may assume that the face value of each share is Rs.10.)
Required to compute:
The maximum permissible bonus ratio as per SEBI guidelines.
43. The balance sheet of Panama Chemicals Ltd. as on 31st March, 20x1 is as follows:
(Rs. crore)
Liabilities Assets
Share Capital (Face value Rs.10) 15.00 Land & Buildings 19.00
Reserves & Surplus 75.00 Plant & Machinery 52.00
Debentures 26.00 Misc. Fixed Assets 20.00
Current Liabilities 35.00 Current Assets 60.00
151.00 151. 00
The profit after tax for 20x0-x1 is Rs.9 crore. The EPS is expected to increase by 40%
during 20x1-x2. The market discounts the share at 22 times its expected earnings.
The company proposes to set up a Heavy Chemicals Plant involving a project outlay of
Rs.490 crore. The project is proposed to be financed by term loan of 291.84 crore from
IDBI, Rs.60 crore through private placement of NCDs, Rs.55 crore from internal accruals
and the balance through a rights issue. The rights issue is proposed to be priced at 75% of
its current market price.
The company had issued 10,00,000, 16% PCDs of Rs.150 each in June 20x1. Part A of
Rs.100 will be converted into 6 shares, 15 months from the date of allotment. The balance
will be redeemed at the end of 5 years.
The company had raised a sum of $9 million by issue of 7,50,000 GDRs in March 20x1.
The paid-up capital of Rs.15 crore includes 30,00,000 shares underlying the GDRs.
You are required to compute:
a. The ratio for issue of rights shares and the pricing.
b. The value of the rights.
c. The gain or loss, in dollars, to a GDR holder who holds 100 GDRs, exercises the
rights and sells his entire holding at the prevailing GDR price.
Assume the GDRs are quoting at 25% premium to their domestic price and the Rs./$
exchange rate to be as follows:
• At the time of issue of GDRs – Rs.38/$
• At the time of rights and sale by GDR holder – Rs.42/$.
44. Megasoft Ltd. plans to expand its operations and estimates the total cost of the expansion to
be Rs.24 crore. The same is proposed to be financed by internal accruals of Rs.9 crore and
the balance through a rights issue. The current share capital of the company is Rs.2.40
crore. The shares of the company are currently quoting at Rs.345. The company proposes to
price the rights at Rs.250.
Based on the above information
a. Compute the ratio of the rights.
b. Calculate the value of the rights.
c. Determine the gain/loss of a shareholder, if he
i. Exercises his rights in the rights issue
ii. Allows his rights to expire
iii. Sells his rights.
151
Investment Banking and Financial Services
152
Part II
Free reserves of Rs.220 lakh include share premium of Rs.80 lakh, half of which was
collected in cash.
The company is planning to capitalize a part of its reserves.
Keeping the existing SEBI guidelines in view, you are required to
a. Calculate the maximum ratio at which the company can issue bonus shares, and
b. State whether the company can go ahead with bonus issue? Give reasons. If not,
what is the additional provision it has to comply with to issue bonus shares?
State assumptions, if any made.
48. Sriram Industries Limited, a listed company at National Stock Exchange is currently
trading at Rs.80. The management is contemplating a rights issue of 2:5 to revamp the
operations and fund their increased working capital requirement. The paid-up capital of the
company is Rs.10 crore. The company plans to price the rights issue at Rs.65 per share.
a. Find the value per share after the rights issue.
b. What is the value of rights?
49. Consider the following information with respect to Wright Constructions Limited (WCL).
Equity capital: Rs.
Issued and fully paid
(10,00,000 shares of Rs.10 each) 1,00,00,000
Reserves & surplus 1,80,00,000
Long-term debt 3,50,00,000
Market price per share Rs.20
Earnings per share Rs.4
Effective corporate tax rate 33%
Out of the total long-term debt of Rs.3,50,00,000 the company wishes to redeem a loan of
Rs.30,00,000 carrying an interest rate of 10% by making a rights issue.
You are required to calculate
a. The number of right shares, rights ratio and dilution in EPS if the shareholders
expect the subscription price to be 20% below the existing market price.
b. Calculate the ex-rights price of the shares and the corresponding P/E ratio if rights
issue is made based on (a) above.
c. Calculate the change in wealth of a shareholder who owns 1000 shares in WCL
i. if he sells his rights
ii. if he allows his rights to expire.
Comment on the above.
50. Unique Graphics Limited is currently trading on the stock exchange at Rs.80 per share of
Rs.10 face value. During the year 20x1-x2 it proposed to expand by increasing its existing
capacity of production with an estimated cost of Rs.90 lakh. The capital and reserves and
surplus of the company as at the end of March 20x2 (estimated) are as follows:
(Rs. lakh)
Issue, Subscribed and paid-up 90
(9 lakh equity shares of Rs.10 each)
Reserves and surplus 110
3 lakh of Partly Convertible Debentures 300
of Rs.100 each
Rs.80 of each PCD which are issued during March 20x2 are convertible into 1 equity share
of face value of Rs.10 at a premium of Rs.70 each at the end of March 20x3.
153
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Its estimated earnings per share for the year 20x1-x2 is Rs.3. Due to expansion it expects its
post-tax earnings to increase by 20% for the year 20x2-x3. To reduce the issue expenses it
proposes to raise the funds for expansion through rights issue during 20x2-x3. In pricing
the issue it had the following objective:
– The dilution in EPS should not be more than 20%.
Assuming that the price of the share would be around Rs.80 before rights issue
Calculate
i. The minimum subscription price of right shares and the maximum ratio of rights
ii. Change in the wealth of a shareholder who owns 1000 shares if he allows his rights
to lapse.
51. Dawn Ltd. had entered the market with an IPO in June 19x9 and its shares are currently
trading at Rs.78. The company intends to finance one of its new ventures with a rights issue
of 3 shares for every 1 share held. The rights shares are to be priced at Rs.65 per share.
You are required to compute
a. The value of the rights
b. The expected ex-rights price of the share
c. The gain/loss to Mr. Karan holding 100 shares if he
– exercises his rights
– allows his rights to lapse
– sells his rights.
52. The financial data of Excellent Paper is as follows:
Paid-up Capital (4 crore. shares) Rs.40 crore
Reserves & Surplus Rs.160 crore
Profit After Tax Rs.18 crore
The shares of the company are listed and are currently quoting at P/E multiple of 12.
The company has taken up an expansion project at a cost of Rs.355 crore. It proposes to
fund it with a term loan of Rs.155 crore. from ICICI, Rs.80 crore. from internal accruals
and the balance by a rights issue. The right will be priced at Rs.40 per share (Rs.30
premium).
You are required to compute
a. The value of the rights;
b. The market capitalization of the company after the rights issue; and
c. The Net Asset Value of the share after the rights issue.
53. Minco Steel decides to capitalize its reserves. The details of the same on 31/03/20x0
are as follows:
Authorized Capital Rs.
1,50,00,000 shares of Rs.10 each 15,00,00,000
Paid-up Capital
70,00,000 shares of Rs.10 each 7,00,00,000
Reserves & Surplus
General Reserve 15,00,00,000
Share Premium 9,00,00,000
Revaluation Reserve 4,00,00,000 28,00,00,000
154
Part II
The company had allotted 10 lacs 16.5% FCDs of Rs.170 each on 13/11/19x8. The terms of
the issue were as follows:
• Part A of Rs.50 would be converted into 2 equity shares @ Rs.25 per share, 12
months from allotment.
• Part B of Rs.120 would be converted into 3 equity shares @ Rs.40 per share, 24 months
from allotment.
The company had purchased Plant and Machinery worth Rs.5 crore during April, 19x9. The
purchase consideration was paid in the form of allotment of 10,00,000 equity shares to the
vendor.
You are required to:
a. Compute the maximum permissible bonus ratio as per current SEBI guidelines.
b. Discuss further specific measures which this company would require to take.
54. The Balance Sheet of Ujwala Chemicals Ltd. as on 31st March, 20x0 is as follows:
(Rs. crore)
Liabilities Assets
Share Capital (Face Value Rs.10) 10.00 Land & Buildings 16.00
140.00 140.00
The Profit After Tax for 19x9-20x0 is Rs.6 cr. The EPS is targeted to increase by 25%
during 20x0-x1. The market discounts the share at 20 times its expected earnings.
The company proposes to set up a heavy chemicals plant involving a project outlay of
Rs.465 crore. The project is proposed to be financed by term loan of Rs.255 crore.
from ICICI, Rs.80 crore. through private placement of NCDs, Rs.40 crore. from
internal accruals and the balance through a rights issue. The rights issue is proposed to
be priced at 80% of its current market price.
The company had issued 10,00,000 17% PCDs of Rs.120 each in July, 19x9. Part A of
Rs.100 will be converted into 4 shares, 15 months from the date of allotment. The balance
will be redeemed at the end of 5 years.
The company had raised a sum of $8.75 million by issue of 6,25,000 GDRs in March,
19x9. The paid-up capital of Rs.10 crore. includes 25,00,000 shares underlying the GDRs.
You are required to compute:
a. The ratio for issue of rights shares and the pricing
b. The value of the rights
c. The gain or loss, in dollars, to a GDR holder who holds 100 GDRs, exercises the
rights and sells his entire holdings at the prevailing GDR price.
Assume the GDRs are quoting at 20% premium to their domestic price and the Rs./$
exchange rate to be as follows:
At the time of issue of GDRs Rs.36/$
At the time of rights issue
and sale by GDR holder Rs.42/$
155
Investment Banking and Financial Services
156
Part II
56. The Balance Sheet of Ashwini Plastics Ltd. as on 31st March, 20x0 is as follows:
(Rs. in crore.)
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
Share Capital 20,00,000 shares of Freehold Land 1.00
Rs.10 each fully paid-up
2.00
Buildings 3.50
Plant & Machinery 17.50
Reserves & Surplus: Misc. Fixed Assets 0.50
Share Premium 2.25 Inventory 5.50
General Reserve 2.50 Sundry Debtors 3.50
Dividend Equalization Reserve 1.25 Cash 0.50
Special Reserve 1.50
Contingency Reserve 0.50 8.00
14% Fully Convertible 1.50
Debentures (98 series)
Term Loans 14.00
Sundry Creditors 6.50
32.00 32.00
a. The company, on July 8, 20x0, had issued 2,50,000 14% Fully Convertible
Debentures of Rs.60 each. Each FCD will be converted into 2 equity shares of Rs.10
each, at a premium of Rs.20 per share, 12 months from the date of allotment.
b. The existing share capital includes 2,00,000 shares which were issued as purchase
consideration to a machinery supplier. The cost of the machinery was Rs.70 lakh
and the entire purchase consideration was paid only in the form of shares.
Compute the maximum permissible bonus ratio as per the current SEBI guidelines.
57. The Balance Sheet of Rathi Electrocastings Ltd. as on March 31, 20x1 is as under:
(Rs. in crore)
Liabilities Assets
Share Capital Land 14.00
(5,00,00,000 shares of 50.00 Building 31.00
Rs.10 each)
Reserves & Surplus Plant & Machinery 57.00
Capital Reserve 18.00 Miscellaneous Fixed Assets 23.00
Contingency Reserve 13.00 Patents 8.00
Dividend Equalization Reserve 9.00 Current Assets 113.00
General Reserve 15.00
Revaluation Reserve 42.00
Share Premium 12.00
109.00
11% FCDs 25.00
Current Liabilities 62.00
246.00 246.00
157
Investment Banking and Financial Services
158
Part II
c. Merrill Lynch Telecom Fund invests in 25000 ADRs. At the end of 1 year the
company makes a right issue of 1 share for every 4 shares held. The rights is priced
at Rs.600 per share, when the prevailing domestic price is Rs.1000 per share. The
fund exercises the rights and immediately exits from the investment. The ADRs are
quoting at a premium of 30% over the ex-rights price in the domestic market. The
exchange rate is $1 = Rs.50 at the time of the rights issue as well as the divestment.
Compute the gain/loss to Merrill Lynch Telecom Fund on this transaction.
60. Rockwood Ltd. is a closely held existing profit making company. The company proposes to
expand its capacity to meet the growing demand for its product. The cost of the project is
estimated at Rs.25 crore. The project will be financed by term loans of Rs.10 crore and the
balance through a public issue. The company appoints Emerald Capital Company (ECC) as
their Merchant Bankers. ECC advises them against tapping the market. Instead they suggest
a bought out deal on the following terms:
i. ECC will buy out the entire issue at Rs.62.5 per share.
ii. ECC will offload the shares through an offer for sale at the end of 3 years.
iii. ECC will be assured an IRR of 22% on their investments. In case the divestment
takes place at a lesser price, the promoters would compensate ECC for the
differential amount.
iv. In case, ECC offloads at a price which gives them an IRR of over 22%, the surplus
would be shared equally by the promoters and ECC.
The current EPS is Rs.10 and is expected to grow by 20% annually over the next 3 years.
The company proposes to declare dividend at 15%, 20%, 25% for the next three years
respectively.
The divestment takes place at a P/E multiple of 8.
You are required to
a. Compute the divestment price of the share;
b. The total post-issue returns to ECC on their investment; and
c. The amount of cash outflow/inflow to the promoters on divestment.
INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
61. SK Steel Limited has proposed to expand its operations for which it requires funds of $4.02
crore net of issue expenses. It proposed to raise the required funds through a GDR issue. It
considers the following factors in pricing the issue:
i. The expected market price of the company’s equity share in the domestic market is
Rs.180.
ii. 6 shares should underlie each GDR.
iii. The underlying shares are priced at a discount of 10% to the market price.
iv. The expected exchange rate is Rs.42/$.
v. Dividend expected on the equity share is 15% with a growth of 8% p.a. forever.
vi. The issue costs amount to 2% of the issue size.
You are required to
a. Compute the number of GDRs that have to be issued and also the cost of GDR to the
company.
b. Discuss the factors that the company should consider to choose between domestic
and international market.
159
Investment Banking and Financial Services
62. Rockland Engineering Ltd. has awarded HSBC Bank a syndication mandate for US$ 200
million, 5-year facility. The Bank underwrites US$ 100 million and two other banks
underwrite US$ 50 million each.
The company agrees on the following terms:
Tenure : 5 years
Repayment : Bullet payment
Spread : Payable annually at 100 basis points over LIBOR
Facility fee : 35 basis points per annum
Management fee : 25 basis points payable upfront as under:
– 10 basis points on amount of loan
– 15 basis points on amount underwritten
Each underwriter retains US$ 25 million and there are 10 participant banks with US$ 12.5
million each. Citibank is the appointed agent bank with annual fee of US$ 15,000.
You are required to calculate the
a. Cost of the loan facility for Rockland Engineering Ltd. if LIBOR remains constant
at 5%.
b. Fees earned by HSBC on this transaction.
63. Fine Apparels Ltd. is a leading Hyderabad based garment manufacturer. The company
intends to raise ECBs in the international market. The company has received the following
offer from Citi bank:
Amount – 200 million Euros
Maturity – 6 years
Drawdown – 100 million Euros (1st July, 20x0)
– 100 million Euros (1st July, 20x1)
Interest – Paid annually at 130 BP over Euribor
Management Fee – 50 BP
Commitment Fee – 30 BP per annum
Underwriting Fee – 60 BP
Agency Fee – 30,000 Euros per annum
Guarantee Fee – 80 BP per annum
Amortization – 2 equal installments at the end of 5th and 6th year.
The terms of agreement state that the agency fee is paid at the end of each year while
commitment fee (wherever applicable) and guarantee fee are to be paid at the beginning of each
year. The expected EURIBOR as per a study conducted is as follows:
July 20x0 – June 20x1 3.5%
July 20x1 – June 20x2 3.25%
July 20x2 – June 20x3 4.5%
July 20x3 – June 20x4 3.75%
July 20x4 – June 20x5 3.25%
July 20x5 – June 20x6 3.00%
Required:
Compute the effective cost of borrowing to the company.
160
Part II
161
Investment Banking and Financial Services
162
Part II
Amount $200,000,000
Commitment Fee 25 basis points per annum payable half-yearly on undrawn balances
Agency Fee $5000 per annum payable at the end of each year
163
Investment Banking and Financial Services
68. Shruthi Steel Industries Ltd. is a leading producer of Cold Rolled Coils (CR coils). The
company is planning a backward integration project to produce 1.7 million ton of Hot
Rolled Coils (HR Coils). The project cost is estimated at Rs.2,400 crore. The company
plans to finance the project, inter alia, with a syndicated loan of $400 million. The
company has received an offer from ABN Amro Bank with the following terms:
Amount $ 400 millions
Maturity 7 years
Drawdown $ 100 mn. - immediate
$ 150 mn. - 1/1/20x1
$ 150 mn. - 1/1/20x2
Grace Period 3 years
Amortization Equal annual installments payable on
31/12/20x3 - I Installment
31/12/20x4 - II Installment
31/12/20x5 - III Installment
31/12/20x6 - IV Installment
Interest Rate Paid annually in arrears at 100 BP over LIBOR
Management Fee 50 BP
Commitment Fee 75 BP per annum
Underwriting Fee 40 BP
Agency Fee $ 10,000 per annum
Guarantee Fee 60 BP per annum
The following additional information is provided.
1. The effective date of the loan agreement is 1/1/20x0.
2. Commitment fee and agency fee are payable at the end of each year while
guarantee fee is payable at the beginning of each year.
The LIBOR may be assumed as follows:
20x0 6%
20x1 5%
20x2 6%
20x3 4%
20x4 7%
20x5 8%
20x6 6%
Compute the effective cost of borrowings to the company.
69. Naveen Industries Ltd. is a leading producer of consumer electronics. The company plans
to expand its production facilities to meet the growing demand for its product. The
company intends to finance its expansion primarily through ECB. The company has
received the following offer from Bank of Tokyo – Mitsubishi.
Amount – 20 billion Yen
Maturity – 8 years
Drawdown – 10 billion Yen on 1/1/20x1
10 billion Yen on 1/1/20x2
Interest – 100 BP over Yen LIBOR payable annually
Management Fee – 15 BP
Underwriting Fee – 25 BP
Commitment Fee – 10 BP
Agency Fee – 25 million Yen per annum
Amortization – 4 equal installments at the end of 5th, 6th, 7th and 8th year.
164
Part II
Bank of America has agreed to provide guarantee cover on this loan. The guarantee fee
payable is 50 BP per annum. The guarantee fee is payable at the end of each year.
Commitment Fee is payable at the beginning of the year. Agency Fee is also charged at the
beginning of the year.
The expected Yen LIBOR, as per a survey conducted by Japanese Bond Research Institute
(JBRI), is as follows:
Year Yen LIBOR (%)
20x0 1.50
20x1 1.00
20x2 1.25
20x3 1.50
20x4 2.00
20x5 3.00
20x6 2.50
20x7 2.00
20x8 1.50
Compute the effective cost of the loan to Naveen Industries Ltd.
70. Rashtriya Mills Ltd. is a major player in the textile industry. The company is currently a
market leader in both cotton textile segment as well as in manmade fabrics. The company
has been in existence for almost eight decades. Some of the existing plants were set up in
the sixties and are over 30 years old. The company is planning a comprehensive
modernization and technological upgradation program at an estimated cost of Rs.800 crore.
The company proposes to part finance this project with an ECB. The company has received
the following offer from UBS Bank, Zurich for a syndicated loan:
Amount CHF 100 million
Maturity 8 years
Drawdown CHF 40m (1/1/20x0)
CHF 40m (1/1/20x1)
CHF 20m (1/1/20x2)
Interest 80 BPs over CHF LIMEAN payable on December 31, each year
Amortization 2 equal installments at the end of 7th and 8th year
Management Fee 30 BPs
Underwriting Fee 40 BPs
Commitment Fee 30 BPs payable at the end of the year
Guarantee Fee 50 BPs payable at the beginning of the year
Agency Fee CHF 100,000 per annum payable at the end of the year.
Kotak Mahindra Capital Corp. is the regular investment banker to the company. As per
their research, the expected interest rates are as follows:
Year CHF LIBID CHF LIBOR
20x0 4.90% 5.10%
20x1 4.45% 4.55%
20x2 5.30% 5.40%
20x3 6.10% 6.20%
20x4 5.70% 5.90%
20x5 5.60% 5.80%
20x6 4.95% 5.05%
20x7 4.20% 4.30%
20x8 4.55% 4.60%
20x9 4.35% 4.42%
201x 4.80% 4.90%
165
Investment Banking and Financial Services
166
Part II
167
Investment Banking and Financial Services
168
Part II
79. The most recent audited summarized balance sheet of M/s Aryan Financial Services
Limited is given below:
Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20x1
Liabilities Rs. in million Assets Rs. in million
Equity share Fixed assets:
capital 45.00 Assets on lease 300.00
Reserves & Surplus (Original cost: 450 million)
95.00
Term loan from IDBI 56.00 Other fixed assets 40.00
Public 120.00 Investments (in wholly 15.00
deposits owned subsidiaries)
Bank borrowings Current Assets:
85.00 Stock on hire 60.00
ICDs 60.00 Receivables 25.00
180-day commercial paper 40.00 Other current assets 25.00
Miscellaneous. expenditure 36.00
(not written off)
501.00 501.00
a. You are required to calculate the net owned funds of the company as on March 31,
20x1.
b. The company intends to enhance its investments in the lease portfolio by Rs.450
million and for this purpose it plans to raise funds by way of bank borrowings and
term loans from financial institutions in that order. Determine the financing mix.
80. A company has issued PTCs backed by a pool of property receivables aggregating to
Rs.235 lakh. The equated monthly payments to be made to the PTC holder are as
follows:
During the first 12 months Rs.11 lakh p.m.
During the next 12 months Rs.9 lakh p.m.
During the next 6 months Rs.7 lakh p.m.
Calculate the promised rate of return to the investor.
81. The following financial data has been extracted from the books of Sarita Leasing Limited
for the year 20x0-x1.
Rs. in crore
– Equity share capital 140.00
– Share premium 56.00
– General reserve 126.40
– Revaluation reserves 96.80
– Profit on sale of assets 54.70
– Intangible assets (at book value) 33.60
– Investments in shares and debentures
of subsidiary companies 32.92
– Loans and advances to group
companies 21.98
– Deposits with subsidiary companies 15.64
Calculate the amount of owned funds and net owned funds.
169
Investment Banking and Financial Services
82. The audited Balance Sheet of Rockland Leasing Company as on March 31, 20x1 is
presented below:
Balance Sheet as on March 31, 20x1
Liabilities Rs. in lakh Assets Rs. in lakh
Paid-up Share Capital 150 Fixed Assets 1,700
Reserves & Surplus Investments in wholly owned
– Capital Reserves 100 subsidiaries
Current Assets 140
– Free Reserves 310 – Stock on Hire 750
Secured Loans Miscellaneous Expenses 85
– Term Loans 90 (to the extent not written off)
– Bank Borrowings 705
Unsecured Loans
– Public Deposits 720
Current Liabilities 600
Total 2,675 Total 2,675
70% of the revenue earned by the company is derived from equipment leasing and hire
purchase.
a. Calculate the net owned funds of the company.
b. Calculate the maximum permissible level of debt and the additional amount of debt
that can be raised.
83. Reality Financial Services is contemplating a bond issue (Face value Rs.100) with a
stepped up coupon interest structure, the step up rate being 12% p.a. The bonds will carry a
coupon rate of interest of 10% p.a. for the first year and will be redeemed at 110 percent of
the face value after seven years from the date of issue. The bond issue is to be priced so as
to yield a pre-tax redemption yield of 18.5% to the investor. Calculate the issue price.
84. Based on the data given below, you are required to develop a Cash Certificate Scheme.
Period Minimum Rate of Maturity Value Annual
(in months) Amount (Rs.) Interest*(%) Yield
13 5000 14.5% 5,845 15.60%
36 5000 14.5% 7,705 18.03%
48 5000 14.5% 8,899 19.49%
60 5000 14.5% 10,279 21.11%
* Interest is compounded monthly.
TAX ASPECTS OF LEASING
85. The following data is available on the portfolio of leased assets of Stallion Leasing Ltd. for
a given financial year.
Block Rate of WDV at the beginning Additions during the year
depreciation (Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
A 25% 224 100
Sale of assets during the year have been Rs.13 lakh.
a. Calculate the tax relevant depreciation charge for the year.
b. It is expected that fresh investments to the tune of Rs.40 lakh will be made during
the following financial year.
The disinvestment proceeds are likely to be around Rs.22 lakh.
50% of the fresh investment will be made before September 30 of the financial year.
Calculate the projected depreciation charge for the following year.
170
Part II
86. Vindhya Ltd. plans to acquire capital equipment from Samastha Ltd. based at Cochin. The
cost of the equipment exclusive of sales tax is Rs.67 lakh and the rate of CST payable is
4%. Vindhya Ltd. is considering to lease the equipment from Malathi Financial Services.
The quote on a 3-year lease is Rs.55.28 per thousand per month payable at the end of every
month. Calculate the lease rentals payable by Vindhya Limited.
87. The following data is available on the portfolio of leased assets of Radial Leasing Ltd. for
the year 20x0-x1.
Block Rate of depreciation WDV at the beginning Additions during the year
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
A 25% 186 200
B 40% 125 56
Sale of assets during the year have been Rs.25 lakh and Rs.44 lakh in respect of block A &
B respectively.
a. Calculate the tax relevant depreciation charge for the year 20x0-x1.
b. It is expected that fresh investments to the tune of Rs.85 lakh will be made during
the year 20x1-x2 as follows:
Block Amount of Investment
(Rs. in lakh)
A 60
B 25
The disinvestment proceeds are likely to be around Rs.25 lakh with the following
break up
Sale proceeds
(Rs. in lakh)
A 10
B 15
It is expected that about 50% of the fresh investments will be made before
September 30 of the financial year and the rates of depreciation applicable to Blocks
A and B will be 25% and 40% respectively. Calculate the projected depreciation
charge for the following years.
88. Highway Industries is contemplating a capital investment of Rs.415 lakh during the current
year. There are two ways of funding the investment; The company can finance the
investment by debt carrying a rate of interest of 16.5% p.a. repayable in 5 equal annual
installments (principal repayable in equal installments). Alternatively, it can lease the assets
on the following terms.
• Lease Rental : Rs.310 per thousand per annum
• Lease Period : 5 years
• Frequency of Payment : Annually in arrears
The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 25% and the marginal tax rate is 46%. The company
anticipates substantial tax liabilities during the current year and in the following year.
Given that the objective of the company is to reduce the tax liability, which of the two
alternatives will you recommend?
89. Radhika Spinning Mills Ltd. (RSML) is a 100% export-oriented unit engaged in
manufacturing textiles. It is finalizing a modernization plan at a cost of Rs.65 lakh. It is
planning to lease the required plant and machinery from Sumeet Leasing Ltd. Sumeet
Leasing Ltd. has offered to structure a 7-year non-cancelable finance lease with rentals
payable on an equated annual basis in arrears. If the marginal cost of debt of Radhika
Spinning Mills Ltd. is 17.5%, calculate the maximum lease rental p.a. Radhika Spinning
Mills Ltd. will be willing to pay. Assume no salvage value for the equipment at the end
of 7 years.
171
Investment Banking and Financial Services
90. Innovative Ltd. based at Hyderabad is contemplating purchase of some capital equipment
from Rohit Ltd. based at Chennai. The cost of the capital equipment exclusive of sales tax
is Rs.115 lakh and the rate of CST is 4%. Innovative Ltd. is considering whether it will be
better off by leasing the equipment from Digital Leasing Ltd. (DLL). The quote of DLL on
a 5-year lease is Rs.24.5 per thousand per month payable at the end of every month.
Calculate the lease rentals payable by Innovative Ltd.
LEASE EVALUATION: THE LESSEE’S ANGLE
91. Indusway Limited is considering investment in capital equipment for which the following
information is available:
Cost of the equipment (inclusive of CST @ 4%) : Rs.21.4 lakh
Tax relevant rate of depreciation : 25%
Useful life : 5 years
Net salvage value at the end of 5 years : 35% of the book value
after 5 years
The company can either purchase the equipment under the bill rediscounting scheme of
IDBI or acquire it on a finance lease. The effective interest rate under the IDBI bill
rediscounting scheme is 17.5% p.a. The company has received an offer from Nova Leasing Ltd.
to structure a finance lease for a 5-year term at a rental of Rs.28.5 per thousand per month
payable annually in arrears. The lease rental has to be calculated on the cost of the
equipment to the lessor which will include CST @ 10%.
The target debt-equity ratio of Indusway Ltd. is 2:1 and the cost of debt and equity are
17.5% and 22% respectively. The corporate tax rate is 46%. The investment is likely to
generate an incremental EBDIT of Rs.20 lakh per annum for the first 3 years and Rs.17
lakh for the last 2 years of the project life.
You are required to advise Indusway Ltd. as to whether it should buy or lease the
equipment. Also calculate the break even rental for Indusway Ltd.
92. Ramon Tiles Ltd. is considering investment in a balancing equipment, regarding which the
following information is available:
• The cost of the equipment is Rs.62.8 lakh inclusive of CST @ 4%.
• The acquisition will be funded through a mix of term loan and own funds in the ratio
of 4:1. The loan carries interest at 18.5% p.a. and is repayable in 5 equal annual
installments.
• The planning horizon for such investments is 5 years. After 5 years, the equipment
is expected to fetch a net salvage value of Rs.7.5 lakh.
• The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 25%.
• The investment is expected to generate an EBDIT of Rs.46 lakh in year 1, Rs.37
lakh in year 2 and Rs.24 lakh in year 3, through 5.
The commercial bank which has agreed to finance the investment has recently informed the
company that the loan can be disbursed only after 3 months. Since the equipment is
urgently required, the following alternatives are being considered by the company.
– Finance the acquisition through a 3-month intercorporate loan at a cost of 6% per
quarter and liquidate the liability utilizing the bank loan made available 3 months
later.
– Lease the equipment.
172
Part II
The company has received an offer from Empire Leasing Ltd., the terms of which are as
follows:
Primary lease period : 5 years
Secondary lease period : 2 years
Management fee : 1% of investment cost
Annual rental
During primary period : Rs.310 per thousand
During secondary period : Rs.30 per thousand
The lease rentals are payable annually in arrears, but the management fee is payable
immediately on signing the lease. The leasing company is not entitled to the concessional
CST and has to pay sales tax @ 10% on the cost of the equipment.
Ramon Tiles has an explicitly stated target debt- equity ratio of 2:1. The marginal costs of
debt and equity are 18.5% and 22% respectively. The marginal rate of tax is 46% including
surcharge. Based on economic considerations, which alternative would you recommend?
93. Pavan Agro Tech Ltd. is contemplating investment in equipment costing Rs.47 lakh. The
company can purchase the equipment by raising additional debt at a cost of 16.5% p.a.
Alternatively, the company can take the equipment on a finance lease with a 5-year primary
lease period at the rate of Rs.325 per thousand per annum payable annually in arrears. The
marginal tax rate is 46% and the tax relevant rate of depreciation is 25%. The salvage value
of the equipment after 5 years is negligible. Calculate the net value of the lease. Should the
company lease the equipment?
94. Resin Ltd. is contemplating investment in equipment worth Rs.56 lakh and one of the
alternative being considered is a finance lease offered by Shruti Leasing Ltd. at a rental of
Rs.315 per thousand payable annually in arrears over a non-cancelable period of 5 years.
The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 25% and the marginal rate of tax (inclusive of
surcharge) is 46%. The marginal cost of debt is 16% (pre-tax) and the marginal cost of
capital is 13.5%. Assume that the net salvage value of the equipment after 5 years is Rs.2
lakh.
Answer the following questions based on the equivalent loan model.
a. Calculate the amount of borrowing displaced by the finance lease.
b. Compute the present value of the interest tax shields on the displaced debt.
c. Should the company accept the lease proposal? Give reasons.
95. Rajdeep industries is contemplating investment in equipment about which the following
particulars are available:
Investment cost Rs.72 lakh
Tax relevant rate of depreciation 25%
Useful life 5 years
Estimated salvage value after 5 years Rs.8 lakh
The company can either borrow and buy the equipment or lease the equipment. Its cost of
capital is 13% p.a. and the marginal rate of tax is 46%. The cost of debt is 16% p.a. The
company has received a quote from Midas Leasing which has offered to structure a 5-year
full pay-out lease at the rate of Rs.315 per thousand payable annually in arrears. Compute
the NAL.
96. Surya (Private) Ltd. is planning to invest in equipments worth Rs.54 lakh and one of the
alternatives being considered is a finance lease offered by Never Lease Ltd. at a rental of
Rs.333 per thousand payable annually in arrears over a non-cancelable period of 5 years.
The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 40% and the marginal rate of tax (inclusive of
surcharge) is 46%. The marginal cost of debt is 17% (pre-tax) and the marginal cost of
capital is 12%. Assume that the net salvage value of the equipments after 5 years is Rs.5 lakh.
173
Investment Banking and Financial Services
174
Part II
You are consulted to evaluate these lease proposals using both suggested model and
Weingartner’s model. Comment on the strengths and weaknesses of these models.
Elaborate on how these models react to a given change in lease rentals. (Round off the
interest rates).
100. ACC Construction Company has decided to acquire a crane which costs Rs.10 crore. The
useful life of the crane is four years. If the company acquires the crane, its EBDIT will
increase by Rs.5 crore. The company is in a dilemma on whether to buy or lease the crane.
If it leases the crane, it will have to pay rentals at the rate of Rs.32 ptpm quarterly in
advance and an upfront processing fee of 0.5% of the cost of the asset. For tax purposes, the
crane can be depreciated at 25% and the tax rate applicable to the company is 30%. The
salvage value is expected to be 10% of the cost. The company’s marginal cost of equity and
debt are 20.5% and 14% respectively and it generally maintains a debt equity ratio of 1.5.
You are required to suggest, with the necessary calculations, whether the equipment
should be purchased or leased based on the Weingartner’s model.
LEASE EVALUATION: THE LESSOR’S ANGLE
101. Evergreen Ltd. typically writes 5-year leases with rentals payable annually in arrears. The
following information is available about a lease under review:
Equipment cost : Rs.47 lakh (Inclusive of CST @ 10%)
Salvage value after 5 years : 5% of the original cost
Initial direct cost : Rs.0.5 lakh (front ended)
Management fee : Rs.0.75 lakh (front ended)
The marginal cost of capital to Evergreen Ltd. is 16% and the marginal rate of tax is 46%.
Calculate the break even rental for Evergreen Ltd. assuming a tax relevant rate of
depreciation of (i) 25% (ii) 40% (iii) 100%
102. Starlight Financial Services writes the following types of lease contracts
Type Duration of primary Tax relevant rate of RV. as % of original
lease period depreciation cost
I 3 25% 5%
II 5 40% 3%
The marginal tax rate applicable to the company is 46% and the post-tax cost of funds is
16% p.a. On interstate purchases of capital equipment the company is required to pay CST
@ 10% on the basic price.
a. You are required to calculate the minimum rental which the company should quote
under the two types of lease contracts. Assume that the company collects lease
rentals on a monthly basis in advance.
b. Calculate the minimum monthly rental to be charged on a 5-year non-cancelable lease
proposal which involves leasing an equipment costing Rs.75 lakh (exclusive of CST).
103. Riverside Manufacturing Co. Ltd. (RMCL) has decided to invest in an equipment for which
the following particulars are available:
a. Cost of the equipment : Rs.42 lakh
b. Tax relevant rate of depreciation : 25%
c. Useful life : 3 years
d. Estimated net salvage value after 3 years : Negligible
The company has received a lease proposal from Rainbow Leasing Ltd. (RLL) to structure
a finance lease at a rental of Rs.47.50 per thousand per month payable at the beginning of
every month for three years.
175
Investment Banking and Financial Services
The marginal cost of debt and marginal cost of capital for RMCL are 16% (pre-tax) and
15% respectively. You have been informed that Rainbow Leasing Ltd. requires a minimum
return of 14% on its lease portfolio.
a. Determine the break even rentals for RMCL and RLL.
b. Comment on the spread available between the two break even rentals.
104. Rohit Varma, the Managing Director of Rohit Financial Services estimates the pre-tax cost
of funding leases to be 23% p.a. Based on this estimate, he believes that all lease
investments of his company must provide a gross yield of 25% p.a. after taking into
account the salvage value at 10% of the original cost. He has two alternate structures in
mind which are detailed below:
Structure I:
Equated monthly pattern under which rentals are collected at the beginning of every month
from the first month to the sixtieth month.
Structure II:
Ballooned pattern under which 10% of the monthly rental calculated under Structure I is
collected at the beginning of every month for the first 48 months and ballooned level
(equal) rentals are calculated at the beginning of every month for the next 12 months.
Required:
a. Calculate the monthly rentals under Structures I and II assuming an investment of
Rs.1,000.
b. Calculate the add-on yield on the five-year lease transaction, under both structures.
105. Alpha Industries is negotiating a lease proposal with Beta Leasing Limited for an imported
energy conservation equipment costing Rs.360 lakh which carries a (tax relevant)
depreciation rate of 100%. The useful life of the equipment is three years after which the
net salvage value of the equipment is expected to be 20% of its book value at that point of
time (assuming a book depreciation rate of 30% p.a. under written down value method).
Given its cash flow profile and estimated tax liability for the next three years, the company
wants a back-ended lease to be structured as follows:
Months Lease rental per month
1 – 12 L
13 – 24 1.5L
25 – 36 2.0L
The marginal cost of capital and the pre-tax cost of debt for the company are 14% and 18%
respectively.
Beta Leasing requires a post-tax return of 14% p.a. on all its lease investments. As a matter
of policy, the residual value of any leased equipment is taken at 5% of its original cost for
the purpose of pricing a lease. The initial direct costs are estimated to be 0.2% of the
investment cost. The company does not follow the practice of collecting an upfront
management fee.
The marginal tax rate applicable to both the companies is 45%. Ignore surcharge. Assume
that lease rentals are payable at the beginning of every month.
Required:
a. Calculate the maximum value of L from the point of view of Alpha Industries.
b. Calculate the minimum value of L from the point of view of Beta Leasing.
c. Comment on the spread available between the values obtained in (a) and (b).
106. Foremost Financial Services Limited (FFSL) has recently structured a five-year non-cancelable
leveraged lease transaction involving an investment cost of Rs.120 crore with Bhatt Commercial
Bank (BCB) as the loan participant. FFSL has financed 20% of the investment cost. The
remaining 80% was funded by BCB. If the (pre-tax) gross yield required by FFSL is 24%
per annum, calculate the annual lease rental to be charged. Assume that the loan funds
provided by BCB carry an interest of 18% p.a. and is to be amortized in five equated annual
installments. The corporate tax rate is 43%.
176
Part II
107. Chinni Cement Company Limited (CCCL) is contemplating a sale and leaseback
arrangement in respect of its plant and machinery costing Rs.120 lakh. The plant and
machinery was acquired about two years back and the written down value of this asset as
on date is Rs.70 lakh. The company has received a quotation from the State Financial
Corporation (SFC) under which the SFC is prepared to buy it for a price of Rs.80 lakh and
lease it back on the following terms:
Lease period – 5 years
Lease rental (payable monthly in – Rs.25.5 per thousand per month
advance) during primary period
The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 25%. The estimated salvage value after five years is
expected to be negligible.
Required:
a. On economic considerations, will you recommend the ‘sale and leaseback’
arrangement to CCCL? You are informed that CCCL is a profit making company. Its
marginal cost of debt is 16% and post-tax cost of capital is 12%. The marginal tax
rate is 43%.
b. You are informed that the marginal cost of funds to the SFC is 12% and its marginal
tax rate is 26%. Given this information, will you recommend the proposed
investment to the SFC? Show all calculations that are required to support your
recommendation.
c. Is it possible to structure a mutually advantageous lease proposal? Answer this
question with reference to the results obtained in (a) and (b).
State the assumptions, if any.
108. Navyug Industries is contemplating import lease as one of the alternative for importing
capital goods worth Rs.128 lakh (inclusive of duty) from Smith Plc based at England. It
has approached Clarity Leasing Co. of India (CLC) for designing an import lease with
a rental structure tailored to suit its cash flows position over the next 5 years. After a
careful analysis of the projected pattern of cash flows for the next 5 years, the marketing
manager of CLC has proposed a deferred cum stepped structure of lease rentals as follows:
Profile of Lease Rentals
(Payable annually in Arrear)
Year 1 2 3 4 5
Lease Rental – L 1.15L 1.3225L 1.5208L
You are provided with the following additional information.
• The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 40% p.a.
• The marginal rate of tax (inclusive of surcharge) is 46%.
• The marginal costs of debt and equity are 16% and 18% respectively and the target
debt-equity mix is 2:1.
• The lease rentals are payable annually in arrears.
• The salvage value of the capital goods may be taken as 10% of cost.
a. Calculate the net advantage of the finance lease.
b. Determine the equated annual break even rental.
Assume that the lease rentals have been worked out by CLC based on a pre-tax yield of
20% p.a. You can make some additional assumptions if necessary.
177
Investment Banking and Financial Services
109. The finance manager of Minerva Ltd. evaluates lease proposals in terms of the risk adjusted
gross yield. For this purpose, he has developed the following risk classification table which
provides information on the risk adjusted pre-tax yields required for different default risk
classifications.
Risk class Required yield (%)
A 20
B 22
C 25
D 26
The finance manager is currently reviewing a proposed lease transaction with Navaratan
Ltd. about which the following details are available:
Investment Rs.22 lakh
Primary lease period 4 years
Secondary lease period 3 years
Monthly rental during primary period Rs.28.3 per thousand
Monthly rental during secondary period Rs.1 per thousand
You are required to calculate the add-on-yield.
110. The General Manager of Indotech Finance Ltd. evaluates lease proposals in terms of the
risk adjusted gross yield. For this purpose, he has developed the following risk
classification table which provides information on the risk adjusted pre-tax yields required
for different default risk classifications.
Risk class Required yield (%)
A 18
B 20
C 23
A proposed lease transaction with Macro Works Ltd. is being evaluated by the General
Manager. Information regarding the said transaction is as follows:
Primary lease period : 4 years
Lease rentals payable in advance : Rs.31.25 per thousand per month
The credit risk evaluation exercise undertaken by him puts the lease in ‘C’ category of risk.
a. Should the general manager recommend the proposal?
b. Assume that the lessee is prepared to pay 4 months rental in advance, of which 3 months
rental will be maintained as an interest free security deposit and adjusted against the
payments due for the last 3 months of the primary lease period. Does this alter your
answer to (a)?
111. The management of Rocky Leasing Ltd. is evaluating a lease proposal from Rivet
Manufacturing Ltd, information available regarding which is as follows:
Primary lease period 3 years
Secondary lease period 2 years
Monthly lease rental during the primary Rs.35.06 per thousand
lease period
Monthly rental during secondary period Rs.1 per thousand
The target debt-equity ratio of Rocky Leasing Ltd. is 3:1 and the marginal cost of debt and
equity are 19% and 22% respectively. The marginal rate of tax inclusive of surcharge is
46%. The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 40%.
The salvage value after the third year is insignificant. Based on the IRR of the lease
proposal, determine whether the proposal should be accepted or not.
178
Part II
112. Leasewell Ltd. has a client who wants to lease an equipment worth Rs.100 lakh. Leasewell
Ltd. is facing a liquidity crunch and is looking for a loan participant for the lease deal who
can finance it to the extent of Rs.30 lakh. The equipment has a useful life of 5 years
and its salvage value is expected to be Rs.5 lakh. It can be depreciated at 30% on WDV
basis. The company contacted Wellfin Ltd., which agreed to participate in the lease. The
terms quoted by Wellfin Ltd. are an interest of 16% and repayments in equal quarterly
installments including interest over five years. If the Leasewell Ltd. expects a gross yield of
at least 30%, what is the minimum quarterly lease rental that should be quoted to the client?
Lease rentals are to be paid in arrears.
Leasewell Ltd. is thinking of offering a hire purchase plan to the client if he is willing to
make a down payment of Rs.30 lakh. The company wants the hire rentals to be paid
monthly in arrears. What is the minimum flat rate of interest that should be quoted
to the client if Leasewell Ltd. should not lose on this transaction compared to the above
lease transaction? Ignore interest tax. The income tax rate applicable to the company is
30%.
113. Shubhlabh Financial Services Ltd. (SFSL) has a client who wants to lease an equipment
that costs Rs.50 lakh. The current lease rate applicable to such leases is Rs.35 ptpm payable
annually in arrears. The company is at present not in a position to finance the lease entirely
by itself. It is therefore looking for a loan participant to finance at least Rs.10 lakh. The
supplier of the equipment is willing to finance it through its finance subsidiary and wants
the amount to be repaid over five years with interest at 16%, in equal annual installments
(including interest). SFSL wants a gross yield of 25% on this transaction.
You are required to advise SFSL whether it should go ahead with this transaction or not.
(Support your answer with suitable workings).
LEASE ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING
114. Anand Petro Chemicals Limited (APCL) has recently signed a lease agreement for
acquiring machinery costing Rs.450 lakh on a five-year non-cancelable lease at a rate of
Rs.312 per thousand payable at the end of every year. The salvage value of the machinery
after five years is estimated to be negligible. The other relevant information is as follows:
Marginal cost of capital 12%
Pre-tax marginal cost of debt 18%
Marginal tax rate (inclusive of surcharge) 51.75%
Rate of depreciation 30%
Required:
Based on the guidelines issued by the International Accounting Standards Committee
(IASC) for lease accounting and reporting, answer the following questions:
i. Calculate the present value of the minimum lease payments.
ii. Determine the value at which the machinery must be capitalized in the balance sheet of
APCL.
iii. Calculate the unexpired finance charge at the inception of the lease.
iv. Prepare a schedule showing the allocation of the unexpired finance charge using the
actuarial method.
v. Prepare the schedule required in (iv) using the sum of the digits method. Do the
IASC guidelines recognize this method of allocation? Explain.
vi. Prepare the schedule required in (iv) using the straight line method. Is this method
conceptually flawed? Explain.
vii. Show how the transaction will be reflected in the financial statements of APCL
at the end of the first year of the lease period. The problem has been solved
according to IAS:17 and AS:19 (Indian Standards).
179
Investment Banking and Financial Services
115. Jumbo Industries is contemplating an import lease for acquiring equipments costing Rs.72 lakh.
The lease terms require Jumbo Industries to pay a lease rental of Rs.105 ptpq, quarterly in
arrear over a non-cancelable period of 3 years. The marginal cost of debt is 18% p.a. and
the marginal rate of tax applicable to the company is 43%. The tax relevant rate of
depreciation is 25%.
Assume that the lease has to be capitalized in the books of the lessee as per the guidelines
of IAS:17 and AS:19 Show how the transaction will be reflected in the financial statements
of Jumbo Industries prepared at the end of each year of the lease period. The company
follows the effective rate of interest method (the actuarial method) for spreading over the
unexpired finance charge. Ignore salvage value.
116. Run Industries is contemplating to lease an industrial equipment costing Rs.65 lakh. The
lease terms require Run Industries to pay a lease rental of Rs.25.50 per thousand per month
payable monthly in advance over a period of 5 years. Its marginal cost of debt and equity
are 16% and 22% respectively. The long-term debt-equity ratio is 2 : 1. The tax relevant
depreciation and effective tax rate are 30% (WDV) and 34% respectively.
According to the IAS:17/AS:19 show how the transaction is reflected in the financial
statements of Run Industries during the lease period. Assume that the salvage value for the
asset is nil and interest allocation is made by the company using effective rate of interest
method.
117. Layman Ltd. has recently signed a lease for an equipment costing Rs.47 lakh. The lease is
for a non-cancelable period of 3 years and the lease rentals are payable at the rate of Rs.456
per thousand annually in arrear. The company depreciates the equipment @ 25% p.a. as per
the WDV method. Its incremental borrowing rate and the marginal rate of tax are 18% and
46% respectively.
a. Determine the capitalized value of the equipment.
b. Prepare a schedule showing the allocation of the unexpired finance charge.
c. Prepare all relevant ledger accounts for the 3 years of the lease in the books of lessee
and show how the ledger balances will be reflected in the financial statements for
these periods.
You may answer the above questions according to IAS:17/AS:19.
118. Creative Finance Limited has signed a lease agreement for equipment costing Rs.87 lakh.
The lease is non-cancelable for a period of 5 years and the lease rentals receivable are
312/1000 annually in arrears. Creative Finance Ltd. depreciates the equipment at the rate of
25% p.a. as per the WDV method. The incremental borrowing rate and marginal tax rate are
17% and 46% respectively. The residual value after 5 years is expected to be Rs.8.5 lakh. The
initial direct cost of the lease transactions is Rs.0.5 lakh.
a. Prepare a schedule showing the allocation of unearned finance income.
b. Prepare all relevant ledger accounts for the first 3 years of the lease and show how
these ledger balances will be reflected in the financial statements for the respective
periods.
You may follow IAS:17/AS:19 for answering this question.
119. Cordial Systems Ltd. is a dealer (lessor) in pollution control equipment. The products of the
company are sold either on hire purchase basis or on a 5-year non-cancelable lease.
The cash price of the equipment is Rs.20 lakh which includes a profit margin of 20% on
cost. The lease rate is 26.5 per thousand per month and the lease rentals are payable
annually in advance. The estimated unguaranteed residual value of the equipment at the end
of the lease period is 3% of the initial cash price. The prevailing market rate of interest for
medium-term loans is 16.5% per annum.
a. Determine the sales revenue to be recognized under the finance lease plan.
b. Prepare a schedule showing the allocation of financial income over the lease period.
c. Prepare the relevant ledger accounts in the books of Cordial Systems Ltd. for the
first year of the lease period. Also show how the transaction will be reflected in the
financial statements prepared at the end of the first year of the lease period.
You may follow IAS:17/AS:19 to answer this question.
180
Part II
HIRE PURCHASE
120. Tristar Chemicals has recently acquired some equipments costing Rs.100 lakh under the
industrial hire purchase scheme of Synergy Finance. The company is required to pay a hire
purchase installment of Rs.3,94,440 per month for a period of 36 months.
a. Calculate the flat rate of interest charged by Synergy Finance.
b. Calculate the effective rate of interest p.a. implicit in the scheme. Assume that the
hire purchase installments are payable at the end of every month.
c. Tristar Chemicals follows the sum of the digits method for allocating the interest
charged over the 3-year period. Calculate the interest allocated to each year by
Tristar Chemicals.
Note:
PVIFA(1%, 36 months) = 30.108
PVIFA(1%, 35 months) = 29.409
PVIFA(2%, 36 months) = 25.489
PVIFA(2%, 35 months) = 24.999
PVIFA(3%, 36 months) = 21.832
PVIFA(3%, 35 months) = 21.487
121. Finex Financial Services company is evaluating the financial flexibility of the following
hire purchase plan:
Cost of asset : Rs.30,000
Down payment : 25%
Rate of interest : 12% p.a. flat
Duration : 3 years
Frequency of payment : Monthly in arrears
The asset is entitled to a tax relevant rate of depreciation of 25% and the net salvage value
after 3 years is estimated to be 10% of the original cost.
The D/E ratio of the company is 4 : 1. Its pre-tax cost of debt is 20% and expected
return on equity is 24%. The company attracts a tax rate of 43%.
Given the above information, you are required to
a. Calculate the NPV of the hire purchase plan, assuming FFS company follows the
SOYD method for spreading the total charge for credit. Ignore Interest Tax.
b. Calculate the effective rate of interest using the approximation formula.
122. Monopoly Financial Services Ltd. is offering equipment finance under the following schemes:
Hire Purchase
Down payment 20%
Flat rate of interest 15%
Duration 3 years
Repayment Monthly in advance
Lease
Primary lease period 5 years
Lease rental 27 ptpm
Frequency of lease rentals Monthly in advance
Pratibha Steels Corporation (PSC) has considered a modernization program for which it
requires to invest in an equipment worth Rs.280 lakh.
The company has given the following information.
a. Tax rate applicable is 30%
b. Debt-equity ratio 3 : 1
181
Investment Banking and Financial Services
182
Part II
Required:
a. Calculate the minimum lease rental to be quoted on an asset cost of Rs.1,000. Ignore sales
tax.
b. Calculate the minimum hire charges to be quoted on an asset cost of Rs.1,000.
Assume that the bank recognizes finance income under the SOYD (Sum of Years
Digits) Method. Ignore sales tax and interest tax.
c. Calculate the add-on yield implied by the lease rental determined in (a) and the
effective rate of interest (approximate rate of interest) implied by the hire charges
determined in (b)).
125. PTS Chemicals Limited manufactures a wide range of speciality chemicals which find
applications in a number of industries such as detergents, cosmetics, leather, textiles,
pharmaceuticals and pesticides industries. In order to step up its capacity, the company has
incurred a capital expenditure of Rs.1,200 lakh of which equipments costing Rs.600 lakh
have been acquired under a hire purchase plan on the following terms:
Rate of interest – 16% flat
Frequency of payments – Annually in arrear
Pattern of payment – Equated
Down payment – 25%
Period – 4 years
The company follows the straight line method of depreciation and charges depreciation at
the rate of 12% p.a. for similar equipments.
a. Prepare tables showing the year-wise allocation of finance charge using (i) the
effective rate of interest method (ii) the SOYD method and (iii) the straight line
method.
b. Show how the transaction will be reflected in the financial statements of PTS
Chemicals at the end of the first year of the hire period.
126. Sindhiya Finance offers a hire purchase plan for its borrowers on the following terms.
Rate of interest : 13.5% flat
Repayment period : 4 years
Frequency of payment : Monthly in arrear
Down payment : 25%
Calculate the effective rate of interest per annum or the annual percentage rate (APR) using
(a) the trial and error approach and (b) the approximation formula.
127. Sahadev Financial Service offers a hire purchase plan under which the hirer is provided
with 100% finance in the following terms:
Rate of interest = 14%
Repayment period = 4 years
Frequency of payment = Monthly in arrear.
The hirer is required to invest 25% of the investment cost in the cumulative fixed deposit
scheme of the company for a period of 4 years. The company offers a rate of interest of
15% p.a. compounded monthly.
Calculate the APR of the scheme.
128. Sunanda Finance offers a hire purchase plan for its corporate borrowers on the following
terms:
• Rate of Interest : 13.5%
• Repayment period : 4 years
• Frequency of payment : Monthly in arrear
Immediately after paying the 26th monthly installment the borrower wishes to repay the
outstanding loan and purchase the equipment. Calculate the interest rebate according to the
effective rate of interest method.
183
Investment Banking and Financial Services
129. Srivani Finance offers a hire purchase plan for its borrower. Details of the plan are as
follows:
Rate of interest – 14% flat
Repayment period – 3 years
Frequency of payment – Monthly in arrear
Down payment – 25%
Immediately after paying the 24th monthly installment, the borrower works to repay the
outstanding loan and purchase the equipment. Calculate the interest rebate that can be
allowed to him according to the rule of 78.
130. Sujan Financial Services offers both leasing and hire purchase plans to its clientele. The
salient features of these plans are as follows:
A. Lease Plan
Primary period : 5 years
Lease rate : Rs.26.5 per thousand per month
Frequency of payment : Monthly in advance
B. Hire Purchase Plan
Hire period : 3 years
Rate of interest : 15.5% flat
Frequency of payment : Monthly in advance
Down payment : 25%
Sriven Industrial Corporation (SIC) is contemplating a capital expenditure of Rs.270 lakh.
Given the following information, evaluate the two plans for SIC:
A. Tax rate of depreciation : 40%
B. Marginal rate of tax : 46%
C. Marginal cost of capital : 17%
D. Marginal cost of debt : 20%
Assume that Sriven follows the SOYD method to spread the total charge for credit under
the hire purchase plan. The planning horizon is 5 years. The net salvage value of the plant and
machinery after 5 years is expected to be Rs.32 lakh.
131. Consider the following data about a hire purchase plan available to Mathur Industries Ltd.
for purchase of factory equipment.
Investment Rs.378 lakh
Hire period 3 years
Flat rate of interest 13.5% p.a.
Frequency of payment Monthly in advance
Amount of finance provided 100%
Initial deposit requirement (interest free) 25%
Term of deposit 3 years
Tax relevant rate of depreciation 25%
Marginal rate of tax 46%
Marginal cost of capital 14.5%
Marginal cost of debt 16%
Show how the transaction will be reflected in the financial statements over the hire
purchase period. The company follows the SOYD method for allocating the total charge for
credit.
184
Part II
132. A commercial bank has recently diversified into industrial hire purchase business. The bank
proposes to offer a down payment plan with the following features:
Down payment (as a % of investment cost) : 20
Repayment Period : 3 years
Frequency of Payment : Quarterly in advance
The bank is required to pay interest tax at the rate of 3% on the finance income and income
tax at the rate of 26%. The bank follows the SOYD method to allocate the unexpired
finance charge.
Required:
If the average cost of capital for the bank is 9%, is a flat rate of 14% profitable to it?
Support your answer with necessary workings.
133. Zeta Financial Services Ltd. (ZFSL) offers finance to individuals to purchase four wheelers
on the following terms:
• Deposit of 20% of the cost of the asset should be made at the inception of the
transaction.
• 48 EMIs have to be made each at the beginning of every month.
• Front end service charge of 2% should be made.
• Deposit carrying an interest of 12% p.a. compounded monthly would be repaid at
the end of 48 months.
You are required to:
a. Calculate the maximum monthly payments to be made by a borrower if his
opportunity cost of funds is 18% p.a. and cost of the asset is Rs.4 lakh.
b. Calculate the effective interest rate on the completed transaction if the borrower
would like to make the prepayment at the end of 36 months after paying 36
installments. Deposit would be repaid at the end of 36 months. The company offers
an interest rebate calculated in accordance with the Rule of 78 Method. Assume the
EMIs as obtained in (a) above.
134. Brick-well Construction Limited has proposed to acquire a machinery costing Rs.100 crore.
The equipment has a life of 7 years. The tax relevant rate of depreciation is 25%. The target
debt-equity ratio is 2:1. The cost of debt and equity are 15% and 18% respectively.
Alternatively, the company can lease the equipment or take it on hire. It had approached
Vibrant Financial Services which offers both lease and hire purchase to corporates. The
lease terms are as follows:
Lease rentals during primary 32 ptpm payable monthly in
lease period of 4 years advance
Lease rentals during secondary 2 ptpq payable yearly in advance
period of 3 years
The hire terms of the company are as follows:
Flat rate of interest 13%
Structure Payable monthly in advance
Hire period 4 years
The marginal tax rate of BCL is 30%. BCL follows SOYD method of interest allocation.
The planning horizon is 4 years.
Assume negligible salvage value at the end of 4 years.
You are required to
a. Choose the best alternative between lease and hire purchase from BCL point of view
b. Choose the best alternative between purchase and the alternative obtained in (a) above.
185
Investment Banking and Financial Services
135. Fair Finance Ltd (FFL) offers the following finance scheme to its customers:
Amount (Rs.) 4,00,000
Repayment Period (Mths) 48
Equated Monthly Installment (Rs.) 9,250
(Payable at the beginning of every month)
Down Payment 25%
The company levies a service fee of Rs.2000 and offers a prompt payment bonus of Rs.8
per Rs.10,000 per month on expiry of the repayment period.
After paying 36 installments (at the end of 3 years) one of the borrower opts for an early
settlement. The company allows the prompt payment bonus in respect of the installment
paid and offers an interest rebate in accordance with the Rule of 78 method.
You are required to calculate the effective rate of interest on the completed transaction.
136. The following information relates to the loans and advances, hire purchase receivables and
lease assets of A to Z Finance Ltd., a non-banking finance company.
Loans and Advances
Category of loans and Amount at the beginning Recovery during the year
advances of the year leading to closure
(Rs. lakh) of accounts
Standard 180 —
Sub-standard 50 25%
Doubtful
Up to 1 year 12 20%
1-3 years 8 10%
More than 3 years 7 5%
Loss 25 5%
Loans and advances extended during the year amount to Rs.30 lakh, which remained as
a standard asset. Of the sub-standard assets, Rs.5 lakh became doubtful while Rs.10
lakh worth of assets were upgraded. Out of the doubtful assets, Rs.3 lakh were
upgraded. The entire amount of outstanding doubtful debts is fully secured.
Hire Purchase Assets
(Rs. lakh)
Current year Previous year
Total dues (Stock on hire) 95 88
Unmatured finance charges 20 18
Original cost of the assets 75 70
Amount realizable 95 88
Accumulated depreciation 29 14
186
Part II
137. Zaveri Finance Company (ZFC) offers hire purchase schemes on the following terms:
Down payment 20%
Duration 5 years
Frequency of payment Monthly in arrears.
Mohan Industries Ltd. (MIL) is contemplating an investment of Rs.75 lakh for purchase of
a plant. The plant attracts a tax relevant depreciation rate of 25% and has a salvage value of
10% of initial cost.
MIL has approached ZFC to avail the above hire purchase plan. ZFC’s cost of capital is
12%. It is in the tax bracket of 30%. Assume ZFC recognizes finance income on the basis
of the SOYD method and attracts an interest tax of 2%.
You are required to
a. Determine the minimum flat rate of interest to be charged by ZFC on the above HP plan.
b. Reflect the above hire purchase transaction in the books of ZFC for the first three
years of HP term. Assume the flat rate of interest as arrived at in (a) above.
138. Mr. Gangaram, one of the partners of M/s Gangaram and Brothers intends to purchase a car
costing Rs.5,60,000 on monthly installments for his personal use. Standard Finance Ltd.
(SFL) offered the following finance scheme to him:
Deposit (to be made at the beginning) 20% of the cost of the car
Interest earned on the deposit (at monthly rests) 6% p.a.
Flat rate of interest charged 11% p.a.
Repayment period 36 months
Payment structure At the beginning of every month
SFL levies a front ended documentation and service fee of 0.5% of the cost and offers a
prompt payment bonus of Rs.18 per Rs.20,000 per month on the expiry of the repayment
period. The deposit is refunded at the end of 36 months along with accumulated interest.
Realizable value at the end of 3 years is estimated to be negligible and the tax rate applicable to
Mr. Gangaram is 30%.
Assuming that all installments have been paid on the due date, you are required to
determine:
a. The effective rate of interest per annum implied in the above financing scheme.
b. The effective rate of interest per annum assuming M/s Gangaram and Brothers
purchased the car. The firm is in the tax bracket of 20%. Its pre-tax cost of debt is
14%, and weighted average cost of capital is 20%. The car can be depreciated at the rate
of 30% on WDV basis.
139. Aditya Steels (P) Ltd. (ASL) is contemplating to modernize its operations for which it
requires a new plant costing Rs.800 lakh inclusive of CST @ 4%. It estimates the economic
life of the plant to be 5 years after which it is estimated to realize Rs.12 lakh. The tax
relevant rate of depreciation is 30%.
The finance manager of ASL has approached Kavya Financial Services (KFS) to finance its
modernization program either through leasing or hire purchase. KFS forwarded the
following details to ASL:
Leasing
Lease rentals : Rs.25 ptpm
Payment : Quarterly in arrears
Lease period : 5 years
Hire Purchase
Down payment : 25%
Flat rate of interest : 12%
Payment : Monthly in advance
Hire period : 5 years.
The marginal cost of debt and marginal cost of capital of ASL are 14% and 16%
respectively. ASL is in the tax bracket of 35% and it allocates interest on SOYD basis.
187
Investment Banking and Financial Services
188
Part II
142. Epsilon Finance Company offers the following type of Deposit Linked Scheme for
acquiring cars.
Deposit Scheme 25% Deposit
Amount (Rs.) 1,00,000.00
Repayment Period (in months) 36
Equated Monthly Installment (Rs.) (Payable at the end of every 3,835.00
month)
Accumulated Interest on Deposit (after 36 months) – interest is 13,886.40
cumulated with quarterly rests
The company levies a front-ended documentation and service fee of Rs.2,000 and offers a
prompt payment bonus of Rs.10 per Rs.10,000 per month on expiry of the repayment
period. The EMI is payable at the end of every month.
After 24 months, one of the borrowers (who has borrowed Rs.1,00,000) under the scheme
opts for an early settlement. The company levies a service charge of 2% on the principal
outstanding on the date of settlement. It offers an interest rebate calculated in accordance
with the Rule of 78 method. Calculate the effective rate of interest on the completed
transaction.
143. Premier Financial Services (PFS) offers car loans for a maximum period of 4 years. The
company finances up to 80% of the cost of the cars and its repayment schedule for loan
amount of Rs.1,00,000 is as follows:
Loan Tenure (in months) 12 24 36 48 60
Equated Monthly Installment (Rs.) 9,260 5,173 3,835 3,183 2,807
The company charges processing fee of 1% of the amount financed. Mr. Avinash applied
for the loan to finance the purchase of a car costing Rs.4,20,000.
Required:
a. Calculate the flat rate of interest if Mr. Avinash opts for a loan tenure of 3 years.
b. Calculate the effective rate of interest on the completed transaction if he opts for an early
settlement after paying the 24th installment. Assume PFS calculates the interest rebate
according to the Rule of 78 method.
144. Mrs Laxmi is contemplating to purchase a Maruthi Zen costing Rs.3.50 lakh by availing a
consumer finance of Rs.2.50 lakh. She is considering the following schemes:
Citi Bank scheme calls for 15% down payment on the cost price of the car and their rate of
interest is 16% flat. The loan is repayable in 36 equal monthly installments payable in
arrears. The bank also permits 3 months as deferment period at the beginning of the
transaction. The bank charges Rs.2,500 as processing fee and in case of a prepayment the
bank allows interest rebate equal to 80% of interest rebate as calculated according to
effective rate of interest method.
You are required to:
a. Calculate the EMI assuming that the actual amount financed is Rs.2.50 lakh.
b. If Mrs. Laxmi opts for an early repayment after completion of 18 months from the
beginning of the repayments, calculate the effective rate of interest on the completed
transaction.
145. A consumer loan of Rs.40,000 is repayable in 36 monthly installments (in arrear) of
Rs.1,500. Calculate the APR of the transaction.
146. A washing machine which costs Rs.19,000 can be purchased by 52 weekly installments of
Rs.380, payable in arrear. What is the APR of this transaction?
147. The car finance scheme of Meridian Finance Company permits a self-employed
professional to borrow up to Rs.2.75 lakh repayable in 12 monthly installments in arrear
calculated at a flat rate of interest of 13% p.a.
Calculate the monthly repayment on a loan amount of Rs.2 lakh and find the APR of
the transaction.
189
Investment Banking and Financial Services
148. Mr. Anil plans to purchase a car worth Rs.4,25,000. The finance company whom Anil
approached has offered him the following scheme:
The loan requires a down payment of 25% and the loan period is 20 years. It carries an
interest of 12.5% p.a. compounded monthly.
Calculate the equated monthly installment which is to be paid by Anil under the scheme.
Also, calculate the EMIs, if the loan does not require the down payment.
149. Sahitya Finance Company offers a credit plan under which a loan amount P is to be
repaid by a single installment of amount (P + D) after n (> 0) years. Under the credit
plan offered by the company, a customer availed a loan of Rs.75,000 on July 10, 20x0 to be
repaid one year later by a single installment of 80,000. On December 10, 20x0, he opted
for an early settlement.
In respect of loan repayable by a single installment, the Consumer Credit regulation
requires that the interest rebate should be proportional from the settlement date to the
originally specified repayment date. The regulation, however, permits the lender to take the
settlement date on the actual date of the early settlement deferred by 2 months for a loan of
an original term of 5 years or less.
Determine the sum paid by the borrower on early settlement and the APR on the completed
transaction.
150. The equated monthly installments for a consumer loan of Rs.54,000 under these repayment
options are as follows.
Repayment period EMI (Rs.)
(in months)
12 5,062.5
24 2,835.0
36 2,107.5
Calculate the flat and the effective rates of interest for each option.
151. Rehana Finance Company offers the following types of deposit linked schemes to acquire cars.
Deposit scheme Zero Deposit 25% deposit
Amount (Rs.) 90,000 90,000
Repayment period in months 36 36
Equated monthly installment 3,475 3,300
Bullet installment at the end (Rs.) 7,200 –
Accumulated interest on deposit (after 36 months) 11,720
The company levies a front ended documentation and service fee of Rs.1,500 and offers a
prompt payment bonus of Re.1 per thousand per month on expiry of the repayment period.
The EMI is payable at the end of every month.
Calculate the effective rates of interest implied by the two schemes.
152. Under the car finance plan of Meridian Finance Company a self-employed professional can
borrow up to Rs.1.10 lakh repayable in 12 monthly installments in arrears calculated at a
flat rate of interest of 12.5% p.a.
After making the sixth monthly repayment, the borrower pays off the outstanding loan. The
company calculates the amount required for early settlement by using the modified rule of
78 with α = 1. Determine the amount payable by the borrower and the effective rate on the
completed transaction.
153. Zeta Finance Company offers 20% deposit and 20% down payment schemes for acquiring
consumer durables. Prabhat approached the company to finance a washing machine costing
Rs.25,000 under 20% deposit scheme. The flat rate of interest charged is 10% p.a. Prabhat
is required to pay 24 equal monthly installments in arrears and keep the deposit at the
beginning of the contract which would be repaid on the day of payment of the last
installment with interest @ 15% p.a. compounded monthly.
190
Part II
191
Investment Banking and Financial Services
192
Part II
159. Penguin Factors, the subsidiary of Meridian Bank offers the following fund-based facilities:
Facility Recourse Non-Recourse
Factoring Factoring
A Discount charge (payable upfront) 19.5% p.a. 19.5% p.a.
B Reserve 20% p.a. 20% p.a.
C Commission 2% 3%
The finance manager of Sameer Textiles has recently approached Penguin Factors to factor
the receivables. After a careful analysis of the sales ledger of Sameer Textiles, the Vice-
President (Operations) of Penguin Factors agrees to a guaranteed payment period of 60 days.
The finance manager of Sameer Textiles is not clear about the type of factoring he should
opt for and seeks your help in this regard. He provides you with the following additional
information.
a. The firm sells on terms 2/10 net 60. On an average 50% of the customers pay on the
10th day and avail the discount. On an average the remaining customers pay 90 days
after the invoice date.
b. The bad debts and losses amount to 2% of the sales invoices.
c. The sales executives are responsible for following up collectors and on an average,
spend 25% of their time on collection efforts. Subjective assessment is that the firm
can increase its annual sales by Rs.15 lakh if the sales executives are relieved from
collection responsibilities. The gross margin on sales is 25% and the projected sales
turnover for the following year (without considering the increase of Rs.15 lakh) is
Rs.260 lakh.
d. By hiving off sales ledger administration and credit monitoring, the firm can save
administrative overheads to the time of Rs.1.25 lakh per annum.
e. As of now, the firm has been financing its investment in receivables through a mix
of bank finance and long-term funds in the ratio of 2:1. The effective rate of interest
on bank finance is 18.5% p.a. and the cost of long-term funds is around 23% p.a.
(pre-tax).
160. Thirumalai Chemicals Limited (TCL) involved in petrochemicals has an annual turnover of
Rs.800 lakh, about 20% of which is cash sale. The company has an average collection
period of 45 days. The gross margin on sale is 20%. The cost of long-term funds (pre-tax)
for TCL is 20% and banks interest rate is 16% p.a. The bank finance to long-term funds
ratio is 2:1. Annual expenditure on maintaining and collecting accounts is about Rs.10 lakh.
The bad debt averages around 1% of the credit sale.
Wipro Factors Limited (WFL) recently approached the management of TCL and offered
factoring services under the following terms:
Non-recourse Factoring
Discount charges (Upfront) 19% p.a.
Commission charges (Upfront) 2.0%
Reserve 25.0%
There is a possibility that WFL would agree for 40 days collection period. TCL is expected to
avoid 75% of expenses incurred in maintaining and collecting accounts, if it avails factoring
services.
Is factoring a better way to manage receivables than the current practice? Show all
calculations.
Make suitable assumptions.
193
Investment Banking and Financial Services
161. Duncan Bearings is a medium-scale unit engaged in the manufacture of roller bearings. The
principal customers of the company include the major manufacturers of two-wheelers and
commercial vehicles. The firm sells on credit and the present terms are 1/10 net 60. A
recent analysis of the outstanding receivables using the Ageing Schedule revealed the
following position:
Age group Standard Percentage of Actual Percentage of
(in days) Receivable Receivables
0 - 03 35 20
31 - 45 60 40
46 - 90 5 30
> 90 – 6
The adverse changes in the pattern of payment as revealed by the Ageing Schedule
prompted the firm to review its practices relating to receivables management. The finance
manager of the firm found that:
a. The average collection period is 66 days on an annual sales turnover of Rs.780 lakh.
b. The proportion of sales on which customers currently take discount is 0.3.
c. The bad debts to sales ratio is 0.01. The average cost of funds is 16% p.a. To
expedite collection of receivables and reduce the collection period, the finance
manager has proposed the following alternatives:
i. Factoring: The firm can opt for either Recourse Advance Factoring or Non-
Recourse Advance Factoring on the following terms:
Recourse Non- Recourse
Factoring Factoring
Interest rate on advance 18% 18%
Commission (as a % of 0.5% 1%
invoice value)
The firm can negotiate for a fixed maturity period of 50 days and the firm can
save about Rs.3.4 lakh in terms of administrative overheads associated with
collection of debts.
ii. Change in Credit Policy: The firm can relax its discount terms to 2/10 net
45. Such a relaxation coupled with vigorous collection efforts can reduce the
average collection period to 36 days and increase the proportion of discount
sales to 0.6.
Based on economic considerations, which one of the alternatives will you
recommend? Show all calculations that are relevant for supporting your
recommendations.
162. Swan Silk Mills Limited (SSML) is a medium sized, composite textile and silk mill based
at Hyderabad. The company is producing pure and artificial silk fabrics, sarees, cushions,
etc. During the year 20x0-x1 it had a sales turnover of Rs.48 crore and expects it to increase
by 10% during 20x1-x2.
Currently, the company follows credit terms of 1/10 net 45 days. 20% of the customers pay
within 10 days and the balance accepts the bills drawn by the company with a usance
period of 45 days. However, only 80% of the bills receivable would be honored within the
45 days and the balance pay within 70 days. The company has a policy to avail short-term
bank finance at an interest rate of 18% p.a. to fund 80% of the receivables and the rest is
sourced from the company’s own funds at an effective cost (in pre-tax terms) of 21% p.a.
The company spends around Rs.0.6 crore for the purpose of collecting dues, ledger
administration and credit monitoring.
194
Part II
The finance manager of the firm has been approached by Swift Factors Limited (SFL)
which provides advance non-recourse factoring for working capital finance to small and
medium sized companies. The terms and conditions of factoring are as follows:
• Discount charge is 19% p.a.
• Commission is 1.5%
• Advance payment as proportion of factored receivables is 80%.
• Agreed payment time is 30 days.
If factoring is availed the administration expenses can be avoided.
Assume 360 days in a year.
You are required to:
Suggest the alternative of working capital finance to the finance manager of SSML.
163. Siddi Prints is a medium-sized, composite textile mill based at Hyderabad. During the year
20x0-x1 it has a sales turnover of Rs.80 lakh and expects it to increase by 10% during
20x1-x2.
The company currently follows credit terms of 2/10 net 60 days. 30% of the customers are
expected to pay within 10 days and avail the discount. The balance 70% accepts the bills
drawn by the company, on the day of sale, with a usance period of 60 days. However, only
90% of the bills receivable would be honored within 60 days and the remaining are paid
within 90 days. The company has a policy to avail short-term bank finance at an
interest rate of 16% p.a. to fund 75% of the receivables and the rest is sourced from the
company’s own funds at an effective cost (in pre-tax terms) of 24% p.a. The
company spends around Rs.0.8 lakh for the purpose of collecting dues, ledger
administration and credit monitoring. Bad debts amount to 1% of the credit sales.
The finance manager of the firm has been approached by Swift Factors Limited which
offers bill discounting and advance non-recourse factoring for working capital finance to
small and medium-sized companies.
The terms and conditions under bill discounting option are as follows:
i. Discount charge is 20% p.a.
ii. On the 60th day, the payment day of the bills, the bank agrees to extend the time of
unpaid bills to 90 days charging an interest of 3% which the company would be
collecting from the customers.
The terms of factoring are as follows:
i. Discount charge is 19% p.a. and commission is 2%.
ii. Advance payment as proportion of factored receivables is 85%.
iii. Agreed payment time is 50 days.
While the finance manager was assured by Swift Factors that any of the above alternatives
would be better than the existing in-house management of receivables, he is unable to
decide among the three.
You are required to evaluate the cost benefit analysis of bill discounting and factoring and
suggest the alternative of working capital finance to the finance manager of the company.
(Assume 360 days in a year and administration expenses can be avoided if factoring is
availed).
164. Sri Chemicals Limited (SCL) is presently managing its accounts receivables internally
through its credit department. Sales for the current year are Rs.360 lakh. Its credit terms are
1/15 net 40. On an average 20% of the customers avail the discount while the remaining
pay within 45 days. Its bad debts to sales ratio is 0.015 and its contribution margin is 20%.
The firm currently is financing its receivables by a mix of bank finance and own funds in
the ratio of 3:2. The rate of interest on bank finance is 20% whereas its pre-tax cost of own
funds is 24%.
195
Investment Banking and Financial Services
SCL has received a proposal from Charan Factors Limited (CFL) to factor its receivables
under a bank participation factoring arrangement with Sind Bank providing an advance of
60 percent of factor reserves at an interest of 22%. CFL has agreed for advance payment of
80% of receivables at a guaranteed payment of 40 days. The interest (payable upfront) and
the commission charged by CFL is 20% and 3% respectively. The factoring arrangement is
without recourse to SCL.
SCL has projected its sales for the next year to increase by 10% without a factoring
arrangement and by 20% with factoring arrangement. The collection expenses are expected
to be reduced by Rs.1.5 lakh due to the factoring arrangement.
(Assume 365 days in a year).
You are required to suggest whether or not SCL should go for the factoring arrangement.
Support your answer with detailed workings.
165. Sritex Ltd. (SL) is a medium-sized, composite textile mill based at Kakinada. During the
year 20x0-x1 it had a sales turnover of Rs.250 lakh and expects it to increase by 10%
during the year 20x1-x2.
The credit terms of SL are 1/15 net 60 days. 20% of the customers pay within 15 days and
avail the discount. The remaining customers accept the bills drawn by the company for a period
of 60 days. However, the past records show that on an average 80% of the bills accepted are
honored on the due date while the remaining 20% of the bills are dishonored and the payment of
the same is made within 80 days.
SL has a policy to avail short-term bank finance from Finex Bank (FB) to fund 70% of
receivables at an interest of 18% p.a.
The cost of SL’s own funds is 24% p.a. (in pre-tax terms). The cost of sales ledger maintenance
and receivables collection is estimated to be Rs.0.6 lakh.
FB has recently started offering non-recourse factoring services and has also approached
SL for the same. The terms of factoring are
Discount charge 22% p.a.
Commission 2.5%
Advance payment 80% of factored receivables
Agreed payment time 40 days
SL has opted for factoring since SL expects to avoid the administration expenses and increase
its sales revenue. The SL’s variable to sales ratio is 0.7.
Assume 365 days in a year.
You are required to determine the minimum increment in sales at which factoring is better
than bank financing.
166. Sujana Industries Ltd. offers credit to its customers at 2/10, net 45. At present, about 25%
of the customers pay on the 45th day, 50% pay on the 55th day and the rest pay on the 75th
day. Bad debts generally amount to 2% of sales. The company now finances 50% of its
receivables through a bank loan at 16% and the rest through own funds. It is planning to
factor its receivables with Fairfacts Ltd. which agreed to factor the receivables at a
commission of 2%. The factor will also provide an advance of 75% of the receivables at an
interest of 15% and pay the balance at the end of the 50th day. The cost of the company’s
own funds is 20%. The sales of the company are at present Rs.500 crore and are expected
to increase to Rs.575 crore if the sales force is relieved from the collection efforts. The
variable costs generally form 75% of the sales. Further, a saving of Rs.5 lakh is expected
annually due to the accounting services provided by the factoring company.
You are required to advise the company whether factoring is desirable or not.
(Support your answer with suitable workings. Assume 360 days in a year).
196
Part II
197
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Mr. X Mrs. X
Rs. p.m. Rs. p.m.
Salary 20,000 12,000
Provident fund 800 600
Vehicle loan deduction 600 600
Income tax 4,000 2,000
You are now required to advice HFC the maximum amount of loan which can be
given to Mr. & Mrs. X and the maximum value of the flat which the couple can
consider buying?
SOURCES OF FINANCE AND REGULATORY ENVIRONMENT OF
FINANCIAL SERVICES
173. The summarized Balance Sheet of Apt Finance Ltd. (AFL) as at 31st March, 20x0 is as
follows:
(Rs. lakh)
Capital and Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
Shareholders’ Fund: Fixed Assets (Net)
– Subscribed and called – Own Assets 3,246.58
upEquity Capital
5567.31
Less: Call money – Leased Assets 18,952.75
receivable 0.42 5,566.89 – Capital Work-in-progress 18,027.62
– Cumulative Preference Investments
Shares of Rs.100 each to
be converted to equity at
the end of 31st March, 200.00
2001
– Capital Reserve 514.33 – Investments in Government 5,790.27
(represented by surplus securities
on sale of assets)
– General Reserve 3,612.19 – Investment in Subsidiary 2,220.00
Companies
– Share Premium Account 14,131.02 – Trade Investments 5,316.83
– Revaluation Reserves 2,517.00 Current Assets, Loans & Advances
– Debenture Redemption 4,100.00 – Stock on hire 45,487.00
Reserve
Secured Loans – Sundry Debtors 3,559.01
– Banks 27,378.03 – Cash & Bank Balance 3,844.76
– Secured Redeemable 14,198.03 – Loans and Advances
Non-convertible
Debentures
Unsecured loans – To subsidiaries 2,421.51
– Loans and Advances 480.05 – Others 10,026.03
– Public Fixed Deposits 37,299.39
Current Liabilities and
Provisions
– Sundry Creditors 1,949.85
– Unmatured Finance 656.42
Charges
– Others 5,088.06
– Provisions 1,201.10
1,18,892.36 1,18,892.36
198
Part II
199
Part II: Solutions
MONEY MARKET
Introduction to Money Market
1. a. The success rate that is to be maintained by the PDs for G-Secs is 33.33% of the
commitment.
(Rs. crore)
Commitment for aggregate bidding for G-Secs by TRQ Ltd. 1000
Commitment for aggregate bidding for G-Secs by XYZ Ltd. 1200
Required amount of successful bids for TRQ Ltd. (1000 x 33.33%) 333.3
Required amount of successful bids for XYZ Ltd. (1200 x 33.33%) 399.96
b. For the PDs to meet the requirements of their commitments, the tendered bids should be
greater than their commitments. Similarly, the bids accepted by them should be greater than
the successful bids for them to meet the requirements.
Adherence to Commitments
(Rs. crore)
Bids Tendered Commitments (Y/N) Adhered (Y/N)
TRQ Ltd. 800 < 1000 N
XYZ Ltd. 1400 > 1200 Y
Adherence to Successful Bids
(Rs. crore)
Bids Accepted Required Commitment AdherenceY/N
TRQ Ltd. 700 > 333.3 Y
XYZ Ltd. 1000 > 399.96 Y
From the table given above it can be observed that though TRQ Ltd. has adhered to the
successful bids, it does not adhere to the commitments. XYZ Ltd. has, however, adhered to
both its commitments and the successful bids.
2. The success ratio to be maintained by PDs while bidding for a T-bills auction is 40%.
Hence the commitment of aggregate bidding by STL Ltd. would have been
315 x 100/40 = Rs.787.5 crore.
For a PD to adhere to the commitments, the bids tendered should be greater than their
commitment for aggregate bidding. And for a PD to adhere to the successful bids, the bids
accepted should be greater than the required amount of successful bids. The minimum
amounts of tendered and accepted bids for STL Ltd. in order to adhere to the requirements
will be Rs.787.5 crore and Rs.315 crore respectively.
3. (Rs. crore)
G-Secs T-Bills
Notified Amount 3700 2200
Bids Accepted 3100 1800
Due to the amount of accepted bids falling below the notified amounts for g-secs and
T-Bills, both the issues will devolve on the PDs and the RBI.
(Rs. crore)
Total devolvement in the G-Secs issue 600
Total devolvement in the T-Bills issue 400
The devolved amount will have to be shared by all PDs, RBI and Sterling in the following
manner.
Part II
Devolvement in G-Secs
(Rs. crore)
Amounts devolved on all PDs = 600 x 0.25 = 150
Amount devolved on RBI = 600 x 0.75 = 450
Amount devolved on Sterling = 150 x 0.10 = 15
Devolvement in T-Bills
Amount devolved on all PDs = 400 x 0.20 = 80
Amount devolved on RBI = 400 x 0.80 = 320
Amount devolved on Sterling = 80 x 0.05 = 4
In case of devolvement, the collectively underwritten portion by all PD’s will be fixed at a
level not exceeding 25% of an issue in the case of dated securities and 20% in case of
T-Bills. The RBI will underwrite the remaining 75% and 80% respectively.
4. i. The success ratio to be maintained by PDs in G-Secs = 33.33%
The success ratio to be maintained by PDs in Auction T-Bills = 40%
(Rs. crore)
P Ltd. Q Ltd. R Ltd. S Ltd.
G-Secs (commitment x 33.33%) 267 300 200 133
Auction T-Bills (commitment x 40%) 360 480 600 680
ii. G-Secs
Adherence to commitments Adherence to successful bids
Bids Commit- Adhered Bids accepted Required Adhered
tendered ments Y/N commitments Y/N
P Ltd. 850 > 800 Y 300 > 267 Y
Q Ltd. 1,000 > 900 Y 250 < 300 N
R Ltd. 500 < 600 N 150 < 200 N
S Ltd. 600 > 400 Y 300 > 133 Y
From the above table it can be observed that R Ltd. did not adhere to the commitment on
aggregative bidding or on the required amount of successful bids.
Q Ltd. has adhered only to their commitment on aggregative bidding but not to the required
amount of successful bids.
Auction T-Bills
(Rs. crore)
Adherence to commitments Adherence to successful bids
Bids Commitments Adhered Bids Required Adhered
tendered Y/N accepted commitment Y/N
P Ltd. 1000 > 900 Y 300 < 360 N
Q Ltd. 700 < 1200 N 250 < 480 N
R Ltd. 1700 > 1500 Y 620 > 600 Y
S Ltd. 1900 > 1700 Y 750 > 680 Y
It can be observed that Q Ltd. has not adhered to either to the commitment on aggregative
bidding or to the required amount of successful bids while P Ltd. has not adhered to the
required amount of successful bids.
201
Investment Banking and Financial Services
5. Case 1
(Rs. crore)
G-Secs 91-day
T-Bills
Notified amount 600 200
Bids accepted 600 200
There is no shortfall in the subscription of G-Secs and 91-day T-Bills since the bids
received for G-Secs and the T-Bills are equal to the notified amount. Hence, there is no
devolvement.
Case 2
(Rs. crore)
G-Secs 91-day
T-Bills
Notified amount 600 200
Bids accepted 500 150
It can be observed that the bids accepted for the G-Secs and 91-day T-Bills fall short of the
notified amount by Rs.100 crore and Rs.50 crore respectively. Hence there is a devolvement in
the issues. The devolvement on PDs, Ross Ltd. and RBI will be assessed based on the
following:
Devolvement on RBI in case of G-Secs = 75% of the devolvement
Devolvement on RBI in case of T-Bills = 80% of the devolvement
Devolvement on PDs in case of G-Secs = 25% of the devolvement
Devolvement on PDs in case of T-Bills = 20% of the devolvement
Devolvement on Ross Ltd. in case of G-Secs = 15% of the amount devolved on PDs
Devolvement on Ross Ltd. in case of T-Bills = 10% of the amount devolved on PDs
(Rs. crore)
G-Secs 91-day T-Bills
Amount of shortfall 100 50
a. Devolvement on PDs 100 x 0.25 = 25.00 50 x 0.20 = 10.00
b. Devolvement on Ross Ltd. 25 x 0.15 = 3.75 10 x 0.10 = 1.00
c. Devolvement on RBI 100 x 0.75 = 75.00 50 x 0.80 = 40.00
And, the success ratio to be maintained by the primary dealers in Auction T-Bills = 40%
202
Part II
b.
Government Securities
(All figures in Rs. crore)
Particulars Adherence to commitments Adherence to successful bids
Bids Commit- Adhered Bids Required Adhered
tendered ments (Y/N) accepted commitment (Y/N)
PNB Gilts Ltd. 1,000 > 900 Y 400 > 300 Y
SBI Gilts Ltd. 900 < 1,000 N 350 > 333 Y
Gilts 1,100 > 800 Y 412 > 267 Y
Securities
Trading
Corporation
ICICI 650 < 700 N 200 < 233 N
Securities and
Finance
Company Ltd.
From the above table it can be observed that ICICI Securities and Finance Company Ltd.
has not adhered to the commitment on aggregative bidding or on the required amount of
successful bids and SBI Gilts Ltd. has not adhered to the commitment on aggregative
bidding.
Auction T-Bills
(All figures in Rs. crore)
Particulars Adherence to commitments Adherence to successful bids
Bids Commit- Adhered Bids Required Adhered
tendered ments (Y/N) accepted commitment (Y/N)
PNB Gilts Ltd. 1,500 > 1,300 Y 500 < 520 N
SBI Gilts Ltd. 1,400 < 1,500 N 450 < 600 N
Gilts Securities 1,200 > 1,100 Y 350 < 440 N
Trading
Corporation
ICICI 1,600 < 1,800 N 500 < 720 N
Securities and
Finance
Company Ltd.
From the above table it can be observed that only PNB Gilts Ltd. and Gilts Securities
Trading Corporation has adhered to the commitment on aggregative bidding but none of the
primary dealers have adhered to the amount of successful bids.
Treasury Bills
7. Fully accepted bids will be as follows:
Bidder Price Quoted Approved Amount (Rs. cr.)
A 98.95 1800
B 98.93 700
C 98.92 1000
Total 3500
203
Investment Banking and Financial Services
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
A =⎢ − 1⎥ x = 4.26%
⎣ 98.95 ⎦ 91
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
B = ⎢ − 1⎥ x = 4.34%
⎣ 98.93 ⎦ 91
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
C = ⎢ − 1⎥ x = 4.38%
⎣ 98.92 ⎦ 91
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
D and E = ⎢ − 1⎥ x = 4.46%
⎣ 98.90 ⎦ 91
If this auction is a single price auction, the price to be paid by the winning bidder would be
Rs.98.90.
⎡ Face Value ⎤ 365
8. Yield = ⎢ ⎥ −1x
⎣ Pr ice ⎦ Days to maturity
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
= ⎢ − 1⎥ x
⎣ 91.35 ⎦ 364
= 9.495%.
9. a. The interest rate for each of the 6 years is
Year T-Bill yield Mark up of 3% Coupon for each year
1 11.55* 14.55 14.5%
2 10.55 13.55 13.5%
3 9.90 12.90 13.0%
4 9.30 12.30 12.5%
5 9.50 12.50 12.5%
6 8.30 11.30 11.5%
204
Part II
11.14%
The post-tax cost to the company is (i) in the following:
2, 496 2,544 2,588 2, 634 2, 680 947
10,000 = + + + + +
(1 + i) (1 + i) 2
(1 + i) 3
(1 + i) 4
(1 + i) 5
(1 + i)6
Solving,
By i = 11.14%.
* T–Bill Yield for year 1
(11.0 x 0.3) + (11.5 x 0.5) + (12.5 x 0.2) = 11.5.
Similarly you can calculate for the remaining years also.
10. The optimal cut-off price is Rs.98.85. Below this point the amount of bids is short by
Rs.150 crore and at this point, it has a surplus of Rs.350 crore. The first 4 bids given by
A and B are accepted completely and the next quote given by the 2 bidders being the
same RBI allots them proportionately. The fully accepted bids are
(Rs. crore)
Name of the bidder Price Quoted Approval Amount
A 98.91 100
A 98.89 180
B 98.93 50
B 98.90 120
Total 450
The RBI allots the 2 bidders proportionately in the following manner.
Name of the bidder Price Amount Proportionate
Amount Allotted
(Rs. crore)
A 98.85 200 60
C 98.85 300 90
500 150
⎡ Face Value ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ − 1⎥ x
⎣ Pr ice ⎦ Days to maurity
205
Investment Banking and Financial Services
⎡ 100 ⎤ ⎡ 180 ⎤ ⎡ 60 ⎤
⎢98.91 x *⎥
+ ⎢98.89 x *⎥
+ ⎢98.85 x ⎥ = 98.89
⎣ 340 ⎦ ⎣ 340 ⎦ ⎣ 340* ⎦
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ 98.89 − 1⎥ x 182 = 2.25%
⎣ ⎦
⎛ 50 ⎞ ⎛ 120 ⎞
= ⎜ 98.93 x + 98.90 x
* ⎟ ⎜ ⎟
⎝ 170 ⎠ ⎝ 170* ⎠
= 98.91
* (50 + 120 = 170)
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ − 1⎥ x = 2.21%
⎣ 98.91 ⎦ 182
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
C= ⎢ − 1⎥ x = 2.33%
⎣ 98.85 ⎦ 182
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
⎢ 92.05 − 1⎥ x 182 = 17.32%
⎣ ⎦
1/ t
⎛A⎞
13. i =⎜ ⎟ −1
⎝P⎠
$10, 000
i= − 1 = 5.28%
$9022.87
206
Part II
14. The bond pays $40 semi-annual coupons and there are ten 6-month periods to maturity. The
6-month periodic rate is the value of i that satisfies
$40 $40 $40
$850.75 = + + …… +
1+ i (1 + i) 2
(1 + i)10
i = 6.03% which must be converted into an effective annual rate
(1 + i) = (1.0603)2
i = 12.43%
* (Effective annual rate ⇒ i = (1+ nominal rate)n – n → no. of compoundings.)
Commercial Paper (CP)
Par value − P urchase price 12
15. Rate of return = x
Purchase price No. of months to maturity
$10, 00, 000 − $9, 61, 000 12 $39, 000 12
= x = x = 8.11%
$9, 61, 000 6 $9, 61, 000 6
F
16. Issue price =
⎛ I N ⎞
1+ ⎜ x ⎟
⎝ 100 365 ⎠
where,
F = Face value
I = Effective interest p.a.
N = Usance period
25, 00, 000
= = Rs.24,36,907.46
⎛ 10.5 90 ⎞
1+ ⎜ x ⎟
⎝ 100 365 ⎠
Face Value
17. Effective interest Issue price =
⎛ i N ⎞
1+ ⎜ x ⎟
⎝ 100 365 ⎠
1, 00, 000
98,250 =
⎛ 90 ⎞
1 + ⎜i x
⎝ 365 ⎟⎠
i = 7.22%
Cost of funds to the company
Effective interest rate = 7.22%
Brokerage (0.025 x 4) = 0.1%
Rating charges (0.125 x 4) = 0.5%
Stamp duty = 0.5%
8.32% p.a.
F
18. a. P=
IxN
1+
100 x 365
where,
P = Issue price
F = Face value or maturity value
207
Investment Banking and Financial Services
11.5%
Monthly interest rate = = 0.958%
12
1121.214 − 1000
x 100 = 12.12%
1000
11.3%
For the 2nd CD, the periodic rate = 0.217%
52
Since, it is compounded weekly, at the end of the year, we would have
52
1000 x (1.00217) = 1119.315
1119.315 − 1000
= 11.93% = 11.93%
1000
The effective annual interest rate on the 2nd CD is lower than that of the first CD.
208
Part II
Face value
20. Issue price =
⎛ i N ⎞
1+ ⎜ x ⎟
⎝ 100 365 ⎠
15, 00, 000
14,45,000 =
⎛ i 150 ⎞
1+ ⎜ x ⎟
⎝ 100 165 ⎠
i = 9.26%
Cost of funds to the Bank = Effective interest rate + Stamp duty
= 9.26% + 0.25%
= 9.51%
Bill Financing
60
21. Discount charge = 100 x 0.25 x = Rs.4.17
360
For every Rs.100 worth of bills discounted the bimonthly interest rate
4.17
= = 4.35%
100 − 4.17
Effective rate = (1.0435)6 – 1 = 29.12%
22. Value of the L/C backed bill = Rs.1,000
90
Discount charge = 1,000 x 0.23 x = Rs.57.5
360
Value received by the client = Rs.942.5 (1000 – 57.5)
57.5
Effective rate of interest per quarter = x 100 = 6.1007%.
942.5
Effective rate of interest per annum = [(1.061007) 4 – 1] x 100 = 26.72%.
MERCHANT BANKING
Management of Public Issues, Initial Public Offerings and Pricing of Various
Instruments
23. Probability of getting the target return should be equal to or more than 0.74.
Growth in EPS P/E ratio (in percent) Estimated price Joint probability
EPS (1+g) x P/E
0 6 42.0 0.0225
10 6 46.2 0.0375
20 6 50.4 0.0300
30 6 54.6 0.0450
40 6 58.8 0.0150
0 8 56.0 0.0375
10 8 61.6 0.0625
20 8 67.2 0.0500
30 8 72.8 0.0750
40 8 78.4 0.0250
0 10 70.0 0.0600
10 10 77.0 0.1000
20 10 84.0 0.0800
209
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Growth in EPS P/E ratio (in percent) Estimated price Joint probability
EPS (1+g) x P/E
30 10 91.0 0.1200
40 10 98.0 0.0400
0 12 84.0 0.0300
10 12 92.4 0.0500
20 12 100.8 0.0400
30 12 109.2 0.0600
40 12 117.6 0.0200
210
Part II
211
Investment Banking and Financial Services
103.99
Weighted EPS = = 17.33
6
Hence the FCDs of 120 lakh would be converted into 62,827 shares.
63,89,05,800
(62,827 x 3.106) + (388.25 x 62,827)
= 1,95,140.66 + 2,43,92,583 = 2,45,87,723
Alternative (a) is to be chosen.
Add:
212
Part II
350,00,000 90,00,000
350, 00, 000
Oversubscription ratio = ~ 3.89
90, 00, 000
Note: * (3.8888....9). In col. (4), the figure taken is the original oversubscription ratio
figure and not the rounded off figure).
* 50% of 1,80,00,000 shares reserved for investors below 1000 shares.
4,35, 00, 000
Oversubscription rate = = 4.83
90, 00, 000
Applications below 1000 shares
Category No. of No. of Proportionate Shares per No. of
applicati shares shares allottee allottees
on applied available for (after
allotment adjustments)
Before After
rounding rounding
off off
1 2 (3) = (1) x (2) (4) = (3) ÷ (5) (6) (7)
4.83*
4,35,00,000 90,00,000
213
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Size No. of Share % of Shares Shares per R/o No. of Adjustments Final no. of
Appli- Applied total available application allottees allottees
cations
100 75,000 75,00,000 18.75% 6,56,250 8.75 100 6,563 0 6,563
200 35,000 70,00,000 17.50% 6,12,500 17.50 100 6,125 0 6,125
500 27,000 135,00,00 33.75% 11,81,250 43.75 100 11,813 0 11,813
1000 12,000 120,00,00 30.00% 10,50,000 87.50 100 10,500 0 10,500
4,00,00,000 35,00,000
O/S Ratio = 11.43
Basis of allotment for above 1000 shares
Size No. of Shares % of total Share Shares per R/o No. of Adjust
applications applied vailable application allottees Final No.
of allottees
2,500 7,000 1,75,00,000 53.03% 18,56,061 265 300 6,187 6,199
5,000 1,500 75,00,000 22.73% 7,95,455 530 500 1,591 1,500
10,000 800 80,00,000 24.24% 8,48,485 1061 1,100 771 800
3,30,00,000 35,00,001
O/S Ratio = 9.43
Working Notes:
Rs. 42 crore
Number of shares to be issued = = 84,00,000
Rs. 50
Computation of Net Offer to Public
Total shares offered 84,00,000
Less: Reservations
– FII’s 7,00,000
– Mutual funds 7,00,000
– Banks/FIS 3,50,000 17,50,000
66,50,000
Add: Unsubscribed portion mutual funds 3,50,000
70,00,000
27. Computation of Net Offer to Public
(Figures in crore)
Total shares offered 16.00
Less: Reservations
Mutual funds 1.00
NRIs 0.50
FIIs 2.00
Banks 1.00
Employees 0.01 4.51
11.49
Add: Unsubscribed portion*
NRI 0.20
Employees 0.01 0.21
0.21 11.70
*Unsubscribed portion of reservation on firm basis will be bought in by the promoters with
214
Part II
3-year lock in period and unsubscribed portion of reservation on competitive basis will be
added to the public portion.
50% of the net public offer is reserved for applicants who applied for 1000 or less shares.
Thus, the oversubscription rate for the category = Total number of shares applied ÿ 50% of
11.70 crore
37,80, 00, 000
= 6.46
5,85, 00, 000
19, 00, 00, 000
Oversubscription rate = = 3.25
5,85, 00, 000
Basis of Allotment for below 1000 Shares
Size No. of Total shares applied Pro- Shares per applicant No. of Adjust. of Final
applications portionate shares allottees surplus No. of allottees
available
Before After rounding
rounding
1 2 3 4 = (Col.3 6.46) 5 6 7 8 9
200 4,40,000 8,80,00,000 1,36,19,048 31 100 1,36,190 1,36,190
500 2,20,000 11,00,00,000 1,70,23,810 77 100 1,70,238 1,70,238
800 1,00,000 8,00,00,000 1,23,80,952 124 100 1,23,810 23,810 1,00,000
1,000 1,00,000 10,00,00,000 1,54,76,190 155 200 77,381 89,286
37,80,00,000 5,85,00,000
Basis of Allotment for above 1000 Shares
Size No. of Total shares Proportionate Shares per applicant No. of Adjust. Final no.
applications applied share allottees of of
available surplus allottees
Before After
rounding rounding
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
19,00,00,000 5,85,00,000
215
Investment Banking and Financial Services
216
Part II
500 – 411
600 – 148
700 – 91
800 – 186
900 – 361
1000 – 4,698
31.
217
Investment Banking and Financial Services
218
Part II
4,93,70,000 55,00,000
4,93, 70, 000
Oversubscription ratio = = 8.976.
55, 00, 000
34. As per the prospectus, the issue pattern is as follows:
Offer in terms of prospectus – 220 lakh shares
Less:
Reservation for Mutual Funds – 20 lakh shares
Reservation for FIIs – 15 lakh shares
Net offer to public – 185 lakh shares
Subscription in Reservation
(Shares in lakh)
Category Reservation Subscription Surplus/Deficit
Mutual Funds 20 12 +8
FIIs 15 3 +12
219
Investment Banking and Financial Services
500,00,000 102,50,104
* The surplus in 600 & 1000 shares category adjusted to the 200 shares category. Surplus in
600 shares category = (24,60,025 – 20,00,000) = 4,60,025. Surplus in 1,000 shares category
= 20,50,021 – 2,00,000 = 50,021. Additional shares to 200 shares category = 5,10,046.
Hence, additional successful applicants = 5,100.
Total number of shares applied
**Oversubscription rate =
50% of net offer to public
5, 00, 00, 000
= = 4.878
[(185 + 20) ÷ 2] lakh
35. a. Computation of Net Offer to Public
(Figures in crore)
Total shares offered 14.40
Less: Reservations
Mutual funds 1.00
NRIs 0.50
FIIs 2.00
Banks 1.00
Employees 0.01 4.51
9.89
Add: Unsubscribed Portion*
NRI 0.10
Employees 0.01 0.11
Net Public Offer 10.00
*Unsubscribed portion of reservation on firm basis will be brought in by the promoters with
3 year lock-in period and unsubscribed portion of reservation on competitive basis will be
added to the public portion.
220
Part II
(1) (2) (3) (4) = (3) 8* (5) = (1) 8* (6) (7) (8) (9) = (7) + (8)
250000000 50000000
25 crore
*Oversubscription rate = =5
5 crore
b. According to SEBI guidelines a SEBI nominated public representative should oversee
the process of allotment if a par issue is oversubscribed by 5 or more times. Being a par
issue and oversubscribed by more than 5 times, a SEBI nominated public representative
should oversee the allotment process.
36. Basis of Allotment Below 1000 Shares
Size Number of Shares Applied % of Shares Available Share per Rounded Number of Adjustment Final
Applications Total (4) x 70 lakh Application Off Allottees of Surplus Number of
(5) ÷
(2) (5) ÷ (7) Allottees
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10)
200 75,000 1,50,00,000 24.0 16,80,000 22.4 100 16800 +216000 18960
1000 18,000 1,80,00,000 28.8 20,16,000 112.0 100 18000 –216000 18000
6,25,00,000 70,00,000
221
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Working Notes:
i. Shares available for public offer:
Initial shares available for public offer
17, 00, 00, 000 1,30,00,000
= = – 40,00,000
10
Undersubscription of FIIs 10,00,000
Shares available for public offer 1,40,00,000
The undersubscription in reservations for FIIs (10,00,000 shares) has been added
back to public offer as the reservation was on a competitive basis.
The undersubscription in the Mutual Fund portion has to be brought in by the
promoters as the same was on a firm basis. 50% of shares available to public offer
i.e. 70,00,000 shares should be reserved to the small investor.
ii. While alloting to `1000 shares’ category, the number of applicants are 18000.
Therefore, number of allottees are 18000. The surplus of [2016000 – 18000 x 100]
i.e. 216000 shares are allotted to the ‘200’ category.
37. Basis of Allotment Below 1000 Shares
Size Number Shares % of Total Shares Share per Rounded Number of Surplus Adjustment Final
of applied available application off allottees number of
Applications allottees
400 10000 4000000 23.52 2941176 294.12 300 9804 –24 58824 10000
500 8000 4000000 23.52 2941176 367.65 400 7353 –24 118024 7648
800 5000 4000000 23.52 2941176 588.24 600 4902 –24 24 4902
1000 5000 5000000 29.41 3676471 735.29 700 5000 176471 –176471 5000
17000000 12500000
Oversubscription ratio = 1.36
Basis of Allotment Above 1000 Shares
Number Shares % of Total Shares Share per Rounded Number of Surplus Adjustment Final
Size of applied available application off allottees number of
Applications allottees
2000 1000 2000000 12.50 1562500 1562.50 1600 977 –700 7100 981
10000 500 5000000 31.25 3906250 7812.50 7800 500 6250 –6250 500
20000 200 4000000 25.00 3125000 15625.00 15600 200 5000 –5000 200
50000 100 5000000 31.25 3906250 39062.50 39100 100 –3750 3750 100
16000000 12500000
Working Notes:
Over Subscription Ratio = 1.28
Initial shares available for public offer
60% of (25, 00, 00, 000
= − (25, 00, 000 + 50, 00, 000)
5
222
Part II
223
Investment Banking and Financial Services
224
Part II
The maximum number of bonus shares that can be issued from eligible reserves
Rs.12.5 crore
= = 1.25 crore shares.
Rs.10 per share
No. of existing shares = 0.8
Hence the maximum permissible bonus ratio
1.25
= = 1.5625
0.8
b. The partly paid shares should be made fully paid-up before the bonus issue.
The total paid-up capital after bonus issue would be equal to Rs.8 crore + Rs.12.5
crore = Rs.20.5 crore.
As the paid-up capital would be exceeding the authorized capital of Rs.20 crore, the
company has to pass a special resolution to increase its authorized capital.
c. i. Secret reserve is a hidden financial strength of the company. It is not
disclosed in the balance sheet of the company. Companies build secret
reserves to meet any unforeseen eventualities. Normally secret reserves are
created by the following means:
• Making excess provisions than is required
• Showing contingent liabilities as firm liabilities
• Undervaluing intangibles like goodwill, etc.
ii. Secret reserve is an undisclosed financial strength and not in the nature of an
accounting reserve. Hence it cannot be capitalized. Disclosing the same
through newspaper advertisement does not entitle the company to declare
bonus from it.
41. Computation of maximum permissible bonus ratio.
Eligible Reserve Rs. in lakh
General Reserve 20.00
Share Premium 15.00
Capital Reserve 14.00
49.00
Hence a maximum of 4,90,000 shares can be issued as bonus shares.
The maximum permissible bonus ratio would be
4,90,000 : 3,50,000 = 7:5
7 bonus shares against every 5 existing shares.
42. Computation of Eligible Reserves:
Rs. crore
General Reserves 20.00
Share Premium 6.50
Contingency Reserve 4.00
Capital Reserve 3.00
Eligible Reserve 33.50
Rs.2.5 crore was accrued to the share premium account on account of notional premium
charged to the seller of the building. As this premium account was not collected in cash, the
same is not included in computation of eligible reserves.
225
Investment Banking and Financial Services
226
Part II
Shares are sold by GDR holder at 25% premium to the then market price
= 174.53 x 1.25 = Rs.218.17
Number of rights shares offered and subscribed by GDR holder holding 100 GDRs
6
= x 100 x 4 = 114
21
Gain/loss made by the GDR holder holding 100 GDRs is calculated as follows:
Purchase cost of 100 GDRs = $ 1200
114 x 138.6
Investment in rights issue = $ 376
42
Total investment = $ 1576
(100 x 4 + 114) x 218.17
Sale of GDRs at 25% premium = = $ 2670
42
Therefore,
Profit = $ 1094
44. a. Total size of the project outlay = Rs.24 crore
Less: Internal accruals = 9 crore
Size of the proposed rights issue = 15 crore
Pricing of the rights – Rs. per share 250 per share
(15 crore/250) (2.4 crore/10)
Number of right shares = 6,00,000
Existing capital = 24,00,000 shares
Hence, the rights ratio is 1 rights share for every 4 shares held.
b. Computation of the value of rights
Pr − S
R=
N +1
Where,
R is the value of the rights
S is the strike price of the rights share
Pr is the market value of share
N is the number of existing shares required to get 1 rights share.
345 − 250
R = = Rs.19
4 +1
c. Gain/Loss to a shareholder
N Pr + S
i. The ex-rights price of the share is expected to be
N +1
(4 x 345) + 250
=
4 +1
= Rs.326
Assume X holds 100 shares.
If the invests in the rights issue
Existing wealth = 100 x 345 = Rs.34,500
Subscription in rights issue = 25 x 250 = 6,250
Total = 40,750
227
Investment Banking and Financial Services
= Rs.53.75
No. of shares outstanding after rights issue = Existing + Rights shares
= 2 + 2 = 4 crore
Market capitalization = Ex-rights price x No. of outstanding shares
= 53.75 x 4 = Rs.215 crore
228
Part II
229
Investment Banking and Financial Services
47. Partly paid-up shares should be made fully paid-up before the bonus issue.
Eligible reserves for computation of bonus are
Free reserves 220 lakh
Less: Share premium not collected in cash 40 lakh
180 lakh
The maximum number of bonus shares that can be issued from eligible reserves
Rs.180 lakh
= = 18 lakh shares
Rs.10 per share
Number of existing shares = 45 lakh shares
2 18
Hence the maximum permissible bonus ratio = (i.e. )
5 45
2 bonus shares for every 5 equity shares held.
Share capital after the bonus issue would be equal to Rs.180 lakh + Rs.450 lakh = Rs.630
lakh.
Which is more than the authorized capital of Rs.500 lakh.
The company will thus have to pass a special resolution to increase its authorized capital.
48. Current market price of the scrip = Rs.80
Rights issue in the ratio of 2 right shares for every 5 equity shares held
Paid-up capital of the company = Rs.10 crore
Pricing of the rights issue = Rs.65 per share.
a. Value per share after the rights issue
NP + S
0
=
N +1
Where,
N = Number of existing shares required for a rights share
P0 = Cum-rights market price per share
S = Subscription price at which the rights shares are issued
2.5 x 80 + 65
= = Rs.75.71.
2.5 + 1
b. Value of rights
P −S 80 − 65
r
R = =
N +1 2.5 + 1
15
= = 4.29
3.5
49. a. Market price per share = Rs.20
Earnings per share = Rs.4
Subscription price = 20% below the
existing market
price
= Rs.16
Number of right shares = 30, 00, 000
16
= 1,87,500
230
Part II
Rights ratio
Existing shares = 10,00,000
Number of additional = 1,87,500
equity shares proposed
to be issued as rights
shares
3 rights shares for every 16 shares held.
Dilution in EPS:
EPS = Rs.4
PAT PAT
EPS = =4=
No. of shares 10, 00, 000
PAT = 40,00,000
Effect of rights issue on EPS
PAT = 40,00,000
PBT = 59,70,149
Add: Interest saved as a result of redemption of loan = 3,00,000
62,70,149
Less: 33% Tax = 20,69,149
42,01,000
PAT
EPS =
Number of shares
42, 01, 000
= = Rs.3.54.
10, 00, 000 + 1,87,500
b. Ex-rights price of the share
NP + S
0
=
N +1
N = Number of existing shares required for a rights share
P0 = Cum-rights market price per share
231
Investment Banking and Financial Services
20 − 16
= = 0.6315
⎛ 16 ⎞
⎜ + 1⎟
⎝ 3 ⎠
20,001.57
ii. If he allows his rights to expire
Current market value of the investment = 1,000 x 20 = 20,000
Market value after the rights issue @ 1,000 x 19.37 = 19,370
Change in Wealth = 630
50. i. Proposed amount of rights issue = Rs.90 lakh
EPS for 20x1-x2 = Rs.3
PAT PAT
EPS = =3=
No. of shares 9 lakh
PAT = 27 lakh for 20x1-x2
Post-tax earnings for year 20x2-x3 to increase by 20% = 27 lakh x 1.20
= Rs.32.4 lakh
Dilution in EPS should not be more than 20%.
EPS cannot be less than Rs.2.4
Minimum subscription price of right shares
32.4 lakh
2.4 =
12 lakh + X
X = 1.5 lakh
X = No. of rights shares to be issued
Total amount of rights issue proposed = 90 lakh
90 lakh
Minimum subscription price of right shares = = Rs. 60
1.5 lakh
12, 00, 000
Ratio of rights = = 8 :1
1,50, 000
1 rights share for every 8 shares held.
ii. If a shareholder who holds 1000 shares allows his rights to lapse, then
Rs.
Current market value of investment = 1000 x 80 80,000
Market value after the rights issue = 1000 x 77.78 77,778
Change in wealth 2,222
Ex-rights price of the share
NP + S
0
=
N +1
(8 x 80) + 60
=
8 +1
640 + 60 700
= = = Rs.77.78
9 9
232
Part II
⎛ 1 ⎞
⎜ N = = 0.33 ⎟
⎝ 3 ⎠
b. Expected ex-rights price of the share
NP + S (0.33 x 78) + 65
= 0
=
N +1 1.33
90.74
= = Rs.68.25
1.33
c. Gain/Loss if the shareholder exercises his rights:
Market value of original shareholding at the rate= Rs.7,800
of 78 per share (100 x 78)
Additional subscription price paid for 300 right= Rs.19,500
shares @ Rs.65 per share
Total Investment = Rs.27,300
Market value of 400 shares @ Rs.68.25 per share = Rs.27,300
If the rights are allowed to lapse:
Market value of original shareholding @ Rs.78 per share = Rs.7,800
Market value of 100 shares held after the rights issue @ Rs.68.25 per share = Rs.6,825
Change in wealth (Rs.6825 – Rs.7800) = Rs.(975)
If the rights are sold:
Market value of original shares @ 78 per share = Rs.7,800
Value realized from sale of 100 rights at Rs.9.75 = Rs.975
Market value of 100 shares held after rights issue = Rs.6,825
Change in Wealth (Rs. 6825 – Rs. 7800) = Rs.(975)
52. The amount to be raised by rights issue = Rs.355 – (155 + 80) = Rs.120 crore.
Subscription price/rights share = Rs.40.
No. of right shares on offer = 300,00,000.
Hence ratio of rights is 3 shares for every 4 shares held 3 : 4.
EPS – Rs.4.50
MPS
P/E – 12 since = 12
EPS
Market Price – Rs.54
P −S
0
a. Value of the rights R=
N +1
Where,
P0 = Market price before rights issue
S = Subscription price
N = Number of shares required for 1 rights share
54 − 40
= = Rs.6.
1.33 + 1
Rights ratio = 0.75
233
Investment Banking and Financial Services
NPo + S
b. Market value after the rights issue =
N +1
(1.33 x 54) + 40
=
1.33 + 1
71.82 + 40
=
2.33
= Rs.48
No. of shares outstanding after rights issue = Existing + Rights shares
= 4 + 3 = 7 crore
Market capitalization = Ex. Rights price x No. of outstanding shares
= 48 x 7
= Rs.336 crore
c. NAV per share after the issue:
Paid up capital Rs.70 cr.
Reserves & surplus:
Existing 160
Premium on rights issue + 90 Rs.250crore
Net worth of the company Rs.320crore
No. of shares 7crore
NAV per share = Rs.45.71
53. a. Part B of the 16.5% FCD is convertible into equity within one year of bonus issue.
Hence any bonus decision will affect the FCD holders.
The conversion of Part B, would result in additional 30,00,000 shares. Hence these
have to be taken into consideration while computing the bonus ratio.
The reserves eligible for capitalizing are
General Reserves Rs.15,00,00,000
Share Premium (Rs.4,00,00,000 premium not Rs.5,00,00,000
collected in cash excluded)*
Rs.20,00,00,000
The shares eligible for bonus are:
Equity shares 70,00,000
Shares arising from conversion of 16.5% 30,00,000
FCDs
1,00,00,000
Hence, the maximum permissible bonus ratio is 2 bonus shares for every share held.
(20crore /1crore x 10)
* Share premium not collected in cash are not eligible for bonus issue and as such
are excluded. Premium not collected in cash = Cost of plant & machinery purchased
less face value of shares issued to the vendor in lieu of payment = 5 cr. – 10,00,000 x 10 =
Rs.4crore.
b. After bonus, the increased capital of Rs.27crore would be more than the authorized
capital of Rs.15crore. Hence, the company has to pass a special resolution to give
effect to the increased authorized capital.
54. a. Size of the rights issue= 465 – (255 + 80 + 40) = Rs.90crore.
6
EPS for 20x0-x1 = EPS during 19x9-20x0 x 1.25 = x 1.25 = Rs.7.5
1
Current market price = 7.5 x 20 = Rs.150
234
Part II
87,50, 000
Issue price of GDR = = $14
6, 25, 000
NP + S
r
Ex-rights price of the share =
N +1
28
x 150 + 120
= 15 = Rs.139.53
28
+1
15
Shares are sold by GDR holder at 20% premium to the then market price = 139.53 x 1.2
= Rs.167.44
Number of rights shares offered and subscribed by GDR holder holding 100 GDRs
235
Investment Banking and Financial Services
15
= x 100 x 4 = 214
28
Gain/loss made by the GDR holder, holding 100 GDRs is calculated as follows:
Purchase cost of 100 GDRs (14 x 100) = $1400
214 x 120
Investment in rights issue = = $611
42
Total cost = $2011
(100 x 4 + 214) x 167.44
Sales of GDRs at 20% premium = = $2448
42
Therefore, Profit = $437
55. i. All reserves given in the balance sheet of the company except revaluation reserves
are eligible reserves for bonus issue. However, share premium given in the balance
sheet includes premium not collected in cash which has to be excluded from eligible
reserves for bonus issue.
Share premium not collected in cash is equal to the difference between the payment
to the vendor and the face value of the shares allotted. Hence, it is equal to Rs.4crore
– 10lakh x 10 = Rs.3crore.
The eligible reserves for computation of the bonus are:
General Reserves 3.00
Contingency Reserves 2.75
Capital Reserves 1.25
Share Premium (Rs.7crore – 3 crore) 4.00
Dividend Equalization Reserve 1.00
Total eligible reserves 12.00
The finance manager’s contention that there would not be any calls and reserves that
can be capitalized is not justified as the equity capital consists of both fully paid
shares and partly paid shares. Utilization of reserves for making partly paid shares to
make fully paid shares would result in injustice to the fully paid shareholders. Thus,
assuming that the company call-up the partly paid shares and all the shareholders
pay up in full the maximum bonus ratio can be worked out as under.
The maximum number of bonus shares that can be issued from eligible reserves:
Rs.12 crore
= 1.2 crore shares
Rs.10 per share
No. of existing shares = 0.5
1.2
Hence, the maximum permissible bonus ratio = = 2.4 i.e. for every 5 shares
10.5
held 11 bonus shares can be issued.
ii. a. The partly paid shares should be made fully paid up before the bonus issue.
b. The total paid up capital after bonus issue would be equal to Rs.5crore + Rs.11 crore
= Rs.16 crore.
As the paid up capital would be exceeding the authorized capital of Rs.14
crore, the company has to pass a special resolution to increase its authorized
capital.
iii. a. Secret reserve is a hidden financial strength of the company. It is not
disclosed in the balance sheet of the company. Companies build secret
reserves to meet any unforeseen eventualities. Normally secret reserves are
created by the following means:
236
Part II
237
Investment Banking and Financial Services
238
Part II
11.5
= + 0.15 = 15.4%
2,880 x 0.96
D
⎛ 11.5
1
+g ⎞
⎜ 2,880 + 0.15 ⎟
P
Cost of ADR can also be calculated as o =⎝ ⎠ = 16%
1− f 0.96
NP + S 4 x 1, 000 + 600
o
c. Domestic ex-right price = = = Rs.920
N +1 5
920 x 4 x 1.3
Ex-rights price of an ADR = = $95.68
50
Initial investment = 25,000 x 60.42
= $15,10,500
25, 000
Number of ADRs bought under rights issue = = 6,250 ADRs
4
239
Investment Banking and Financial Services
6, 250 x (600 x 4)
Investment in rights issue = = $3,00,000
50
Total investment = $18,10,500
Divestment proceeds = (25,000 + 6,250) x $95.68
= $29,90,000
Profit to MLTF = $11,79,500.
60. a. Divestment Price:
EPS for 3 years
Year 1 12.00
Year 2 14.40
Year 3 17.28
The divestment takes plakhe at P/E of 8 and this is equal to Rs.17.28 x 8
= Rs.138.24
b. Required IRR of ECC = 22%
15crore
No. of shares invested by ECC = = 24 lakh
62.5
Let the minimum value of divestment be X. Thus the cash flow to ECC will be
(Rs. in lakh)
Year 0 Investment value –1,500
Year 1 Dividend 24 x 10 x 0.15 36
Year 2 Dividend 24 x 10 x 0.2 48
Year 3 (Dividend + Divestment) (60 + X)
(24 x 10 x 0.25) + X
The discounted cash flow @ 22% is
Year 0 –1500 x 1 = –1500
Year 1 36 x 0.820 = 29.51
Year 2 48 x 0.672 = 32.25
Year 3 (60 + X) x 0.551 = 33.042 + 0.551X
1,500 = 29.51 + 32.25 + 33.042 + 0.551X
Rs. 2,550.268
Hence the divestment price = = Rs.106.26
24 lakh shares
The cash flows to ECC from divestment would be
= 24,00,000 x
⎡ 50 ⎤
⎢ Rs.106.26 + (Rs.138.24 − Rs.106.26) x 100 ⎥
⎣ ⎦
= 24,00,000 x 122.25 = Rs.29,34,00,000
240
Part II
INTERNATIONAL MARKETS
$4.02 crore
61. Total issue amount = = $4.102 crore
0.98
= 4.102 x 42 = Rs.172.2857 crore
Rs.172.2857
No. of GDRs issued = = 0.177249 crore
Rs.972
Cost of GDRs is computed as follows:
Current market price of GDR (Po) = Rs.972
0 + 199.5
1 –12.715
2 –12.715
3 –12.715
4 –12.715
5 –212.715
241
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Half-Year Loan o/s at LIMEAN* Annual Interest Paid Guarantee Agency Fee Principal Cash
Ended the Interest (2 x 4) ÷ 2 Fee and repaid outflow =
beginning Rate (%) Commitment 5+6+7
+8
Dec. 20x2 87.5 5.05 6.05 2.647 0.15 0.0065(A) 12.5 15.3040
Dec. 20x3 62.5 5.275 6.275 1.961 0.10 0.0065(A) 12.5 14.5680
242
Part II
Dec. 20x4 37.5 6.075 7.075 1.327 0.05 0.0065(A) 12.5 13.8840
By solving k = 2.76%
Annual effective cost = (1 + k) 2 – 1
= (1 + 0.0276)2 – 1
= 5.60%
Assumptions:
i. Commitment fee is paid at the beginning of the half-year period.
ii. Repayment starts from the end of the half year after the grace period i.e. from the
end of June 20x2.
65. The payment towards interest and various fees in respect of the syndicated loan are as
follows:
(in $ million)
Upfront 31.12.20x0 31.12.20x1 31.12.20x2 31.12.20x3 31.12.20x4 31.12.20x5 31.12.20x6
Opening Balance of Loan 150.00 300.00 400.00 400.0 300.0 200.0 100.0
Interest 0.00 10.80 15.60 24.80 32.8 21.6 18.4 8.2
Amortization 0.00 100.0 100.0 100.0 100.0
Management Fee 2.4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Underwriting Fee 2.0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Commitment Fee 0.0 02.00 0.800
Agency Fee 0.0 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015 0.015
Guarantee Fee 1.125 2.25 3.00 3.00 2.25 1.50 0.75 0
Total Payment 5.525 15.065 19.415 27.815 135.065 123.115 119.165 108.215
Working Notes:
i. Management fee is payable upfront on the entire syndicated loan. It is equal to $400
million x 0.6% = $2.4 million.
243
Investment Banking and Financial Services
244
Part II
3 –18.76
4 –18.76
5 –317.26
Cost of loan is value of `i’ in the following:
245
Investment Banking and Financial Services
2.375
The effective cost to the company is the value of k which equates –
Assumptions:
i. Commitment fee is paid at the beginning of the half-year period.
ii. Repayment starts from the end of the half-year after the grace period i.e. from the end of
June, 2001.
68. The payment towards interest and various fees in respect of the syndicated loan are as
follows:
(in $ millions)
Up-front 31.12.20x0 31.12.20x1 31.12.20x2 31.12.20x3 31.12.20x4 31.12.20x5 31.12.20x6
Opening Balance of loan 100.00 250.00 400.00 400.00 300.00 200.00 100.00
Management fee (W.N. i) 2.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Underwriting Fee (W.N. ii) 1.60 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Commitment Fee (W.N. iii) 0.00 2.25 1.13 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Agency Fee 0.00 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
Guarantee Fee (W.N. iv) 0.60 1.50 2.40 2.40 1.80 1.20 0.60
Total payment 3.60 9.86 17.64 30.41 122.41 125.81 119.21 107.61
Working Notes:
i. Management fee is payable upfront on the entire syndicated loan. It is equal to $400
million x 0.5% = $ 2 million.
ii. Underwriting fee is also payable upfront on the entire loan. It is equal to $400
million x 0.4% = $1.6 million.
246
Part II
Interest 0.000 0.250 0.400 0.450 0.500 0.600 0.600 0.350 0.150
Amortization 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 5.000 5.000 5.000 5.000
Management 0.030 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Fee
Underwriting 0.050 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Fee
Commitment 0.010 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
Fee
Agency Fee 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.025 0.000
Guarantee Fee 0.000 0.050 0.100 0.100 0.100 0.100 0.075 0.050 0.025
Total 0.115 0.325 0.525 0.575 0.625 5.725 5.700 5.425 5.175
Computation of Effective Cost of Borrowings
Year Cash flows
0 10 – 0.115 = 9.885
1 10 – 0.325 = 9.675
2 –0.525
3 –0.575
4 –0.625
5 –5.725
6 –5.700
7 –5.425
8 –5.175
247
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Interest 0.00 2.32 4.24 6.15 6.95 6.60 6.50 5.80 2.53
Amortization 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 50.00 50.00
Management fee 0.30 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Underwriting fee 0.40 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0000 0.00 0.00 0.00
Commitment fee 0.00 0.18 0.06 0.00 0.00 0000 0.00 0.00 0.00
Agency fee 0.00 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10 0.10
Guarantee fee 0.20 0.40 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.50 0.25 0.00
Total 0.90 3.00 4.90 6.75 7.55 7.20 7.10 56.15 52.63
248
Part II
249
Investment Banking and Financial Services
250
Part II
b. When the lease rental is deferred for 1 year, the rental structure will be as follows:
Year Rental PV factor @ 22% axb
(a) (b)
1 0 0.819 L(0)
2 L 0.672 L(0.672)
3 L 0.551 L(0.551)
4 L 0.451 L(0.451)
5 L 0.370 L(0.370)
L(2.044)
L x 2.044 = 45 lakh
L = 45/2.044 = 22.02
The deferred lease rental will thus be
Year Lease Rental
1 0.00
2 22.02
3 22.02
4 22.02
5 22.02
74. The lessor will have to price his lease so as to obtain a gross pre-tax return of 20.5% p.a.
Lease Rental under the Stepped Rental Structure:
Assume the lease rental to be charged is L, and the lease rental increases by 10% p.a.
L x PVIF(20.5,1) + 1.10L x PVIF(20.5,2) + 1.21L x PVIF(20.5,3) + 1.33L x PVIF(20.5,4)
+ 1.46L x PVIF(20.5,5) = Rs.80 lakh
(L x .830) + (1.10L x .689) + (1.21L x 0.572) + (1.33L x .474) + (1.46L x .394) = Rs.80 lakh
L(0.83) + L(0.76) + L(0.69) + L(0.63) + L(0.58) = Rs.80 lakh
L(3.49) = Rs.80.00 lakh
L = 80/3.48 = Rs.22.92 lakh
Lease rentals
Year Rs. in lakh
1 22.92
2 (22.92 x 1.1) = 25.21
3 (25.21 x 1.1) = 27.73
4 (27.73 x 1.1) = 30.51
5 (30.51 x 1.1) = 33.56
Ballooned Rental Structure:
L = Rs.185.39 lakh
251
Investment Banking and Financial Services
The ballooned payment to be made in the fifth year is Rs.185.39 lakh. Therefore, the lease
rental structure will be
Year Lease Rental
(Rs. in lakh)
1 3.00
2 3.00
3 3.00
4 3.00
5 185.39
75. a. Leverage Ratio
Total Debt Long − term Debt
= or
Net Worth Net Worth
Total Debt/Net Worth
Loan Funds + Current + Liabilities
=
Net Worth
3, 400 + 1,850
= = 3.09
1, 700
Long-Term Debt/ Net Worth
Loan Funds − Cash Credit
=
Net Worth
3, 400 − 1, 068
= = 1.37
1, 700
Fixed Assets Turnover Ratio
Net Sales
=
Net Fixed Assets
9, 000
= = 2.57
3,500
Return on Investment
PBIT
= x100
Total Assets
2, 250
= x 100 = 32.37
6,950
b. The revised financial statements will be as follows:
Income Statement for the Year Ended March 31, 1999
Rs. in lakh
Net sales 9,000
Cost of goods sold 4,500
General expenses 1,590
Lease rental (950 x 0.375) 356.25
Interest charges (675 – 175.75) 499.25
Depreciation 660 – (950 x 0.333) 343.65
Profit before tax 1,710.85
Tax @ 40% 684.34
Profit after tax 1,026.51
252
Part II
C: Total (A + B) 4,422
Application of Funds:
D: Fixed Assets
Original Cost (5000 – 950) 4,050
Less: Acc. Depreciation (1500 – 316.35) 1,183
Net Block 2,867
Add: Capital Work-in-progress 500
3,367
E: Investments 500
F: Current Assets
Cash and Bank Balances 510
(500 + 190 + 175.75 – 356.25)
Receivables 750
Inventory 1,000
Other Current Assets 200
2,460
G: Less: Current Liabilities
Accounts Payable 1,000
Provisions 904
(850 – 630 + 684.34)
1,904
H: Net Current Assets (F – G) 556
I: Total 4,423
Total Debt 2, 640
Leverage Ratio = = = 1.48
Net Worth 1, 782.2
or
Loan Funds − Cash Credit 1,572
= = 0.88
Net Worth 1, 782
Fixed Assets Turnover Ratio
Net Sales 9, 000
= = 3.14
Net Fixed Assets 2,867
PBIT 2, 210
ROI = x100 = x100 = 34.94%
Total Assets 6,327
253
Investment Banking and Financial Services
18
76. a. Borrowing rate per month = = 1.50
12
Present value of monthly lease rentals = 0.022 (1 + 1.5%) x 670 x
payable at the beginning of every month PVIFA(1.5,60)
= 14.74 x (1 + 1.5%) x
PVIFA(1.5, 60)
= 14.74 x 1.015 x PVIFA(1.5,60)
= 14.74 x 1.015 x 39.38
= Rs.589.17 lakh
i. Cost of the asset = Rs.670.00 lakh
ii. PV of monthly lease payments = Rs.589.17 lakh
(ii) as a percentage of (i) 87.94%
As the present value of monthly lease payments does not exceed 90% of the asset
cost at the time of inception of the lease the transaction is not a finance lease.
i. Economic life of the asset 10 years
ii. Lease term (ii) 7 years
as a percentage of (i) 70%
As the percentage does not exceed 75%, it cannot be classified as a finance lease.
b. In case of (b), the economic life is 8 years being least of the physical life,
technological life and the product market life
Lease term = 7 years
Lease term as a percentage of the economic life = 7/8 x 100
= 87.50
As the percentage exceeds 75%, the transaction can be treated as a finance lease.
2 1
77. a. Cost of capital = 14 x x 0.65 + 22 x = 13.4%
3 2
NPV (Buy)
i. Present value of EBDIT (1 – T):
EBDIT =Rs.20 lakh
Tax rate = 35%
EBDIT (1 – T)
= 20(1 – 0.35) = Rs.13.00 lakh
Present value
= 13.00 x PVIFA(13.4,5)
= 13.00 x 3.483 = Rs.45.28 lakh
ii. Present value of depreciation tax shields:
Year Depreciation PVIF(13.4, i) Present
@ 25% value
1 12.50 0.882 11.03
2 9.38 0.778 7.30
3 7.03 0.686 4.82
4 5.28 0.605 3.19
5 3.96 0.533 2.11
38.15 28.45
Tax shield = 28.45 x 0.35 = Rs.9.96 lakh.
254
Part II
255
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Assuming im = 1%
= 11 x 11.255 + 9 x 11.255 x 0.887 + 7 x 5.795 x 0.787
= 123.805 + 89.84 + 31.92 = 245.565
Assuming im = 2%
= 11 x 10.575 + 9 x 10.575 x 0.788 + 7 x 5.601 x 0.621
= 116.325 + 74.99 + 24.31 = 215.625
Since the required value of aggregate receivables lies between the two values 245.565 @
1% and 215.625 @ 2%, the value of im lies between 1% and 2%. By interpolating,
245.565 − 235.00 10.565
0.01 + x1 = 1% + x 1 = 1 + 0.35 = 1.35%
245.565 − 215.625 29.94
im = 1.35%
i = (1 + im)12 – 1 = (1.0135)12 – 1
= 1.1745 – 1 = 0.1745 = 17.45%
81. Rs. in crore
Equity share capital 140.00
Share premium 56.00
General reserve 126.40
Profit on sale of assets 54.70
377.10
Less: Intangible assets 33.60
Owned funds 343.50(A)
Investments in shares and debentures of subsidiary companies 32.92
Loans and advances to group companies 21.98
Deposits with subsidiary companies 15.64
70.54(B)
Excess of B over 10% of owned funds 36.19(C)
Net owned funds (A – C) 307.31
256
Part II
82. a. Net owned funds = Paid-up Share Capital + Free Reserves – Miscellaneous
Expenses – Investments in wholly owned subsidiaries
= 150 + 310 – 85 – 140
= 460 – 225 = Rs.235 lakh
257
Investment Banking and Financial Services
1 + r = (1 + i/m)m
i = 14.5%
m = 12
12
⎛ 0.145 ⎞
Therefore, 1 + r = ⎜1 + ⎟
⎝ 12 ⎠
⇒ r = 15.5%
258
Part II
259
Investment Banking and Financial Services
2. Depreciation Schedule
Year 1 2
Opening WDV 415.00 (415 – 103.75) = 311.2500
Depreciation 103.75 77.8120
Closing WDV 311.25 233.4375
89. Being a 100% EOU, the company can neither avail of the lease related tax shelters nor avail
of the acquisition related tax shelters.
Therefore, the company will not be willing to accept a rental stream whose present value
exceeds Rs.65 lakh; Put differently, if ‘L’ denotes the maximum annual lease rental RSML
is willing to pay, the value of L can be determined from the equation
L x PVIFA(17.5,7) = 65
3.866L = 65
L = 16.81
If the annual lease rental charged by Sumeet Leasing Ltd. is less than 16.81, RSML will
find it worthwhile to lease the equipments.
Cost of the equipment to Innovative Ltd. including
90. = 115 x 1.04 = Rs.119.6 lakh
sales tax
Cost of the equipment to DLL = 115 x 1.10* = Rs.126.5 lakh
Lease rentals to be paid to DLL = 126.5 x 0.0245 = Rs.3.099 lakh p.m.
By opting for a lease, Innovative Ltd. is able to avert the initial outflow of Rs.119.6 lakh.
But then, it ends up paying lease rentals on an enhanced investment cost because the lessor
bears the impact of sales tax at the normal rate of 10%. So other things being equal, the
present value of the lease rentals paid by Innovative Ltd. will be higher than Rs.119.6 lakh.
LEASE EVALUATION: THE LESSEE’S ANGLE
91. a. In order to determine as to whether Indusway should lease or buy the equipment; the
NPV(L) and the NPV(B) should be calculated.
NPV(L) = PV[EBDIT (1 – T)] – PV (LR) + PV (Tax shield on lease rental
– Management Fee) + PV (Tax Shield on Management Fee)
Discount rate to be applied is the marginal cost of capital which is calculated as
under
D E
K= x K D x (1 − T ) + x KE
D+E D+E
⎡2 ⎤ ⎡1 ⎤
= ⎢ x 17.5 x 0.54⎥ + ⎢ x 22⎥ = 6.33 + 7.33 = 13.63%
⎣ 3 ⎦ ⎣ 3 ⎦
260
Part II
PV [EBDIT (1 – T)]
= [20 x 0.54 x PVIFA (13.63,3)] + [17 x 0.54 x PVIFA(13.63,2) x PVIF(13.63,3)]
= (20 x 0.54 x 2.336) + (17 x 0.54 x 1.654 x 0.682)
= 25.23 + 10.36
= Rs.35.59 lakh
PV of Lease Rentals
21.40
= x1.10 x 12 x 0.0285 x PVIFA(13.63, 5)
1.04
= 22.63 x 12 x 0.0285 x 3.463 = 26.80
PV(LRT) = PV(LR) x 0.46
= 26.80 x 0.46 = Rs.12.32 lakh
NPV(L) = 35.59 – 26.80 + 12.32 = Rs.21.11 lakh
NPV(B) = – A + PV [EBDIT (1 – T)] + PV(DT) + PV(RV)
A = Acquisition cost = Rs.21.4 lakh
PV[EBDIT (1 – T)]
= Rs.35.59 lakh
PV[DT] = [*5.35 x PVIF(13.63,1) + 4.01 x PVIF(13.63,2) + 3.01 x
PVIF(13.63,3) + 2.26 x PVIF(13.63,4) + 1.69 x PVIF(13.63,5)] x 0.46
= [(5.35 x 0.88) + (4.01 x 0.77) + (3.01 x 0.68) + 2.26 x 0.599
+ 1.69 x 0.5279] x 0.46
= [4.708 + 3.108 + 2.051 + 1.354 + 0.894] x 0.46
= 12.11445 x 0.46 = Rs.5.57 lakh
PV(RV) = 1.78** x PVIF(13.63,5)
= 1.78 x 0.5279 = Rs.0.94 lakh
NPV(B) = –21.4 + 35.59 + 5.57 + 0.94 = Rs.20.70 lakh
As NPV (L) is greater than NPV (B), leasing is recommended.
b. Let us denote the annual break even rental as L. The value of L can be obtained by
solving for L in the equation
NPV(L) – NPV(B) = 0
14.89
L = = Rs.7.96 lakh.
1.87
261
Investment Banking and Financial Services
The present value of the net cash flow stream associated with the purchase option can be
defined as:
NPV(B)
= – Initial investment + PV of [EBDIT stream (1 – Tax Rate)] + PV of [Tax shields
on depreciation] + PV of [Net salvage value]
PV of [EBDIT stream (1 – Tax Rate)]
= 46 x [PVIF(14,1)] + 37 x PVIF(14,2) + 24 x [PVIF(14,3) + PVIF(14,4) + PVIF(14,5)] x 0.54
= (46 x 0.877) + (37 x 0.770) + 24 [0.675 + 0.592 + 0.519] x 0.54
[40.35 + 28.48 + 1.24 x (1.786)] x 0.54
= [40.35 + 28.48 + 42.88] 0.54
111.71 x 0.54
= Rs.60.32 lakh.
PV of (Tax shields on depreciation)
= [*15.70 x PVIF(14,1) + 11.78 x PVIF(14,2) + 8.83 x PVIF(14,3) + 6.62
x PVIF(14,4) + 4.97 x PVIF(14,5)] x 0.46
= [15.70 x 0.877) + (11.78 x 0.770) + (8.83 x 0.675) + (6.62 x 0.592) + (4.97 x 0.520)]
x 0.46
= (13.773 + 9.062 + 5.962 + 3.923 + 2.581) x 0.46 = 35.30173 x 0.46
= 16.23879 = Rs.16.24 lakh
PV of Interest on Intercorporate Borrowings
4
= (0.06 x 62.8 x ) x PVIF(14,0.25)
5
= 3.0144 x 0.968 = Rs.2.92 lakh
PV of (Interest tax shield on Intercorporate Borrowings)
= 3.0144 x 0.46 x [PVIF(14,1)]
= 3.0144 x 0.46 x 0.877 = Rs.1.216 lakh
PV of (Net salvage value)
= 7.5 x PVIF(14,5)
= 7.5 x 0.519 = Rs.3.90 lakh
NPV of purchase option
= –62.8 + 60.32 + 16.24 – 2.92 + 1.216 + 3.90 = Rs.15.86 lakh
The present value of the cash flow stream associated with the lease option is defined as
follows:
NPV(L)
= –PV (Lease rentals) + PV[(EBDIT stream) x (1 – Tax Rate)] + PV (Tax shield on
lease rentals) – Management fee + PV (Tax shield on Management fee)
Lease Rentals
62.8
= x 1.10 x 0.310 = Rs.20.59 lakh
1.04
PV of lease rentals
= 20.59 x PVIFA(14,5)
= 20.59 x 3.433 = Rs.70.69 lakh
PV [EBDIT stream (1 – Tax Rate)]
= Rs.60.32 lakh
PV (Tax shield on Lease rentals)
= 20.59 x 0.46 x PVIFA(14,5)
= 20.59 x 0.46 x 3.433 = Rs.32.52 lakh
262
Part II
Management fee
= 66.42 x 0.01 = Rs.0.66 lakh
PV (Tax shield on Management fee)
= 0.66 x 0.46 x PVIF(14,1)
= 0.66 x 0.46 x 0.877 = Rs.0.26 lakh
NPV(L)
= –70.69 + 60.32 + 32.52 – 0.66 + 0.26
= Rs.21.75 lakh.
NPV(L) > NPV(B) > 0
Therefore, the equipment must be leased.
*62.8 x 0.25 = 15.7
47.1 x 0.25 = 11.78
35.32 x 0.25 = 8.83
26.49 x 0.25 = 6.62
19.87 x 0.25 = 4.97
93. Kd = 16.5 (1 – 0.46) = 16.5 x 0.54 = 8.91%
a. Initial investment = Rs.47 lakh
b. Present value of lease 325
payments = 47 x x PVIFA(16.5%,5)
1000
= 15.275 x 3.236 = Rs.49.436 lakh
c. PV of tax shield on lease = 15.275 x 0.46 x PVIFA(8.91,5)
payments
= 15.275 x 0.46 x 3.898 = Rs.27.39 lakh
d. PV of depreciation tax shields = [11.75 x PVIF(8.91,1) + 8.81 x PVIF(8.91,2)
+ 6.61PVIF(8.91,3) + 4.96 x PVIF(8.91,4)
+ 3.72 x PVIF(8.91,5)] x 0.46
= [(11.75 x 0.918) + (8.81 x 0.843) + (6.61 x 0.774)
+ (4.96 x 0.711) + (3.72 x 0.653)] x 0.46
= (10.789 + 7.427 + 5.117 + 3.525 + 2.428) x 0.46
= 29.286 x 0.46 = 13.471
e. Present value of interest tax = [*8.157 x PVIF(8.91,1) +6.982 x PVIF(8.91, 2)
shields + 5.614 x PVIF(8.91, 3) + 4.020 x PVIF(8.91, 4)
+ 2.163 x PVIF(8.91, 5)] x 0.46
= (7.490 + 5.887 + 4.346 + 2.857 + 1.412) x 0.46
= 21.991 x 0.46 = Rs.10.116 lakh
Amortization Schedule for Equivalent Debt
Year Amount of Capital Interest content Debt service
outstanding loan content @ 16.5% p.a charge
1 49.436 7.118 8.157 15.275
2 42.318 8.293 6.982 15.275
3 34.025 9.661 5.614 15.275
4 24.365 11.255 4.020 15.275
5 13.110 13.11 2.163 15.275
Net value of lease
47 – 49.436 + 27.39 – 13.471 – 10.116 = 1.367
Since NVL is positive the equipment should be leased.
263
Investment Banking and Financial Services
264
Part II
265
Investment Banking and Financial Services
266
Part II
267
Investment Banking and Financial Services
268
Part II
1
= 0.05 x 0.30 x = Rs.0.0132 crore
1.14
PV(TS on LR)
32
= x 10 x 12 x 0.30 x PVIFA(14,4) = Rs.3.36 crore
1000
PV(DTS):
(Rs. crore)
Year Depreciation TS PV @ 14%
1 2.50 0.75 0.66
2 1.88 0.56 0.43
3 1.41 0.42 0.28
4 1.06 0.32 0.19
1.56
PV(Salvage value)
= 10 x 0.10 x PVIF(14, 4) = Rs.0.59 crore
NPV(B)
= – Initial investment + PV(EBDIT) + PV(DTS) + PV(NSV)
= –10 + 10.20 + 1.56 + 0.59 = Rs.2.35 crore
NPV(L)= –PV(LR) + PV(TS on LR) + PV(EBDIT) – Processing fee + PV(TS on rocessing fee)
= –12.15 + 3.36 + 10.20 – 0.05 + 0.0132 = Rs.1.3732 crore
As the NPV(B) is higher, the company should buy the equipment.
269
Investment Banking and Financial Services
= i
12L1 x x PVIFA(16, 3) where i = 16%
d12
= 12L1 x 1.0847 x 2.246 = 29.23L1
iii. PV of tax on lease rentals = 12L1 x PVIFA(16, 3) x 0.46
= 12L1 x 2.246 x 0.46 = 12.39L1
iv. PV of tax shields on = [250 x PVIF(16,1) + 187.50 x PVIF(16,2)
depreciation + 140.63 x PVIF(16, 3)] x 0.46
= [(250 x 0.862) + (187.5 x 0.743)
+ (140.63 x 0.641)] x 0.46
= (215.52 + 139.34 + 90.09) x 0.46 = 204.6
v. PV of residual value = 1,000 x 0.05 x PVIF(16, 3)
= 1,000 x 0.05 x 0.641 = 32.05
Setting the NPV(L) equation to zero, we get
–1,000 + 29.23L1 – 12.39L1 + 204.6 + 32.05 = 0
= 16.84L1 – 763.35 = 0
270
Part II
16.84L1 = 763.35
763.35
L1 = = 45.32.
16.84
Therefore, the minimum lease rental Starlight must charge for writing a lease
contract will be Rs.45.32 ptpm.
The break even rental for a type II contract will be
i. Investment Cost = Rs.1,000
ii. PV of lease rentals = 12L1 x PVIFA
m (16 ,5 )
= i
12L1 x x PVIFA(16, 5)
d12
= 12L1 x 1.0847 x 3.274
= 12L1 x 1.0847 x 3.274
= 42.61L1
iii. PV of tax on lease rental = 12L1 x PVIFA(16, 5) x 0.46
= 12L1 x 3.274 x 0.46 = 18.07L1
iv. PV of tax shields = [400 x PVIF(16, 1) + 240 x PVIF(16, 2) + 144
on depreciation x PVIF(16,3) + 86.40 x PVIF(16,4) + 51.84
x PVIF(16, 5)] x 0.46
= [(400 x 0.862) + (240 x 0.743) + (144 x 0.641)
+ (86.4 x 0.552) + (51.84 x 0.476)] x 0.46
= 316.40
PV of residual value = 1,000 x 0.05 x PVIF(16,5)
= 1,000 x 0.05 x 0.476 = 23.8
–1,000 + 42.61L1 – 18.07L1 + 316.40 + 23.8 = 0
L2 = 26.88 ptpm.
b. Minimum monthly rental for the given lease proposal will be
75 x 1.10 x 0.02688 = Rs.2.22 lakh.
103. a. Let us work out with an amount of Rs.1,000. The break even rental for RMCL can
be calculated as follows:
A. Investment cost = Rs.1000
B. PV of lease rentals = 12LB x PVIFA M (16, 3)
i
= 12LB x x PVIFA(16, 3)
(d ) P
i
= 12LB x x PVIFA(16, 3)
(d)12
= 12LB x 1.0743 x 2.322 = 29.23
C. PV of tax shield on lease = 12LB x PVIFA(15,3) x 0.46 =12LB x 2.28 x
rentals 0.46
= 12.58LB
D. PV of tax shields forgone = [250 x PVIF(15, 1) + 187.50 x PVIF(15 , 2)
on depreciation + 140.63 x PVIF(15, 3)] x 0.46
= [(250 x 0.870) + (187.5 x 0.756)
+ (140.63 x 0.658)] x 0.46
= 451.63 x 0.46 = 207.75
E. PV of interest tax shields = [3.67 x PVIF(15,1) + 2.33 x PVIF(15, 2)
on displaced debt + 0.79 x PVIF(15, 3)] x 0.46
= [(3.67 x 0.870) + (2.33 x 0.756)
+ (0.79 x 0.658)] x 0.46 = 2.516LB
271
Investment Banking and Financial Services
272
Part II
273
Investment Banking and Financial Services
b. Minimum value of L from the point of view of Beta leasing can be obtained as
follows:
A. Initial outlay = Rs.360 lakh
B. PV of lease receipts
i i i
= 12L x (12) x PVIF(i,1) + 18L x (12) x PVIF(i,2) + 24L x (12) x PVIF(i,3)
d d d
where
i = 0.14 or 14%
= 12L x 1.0743 x 0.877 + 18L x 1.0743 x 0.769 + 24L x 1.0743 x 0.675
= 43.58L
C. PV of tax liability on lease receipts
= [12L x PVIF(14,1) + 18L x PVIF(14,2) + 24L x PVIF(14,3)] x 0.45
= [(12L x 0.877) + (18L x 0.769) + (24L x 0.675)] x 0.45 = 18.25L
D. Initial direct costs = 0.002 x 360 = 0.72
E. PV of tax shield on initial direct cost
= 0.72 x PVIF(14,1) x 0.45
= 0.72 x 0.877 x 0.45 = 0.28
F. PV of tax shield on depreciation
= 360 x 0.45 x PVIF(14, 1)
= 360 x 0.45 x 0.877 = 142.07
G. PV of tax shield on residual value
= 360 x 0.05 x PVIF(14,3) = 18 x 0.675 = 12.15
H. The minimum value of L can be obtained from the equation:
–A+B–C–D+E+F+G=0
i.e. – 360 + 43.58L – 18.25L – 0.72 + 0.28 + 142.07 + 12.15 = 0
i.e. – 206.22 + 25.33L = 0
i.e. L = Rs.8.14 lakh
106. Investment cost = Rs.120 crore
Equity component = Rs.24 crore (120 x 0.2)
Debt component = Rs.96 crore (120 x 0.8)
Equity-related cash flow is given by the equation and is denoted by E
E x PVIFA(24,5) = 24
24
E = = Rs.8.74 crore
2.745
Annual debt service charge is given by the equation in which debt repayment is denoted as
D.
D x PVIFA(18,5) = 96
96
D = = Rs.30.70 crore
3.127
Annual lease rental = Rs.39.44 crore
107. a. NAL for the lessee
A. Initial Investment = Rs.80 lakh
B. PV[LR] @ 16% i
= 80 x 0.0255 x 12 x (12 )
x PVIFA(i,5) where i = 16%
d
= 80 x 0.0255 x 12 x 1.0847 x 3.274 = Rs.86.94 lakh
274
Part II
Amortization Schedule
(Rs. in lakh)
Year Lease initial Interest Capital Lease rental Adjusted
investment outstanding content interest
1 86.94 13.91 12.64 26.55 11.84
2 74.30 11.89 14.66 26.55 9.82
3 59.64 9.54 17.01 26.55 7.47
4 42.63 6.82 19.73 26.55 4.75
5 22.90 3.66 22.90 26.56 1.59
PV [Interest tax shields]
= [11.84 x 0.893 + 9.82 x 0.797 + 7.47 x 0.712 + 4.75 x 0.636 + 1.59 x 0.567] x 0.43
= Rs.11.89
NAL = 80 – 86.94 + 37.95 – 17.60 – 11.89
= Rs.1.52
b. NAL from lessor’s angle
Initial Investment = Rs.80 lakh
PV[LR] i
= 80 x 0.0255 x 12 x x PVIFA(i,5) where i = 12%
d (12)
= 80 x 0.0255 x 12 x 1.0639 x 3.605 = Rs.93.89 lakh
PV[Tax on LR] = 80 x 0.0255 x 12 x 0.26 x PVIFA(12,5)
= 80 x 0.0255 x 12 x 0.26 x 3.605 = Rs.22.95 lakh
PV[DTS] 17.60
= x 0.26 = Rs.10.64 lakh
0.43
NAL = – 80 + 93.89 – 22.95 + 10.64 = Rs.1.58 lakh
c. Since NAL for both the lessor and the lessee are positive it is possible to structure a
mutually advantageous lease transaction.
108. a. The value of L can be obtained by solving the equation
= [L x PVIF(20,2) + 1.15L x PVIF(20,3) + 1.3225L x PVIF(20,4) + 1.5208L x PVIF(20,5)]
= Rs.128 lakh
= (L x 0.694) + 1.15L x 0.579 + 1.3225L x 0.482 + 1.5208L x 0.402) = 128
= 0.694L + 0.666L + 0.637L + 0.611L = 128
2.608L = 128
L = Rs.49.07 lakh
Marginal cost of capital
⎛2 ⎞ ⎛1 ⎞
= ⎜ x 16 x 0.54 ⎟ + ⎜ x 18 ⎟ = 11.76% .
⎝ 3 ⎠ ⎝ 3 ⎠
275
Investment Banking and Financial Services
276
Part II
The amortization schedule associated with the displaced debt will be as follows:
Year Debt outstanding Interest Principal Debt Service Charge
1 3.274 L′ 0.524 L′ 0.476 L′ L′
2 2.798 L′ 0.448 L′ 0.552 L′ L′
3 2.245 L′ 0.359 L′ 0.641 L′ L′
4 1.605 L′ 0.257 L′ 0.743 L′ L′
5 0.862 L′ 0.138 L′ 0.862 L′ L′
PV of interest tax shields discounted @ 11.76% = Rs.0.61 L′ lakh
L′ can be found from the following equation
128 – 3.274 L′ + 1.668 L′ –43.47–7.34 – 0.61 L′ =0
= 77.19 – 2.216 L′ = 0
77.19
L′ = = Rs.34.83 lakh
2.216
109. Initial Investment = Rs.22 lakh
Aggregate lease rentals payable under the lease during = 0.0283 x 22 x 48
the primary period = Rs.29.88 lakh
Aggregate interest charge for the lease period = Rs.7.88 lakh
Average annual interest charge 7.88
= Rs. = Rs.1.97 lakh
4
Add-on-yield 1.97
= x 100
22
= 8.96%
110. a. Define ‘i’ as the annual pre-tax yield implied by the lease transaction. The value of
i can be obtained from the equation:
= (31.25 x 12) x PVIFA m (i , 4) = 1,000
i
= 375 x x PVIFA(i, 4) = 1,000
(d)12
i 1000
= 12
x PVIFA(i,4) =
(d ) 375
i
= x PVIFA(i,4) = 2.667
(d)12
at i = 24%, LHS of the equation
= 1.1257 x 2.404 = 2.706
at i = 26%, LHS of the equation
= 1.1359 x 2.320 = 2.635
Interpolating the range we get
⎡ 2.667 − 2.706 ⎤
= 0.24 + ⎢0.02 x = 25.09%
⎣ 2.635 − 2.706 ⎥⎦
As the gross yield is more than required yield, the proposal can be recommended.
b. The value of ‘i’ can be determined from the following equation:
31.25 x 3 + 31.25 + 31.25 x PVIFA(i,44) = 1,000
i = 2.20% (monthly gross yield)
Annualized gross yield = (1.022)12 – 1 = 0.2986 or 29.86%
Since the gross yield is higher than the required yield, the proposal can be
recommended.
111. The marginal cost of capital
277
Investment Banking and Financial Services
⎛3 ⎞ 1
= ⎜ x 0.19 x 0.54 ⎟ + x 0.22 = 13.19%
⎝ 4 ⎠ 4
Define ‘i’ as the IRR of the proposal.
The various components of NAL valued at `i’ will be as follows:
A. Initial investment = Rs.1,000
B. PV of lease payments = 35.06 x 12 x PVIFA
M ( i , 3)
= i
420.72 x x PVIFA(i, 3)
d12
C. PV of tax liability on lease = 35.06 x 12 x 0.46 x PVIFA(i, 3)
payments = 193.53 x PVIFA(i, 3)
D. PV of tax shields on depreciation = (400 x PVIF(i, 1) + 240 x PVIF(i, 2)
+ 144 x PVIF(i, 3)) x 0.46
NAL = – A + B – C + D = 0
i
– 1000 + 420.72 x x PVIFA(i,3) – 193.53 x PVIFA(i,3) + 400 x PVIF(i,1)
d12
+ 240 x PVIF(i,2) + 144 x PVIF(i,3) x 0.46
NAL = –1,000 + (420.72 x 1.0162 x 2.829) – (193.53 x 2.829) + 343.32 = 5.32
at i = 4%
– 1,000 + (420.72 x 1.0215 x 2.775) – (193.53 x 2.775) + 337.88 = –6.56
i = 3.45%
Since IRR is less than the marginal cost of capital, the transaction cannot be accepted.
30 30
112. Loan repayment = = = Rs. 2.21 lakh
PVIFA ( 4%, 20) 13.590
The lease rental to be collected can be calculated as follows:
i
Xx x 4 x PVIFA(30, 5) + 5 x PVIF(30, 5) = 100 – 30
i4
where X is the lease rental required by Leasewell Ltd. after paying the loan installment.
X x 1.1064 x 4 x 2.436 + 5 x 0.269 = 70
X x 10.78 + 1.35 = 70
70 − 1.35
X= = 6.37
10.78
Lease rental to be quoted = 6.37 + 2.21 = Rs.8.58 lakh
8.58 1
or x 1000 x = Rs. 28.60 ptpm
100 3
If Leasewell should not loose on HP transaction, the IRR on hire transaction should be
equal to the IRR on the lease transaction.
IRR on lease transaction is `i’ in the following:
i
–70 + 6.37 x x 4 x PVIFAi, 5 – 6.37 x 4 x 0.3 x PVIFAi, 5 + [9PVIFi, 1 + 6.3 PVIFi, 2 +
i4
4.41PVIFi, 3 + 3.09PVIFi, 4 + 2.19PVIFi, 5 ] + 5 PVIFi, 5 = 0
Let i be 26%, LHS will be equal to
–70 + 25.48 x 1.0928 x 2.635 – 7.64 x 2.636 + [9 x 0.794 + 6.3 x 0.63 + 4.41 x 0.5
+ 3.09 x 0.397 + 2.19 x 0.315] + 5 x 0.315 = 0.043
Let i be 28%, LHS will be equal to
278
Part II
279
Investment Banking and Financial Services
– 40 + 17.946 PVIFA(i%,5) = 0
40
PVIFA(i%,5) = = 2.229
17.946
At i = 32%, PVIFA(32%,5) = 2.345
At i = 36%, PVIFA(36%,5) = 2.181
Hence, i is between 32% and 36% and by interpolation,
2.345 − 2.229
i = 32 + (36 – 32) x
2.345 − 2.189
0.116
= 32 + 4 x = 34.9%
0.164
As the IRR is greater than the required gross yield of 25%, SFSL can go ahead with the
transaction.
LEASE ACCOUNTING AND REPORTING
114. i. Present value of minimum lease payments
= 450 x 0.312 x PVIFA (18, 5) = Rs.439.03 lakh.
ii. The machinery must be capitalized at the present value of the minimum lease
payments or at the fair market value whichever is less. Since the present value of
minimum lease payments is less than the fair market value in this case, the
machinery must be capitalized at the value of Rs.439.03 lakh – the present value of
minimum lease payments.
iii. Unexpired finance charge at the inception of the lease
= (450 x 0.312 x 5) – 439.03 = Rs.262.97 lakh
iv. Allocation of unexpired Finance Charge (Actuarial Method)
Year Net amount Finance charge Capital content Lease payment
outstanding (@ 18%)
1 439.03 79.02 61.38 140.40 *
2 377.65 67.98 72.42 140.40
3 305.23 54.94 85.46 140.40
4 219.77 39.56 100.84 140.40
5 118.93 21.41 118.93 140.34
v. Allocation of Unexpired Finance Charge (Based on sum of the Years Digits
Method)
Year Factor Finance charge
(A) (B) (C) = 262.97 x (B)
1 5/15 87.66
2 4/15 70.19
3 3/15 52.59
4 2/15 35.06
5 1/15 17.53
The IASC states that the Actuarial Method or some form of approximation of this
method can be applied for allocating the unexpired finance charge. Since the Sum-
of-years Digits Method produces an allocation which is close to what is obtained
under the Actuarial Method, we can say that this method is acceptable to the IASC.
280
Part II
Balance Sheet
Liabilities (Rs. Assets (Rs.
in lakh) in lakh)
Assets on Lease 439.03
Less: Depreciation 131.71 307.32
Secured loans
Lease Liability 305.23
Current Liabilities & Provisions
Lease Liability 72.42
* Lease payment = (P.V. of minimum lease payments + Unexpired finance charge at the
inception of the lease)/5
Since, PV[LR] < FMV the equipments need to be capitalized at Rs.70.03 lakh.
B. Amortization Schedule
281
Investment Banking and Financial Services
282
Part II
25.50
116. Lease rental = Rs. x 65 = Rs.1.66 lakh
1000
Present value of lease rental
= 1.66 PVIFA(1.25, 60) x (1.0125)
= 1.66 x 42.095 x 1.0125 = Rs.70.75 lakh
Since the present value is more than the FMV, the asset will be capitalized at Rs.65 lakh.
Effective rate of interest
1.66 x PVIFA (km 60) (1 + km)= 65
PVIFA (km, 60) (1 + km) = 39.156
km = 1.5%, LHS = 39.971
km = 1.75, LHS = 37.611
∴ km = 1.59%
∴ k = (1.0159)12 – 1 = 20.84%
Effective installment p.a. = 1.66 x 1.0159 x FVIFA(1.59,12) = Rs.22.10 lakh
Actual Installment p.a. = Rs.19.92 lakh.
Interest adjustment = 22.10 – 19.92 = 2.18
Interest Allocation
Year Balance o/s. Interest @20.84 Principal Adjusted Interest
1 65.00 13.55 8.55 11.37
2 56.45 11.76 10.33 9.58
3 46.12 9.61 12.49 7.43
4 33.63 7.00 15.10 4.82
5 18.53 3.86 18.53 1.39
Lease Equipment Account
Year Year
1 To Lease payable 65 1 By Balance c/d 65
2 To Balance b/d 65 2 By Balance c/d 65
3 To Balance b/d 65 3 By Balance c/d 65
4 To Balance b/d 65 4 By Balance c/d 65
5 To Balance b/d 65 5 By Balance c/d 65
Lease Payable Account
1 To Lease rental 8.55 1 By Lease equipment 65.00
To balance c/d 56.45
65.00 65.00
2 To Lease rental 10.33 2 By Balance b/d 56.45
To Balance c/d 46.12
56.45 56.45
3 To Lease rental 12.49 3 By Balance b/d 46.12
To Balance c/d 33.63
46.12 46.12
4 To Lease rental 15.10 4 By Balance b/d 33.63
To Balance c/d 18.53
33.63 33.63
283
Investment Banking and Financial Services
284
Part II
Balance Sheet
1 Secured Loan 1 Fixed Assets
Lease payable 46.12 Gross lease equipment 65.00
Current Liabilities Less: Acc. Depreciation 19.50
Lease payable 10.33 Net block 45.50
2 Secured Loan 2 Fixed Assets
Lease payable 33.63 Gross lease equipment 65.00
Current Liabilities Less: Acc. Depreciation 33.15
Lease payable 12.49 Net block 31.85
3 Secured Loans 3 Fixed Assets
Lease payable 18.53 Gross lease equipment 65.00
Current Liabilities Less: Acc. Depreciation 42.70
Lease payable 15.10 Net block 22.30
4 Secured Loan 4 Fixed Assets
Lease payable – Gross lease equipment 65.00
Current Liabilities Less: Acc. Depreciation 49.39
Lease payable 18.53 Net block 15.61
5 Secured Loans 5 Fixed Assets
Lease payable – Gross Lease equipment 65.00
Current Liabilities Less: Acc. Depreciation 54.07
Lease payable – Net block 10.93
117. i. Fair market value of the equipment = Rs.47 lakh
ii. PV of minimum lease payment
= (47 x 0.456) x PVIFA (18,3)
= 21.432 x 2.174 = Rs.46.59 lakh
The asset must be capitalized at Rs.46.59 lakh as it is less than fair market value.
The journal entry for capitalization will be
Leased Equipment a/c Dr 46.59
To lease payable a/c 46.59
The unexpired finance charge is equal to
(47 x 0.456 x 3) – 46.59 = Rs.17.70 lakh.
Allocation of Unexpired Finance Charge
(Rs. in lakh)
Year Outstanding Rate of Interest Principal Lease
lease liability interest charge amount payment
1 46.59 0.18 8.386 13.046 21.432
2 33.544 0.18 6.038 15.394 21.432
3 18.150 0.18 3.267 18.165 21.432
Ledger Accounts
Leased Equipment Account
Year Amount Year Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
1 To Lease payable a/c 46.59 1 By Balance c/d 46.59
285
Investment Banking and Financial Services
286
Part II
33.544 33.544
3. To Lease rental a/c 18.165 3 By Balance b/d 18.150
118. The interest rate implicit in the lease transaction is given by the equation
(87 x 0.312) x PVIFA(r, 5) + 8.5 x PVIF(r, 5) = 87
At r = 18%, LHS of equation is equal to:
(27.144 x 3.127) + (8.5 x 0.437) = 88.599
At r = 19%, LHS of the equation is equal to
= (27.144 x 3.058) + (8.5 x 0.419) = 96.558
⎛ 1% x 87 − 88.599 ⎞
r = 18% + ⎜ − 88.579 ⎟ = 18.78%
⎝ 86.558 ⎠
287
Investment Banking and Financial Services
288
Part II
Dr. Cr.
Year Amount Year Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
1 To Bank a/c 0.5 1 By Profit & Loss a/c 0.5
Disclosure in Financial Statements
Year 1
Profit & Loss a/c
Dr. Cr.
Expenses Amount Income Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
Initial direct cost 0.5 Finance income 16.339
Balance Sheet
Dr. Cr.
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
Current Assets
Net investment in lease 76.195
(144.22 – 57.22 – 10.805)
Year 2
Profit & Loss a/c
Dr. Cr.
Expenses Amount Income Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
Finance Income 14.309
Balance Sheet
Dr. Cr.
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
Current Assets
Net investment in lease 63.36
(76.195 – 12.835)
Year 3
Profit & Loss a/c
Dr. Cr.
Expenses Amount Income Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
Finance Income 11.899
Balance Sheet
Liabilities Amount Assets Amount
(Rs. in lakh) (Rs. in lakh)
Current Assets
Net Investment in lease 48.115
(63.36 – 15.245)
289
Investment Banking and Financial Services
290
Part II
b. Rate of interest implicit in the scheme is that rate which would equate the present
value of rentals to the cash price.
3,94,440 x PVIFA(k,36) = 100,00,000
100,00,000
PVIFA(k,36) = = 25.3524
3,94,440
From the additional information given,
PVIFA(2%,36) = 25.489
PVIFA(3%,36) = 21.832
25.489 − 25.3524
k=2+ = 2.04%
25.489 − 21.832
The implicit rate of interest per annum = (1 + 0.0204)12 – 1 = 27.42%
c. The sum-of-the-years digits would be,
36 + 35 + 34 + ....... + 3 + 2 + 1 = 666
Total interest payable for the three-year period = Rs.41,99,840.
Year Interest Allocation Rs.
** = 36 + 35 + .... + 25 = 366
36 + 35 + .... + 1 666
24 + 23 + .... + 13 222
= =
36 + 35 + .... + 1 666
12 + 11 + .... + 1 78
= =
36 + 35 + .... + 1 666
4 1
121. a. Cost of Capital = 20 (1 − 0.43) x + 24 x
5 5
9.12 + 4.8 = 14 (approx.)
Loan amount = 30,000 x 0.75 = Rs.22,500
22,500 + 22,500 x 0.12 x 3
Monthly HP = = Rs.850
36
i
PV of HP = 12 x 850 x PVIFA(14,3) x *
i12
= 10,200 x 2.322 x 1.0626 = Rs.25,167
* i = Effective rate of interest implied by the completed transaction
i/i12 can be found out from the Table 1 at the end of the textbook.
291
Investment Banking and Financial Services
122. 3 1
Cost of capital = x 16 x 0.7 + x 28 = 15.4
4 4
Cost of Leasing
A. PV of Lease Rentals
i *
= 0.027 x 280 x 12 x x PVIFA(16%,5) = 322.17
d12
B. PV of TS on Lease Rentals
= 280 x 0.027 x 12 x PVIFA(15.4%,5) x 0.3 = 90.384
COL = A – B = 231.79
Cost of Hire Purchase
224 + 224 x 0.15 x 3
C. EMI = = 9.02
36
i
D. PV of Hire payments = 9.02 x 12 x PVIFA(16%,3) x = 263.70
d12
Total charge for credit = 224 x 0.15 x 3 = 100.8
Interest Allocation
Year SOYD Factor Interest Allocation
1 366/666 55.39
2 222/666 33.60
3 78/666 11.81
E. PV of TS on charge for credit
= [55.39 PVIF(15.4,1) + 33.6 PVIF(15.4,2) + 11.81 PVIF(15.4,3)] 0.3=Rs.24.28
F. PV of DTS
= [70 PVIF(15.4,1) + 52.5 PVIF(15.4,2) + 39.38 PVIF(15.4,3) + 29.53(15.4,4)
PVIF(15.4,4)
+ 22.15 PVIF(15.4,5)] 0.3 = Rs.45.97 lakh
COHP = C+D–E–F
= 56 + 263.7 – 24.28 – 45.97 = Rs.249.45 lakh
COHP > COL, leasing is recommended.
292
Part II
i
* For i = 0.16, d12 = 0.1475 ⇒ = 1.0847
d12
(From Table A.1 (Relationship between Nominal and Effective Rates of Interest and
Discount) from the textbook.)
123. Cost of leasing can be determined as follows:
A. Present value of lease payments
i
= 360 x 0.028 x (12 )
* x 12 x PVIFA(20,5)
d
= 360 x 0.028 x 1.1053 x 12 x 2.991 = Rs.339.88 lakh
B. Present value of tax shield on lease payments
= 360 x 0.028 x 12 x 0.5175 x PVIFA(16,5) = 62.6 x 3.274 = Rs.204.94 lakh
Cost of hire purchase can be determined as follows:
C. Down Payment = 360 x 0.2 = Rs.72 lakh
D. Monthly hire purchase installment
360 x 0.8 (1 + 0.16 x 3)
= = Rs.11.84 lakh
36
E. Present value of monthly HP installments
i
= 11.84 x (12 )
** x 12 x PVIFA(20,3)
i
= 11.84 x 1.0887 x 12 x 2.107 = Rs.325.92 lakh
F. Unexpired finance charge at the inception of the HP transaction
= 360 x 0.8 x 0.16 x 3 = Rs.138.24 lakh
Allocation of the unexpired finance charge over the lease period based on the SOYD
method will be as follows:
Year Factor Finance charge
1 36 + 35 + .... + 25 366 366
= 138.24 x = 75.97
36 + 35 + .... + 1 666 666
2 24 + 23 + .... + 13 222 222
= 138.24 x = 46.08
36 + 35 + .... + 1 666 666
3 12 + 11 + .... + 1 78 78
= 138.24 x = 16.19
36 + 35 + .... + 1 666 666
G. Present value of tax shield on finance charge
= [(75.97 x PVIF(16,1) + 46.08 x PVIF(16,2) + 16.19 x PVIF(16,3)] x 0.5175
= [(75.97 x 0.862 + 46.08 x 0.748 + 16.19 x 0.641)] x 0.5175 = Rs.56.98 lakh
H. Present value of depreciation tax shields
= [(90 x PVIF(16,1) + 67.5 x PVIF(16,2) + 50.62 x PVIF(16,3) + 37.97 x PVIF(16,4)
+ 28.48 x PVIF(16,5)] x 0.5175
= [(90 x 0.862) + (67.5 x 0.743) + (50.62 x 0.6,41) + (37.97 x 0.552)
+ (28.48 x 0.476)] x 0.5175 = Rs.100.75 lakh
I. Present value of net salvage value
= 45 x PVIF(16,5)
= 45 x 0.476 = Rs.21.42 lakh
J. Cost of Leasing = A – B = Rs.194.94 lakh
K. Cost of HP = C + E – H – I – G = Rs.218.67 lakh
Since cost of leasing is less than the cost of hire purchase leasing is recommended.
293
Investment Banking and Financial Services
i
* For i = 20% = 0.20, = 1.1053 (From Table A.1)
d12
i
**For i = 20% = 0.20, 12
= 1.0887 (From Table A.1)
i
124. a. The first step is to calculate the break even rental for the lessor. Define L as the
break even rental payable quarterly in arrear on an asset cost of Rs.1,000
A. Initial Investment = Rs.1,000
i
B. PV of lease rentals = 4L x ( 4)
* x PVIFA (10,5)
i
= 4L x 1.0368 x 3.791 = 15.721L
C. PV of Tax on lease rentals = 4L x 0.3 x PVIFA(10,5)
= 4L x 0.3 x 3.791 = 4.549L
D. PV of Depreciation tax shields
= [250x0.909 + 187.5x0.826 + 140.63 x 0.751 + 105.47 x 0.683
+ 79.10x0.621] x 0.3 = 182.67
E. PV of residual value = 50 x 0.621 = 31.05
F. L can be obtained from the equation
–1,000 + 15.721L – 4.549L + 182.67 + 31.05 = 0
i.e 11.172L = 786.28
L = Rs. 70.38 ptpq
b. Define F as the flat rate of interest associated with the hire purchase plan.
750 + (750 x F x 3)
Quarterly installment = = (62.5 + 187.5F)
12
i
PV of quarterly installments = (62.5 + 187.5F) x 4 x ( 4) x PVIFA(i,3)
i
where i = 10%
= (62.5 + 187.5F) x 4 x 1.0367 x 2.487
= 644.57 + 1933.70F
Unexpired Finance Income = 750 x F x 3 = 2,250F
Allocation of unexpired finance income under SOYD method will be as follows:
Year SOYD Factor Finance Income
1 42/78 x 2,250F 1,211.54F
2 26/78 x 2,250F 750.00F
3 10/78 x 2,250F 288.46F
PV of Tax on Finance Income
= [1211.54F x 0.909 + 750.00F x 0.826 + 288.46F x 0.751] x 0.3 = 581.23F
The value of F can be obtained from the equation:
644.57 + 1,933.70F – 581.23F = 750
i.e. 1,352.47F = 105.43 or F = 7.8%
Minimum Quarterly Installment
⎡ 750 + (750 x 0.078 x 3) ⎤
=⎢ ⎥ = Rs.77.125
⎣ 12 ⎦
c. i. Total lease rentals = 70.38 x 4 x 5 = 1407.6
Cost of asset = 1000
294
Part II
295
Investment Banking and Financial Services
1
4 0.1 x 288 = 28.80
10
288
iii. Year-wise allocation under the straight line method =
4
= Rs.72 lakh for all years
b. We will assume allocation of unexpired finance charge using effective rate of
interest method.
Income Statement
(Rs. lakh)
Expenses Incomes
Depreciation related to equipments acquired under HP plan 72.00
Finance charge 104.40
Balance Sheet
(Rs. lakh)
Liabilities Assets
Fixed assets
Secured loans Assets acquired under HP plan
HP outstandings 271.22 Gross block 600
Current liabilities Less: Acc. Depreciation 72
HP outstandings 98.680 Net Block 528.00
126. a. We will work with an amount of Rs.1,000.
Amount of loan = 0.75 x 1,000 = Rs.750
Total charge for credit = 750 x 0.135 x 4 = 405
Monthly installment = (750 + 405)/48 = Rs.24.06
Define (i) as the effective rate of interest per annum or the APR. The value of i can
be obtained from the equation:
i
= 288.75 x x PVIFA(i,4) = 750
i (12)
i
= (12 )
x PVIFA(i, 4) = 2.597
i
i = 25.64%
b. Using the approximation formula, ‘i’ can be calculated as follows:
n 48
x 2F = x 2 x 13.5 = 26.45%
n +1 49
127. We will work with an amount of Rs.1,000.
The charge for credit = (1,000 x 0.14 x 4) = Rs.560
Monthly installment 1560
= = Rs.32.5
48
296
Part II
297
Investment Banking and Financial Services
298
Part II
366
1 x 114.82 63.10 132.72 69.62
666
222
2 x 114.82 38.27 132.72 94.45
666
78
3 x 114.82 13.45 132.72 119.27
666
Year 1
Income Statement
299
Investment Banking and Financial Services
i
d. Present value of hire rentals = 94.67 x x 4 x PVIFA(9,3)
d4
300
Part II
301
Investment Banking and Financial Services
24 + ....... + 13 222
3 = 9.816 6.802
48 + ........ + 1 1176
12 + ....... + 1 78
4 = 3.449 2.114
48 + ........ + 1 1176
41.546
F. PV of tax shield on finance charge of hire rentals
= 41.546 x 0.3 = Rs.12.464 crore
Cost of hire purchase = C – D – E
= 117.12 – 15.905 – 12.464 = Rs.88.75 crore
As COL < COHP, lease should be opted by BCL.
b. Comparison of purchase with lease can be done by calculating the net advantage of
lease (NAL).
If NAL > 0, lease should be opted and if NAL < 0, purchase would be preferable.
NAL = Investment cost – PV of lease rentals + PV of tax shield on lease rentals
– PV of depreciation tax shield – PV of interest tax shield
PV of interest tax shield:
Total charge for credit = 12 x 0.032 x 100 x 4 – 100 = Rs.53.6 crore
(Rs. crore)
Year SOYD factor Interest PV @ 13%
1 510/1176 23.245 20.572
2 366/1176 16.682 13.062
3 222/1176 10.118 7.012
4 78/1176 3.555 2.179
42.825
PV of interest tax shield = 42.825 x 0.3 = Rs.12.848 crore
NAL = 100 – 118.347 + 34.26 – 15.905 – 12.848 = –Rs.12.84 crore
As NAL is (–)ve, purchase alternative should be opted by BCL.
135. A. Loan Amount
= 4,00,000 x 0.75 = Rs.3,00,000
B. PV of installments paid
= 9250 x 12 x i/d12 x PVIFAi,3
= 1,11,000 x i/d12 x PVIFAi,3
C. Service fee = Rs.2,000
D. PV of amount payable on early settlement:
Total charge for credit
= 9250 x 12 x 4 – 3,00,000 = Rs.1,44,000
t ( t + 1)
Interest rebate as per rule 78 = xD
n (n + 1)
where,
t = Installments not due and unpaid;
n = Total number of installments; and
D = Total charge for credit
302
Part II
12 x 13
= x 1,44,000 = Rs.9,551
48 x 49
Rebate for prompt payment
8
= x 9250 x 36 = Rs.266.40
10,000
Amount payable on early settlement
= (9250 x 12) – 9551 – 266.40 = Rs.1,01,183
PV of the amount = 1,01,183 x PVIFi,3
Effective rate of interest is ‘i’ in the following equation:
3,00,000 – 1,11,000 x i/d12 x PVIFAi,3 – 2000 – 1,01,183 x PVIFi,3 = 0
303
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Lease Assets
(Rs. lakh)
Amount o/s Rate of provision Amount
< 12 months 40 — —
12 - 24 months 24 10% 2.4
24 - 36 months 10 - 3* = 7 50% 3.5
> 36 months 10 100% 10.0
15.9
Provision on leased assets = 15.9 + 3.0* = 18.90
Total provision = 34.11 + 29 + 40.50 + 15.90 = Rs.119.51 lakh
*As 12 months have expired after the due date of the last payment, entire net book value
has to be provided for.
137. a. Down payment
= Rs.75 x 0.2 = Rs.15 lakh
A. Amount of loan
= Rs.75 – Rs.15 = Rs.60 lakh
B. Let the flat rate of interest be F%
F
Rs.60 x x 5 + Rs.60
EMI = 100
12 x 5
= Rs. (0.05F + 1) lakh
C. PV of hire payment
i
= Rs.(0.05F + 1) 12 PVIFA12%, 5 x 12
i
= Rs.(0.05F + 1) 12 x 3.605 x 1.0539
= Rs. (2.28F + 45.592) lakh
F
D. Unmatured finance charges = Rs.60 x x 5 = Rs.3F lakh
100
Allocation of unmatured finance charges
(Rs. lakh)
Year SOYD Finance Interest Net PV @ 12% PV @ 12%
factor income tax interest of net of
(Rs.) @ 2% (Rs.) interest interest tax
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
1 654/1830 1.072F 0.021F 1.051F 0.938F 0.01875F
2 510/1830 0.836F 0.017F 0.819F 0.653F 0.01355F
3 366/1830 0.600F 0.012F 0.588F 0.419F 0.00854F
4 222/1830 0.364F 0.0073F 0.357F 0.227F 0.00464F
5 78/1830 0.128F 0.0026F 0.125F 0.071F 0.00148F
2.308F 0.04696F
or 0.047F
E. PV of interest tax = Rs.0.047F lakh
F. PV of income tax on net interest income = Rs.2.308F x 0.3 = Rs.0.692F lakh
NPV(HP)
=–A+C–E–F=0
= – 60 + 2.28F + 45.592 – 0.047F – 0.692F = 0
or, 1.541F = 14.408
304
Part II
Rs.14,408
or, F= = 9.35%
Rs.1,541
b. Monthly hire installment
= 0.05F + 1
= Rs.(0.05 x 9.35) + 1= Rs.1.468 lakh
Equated yearly payment
= Rs.1.468 x 12 = Rs.17.616 lakh
Amortization Schedule
(Rs. lakh)
Year Installment Interest Capital content Interest tax
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) @ 2% (Rs.)
1 17.616 10.023 7.593 0.196
2 17.616 7.817 9.799 0.159
3 17.616 5.610 12.006 0.112
4 17.616 3.403 14.213 0.068
5 17.616 1.197 16.419 0.024
88.080
Profit and Loss Account
(Rs. lakh)
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
Interest tax 0.196 0.159 0.112 Finance 10.023 7.817 5.61
income
Balance Sheet
(Rs. lakh)
Year 1 Year 2 Year 3 Year 1 Year 2 Year 3
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)
Unmatured 18.027 10.210 4.600 Current 70.464 52.848 35.232
finance (7.817 + (5.61 + (3.403 + assets (88.08 – (70.464 – (52.848
income 5.61 + 3.403 + 1.197) 17.616) 17.616) –17.616)
3.403 + 1.197)
1.197)
138. a. A. Cost of car = Rs.5,60,000
B. Deposit = 5,60,000 x 0.2 = Rs.1,12,000
5,60,000 x 0.11 x 3 + 5,60,000
C. EMI = = Rs.20,689
36
D. PV of EMIs = 20,689 PVIFAi, 36 (1 + i)
E. Documentation fee = 0.005 x 5,60,000 = Rs.2,800
F. Deposit with interest refunded = 1,12,000 FVIF0.5%, 36 = Rs.1,34,028
PV of deposit refunded = 1,34,028 PVIFi, 36
18
G. Prompt payment rebate = x 20,689 x 36 = Rs.670
20,000
PV of rebate = 670 PVIFi, 36
305
Investment Banking and Financial Services
306
Part II
307
Investment Banking and Financial Services
308
Part II
CONSUMER CREDIT
141. Initial investment cost = Rs. 4,50,000
Amount of loan = 0.85 x 4,50,000 = 3,82,500
Total charge for credit = 3,82,500 x 0.1240 x 2 = 94,860
Monthly installment = (3,82,500 + 94,860) /24 = 19,890
Employing the approximation formula
n
i = x 2F
n +1
24
x 2 x 0.1240 = 23.81
25
Using the IRR Method:
19,890 x PVIFA(km, 24) = 3,82,500
km = 1.85%
Annual percentage rate = (1.0185)12 – 1 = 0.245 or 24.6%
142. Let flat rate = E
EMI
1,00,000 x E x 3 + 1,00,000
(3835) =
36
3,835 x 36 − 1,00,000
E = = 12.69%
3,00,000
A. Loan = 4,20,000 x 0.8 = Rs.3,36,000
309
Investment Banking and Financial Services
⎛ 3, 835 x 36 ⎞
⎜ 1, 00, 000 x 3, 36, 000 ⎟ − 3, 36, 000
143. a.
⎝ ⎠ = 12.69%
3, 36, 000 x 3
Note: 4,20,000 x 0.8 = 3,36,000
b. Calculation of effective rate of interest:
Amount financed: 4,20,000 x 0.80 = 3,36,000
3,835
EMI = x 3,36,000 = 12,886
1,00,000
Processing fee = 3,36,000 x 0.01 = 3,360
Amount payable as on the date of prepayment
Total interest = 12,886 x 36 – 3,36,000 = 127,896
12 x 13
Rebate = x 1,27,896 = 14979
36 x 37
Amount payable = 12,886 x 12 –14,979 = 1,39,653
The effective rate of interest is ‘i’ in the following equation.
i
3,36,000 – 3,360 – 12,886 x 12
x PVIFA(i,2) = 0
i
– 1,39,653 x PVIF(i,2) = 0
By trial and error, i = 23.66%.
144. a. Flat rate = 16%
36
Effective rate = x 2 x 16 = 31.14%
37
Monthly interest = (1.3114)1/12 – 1 = 2.284%
PVIFA(2.284, 36) = 24.369
2,50,000
EMI = = Rs.10,259
24,369
Alternatively
310
Part II
311
Investment Banking and Financial Services
4,25,000 − 1,06,250 *
148. EMI = n = 20, i = 12.5
PVIFA[1 / 12, n x 12]
149. Since there is a deferment period of 2 months, the settlement date is taken as
February 10, 1999.
The total charge for credit is 5,000, and the interest rebate allowed for an early settlement
5
= 5,000 x = Rs.2,083.
12
Amount payable on early settlement
= 80,000 – 2,083 = Rs.77,917
The rate of interest (i) implied by the completed transaction is given by the equation:
75,000 (1 + i)5/12 = Rs.77,917
⎡ 12
⎤
⎢ ⎛ 77,917 ⎞ 5
i = ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ − 1⎥ = 9.58%
⎢⎝ 75,000 ⎠ ⎥
⎣⎢ ⎥⎦
The APR(i) associated with the original transaction is 75,000 (1 + i) = 80,000 i = 6.67%
150. i. Repayment period = 12 months
Total charge for credit = (5,062.5 x 12) – 54,000 = 6,750
6,750
Flat rate of interest = x 100 = 12.5%
54,000
n
Effective rate of interest = x 2F
n +1
12
= x 25 = 23.07%
13
ii. Repayment period = 24 months
Total charge for credit = (2,835 x 24) – 54,000 = 14,040
Annual charge = 7,020
7,020
Flat rate of interest = x 100 = 13%
54,000
312
Part II
24
Effective rate of interest = x 2 x 13 = 24.96%
25
iii. Repayment period = 36 months
Total charge for credit = (2107.5 x 36) – 54,000 = 21,870
Annual charge = 7,290
7,290
Flat rate of interest = x 100 = 13.5%
54,000
36
Effective rate of interest = x 27 = 26.27%
37
151. a. The effective rate of interest implied by the deposit scheme will be that rate of
interest which equates the present value of the following cash flow stream to zero.
i.e. Loan Amount – PV (Installment paid) – Service fee + (PV (Accumulated value
of Deposit) + PV (Prompt payment bonus) = 0
(Loan amount = 90,000 x 0.25 = 22,500)
Accumulated value of 25% deposit = 22,500 + 11,720 = 34,220 (after 36 months)
3,475
Prompt payment bonus under zero deposit plan = x 1 x 36 = 125.1
1,000
3,300
Prompt payment bonus under 25% deposit plan = x 1 x 36
1,000
= Rs.118.8 = Rs.119
We will define i1, and i2 as the effective rates of interest implied by the zero deposit
scheme and the 25% deposit scheme respectively.
The value of i1 can be obtained from the equation:
i
90,000 – 1,500 – [3,475 x 12 x (12) x PVIFA(i,3)] – [7,200 x PVIF(i,3)]
i
+ [125.1 x PVIF(i,3)]=0
i = 28.71%
The value of i2 can be obtained from the equation:
i
67,500 – 1,500 – [3,300 x 12 x (12)
x PVIFA(i,3)] + 34,220 x PVIF(i,3)
i
+ [119 x PVIF (i,3)] = 0
at 28%, LHS = – 687.257
at 30%, LHS = 290.6
By interpolation i = 29.40%
Therefore, the effective rate of interest implied by the two schemes are 28.71%
and 29.40% respectively.
1.10 + (1.10 x 0.125)
152. Monthly installment = = Rs.10,312
12
Total charge for credit at the inception of the transaction
= (1,10,000 x 1.125) – 1,10,000 = Rs.13,750
Interest rebate as per the modified rule of 78
(6 − 1) (7 − 1)
= 13,750 x = Rs.2,644
12 x 13
Amount repayable on early settlement
= (10,312 x 6) – 2,644 = Rs.59,228
313
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Define im as the monthly rate of interest implied by the completed transaction. The value of
im can be obtained from the equation:
10,312 x PVIFA[i ( m ) ,8 ]
+ 59,228 x PVIFA[i m ,6]
= 1,10,000
i = 2.1%;
Annualized effective rate of interest = [(10.210)12– 1] x 100 = 28.32%
153. a. 20% deposit scheme
A. Investment = Rs.25,000
20
B. Deposit =
x 25,000 = Rs.5000
100
Equated monthly installment (EMI)
25,000 x 0.1 x 2 + 25,000
= = Rs.1250
24
C. PV of EMIs = 1250 x 12 x i/i12 x PVIFAi,2 = 15,000 x i/i12 x PVIFAi,2
Future value of deposit = (1.0125)24
5000 = Rs.6736.755
D. PV of deposit = 6736.755 PVIFi,2
Effective rate of interest is ‘i’ in the following:
A–B–C+D=0
25,000 – 5000 – 15,000 x i/i12 x PVIFAi, 2 + 6736.755 x PVIFi,2 = 0
Let i = 24%
LHS= 25,000 – 5000 – 15,000 x 1.1057 x 1.457 + 6736.755 x 0.65
= Rs.213.817 lakh
Let i = 20%
LHS = 25,000 – 5000 –15,000 x 1.0887 x 1.528 + 6736.755 x 0.694
= –Rs.277.696 lakh
Therefore, i lies between 20% and 24%
By interpolation,
−277.696 − 0
i = 20% + (24 – 20)
− 277.696 − 213.817
= 20% + 2.26% = 22.26%
b. 20% down payment scheme
A. Investment cost = Rs.25,000
B. Down payment = 25,000 x 0.2 = Rs.5000
Equated monthly installment
20,000 x 0.1 x 2 + 20,000
= = Rs.1,000
24
C. PV of EMIs = 1,000 x 12 x PVIFAi,2 x i/i12
Effective rate of interest is i in the following:
A–B–C=0
25,000 – 5000 – 12,000 x PVIFAi,2 x i/i12 = 0
Let i = 20%, LHS = 25000 – 5000 – 12,000 x 1.0887 x 1.528 = 37.597
314
Part II
315
Investment Banking and Financial Services
30 30 30
= [720 x 23%* x ] – [(720 – 25.2) x 0.8** x 22.5% x + 164.16 x 24% x ]
360 360 360
= Rs.(13.80 – 13.70) lakh = Rs.0.10 lakh
* 23% is the average cost of owned funds 24% and borrowings 22%
** only 80% of receivables net commission will be available as advance.
So total benefit of the factoring option
= 14.4 + 7.2 + 8.0 + 0.10 = Rs.29.7 lakh
316
Part II
50 + 90 + 10
Current ratio (before factoring) = = 1.67
90
Bank Overdraft
317
Investment Banking and Financial Services
318
Part II
319
Investment Banking and Financial Services
45 1
Cost of long-term own funds = 800 x 0.8 x x 0.2 x = Rs.5.33 lakh
360 3
45 2
Cost of bank finance = 800 x 0.8 x x 0.16 x = Rs.8.53 lakh
360 3
B. Cost of bad debt loss = 800 x 0.8 x = Rs.6.4 lakh
C. Cost of maintaining and = Rs.10 lakh
collecting accounts
Cost of Non-Recourse Factoring:
D. Factoring commission = 800 x 0.8 x 0.02 = Rs.12.8 lakh
40
E. Discount charges = 800 x 0.8 x 0.75 x 0.19 x
360
= Rs.10.13 lakh
40
F. Cost of own funds = 800 x 0.8 x 0.25 x 0.2 x =Rs.3.56 lakh
360
G. Cost of maintaining and = Rs.2.5 lakh
collecting accounts
Net benefit of non-recourse factoring
A + B + C – (D + E + F + G) = 30.26 – 28.89 = Rs.1.37 lakh
The benefits outweigh the cost incurred. Hence TCL should go for factoring.
161. Relevant Costs of Existing Credit Policy:
A. Cash discount = 780 x 0.3 x 0.01 = Rs.2.34 lakh
B. Cost of funds invested in receivables
66
= 780 x x 0.16 = Rs.22.88 lakh
360
C. Bad debts = 780 x 0.01 = Rs.7.80 lakh
D. Administrative costs = Rs.3.40 lakh
Relevant Costs of Proposed Credit Policy:
E. Cash discount = 780 x 0.6 x 0.02 = Rs.9.36 lakh
F. Cost of funds invested in receivables
36
= 780 x x 0.16 = Rs.12.48 lakh
360
G. Bad debts = 780 x 0.01 = Rs.7.8 lakh
H. Administrative costs = Rs.3.4 lakh
Relevant Costs Associated with recourse Advance Factoring:
I. Commission = 780 x 0.005 = Rs.3.9 lakh
50
J. Interest cost = 780 x x 0.18 = Rs.19.50 lakh
360
K. Bad debts = Rs.7.8 lakh
Relevant Costs Associated with Bon-recourse Advance Factoring:
L. Commission = 780 x 0.01 = Rs.7.8 lakh
M. Interest cost = Rs.19.50 lakh
Cost-benefit analysis of proposed credit policy:
Net benefits = (E + F + G + H) – (A + B + C + D)
= Rs.3.38 lakh (benefit)
Cost-benefit analysis of recourse advance factoring:
Net benefit = (I + J + K) – (A + B + C + D)
320
Part II
321
Investment Banking and Financial Services
50
G. Cost of own funds = 0.24 x x 88 x 0.15 = Rs.0.44 lakh
360
Total costs of factoring = Rs.4.174 lakh
As factoring costs are less than bill discounting costs, factoring should be preferred.
164. Relevant Costs of In-house Management:
Expected sales = Rs.360 x 1.1 = Rs.396 lakh
A. Cash discount = Rs.396 x 0.2 x 0.01 = Rs.0.792 lakh
Average collection period = 0.2 x 15 + 0.8 x 45 = 39 days
B. Cost of funds:
3 39
Costs of bank finance = Rs.396 x x 0.2 x = Rs.5.077 lakh
5 365
2 39
Costs of own funds = Rs.396 x x 0.24 x = Rs.4.062 lakh
5 365
Total cost of funds = Rs.9.139 lakh
C. Bad debts = Rs.396 x 0.015 = Rs.5.94 lakh
D. Loss of profit due to foregone sales = Rs.36 x 0.20 = Rs.7.2 lakh
E. Avoidable administrative expenses = Rs.1.5 lakh
Total costs of in-house management =A+B+C+D+E
= Rs.0.792 + Rs.9.139 + Rs.5.94 + Rs.7.2 + Rs.1.5 = Rs.24.571 lakh.
Relevant costs of bank Participating Factoring:
Expected sales = Rs.360 x 1.2 = Rs.432 lakh
F. Commission = Rs.432 x 0.03 = Rs.12.96 lakhs
G. Cost of funds:
40
Discount charges = Rs.432 x 0.8 x 0.2 x = Rs.7.575 lakh
365
40
Interest to Sind Bank = Rs.432 x 0.2 x 0.6 x 0.22 x = Rs.1.25 lakh
365
40
Cost of own funds = Rs.432 x 0.2 x 0.4 x 0.24 x = Rs.0.9095 lakh
365
Total cost of funds = Rs.9.734 lakh
Total cost of bank participating factoring
= Cost of funds + Commission = Rs.9.734 + Rs12.96 = Rs.22.694 lakh
As costs of bank participating factoring are less than costs of in-house management
SCL should opt for the factoring arrangement.
165. Cost and Benefit Analysis of Factoring:
Benefits of factoring:
(Assuming that the 10% increment in sales is irrespective of the method of financing
receivables).
New sales = 250 x 1.1 = Rs.275 lakh
A. Cash discount = 275 x 0.2 x 0.01 = Rs.0.55 lakh
Average collection period: 0.2 x 15 + 0.8 [0.8 x 60 + 0.2 x 80] = 54.2 days
54.2
B. Cost of own funds = 275 x x 0.3 x 0.24 = Rs.2.94 lakh
365
322
Part II
54.2
C. Cost of bank finance = 275 x x 0.7 x 0.18 = Rs.5.15 lakh
365
D. Avoidable administration expenses = Rs.0.6 lakh
E. Let the increment in sales because of factoring over and above Rs.275 lakh be Rs.X
lakh.
Contribution gained on increased sales = X x 0.3 = Rs.0.3X lakh
Total benefit of factoring =A+B+C+D+E
= 0.55 + 2.94 + 5.15 + 0.6 + 0.3X = (9.24 + 0.3X) lakh
Costs of factoring:
Sales under factoring option are Rs.(275 + X) lakh.
40
F. Discount charge = (275 + X) 0.8 x x 0.22 = Rs.5.30 + 0.019X lakh
365
G. Commission = (275 + X) 0.025 = Rs.6.88 + 0.025X lakh
40
H. Cost of own funds = (275 + X) 0.2 x x 0.24 = Rs.1.45 + 0.005X lakh
365
Total costs = F + G + H = Rs.13.63 + 0.049X lakhs
Minimum increment in sales is the value of ‘X’ in the following:
9.24 + 0.3X = 13.63 + 0.049X
X = Rs.17.49 lakh.
166. Costs of In-house Management of Receivables
A. Bad debts = 0.02 x 500 = Rs.10 crore
(assuming non-recourse factoring)
B. Average collection period = 0.25 x 45 + 0.5 x 55 + 0.25 x 75 = 57.5 days
57.5
Cost of bank finance = 500 x 0.5 x x 0.16 = Rs.6.39 crore
360
57.5
Cost of own funds = 500 x 0.5 x x 0.2 = Rs.7.99 crore
360
Cost of financing receivables = Rs.14.38 crore
C. Savings in administration expenses = Rs.0.05 crore
D. Contribution foregone on increased sales = 75 x 0.25 = Rs.18.75 crore
Total costs = A + B + C + D = 10 + 14.38 + 0.05 + 18.75 = Rs.43.18 crore.
Cost of Factoring
E. Commission = 575 x 0.02 = Rs.11.5 crore
50
F. Discount charge = 575 x 0.75 x 0.15 x = Rs.8.98 crore
360
50
G. Cost of own funds = 575 x 0.25 x 0.2 x = Rs.3.99 crore
360
Total costs of factoring = E + F + G = 11.5 + 8.98 + 3.99 = Rs.24.47 crore
As total costs of factoring are lower than the total costs of in-house management,
factoring can be considered.
However, if we assume that the factoring is with recourse, the total costs of in-house
management of receivables remain unchanged at Rs.43.18 crore whereas costs of
factoring increases by Rs.11.5 crore (i.e 575 x 0.02 crore) to Rs.35.97 crore. Even
recourse factoring, is desirable, as its costs are lower than the costs of in-house
management.
323
Investment Banking and Financial Services
324
Part II
CC PC LC
= AV x x + AV x − BC − CM
100 100 100
78.95 x 50 21.05
= 4,75,000 x + 4,75,000 x – 1,10,500 – 85,000 = Rs.91,993.75
100 x100 100
⎢ 3,60,000 x 0.16 ⎜ ⎟ ⎥
= ⎢
1 ⎝ 12 ⎠ ⎥ = Rs.5,008.5
12 ⎢ ⎛ 1 + 0.16 ⎞
240 −1 ⎥
⎢ ⎜ ⎟ ⎥
⎣⎢ ⎝ 12 ⎠ ⎦⎥
171. The approximate amount of installment can be calculated as follows:
15,00,000 1
x = Rs.21,377
PVIFA (15,15) 12
1.79163
or 96,000 = L
9.539
or L = Rs.4,98,344
Maximum value of the flat = Rs.6,64,459.
325
Investment Banking and Financial Services
326
Part II
327
Investment Banking and Financial Services
328
Part III
13. Omega Plastics is planning to raise capital. Mr. Goutam Parekh, MD, is thinking that it
is wise to raise funds through private placement rather than from the public. List out the
features and merits of private placements to Mr. Parekh.
14. Mulchand Electronics Limited are small scale manufacturers of electronic equipments. The
company has a turnover of Rs.5 cr. It is contemplating to expand its capacity and needs
funds immediately. The Finance Manager, Mahinder Singh is of the opinion that he may
not be able to get the right price for the shares if he opts for an IPO. But, he still wants his
company to be listed. Is there any way out to raise funds without going public? If so,
discuss the distinctive advantages of the same over a public offering.
15. The prime function of a rating agency is to provide investors with authentic information
about the creditworthiness of issuers. Standard & Poor’s rating agency is considered as one
of the best credit rating agencies in the world. In this context, discuss the rating obligations
(both long-term and short-term) of S&Ps.
16. The concept of free pricing rests on the premise that “market knows best”. Both underpricing and
overpricing have negative consequences. Explain whether SEBI guidelines are adequate to ensure
proper pricing.
17. Most of the developing nations are tapping foreign investments to accelerate their economic
development, but the investors need to assess the country’s economic, social, political and
financial position through a reliable credit rating agency for investing their funds. S&P does
sovereign rating for nations all over the world. Discuss the key factors considered by S & P
while rating local currency debt.
18. The responsibilities of intermediaries form a crucial role in international capital
markets. In this regard, discuss briefly the role of various intermediaries in international
capital markets.
19. Till the early ‘90s, investors faced liquidity problems, risk of bad deliveries, lack of
transparency, etc., in secondary markets for equity. What are the major changes that have
been initiated in the secondary market to address the above problem?
20. Ranj Kunj Petrochem Ltd. is into extracting petro products for the last 25 years. It is
planning forward integration for which it needs huge funds which cannot be catered by the
Indian investors; hence it is planning to issue ADRs. Discuss the various levels of ADR.
21. Arnica Chemicals and Extracts Ltd. is planning to diversify into related areas. It plans to
raise finance by accepting public deposits rather than approach any financial institution.
Discuss various factors that Arnica Chemicals needs to consider while marketing its public
deposits.
22. The call money market is referred to as the most sensitive barometer measuring the
liquidity conditions prevailing in financial markets. What are the various purposes for
which call money is lent in India?
23. Manjari Publishers is a good market player in publishing journals, textbooks and also
undertakes bulk screen printing work. It has recently, come out with its public issue, and
when it was listed on BSE, it was underpriced. What do you think are the probable factors
for underpricing in case of the Manjari Publishers?
24. XYZ Ltd. is a company involved in the leasing business. It had applied for registration with
the RBI and is still awaiting its approval. What are the parameters of XYZ Ltd. that will be
considered by the RBI before granting the certificate of registration?
25. A NBFC with over Rs.25 lakh paid-up capital has recently received its auditors’ comment
stating that the mix of Tier I capital and Tier II capital is disproportionate compared to the
stipulated norms for the calculation of the CAR. Where do you think the NBFC must have
gone wrong? State the methodology of calculating Tier I capital.
26. The management of the Avenue Finance Ltd., a new company, was quite relieved to receive
a communication from the RBI granting it the certificate of registration. They now propose
to accept fixed deposits as per the RBI guidelines so as to provide funds to their principal
area of business leasing. What are the various regulations concerning maintenance of a
register, advertisement for deposits, nominations and loans, that have to be followed by the
management with regard to acceptance of fixed deposits?
329
Investment Banking and Financial Services
27. The NPAs of Path Financial Services are at a very high level of 10%. The consultant of the
company says that the company needs to make more provisions because of its asset mix
being skewed towards leasing and hire purchase rather than loans and advances.
What are the provisions that has to be done in case of loans, advances and other credit
facilities and in case of Lease and Hire Purchase of assets?
28. “Though the lease rental is a bit on the higher side, in view of the high rate of technological
obsolescence in the industry, we better go for an operating lease for the equipment, rather
than a finance lease”, said Mr Avadhani, Director (Technical) of Prudent Technologies Ltd.
to the Manager (Finance) during a meeting called to finalize the mode of acquisition of the
latest brand of balancing equipment. The Director (Marketing), who was also present, could
not understand what it meant. Explain to him the distinction between a finance lease and an
operating lease to him.
29. Leasing is widely known to be an off-balance sheet form of financing. But, is it the only
advantage of leasing? Explain the advantages of leasing.
30. “Though leasing appears to be a highly flexible form of finance, the finance lease contract
being non-cancellable makes it somewhat unattractive” says the Finance Manager of
Duraplastic Ltd. Do you agree with him? Explain the shortcomings of leasing as a form of
finance.
31. Tax treatment of lease rentals and leased assets and their representation in financial
statements were controversial issues for quite some time. But now, there is a general
agreement on the issue – mostly due to various circulars and notes issued by government
agencies and bodies. Briefly explain the tax and accounting aspects of leasing.
32. Purchase of consumer durables, particularly through consumer credit has gained a lot of
momentum in India in the last five years. Explain the characteristic features of consumer credit
transactions.
33. Mr Ramchandani wants to buy a color television costing Rs.20,000 on installment basis and
approaches Rajkamal Electronics Ltd., a big distributor of consumer goods. Rajkamal
Electronics Ltd. has a financing arrangement with World Wide Consumer Finance Ltd. for
financing purchases made from it. Explain how Mr Ramchandani will be evaluated by
the company to decide whether or not he should be granted the installment payment
facility.
34. Financial markets always create new instruments to overcome the difficulties associated
with instruments already in use. The same phenomenon can be seen in the mortgage-backed
securitized instruments. The innovative instruments are generally referred to as non-
traditional instruments. Describe any four of them.
35 Housing finance being a long-term finance, the possibility of steep changes in interest rates
has always been a matter of concern for both borrowers and lenders. To address the
concerns of the two, floating rate loans have been introduced. The HDFC has recently (in
June, 1999) announced plans to provide floating rate loans. In the West, a more
sophisticated instrument called the Adjusted Rate Mortgage (ARM) is in use. Explain what
is meant by an ARM and its advantages.
36. Real estate, for long, has been known for providing good returns. Though the real estate
market in some cities has seen a slump in the recent past (second half of 1998), investment
interest in real estate is still very strong. What are the characteristic features of real estate
that make it a good investment? What are the aspects that should be kept in view while
selecting and managing real estate?
37. Credit rating is always helpful in selling an issue of debt. But is credit rating necessary for
securitizing the receivables of a company? Explain.
38. In hire purchase, the hirer is allowed to claim depreciation on the hired assets from the year
the assets are taken on hire. But, the ownership is said to be passed on only at the time of
exercise of option to buy/payment of the last hire rental. In such a situation, when should
the transaction be subjected to sales tax, if at all? Explain the sales tax provisions relating to
hire purchase.
330
Part III
39. The finance manager of Grindwell Manufacturing Co. Ltd. is seriously thinking of using
factoring to reduce the company’s funds that are blocked in accounts receivable. But, he
wants to know about factoring in detail before taking any concrete steps in that direction.
Explain the mechanism of factoring to him.
40. The process of factoring involves some legal complications as it involves the assignment of
the right to collect a debt from the client company to the factor company. Explain the legal
aspects of factoring in detail.
41. A part of the working capital finance given by banks is generally in the form of a bill
discounting limit for discounting the bills of exchange received in the course of business.
What are bills of exchange? Explain their features.
42. Just as physical assets are depreciated, finance companies also write-off their assets. The
write-off is not based on the passage of time, but on the quality of the asset as evidenced by
the receipt of the interest payments and principal payments. Explain the provisions required
for loans and advances made by NBFCs.
43. Bills of exchange are used very frequently while trading with parties in far-off locations.
Mr Raja Ram, the manager of a newly set-up trading concern, M/s Ranvir Trading Co, is
not very sure of how bills of exchange come into existence and how they are useful in
transacting with other parties. Explain the same with reference to different types of bills to
him.
44. Though Indian exporters want to reduce the lag between the export of goods and receipt of
proceeds, they are looking up to the government to provide them finance at lower rates of
interest rather than use services such as cross-border factoring and forfaiting. The reasons
appear to be lack of awareness regarding forfaiting and presence of very few companies offering
the service of forfaiting. Explain the process of forfaiting.
45. The use of credit cards has increased phenomenally in the last few years. This has induced
many banks to come out with credit cards. The competition among banks is increasing.
Explain the advantages of credit cards to all the parties involved.
331
Investment Banking and Financial Services
332
Part III
The outstanding balance of WMA at the end of the year should be repaid by the central
government (it should be brought down to zero). If the balance remains unpaid for more
than two weeks after the end of the year, the RBI converts the amount into dated securities
at the market rate of interest.
If 75 percent of the limit is utilized, the RBI should initiate a fresh floatation of central
government securities.
2. Short-term liquidity being the main purpose of the money market, various instruments have
developed to suit short-term requirements. For instance, the requirement of funds by banks
to meet their statutory reserves will vary from one day to a fortnight. Similarly, corporates
may require funds for their working capital purpose for any period up to a year. Given
below is a broad classification of the money market instruments depending upon the type of
issuer and the requirements they meet.
Government and Quasi-Government Securities
• Treasury Bills (T-Bills)
• Government Dated Securities/Gilt-Edged Securities
Banking Sector Securities
• Call and Notice Money Market
• Term Money Market
• Certificate of Deposit
• Participation Certificates
Private Sector Securities
• Commercial Paper
• Bills of Exchange (commercial and trade bills/factorization bills)
• Inter-corporate Deposits/Investments
• Money Market Mutual Funds.
Except for their debt nature, the securities listed above differ from each other in their
characteristics relating to maturity, issuer, type of investors, the risk-return profile,
liquidity, marketability, negotiability, transferability, etc. Money market instruments,
however, do not include any equities.
Government Securities
Treasury Bills: T-Bills are issued to enable the government to tide over short-term
liquidity requirements with maturities varying from a fortnight up to a year. These
instruments are issued at a discount to the face value. Being issued by the government they
are considered to be risk-free. Due to this, they are highly marketable. Investors in T-Bills
generally include banks, other institutional investors and individuals.
Government Dated Securities: These are medium- to long-term government securities.
Unlike the T-Bills which are issued at a discount, these securities carry a coupon rate. In
spite of being long-term instruments, these government securities form a part of the money
market due to their liquidity. These instruments set a benchmark for the long-term interest
rates. Issuers will clearly be the central/state government and other quasi-governmental
bodies while the investors will be banks, FIs, other institutional investors and individuals.
Government securities have fairly high liquidity compared to other money market
instruments.
Banking Sector Securities
The banking sector has a very vital and active role in the money market. The short-term
requirements of banks vary from a single day up to a year for meeting reserve requirements
and credit accommodation purposes. Based on this requirement, various instruments/
markets with differing maturities have developed.
333
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Call and Notice Money: These funds represent borrowings made for a period of one day
up to a fortnight. However, there exists a difference in the mechanism adopted for lending
funds between the call and the notice money markets. In the call money market, funds are
lent for a predetermined maturity period that can range from a single day to a fortnight.
However, with identical range for maturity period, the funds lent in the notice money
market do not have a specified repayment date when the deal is entered into. The lender
will simply issue a notice to the borrower 2-3 days before the funds are to be repaid. On
receipt of this notice, the borrower will have to repay the funds within the given time.
While both these funds serve the general purpose of meeting reserve requirements, the
reliance of the banks, however, is mostly on the call money market. It is here that it raises
overnight money, i.e. funds for a single day.
Term Money: Short-term funds having a maturity of 15 days and over are categorized as
term money. Banks access this term money route for the purpose of bringing greater
stability to their short-term deficits. While making a forecast of the funds requirement,
banks will be in a position to assess the likely surplus and deficit balances that are to occur
during the forecasted period. In view of such a forecast, banks assess the amount that needs
to be borrowed/lent in order to prevent any severe liquidity mismatch.
Certificate of Deposits (CDs): Banks issue CDs to raise short-term funds having a
maturity of 3 months to 1 year. These instruments are issued for deposits of
individuals/corporates/institutions, etc. These are usance promissory notes which require
the holder to establish his identity before redeeming the amount. Being negotiable
instruments they are easily transferable. They are issued at a discount to face value. The
funds raised through certificates of deposit form a part of the deposits and hence attract
reserve requirements.
Participation Certificates (PCs): The major activity of a bank is credit accommodation.
This service of the banks, apart from increasing the risks, may place the banks in a tight
liquidity position. To ease their liquidity, banks have the option of sharing their credit
asset(s) with other banks by issuing Participation Certificates. These certificates are also
known as InterBank Participations (IBPs). With this participation approach, banks and FIs
come together either on a risk sharing or non-risk sharing basis. Thus, while providing
short-term funds, PCs can also be used for risk reduction. The rate at which these PCs can
be issued will be negotiable and depends on the interest rate scenario. Like CDs, PCs are
also issued by banks for similar maturity periods i.e. 3 months to 1 year.
Private Sector Securities
Commercial Papers (CPs): CPs are promissory notes with fixed maturity, issued by
highly rated corporates. This source of short-term finance is used by corporates as an
alternative to the bank finance for working capital. Corporates prefer to raise funds through
this route when the interest rate on working capital charged by banks is higher than the rate
at which funds can be raised through CP. The maturity period ranges from 30 days to 364
days.
Bills of Exchange: It is a financial instrument that facilitates funding of a trade transaction.
It is a negotiable instrument and hence is easily transferable. Further, depending on the
repayment period and the documents attached, these bills of exchange are classified into
different types. The period for which these bills are drawn generally ranges between 1 – 6
months.
Factorization Bills: This is an instrument arising due to the factoring of the bills of
exchange. Factors, who are generally banks or FIs, purchase the bills from the creditors
with or without a recourse facility and collect the dues from the debtors. The market for
factorization of bills depends on the level of activity in the bill market.
Inter Corporate Investments/Deposits (ICDs): In the ICD market, the borrowers and
issuers are the corporates. The interest rates of these instruments are generally higher than
the other short-term sources since the risk is higher.
334
Part III
Money Market Mutual Funds (MMMFs): The Money Market Mutual Funds provide an
avenue for the retail investor to invest in the money market. Retail investors normally deposits
short-term surplus funds into a savings bank account, the returns from which are relatively low.
By investing in the money market through MMMFs the returns earned will be higher than
what is obtained by depositing in a bank. Further, this also provides adequate liquidity and
the investor can plan for short-term deployment of funds. The safety level of these funds
will also be high since the investments will generally be in high quality securities,
i.e., government/bank/highly rated corporate securities. Thus, MMMFs represent a low-risk
and high-returns avenue to the retail investors in the money market.
3. Auction Procedure
The process of T-Bill is explained through an illustration. Say on 2nd November, the RBI
issued a tender notification for 91-day T-bill for Rs.500 crore. There were 4 competitive
bidders namely, A, B, C and D who responded to the notification of T-bills, and submitted
sealed tenders to the RBI. The overall amount quoted through the tender is Rs.1,900 crore.
A General Manager of the Public Debt Office (Mumbai) opened the tenders, and compiled
the following information for the sake of determining the cut-off point.
Sl. No. Name of the Bidder Price Amount Cumulative Amount
(Rs.) (Rs. in cr.) (Rs. in cr.)
1 B 98.95 50 50
2 A 98.90 40 90
3 A 98.80 60 150
4 C 98.80 80 230
5 B 98.75 50 280
6 C 98.65 120 400
7 C 98.50 200 600
8 A 98.50 100 700
9 B 98.50 100 800
10 A 98.45 200 1000
11 B 98.40 120 1120
12 C 98.35 280 1400
13 D 98.45 70 1470
14 D 98.35 120 1590
15 D 98.30 150 1740
16 D 98.25 160 1900
Based on the above information, the GM needs to decide the cut-off price and allocate the
T-bills to bidders at respective rates. The GM decides the optimal cut-off price as Rs.98.50.
Below this point, amount of bids is short by Rs.100 crore and at this point, it has a surplus
of Rs.300 crore. The first six bids given by A, B and C are accepted completely, and the
next quote given by the three bidders being the same, the RBI allots T-bills proportionately.
The fully accepted bids are:
Name of the Price Quoted Approved Amount
Bidder
A 98.90 40
A 98.80 60
B 98.95 50
B 98.75 50
C 98.80 80
C 98.65 120
Total 400
The RBI allots the three bidders proportionately in the following manner:
Name of the Proportionate Amount
Price Amount
Bidder Allotted (cr)
A 98.50 100 25
B 98.50 100 25
C 98.50 200 50
400 100
335
Investment Banking and Financial Services
100
x 100 = 25. Thus, a proportionate allotment is done to three bidders.
400
The yield is calculated by the following formula:
⎡ Face Value ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ − 1⎥ x
⎣ Price ⎦ Days to Maturity
Weighted Average Yield for the Issue
Name of Price Amount Proportion Wt. Price Yield Wt.Yield
the Bidder (i) (ii) (iii) (i x iii = iv) (v) (vi)
= (iii*v)
A 98.90 40 0.08 7.904 0.0446 0.00356
98.80 60 0.12 11.856 0.0487 0.00584
98.50 25 0.05 4.925 0.0610 0.00305
B 98.95 50 0.10 9.895 0.0425 0.00425
98.75 50 0.10 9.875 0.0507 0.05078
98.50 25 0.05 4.925 0.0610 0.00305
C 98.80 80 0.16 15.808 0.0487 0.00779
98.65 120 0.24 23.676 0.0548 0.00131
98.50 50 0.10 19.700 0.0610 0.00610
1.00 98.722 0.051876
The non-competitive bidders would have to pay weighted average cut-off price which is
obtained by taking the average of prices, which works out to be 98.722 in this particular
issue. The non-competitive bidders would get an yield of 5.1876 percent.
Let us calculate the yield based on the above inputs for each of the bidders:
A. Average Yield for A:
(98.90 x 40/125 + 98.80 x 60/125 + 98.50 x 25/125) = 98.77
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ −1⎥ x = 4.99%
⎣ 98.77 ⎦ 91
or
(0.0446 x 40/125 + 0.0487 x 60/125 + 0.0610 x 25/125) = 4.984%
B. Average Yield for B:
(98.95 x 50/125 + 98.75 x 50/125 + 98.50 x 25/125) = 98.78
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ −1⎥ x = 4.95%
⎣ 98.78 ⎦ 91
(0.0425 x 50/125 + 0.0507 x 50/125 + 0.0610 x 25/125) = 4.948%
C. Average Yield for C:
(98.80 x 80/250 + 98.65 x 120/250 + 98.50 x 50/250) = 98.668
⎡ 100 ⎤ 365
Yield = ⎢ −1⎥ x = 5.414%
⎣ 98.668 ⎦ 91
or
(0.0487 x 80/250 + 0.0548 x 120/250 + 0.0610 x 50/250) = 5.41%
336
Part III
4. Vemoplast can raise Commercial Paper (CP) by fulfilling the following conditions:
• The tangible net worth of Vemoplast should not be less than Rs.4 crore as per the
latest audited statement (tangible net worth will comprise of paid-up capital plus free
reserves less accumulated balance of losses, balances of deferred revenue
expenditure and also other intangible assets).
• Its fund-based working capital limit should not be less than Rs.4 crore.
• The minimum credit rating required from the approved agencies should be P2 from
Credit Rating Information Services of India Ltd. (CRISIL), A2 from Investment
Information and Credit Rating Agency of India (ICRA) and PR2 from Credit
Analysis and Research Ltd. (CARE) which should not be more than two months old.
• Vemoplast should have a minimum current ratio of 1.33:1 as per the latest audited
balance sheet.
• The aggregate amount to be raised by issuance of commercial paper should not
exceed the working capital (fund-based) limit sanctioned by bank/banks to the issuer
company i.e., CP can be raised to the extent of 100 percent of the working capital
limit.
• The working capital limit of Vemoplast should be correspondingly reduced by the
banking system. As the CP will be carved out of the working capital (fund-based)
limits of the company, by issuance of CP there should not be any increase in the
level of short-term borrowing facilities.
• A Board resolution authorizing Vemoplast Ltd. for issue of CP is essential.
5. The RBI guidelines relating to CDs are as follows:
• All scheduled banks, other than Regional Rural Banks and Scheduled Co-operative
Banks are eligible to issue CDs, and there is no limit to the total amount raised.
• CDs should be issued in the form of usance promissory notes with a fixed maturity
date without any grace period.
• The size of the issue should be in multiples of Rs.1 lakh subject to the minimum size
of each issue being Rs.5 lakh.
• The banks can issue CDs ranging from 3 months to 1 year whereas financial
institutions can issue CDs ranging from 1 year to 3 years.
• CDs become freely transferable by endorsement and delivery but only after a lock-in
period of 30 days.
• All CDs are subjected to the usual CRR and SLR requirements.
• CDs are subject to stamp duty.
• Premature payment or loans against CDs by the issuer is not allowed.
6. The Reserve Bank on behalf of issuers may issue different types of stocks from time to time
depending on their requirements:
Types of Government Stocks
i. Issue of Stock through Auction: The RBI, on behalf of the government, issues
notification for auctioning of government securities, stating the amount and time. An
applicant may submit more than one bid at different yields through separate
applications for each bid. The aggregate amount of bids submitted by a person
should not exceed the aggregate amount of Government Stock offered for sale. On
the basis of the bids received, the Reserve Bank of India will determine the cut-off
rate of yield, at which point, offers for the purchase of Government Stock will be
accepted at the auction depending upon the notified amount. The coupon of the
stock is decided in an auction. The successful bids offered at the cut-off rate of yield
as determined by the RBI will be accepted at par. Other bids tendered at rates lower
337
Investment Banking and Financial Services
than the cut-off rate of yield determined by the RBI will be accepted at cut-off rates
as quoted in the bid. The bidders will be issued these securities at a premium which
will be determined in such a way that yield-to-maturity to the bidder will be equal to
the rates at which they have bid. Bids quoted at rates higher than the cut-off rate of
yield determined by the RBI will be rejected. The stock carries the same coupon till
maturity.
ii. Issue of Stock with Pre-announced Coupon Rates: The RBI also announces the
coupon on stock before the date of floatation and the stock is issued at par. The
interested bidders need to submit the application form to the RBI. If the total
subscription exceeds the aggregate amount offered for sale in respect of a fixed
coupon stock, the RBI will make partial allotment to all the applicants.
iii. Stock with Variable Coupon Rates, viz., Floating Rate Bonds, etc.: In case of
floating rate bonds, the stock will carry a coupon rate which will vary according to
the change in the base rate to which it is related. The description of the base rate and
the manner in which the coupon rate is linked to the base rate, floor and cap to the
coupon rate, if any, will be announced by the RBI at the time of issue. The
procedure for issuance is similar to pre-announced coupon rates.
iv. Zero-coupon Bonds: Zero-coupon bonds are issued at a discount and redeemed at
par. No interest is paid on such bonds before maturity. Zero-coupon bonds are
issued by means of auction, with a face value of say Rs.100. The bidders need to
clearly specify the purchase price expressed up to two decimal points in the
application. An applicant needs to submit more than one bid at different prices
through separate applications for each bid (but the aggregate amount of bids
submitted by a person should not exceed the aggregate amount of bonds offered for
sale).
The RBI will determine the cut-off price at which tenders for purchase of
zero- coupon bonds will be accepted at the auction.
All the bids at prices higher than the cut-off price will receive full allotment, while
the bids at prices lower than the cut-off price will be rejected. The bids at the cut-off
price may receive full or partial allotment depending on the total amount of bids and
the notified amount.
v. Stock on Tap: Stock on tap is issued by the RBI with predetermined price, maturity
and coupon with no aggregate amount indicated in the notification. Sale of such
stock will be kept open so long as the RBI desires. The sale may be closed at any
time at the discretion of the RBI.
vi. Stock for which the payment is made in installments: The stock is issued either
by auction or by pre-announcing a coupon rate. The special feature of the stock is
that the payment can be made by the investors in installments. It means that the
stock will be initially issued as partly paid stock which will become fully paid at the
end of the last installment. The total amount is usually paid in four installments. The
interest is paid on the paid-up value of the stock.
vii. Issue of Government Stock in conversion of Maturing Treasury Bills/Dated
Securities: In this mode, the RBI gives an option to the holders of the Treasury Bills
of certain specified maturities, to convert the respective treasury bills at specified
prices into a new stock offered for sale. The conversion prices are predetermined by
the RBI depending on the remaining term to maturity of the respective treasury bills.
7. The SD will be required to have a standing arrangement with the RBI based on the
execution of an undertaking. The registration letter issued by the RBI covers the following
aspects.
Role and Obligations of SDs
i. A satellite dealer should commit to generate outright turnover of the Central
Government securities including T-Bills of not less than Rs.30 crore in a year.
338
Part III
ii. The annual turnover including repos of the SD should not be less than five times in
government securities including T-Bills. Of the total turnover, turnover in respect of
outright transactions should not be less than three times. The turnover will be
Total purchases and sales during the year*
calculated as under:
Average month end stocks during the year
* Purchases are inclusive of primary market purchases and sales are inclusive of
redemption of maturities.
iii. A satellite dealer should achieve a portfolio of not less than 20 percent in
government securities in relation to total assets before the end of the first year of
operations after registration.
iv. A satellite dealer should maintain the minimum capital standards at all points of
time.
v. A satellite dealer should have adequate organizational structure with good
distribution channels across the country and in terms of office computing equipment,
communication facilities like telex/fax, telephone, etc. and skilled manpower for
efficient marketing and to provide advice and education to investors.
vi. A satellite dealer should have an efficient internal control system for fair conduct of
business and settlement of trades and maintenance of accounts.
vii. A satellite dealer should meet such registration and other requirements stipulated by
the Securities Exchange Board of India (SEBI) including operations on the Stock
Exchanges.
viii. A satellite dealer should subject itself to all prudential and regulatory guidelines
issued by the RBI.
ix. A satellite dealer should submit periodic returns as specified by the RBI.
8. Major changes in the primary market that had taken place in recent past are:
i. Free Pricing: The abolition of the office of the Controller of Capital Issues resulted
in the emergence of a new era in the primary markets. All controls on the pricing,
designing and tenure of the instruments were abolished. A wide variety of
instruments were designed to meet the specific requirements of the issuers and the
investors. The issuers were also given the freedom to price the instruments. It was
left to the market forces to decide the appropriateness of the pricing.
ii. Entry Norms: Hitherto there were no restrictions for a company to tap the capital
markets. This resulted in a massive surge of small cap issues. Many of the
companies were promoted by persons with dubious credentials. Most of these shares
were not even traded in the secondary markets after listing. Several investors lost
heavily by investing in these shares. The need for transparent entry barriers was felt.
SEBI introduced eligibility norms in the form of track record of divisible profits for
existing companies and compulsory appraisal of their projects for new companies.
iii. Disclosures: The quality of disclosures in the offer documents was extremely poor.
Several vital pieces of adverse information were not disclosed in the offer document.
SEBI has introduced stringent disclosure norms. The Malegam Committee was
appointed to suggest measures to increase the levels of disclosure by Indian issuers.
Most of the recommendations of the Committee have been implemented. An attempt
is being made to bring our disclosure norms in conformity with global standards.
iv. Book Building: Book Building is the process of price discovery. One of the
drawbacks of free pricing was the pricing mechanism. The issue price had to be
decided around 60-70 days before the opening of the issue. Further, the issuer has no
clear idea about the market perception of the price determined. Introduction of book
building helps in overcoming this limitation and results in market driven pricing of
securities.
v. Streamlining the Procedures: All the procedural formalities were streamlined.
Many of the operational aspects were hitherto unregulated and different practices
were being followed. SEBI issued guidelines to ensure uniform procedures. Many
aspects of the operations have been made more transparent.
339
Investment Banking and Financial Services
• Merchant Bankers
• Registrars and Share Transfer Agents
• Debenture Trustees.
9. Merchant bankers have a vital role to play in the divestiture process. Divestitures involve
sale of assets or business entities. The assets may be tangible like manufacturing unit,
product line, etc., or intangible assets like brand, distribution network, etc. Sometimes the
business entity as a whole may be sold to a third party. The reasons for divestitures can be
broadly classified as:
Planned: A company may plan for the sale of a particular asset/business. The reasons may
be varied:
• Strategic decision to exit from a certain industry.
• Poor business fit with other operations of the company.
• Severe competition.
• Technological factors.
• Continuous losses in a particular line of activity.
• Shrinking margins.
Opportunistic: In such cases, the vendor company has no intentions to divest in the normal
course. However, the management is tempted by the buyer with a very high bid. If the
company feels that the price offered is substantially more than the worth of the
asset/business, it may divest. The reason for the sale is solely profit motive.
Forced: The reason for the sale is the prevalence of circumstances beyond the control of
the company. The company may be facing a severe liquidity crunch and the only solution to
raise cash may be through divestiture. Sometimes the asset/business may be sold to avoid a
takeover or to make a takeover bid unattractive. Sometimes a divestiture may be a part of a
rehabilitation package for the turnaround of a sick company.
10. The SEBI is a regulatory body established to provide transparency, maintain market
integrity and ensure investor protection.
According to the SEBI Act, 1992, the main functions performed by SEBI to meet its
objectives are:
i. Regulating the securities market.
ii. Recognition and regulation of the Stock Exchanges.
iii. Registering and regulating the working of various intermediaries including
Merchant Bankers, Registrars, Share Transfer Agents, Stock Brokers, Sub-brokers,
Debenture Trustees, Bankers to the Issue, Underwriters, Portfolio Managers, etc.
iv. Registering and regulating the functioning of Depositories, Custodians and
Depository Participants.
v. Registration of Foreign Institutional Investors.
vi. Registering and regulating the working of Venture Capital Funds, Mutual Funds and
other collective investment schemes including plantation schemes.
340
Part III
341
Investment Banking and Financial Services
One inherent advantage presented by this instrument is that promoter’s stake does not get
diluted during the public issue.
12. The lead manager exercises his due diligence by checking all the important aspects of the
company going public. Along with this exercise, he compares the company with other
companies whose shares are being publicly traded and develops his own forecast of prices
at which the scrip would be traded. The price band is agreed upon after negotiations
between the issuing company and the merchant banker. Usually, the merchant banker
approves the price band based on the following indicators about the company:
• Past track record of performance.
• Comparison of issuing company with other similar companies with respect to future
earnings, cash flow from operations and fundamental asset values.
• SWOT analysis of the issuing company.
• Half-yearly or quarterly earnings of the company during the current year and its
expectations in the next quarter.
• Information on retail and institutional interest in the proposed offering and an
indication of buying at different levels.
• Information on the overall trend in the IPO market and the success rate of similar
issues during the period.
• Taking into account the shareholding pattern before and after the issue and
identifying the potential selling shareholders upon listing the stock.
• Taking into account, the part of the issue which has to be underwritten and finding
out market-making to the issue.
• Feasibility of perceptions about the company’s management from the brokers and
prospective investor from road shows and investor conferences.
• Products and services of the company and what the future holds for them.
• The company’s accounting methods and whether there had been any changes in
recent years and reasons behind the changes.
13. Private placement of securities is one of the most popular avenues of raising capital. Private
placement is a method of raising capital in which companies directly sell their securities to
a limited number of ‘sophisticated and discerning’ investors.
The distinct features of private placement are:
i. There are no entry barriers for the private placement market.
ii. There is no need for registration of the offer document with SEBI. The procedural
formalities are simple.
iii. The terms of the issue can be negotiated between the issuers and the investors.
iv. The company has a choice of investors.
v. The transaction costs are low.
vi. Credit rating is optional in case of debt instruments.
vii. The execution of the deal is faster.
Merits of Private Placement
The private placement market has witnessed an exponential growth during the last 3 years.
The inherent advantages of private placement as an efficient route for raising capital and
profitable avenue for investments makes it acceptable to both the issuers and the investors.
i. Accessibility: There are no entry barriers for a company to access the private
placement market. Unlike the public issue market, an existing company does not
require a track record of divisible profits for 3 years nor does a greenfield project
require mandatory appraisal and funding by a Bank/Financial Institution. This route
is also available to unlisted and closely held public companies. Further, public
offering may not be viable if the amount proposed to be raised is very small.
342
Part III
ii. Speed: A private placement deal can be executed successfully and much faster than
a public offering. The procedural formalities for a private placement transaction are
minimal. The time-frame required to plan and complete a public offering ranges
between 4 to 6 months (or even more in some cases). On the other hand, a private
placement deal can be successfully closed in 4 to 6 weeks. This results in substantial
saving of time and energy for the issuer.
iii. Flexibility: In a private placement, there is greater flexibility in working out the
terms of the issue. In addition to greater flexibility at the time of structuring the issue
initially, there may be more latitude to renegotiate the terms of the issue
subsequently and even roll-over the debt. This is because the issuer has to deal with
only a few institutional investors in the Private Placement Market (PPM).
Besides, one of the most attractive features of PPM is that it can be tailored to the
needs of first generation entrepreneurs who are comparatively less known to the
public which makes their public issue less attractive. It also satisfies investors who
want large holdings, but whose needs cannot obviously be met in case of public
issue. Thus, for large investors, stocks will be available in the quantity they desire at
reasonable transaction cost compared to secondary market buying.
iv. Lower Transaction Cost: A public issue entails several statutory and non-statutory
expenses associated with underwriting, brokerage, printing, mailing,
announcements, promotion and so on. In the absence of advertisement and
prospectus, the issue expense in case of private placement is as low as 2% of the
total issue amount as compared to 10 to 12% in case of public issues.
v. Confidentiality: Private placements also have the advantage of confidentiality of
information. In a competitive environment, keeping strategic business secrets
pertaining to a firm is of crucial importance.
14. A buy-out is a process whereby an investor or a group of investors buys out a significant
portion of the equity of an unlisted company with a view to make it public within an agreed
time-frame. To put it simply, buy-outs are nothing but wholesale investments.
Distinctive competitive advantages of a bought-out deal in comparison to a public offer.
• The price privilege: One of the main advantages in a bought-out deal as compared
to a run-of-mill public issue is that the price is not subject to the vagaries of the
market place as the buyer of the stock is sophisticated enough to gauge the future
earnings capacity of a company without the help of imperfect signals from the stock
market. While this price may not necessarily reflect a company’s earning potential
to the fullest extent, the discount is the price the issuing company has to pay to get
the money upfront.
• The quick fix: The small investor, who had lost money in the primary market due to
companies with dubious record, has a general mood of skepticism to all new issues.
Often a promoter cannot convince the lay public about the merits of a project,
especially if it is an unknown company or a greenfield project. In such a case,
selected investors in the form of one or several investment bankers are easier to
convince about a projects’ future earnings capacity. So, some companies will find it
easier to go in for a bought-out deal.
• The cost advantage: If the size of an issue is small, it sometimes makes sense for
companies to avoid a public issue. The support for this contention is based on the
fact that the fixed costs of a retail capital offering like mandatory advertisements,
printing of forms, underwriting and the like are rising steadily. Merchant bankers
estimate that for a small issue of Rs.1.5-2 crore, costs may be as high as 15-20% of
the issue size. This cost advantage has already made its presence felt as a catalyst for
private placements. A bought-out deal takes the argument to its logical culmination.
• Time is money: For a company, public issue translates into a six months ordeal of
convincing merchant bankers, regulatory body and investors. In a bought-out deal, a
company normally saves that amount of time. For an entrepreneur, valuable time is
wasted in raising money especially when he should be concentrating on the usage of
funds. The possible results are faster implementation of projects and fewer chances
of cost overruns.
343
Investment Banking and Financial Services
15. Standard & Poor’s specialize in credit rating both long-term as well as short-term
obligations. They rate all public corporate bonds and preferred stock issues of $10 million
or above with or without a request of the issuer. Presently, they have confined their rating
operations to the following types:
Rating Obligations
a. Long-term obligations:
i. US market long-term obligations.
ii. Non-US market long-term obligations.
iii. Euro-bond rating.
b. Short-term obligations:
i. Commercial paper (maturity of not more than 365 days) of US and Non-US
issuers upon request.
c. Sovereign rating.
d. Rating criteria.
Debt instruments covered under the above heading are described below.
a. Long-term Obligations
i. US market long-term obligations: Standard & Poor’s rates the following
US Capital market long-term obligations upon request of issuer and have the
publication right of the rating assigned to these obligations:
• Private placements of debt instruments.
• Mortgage-related financing such as mortgage backed bonds and pass-
through certificates of banks, and thrift institutions.
• Insured Certificates of Deposit of US Banks.
• Uninsured Certificates of Deposit of US Banks.
ii. Non-US market long-term obligations: Long-term obligations in the non-
US capital market are rated on issuers’ request in the overseas markets. Such
rating reflects an assessment of the probability of timely repayment of
principal and interest in the currency of denomination of the issuer. There is
no assessment of foreign exchange risk taken by the investor while opting to
make the investment. The overseas market issues for which S&P rate the debt
obligations includes Euro-currency bonds, domestic Pound Sterling, French
Francs, Swiss Francs, and Deutsche Marks issues.
iii. Euro-bond rating: Euro-bond rating of both US and Non-US entities has
been undertaken by S&P with the internationalization of the world’s capital
market.
Since mid-1982, the rating is done on request or without request of the issuer.
No fee is charged by S&P’s where rating is unrequested. The main advantage
of rating on Euro-bond obligation is that the issuer can have access to the US
capital market, under the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s Rules.
b. Rating of Short-term Obligations
S&P undertakes rating on request by the US or non-US issuers of short-term
obligations, such as commercial paper (having an original maturity of not more
than 365 days). Issuers retain the initial publication right of the rating, but once
the rating has been published, S&P’s can publish the revised rating.
16. The guidelines issued by SEBI for pricing of issues are on follows:
i. A new company can price its shares only at par. A new company has been defined
as one which has not completed 12 months of commercial operations and its audited
operative results are not available and where it is set-up by enterpreneurs without
track record.
344
Part III
ii. A new company, which is promoted by an existing company with a 5 year track-
record of consistent profitability can freely price its issue. In such case the minimum
promoter contribution should be 50%. The term ‘consistent profitability’ should
not be construed as continuous profitability. SEBI has clarified that the promoter
companies should have profits after providing for interest, depreciation and tax
as per the audited accounts, in 5 of the 7 preceding years with profits during the last
2 years, prior to the issue.
iii. An existing private or closely held public company can freely price its issue, if it has
a 3-year track of consistent profitability. As per SEBI clarifications, the company
should have made profits after providing for interest, depreciation and tax as per the
audited accounts in 3 of the preceding 5 years with profits in the last 2 years prior to
the issue.
iv. An existing listed company is allowed to raise capital by freely pricing the issue.
The premium will be fixed by the issuer in consultation with the lead manager(s) to
the issue.
17. Different variables need to be considered while rating a government’s local and foreign
currency debt. The key economic and political risk factors considered by Standard and
Poor’s while rating local currency debt are as follows:
Stability of Political Institutions: The decision-making relating to the various economic
policies aimed to bring about progress depend on the stability and the level of participation
of the government in the economic progress.
Economic Structure: This factor is essential since a free market economy enables
decentralized decision-making where the market forces play a key role, while in a closely
regulated economy, the government will be playing a key role in various economic factors
viz., interest rates, etc.
Fiscal and Monetary Policies: The purpose and the magnitude of the public sector
borrowings and its implication on inflation are the aspects related to fiscal policy that may
have a major influence on the government’s ability to service public debt. Government may
further, with its monetary powers, mobilize funds for deficit financing. However, heavy
monetization of budget deficits will increase the public debt burden of the government
which may adversely affect its sovereign creditworthiness.
Inflation: Apart from affecting economic progress, price rise may also lead to political
problems/instability. To evaluate the inflationary pressures, S&P’s assesses the inflation
using the past behavior. Other factors that are considered here are total borrowings of the
government, the maturity structure of public debt, future borrowing programs and the
ability of the Central Bank to check fiscal imbalances.
Apart from the above mentioned factors, the performance of the country’s financial markets are
also examined by S&P while conducting local currency debt-rating.
While rating the foreign currency debt obligations of a country, S&P’s considers most of
the factors used while rating local currency debt. Other than these, it also focuses on the
following:
Balance of Payments (BoP): A nation’s BoP situation should be adequate and should
sustain any risk that might arise so as to enable the government to service its debt. Changes
in domestic and foreign environments influence the BoP. To prevent any adverse impact on
the BoP situation, timely and appropriate measures need to be taken. Current account
vulnerability to any changes in the environment depends on the structure of the trade and
service, the exports and imports, international competitiveness, etc. On the other hand,
flexibility to the BoP position can be obtained by ensuring greater capital inflows by way of
direct investment in equity and other assets. Capital inflows by way of debt will expose the
country to interest rate, exchange rate and liquidity risks. S&P’s studies the past data on the
BoP situation and based on the likely policy measures, forecasts the future trend.
External Financial Position: S&P’s focuses on the burden of external public debt,
contingent liabilities and the ability of the country’s reserves to service the debt.
345
Investment Banking and Financial Services
346
Part III
347
Investment Banking and Financial Services
iv. Settlement System: The exchange followed the calendar system of settlement. For
example, in case of A group shares on the BSE, the trading cycle was for 14 days.
Trading in equities internationally is done on the basis of rolling settlement. The
settlement is done on either T+3 or T+5 system (i.e. the trade will be settled on the
3rd/5th day from the date of execution of the transaction). SEBI has encouraged the
stock exchanges to shorten their settlement cycle. The exchanges currently follow a
7 day settlement cycle. However, the trading week is not uniform giving rise to
arbitrage opportunities. In case of trading in dematerialized securities, the rolling
settlement has been introduced. Further, with the availability of the facility of
electronic funds transfer, the Delivery Versus Payment (DVP) system is being
introduced.
The trading on the NSE commences every Wednesday and concludes on the
following Tuesday and thus a month normally has four trading periods. With the
introduction of rolling settlement from July 2, 2001, the settlement is to be done on
daily basis and the NSE period will also be from Monday to Friday.
v. Carry Forward System: The Indian Stock Exchanges have been an amalgam of
cash market and forward market. The prices of the scrips on the exchange did not
reflect their ‘true’ price in the underlying cash market. Further there was
indiscriminate and rampant speculation in the market. Defaults were common and
other members were forced to “accommodate” the defaulting member. Often, the
defaults had a snowballing effect and the entire market would be in the throes of a
major payment crisis. This resulted in frequent closure of the exchanges for a few
days. In order to curb the prevailing malpractices, SEBI banned carry forward
transactions on all the stock exchanges. A modified carry forward system was
introduced and the badla procedure was also streamlined. Now, with the rolling
settlement system, modified carry forward and badla have been banned.
vi. Margin System: The role of the margin system for smooth running of any stock
exchange cannot be overemphasized. The margin system was dysfunctional in most
of the stock exchanges. The lack of stringent margin requirements and the laxity in
collection of the margins resulted in utter chaos, whenever there was a default. The
margin system has now been streamlined. SEBI has introduced the concept of mark
to market margin. In addition to this, other margins like initial margin, concentration
margin, etc., have been introduced.
vii. Capital Adequacy: Most of the brokers in the stock exchanges operated on a small
capital base. They were, therefore, unable to bear the risks associated with the
business. The result was a high incidence of defaults in the Stock Exchange. SEBI
has now introduced minimum capital norms for all brokers. Further, the capacity of
a broker to assume a position in the market would be a function of his capital.
viii. Liquidity for Debt: An important feature of a good capital market is the existence
of a vibrant secondary debt market. Indian markets were characterized by lack of
liquidity for corporate debt. This called for widening and deepening of the debt
market. The NSE set-up a separate trading system called the wholesale debt segment
for trading in all debt instruments. This has provided nationwide trading access to
debt investors. Market making would further enhance the liquidity in the debt
market.
ix. Indices: An index is an important tool to measure the price behavior of the overall
market. The return on the index provides a benchmark for portfolio risk-return
analysis. Several new indices have been constructed based on various parameters.
The 30 share BSE Sensex and the 50 share S&P CNX Nifty are the popular sensitive
indices to measure the daily market volatility. Some of the new indices like BSE
Dollex and NSE Defty are denominated in dollars. The S&P CNX 500 is a more
broad based index covering a larger portion of the total market capitalization. Apart
from these indices some industry specific indices have also been constructed to
reflect the price volatility of the shares of the companies in a particular industry. The
construction and maintenance of well-designed and responsive indices has become
critical with the introduction of index futures.
348
Part III
x. Regulation: SEBI has taken a number of steps to maintain the integrity of the
markets and to ensure investor protection. Insider trading has been declared as a
criminal offense and prosecutions have been initiated in cases violating of the
insider trading regulations. SEBI has also started investigating into instances of price
rigging and penal action is taken against the guilty. SEBI has also attempted to bring
transparency into broker-client relationships. The system of circuit breakers has
been introduced to prevent excessive volatility in price movements.
xi. Derivatives: Derivatives are important tools for portfolio management. The
introduction of derivatives resulted in a paradigm shift in the investment strategies
of the Indian investors. The L C Gupta committee had recommended the
introduction of options and futures in India. In the light of the experience gained,
options were introduced at a later stage. While trading in options and futures has
started, the market has not yet witnessed high volumes, as the investors are not very
comfortable with these instruments.
20. Level one: There is a formal agreement between the issuer and one depository bank. Like
the unsponsored ADR, Form F-6 is filed seeking exemption under Rule 12g3-2(b) of the
SEC from the full reporting requirements. The company does not have to comply with the
US Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP).
Level one ADRs cannot be listed on the national stock exchanges but can be traded at over
the counter market and listed in the pink sheets. Over The Counter Bulletin Board will no
longer be available for Level one ADRs although pink sheets would still be available. Pink
sheets contain wholesale price quotes and are distributed by the National Quotation Bureau
of Brokers and Dealers. This can support a Rule 144A ADR facility but cannot be used for
raising capital. Level One ADRs allow the company to enjoy the benefit of a traded
security without complying with the reporting requirements.
In the US, in addition to federal laws and regulations, state level ‘blue sky’ regulations
govern the offer and sale of securities. These regulations require state registration
before intrastate offering can be made.
Issuers who establish an unlisted ADR can publish certain financial data in a
recognized security manual to provide adequate source of investment information. This
eliminates the need to individually list securities in fifty states in the US.
Level two: As in level 1 the issuer initiates the program and there is a formal
agreement with the depository bank. In addition to filing Form F-6, the issuer is also
required to file Form 20-F and comply with other disclosure rules, including partial
reconcilation of the financial statements as per the US GAAP, to the extent there are
differences in major line items in the balance sheet and income statement.
Financial statements for individual business segments need not be reconciled to the
GAAP. Listing of securities exempts foreign issuers from complying with the ‘blue
sky’ regulations.
This program may be used to fund the ESOP (Employee Stock Ownership Plan) and
management compensation plans. This ADR is more expensive and time consuming
because of elaborate reporting requirements and higher legal and listing costs. It cannot
be used for raising capital through the listing process.
Level three: It is identical to level two. In addition, the issuer is required to file Form
F-1. This is similar to Form S-1 for the US companies. The issuer is required to have
the securities registered and fully reconcile the financial statement to the US GAAP.
The offering can be used for various purposes including funding ESOPs or raising
capital for the US acquisition. The issuer also selects an investment banker to advise,
underwrite, and market the offering. Infosys, Rediff, Silverline ICICI Bank, ICICI and
Satyam Info have raised capital in the international market by issuing level 3 ADRs.
21. Arnica Chemicals needs to develop a mix of factors like product differentiation,
pricing, promotion, service and distribution to successfully market their public deposit
schemes.
349
Investment Banking and Financial Services
350
Part III
Secondly, the banks borrow from this market to meet the Cash Reserve Ratio (CRR)
requirements which they should maintain with the RBI every fortnight. Cash Reserve
Ratio (CRR) represents the balances to be maintained by banks with the RBI which is
computed as a percentage of the Net Demand and Time Liabilities (NDTL).
Thirdly, the money is borrowed in the call/notice market for short periods for
discounting commercial bills. The volume of call loans for serving this purpose is very
small in India, this is due to the underdeveloped bill markets. Thus, the utility of the call
money for meeting short-term mismatches form a significant volume when compared to the
other purposes.
23. The generic factors responsible for underpricing of IPOs are:
i. Asymmetric information: The most basic problem of the IPO process is the
presence of both ‘good’ and ‘bad’ firms going public, coupled with asymmetric
information between firms and investors. Firms know themselves reasonably well
but investors do not. When information and analysis is costly, it is optimal for
investors not to learn about a firm thoroughly.
Superior information disclosures can reduce this asymmetry and should help reduce
underpricing.
ii. Fixing the offer price early: The firm sets the offer price at time 0 and the issue
opens at time T. Firms are likely to be risk-averse with respect to the prospects of
the issues failing. Hence they underprice to forestall this possibility.
The delay between choosing an offer price and the issue date has diminished in
some sense with the current SEBI policy allowing firms to choose a price band at
the time of vetting the prospectus instead of a precise price.
iii. Interest rate float: The issuing company controls the application money for a
month. Even if stock-invests are widely used, the interest rate on stock-invests is
quite low. At equilibrium, markets would compensate investors for this low rate of
return, through underpricing.
This problem can be solved if issuing firms and merchant bankers become more
efficient and shorten the lags between the issue date and the listing date.
iv. Liquidity premium: Investors who apply for public issues lose liquidity on the
amount paid at issue price. Usually at equilibrium, the markets would compensate
them for this by paying a liquidity premium, which would show up in IPO
underpricing.
v. Building loyal shareholders: Firms may have an incentive to underprice when they
expect to return to the capital market to raise further resources at a later date, via a
rights issue or a public issue.
vi. Merchant banker rewarding favored clients: The interaction between the
merchant banker and the company going public is typically a one shot interaction,
but the merchant banker is in a repeated game with many of his clients, especially
the large institutional investors. In this situation the merchant banker has an
incentive to underprice to retain his established clients.
24. XYZ Ltd. is a leasing company. The RBI has issued directives to all the leasing, hire
purchase and other non-banking finance companies to apply for registration by July, 1998.
With XYZ Ltd. applying for registration, it has in-principle approval from the RBI to carry
on its business until the RBI scrutinizes the application in detail and either grants or cancels
the certificate of registration to the company. XYZ Ltd. can operate as usual until the RBI
responds to the application of registration.
A non-banking financial company can commence business after 8th January, 1997 or an
existing NBFC, like XYZ Ltd. can carry on the business of a NBFC only after:
i. Obtaining a certificate of registration from the RBI, and
ii. Having minimum net owned funds of Rs.25 lakh.
However, if XYZ Ltd. does not have a Net Owned Funds (NOF) of Rs.25 lakh, the
company should either register itself by enhancing the NOF or cease operations as it is
unable to be registered.
351
Investment Banking and Financial Services
The following factors concerning XYZ Ltd. will be evaluated by the RBI prior to the
granting of the certificate of registration:
a. XYZ Ltd. should be in a position to pay its present or future depositors in full and
when their claims accrue.
b. The affairs of XYZ Ltd. should not be in a manner detrimental to the interests of its
present or future depositors.
c. The general character of the management or the proposed management of XYZ Ltd.
should not be prejudicial to the public interest or the interests of the depositors.
d. Whether XYZ Ltd. has adequate capital structure and earning prospects.
e. The grant of certificate of registration should not be prejudicial to the operation and
consolidation of the financial sector consistent with monetary stability and economic
growth considering such other relevant factors.
f. Any other condition, fulfillment of which in the opinion of the RBI, should be
necessary to ensure that the commencement of, or carrying on of the business in
India by XYZ Ltd. should not be prejudicial to the public interest or in the interest of
the depositors.
25. The NBFC must have proportionately maintained the stipulated ratio of Tier I capital and
Tier II capital. The total of Tier II elements should be limited to a maximum of 100% of the
total of Tier I capital for the purpose of calculation of Capital Adequacy Ratio (CAR).
Tier I capital consists of paid-up capital, preference shares which are compulsorily
convertible into equity, free reserves, balance in share premium account and capital
reserves representing surplus arising out of sale proceeds of assets but excluding reserves
created by revaluation of assets.
From the total of these items, accumulated loss balance, deferred revenue expenditure and
book value of intangible assets, if any, are deducted to arrive at the owned funds.
From the resultant sum, the aggregate of:
• Investment in shares of other NBFCs
• Investment in shares, debentures and bonds of subsidiaries and
• Loans and advances to subsidiaries and companies of the same group are reduced, to
the extent it is more than 10% of net owned funds.
That is:
Owned funds = (Paid-up equity capital) + (Preference shares to be compulsorily convertible
into equity) + (Free reserves which may include any or all of General
Reserves, Share Premium, Capital Reserves, Debenture Redemption
Reserve, Capital Redemption Reserve, Credit Balance in P&L account or
other specified free reserves) – (Accumulated balance of loss) – (Deferred
Revenue Expenditure) – (Other Intangible Assets)
Tier I capital will be = Net owned funds + [Total of the deductions specified below –
10% of the Net owned funds; or Nil, whichever is higher]
Deductions are:
i. Investments in shares of subsidiaries, companies in the same group, other non-
banking companies.
ii. The book value of debentures, bonds, outstanding loans and advances in subsidiaries
and companies in the same group.
26. Every NBFC has to follow a set of procedures for accepting fixed deposits. The procedures
have been put in place to ensure transparency in operations of the NBFC and also to ensure
easy supervision and genuineness of the operations.
352
Part III
Maintenance of Register: Avenue Finance Ltd. (AFL) is accepting fixed deposits and
therefore, has to maintain a set of registers in respect of all the deposits that contain specific
details of each of the depositors. The details should include
i. Name and address of the depositor,
ii. Date and amount of each deposit,
iii. Duration and the due date of each deposit,
iv. Date and amount of accrued interest or premium on each deposit,
v. Date of claim made by the depositor,
vi. The reasons for delay in repayment beyond five working days, and
vii. Any other particulars relating to the deposit.
These registers should be kept at the registered office of the company and should be
maintained for the next 8 calendar years following the financial year.
Advertisement for Deposits: Regulations concerning raising of deposits by NBFCs
stipulate that these entities should not accept deposits without issuance of advertisement
inviting them in the first place.
The advertisement must be issued in a leading English newspaper and one vernacular
newspaper circulating in the state in which the registered office of the AFL is situated, after
approval from the RBI. Such advertisement will be valid till the expiry of six months from
the date of closure of the financial year in which the advertisement is so issued or until the
date on which the balance sheet is laid before the company in the general meeting. The
same procedure is applicable for renewal of deposits also.
If AFL proposes to accept public deposits without inviting or allowing or causing any other
person to invite such deposit, then it must prepare a statement in lieu of advertisement
containing the prescribed particulars.
Nomination by Depositors: Any depositor or all the depositors together have a right to
nominate one person to whom the amount of deposit may be returned by AFL in the
event of death of the sole depositor or the death of all the depositors. Upon the death of
the sole depositor/all depositors, the nominee will be entitled to receive the deposit
from AFL and to all the rights of the depositor(s) in relation to such deposits, to the
exclusion of other persons. This right of the nominee against AFL supersedes any other
law or testament (will).
Loans to Depositor: After 3 months from the date of deposit, AFL can grant loans to the
depositor up to 75% of the amount of public deposit kept by the depositor. Interest rate that
can be charged by AFL can be a minimum of 2% above the interest rate payable on the
deposit.
27. The provisions for Path Financial Services in respect of loans, advances and other credit
facilities including bills purchased and discounted are as under:
a. Sub-standard Assets: A general provision of 10% of total outstandings must be
made.
b. Doubtful Assets:
i. 100% provision must be made to the extent of the unsecured portion.
ii. Additional provision: In addition to (i) above, depending upon the period for
which the asset has remained doubtful, provision to the extent of 20% to 50%
of the secured portion must be made on the following basis:
Period for which the asset has % of provision
been considered as doubtful
Up to 1 year 20%
1-3 years 30%
More than 3 years 50%
353
Investment Banking and Financial Services
c. Loss Assets: The entire loss asset must be written off. If the asset continues to
remain in the books for any reason, 100% of the outstanding amount should be
provided for.
Provisions for Lease and Hire Purchase Assets:
Basic Provisions
The total provision required to be made is broken up into basic provision and additional
provisions. The basic provision is required to be made only in respect of hire purchase
transactions and not in respect of lease transactions, and is required to be made once an
asset becomes a NPA. The basic provision is not linked to the number of months (beyond
12 months) for which the installments are overdue, whereas the additional provisions are
linked.
Hire Purchase Assets
The basic provision is 100% of the following:
• Total dues (overdue and future installments taken together, whether shown as stock-
in-trade or as receivables in the balance sheet).
• As reduced by the finance charges not credited to the profit and loss account and
carried forward as unmatured finance charges.
• As further reduced by the depreciated value or net realizable value, whichever is
lower.
The depreciated value for this purpose must be notionally computed at the original cost of
the asset as reduced by the Straight Line Method (SLM) of depreciation at 20% p.a. As the
SLM rate of depreciation is at 20% per annum, in case the asset is used for a part of a year,
pro rata depreciation has to be calculated.
Additional Provisions
Hire Purchase/Lease Assets
The additional provision is dependent on the number of months for which the hire
charges/lease rentals are overdue, and is calculated as a percentage of the net book value of
the hire purchase/lease asset.
The additional provision required is as under:
Overdue hire charges/lease rentals Provisions required
Percentage of net book value
Up to 12 months Nil
More than 12 months but up to 24 months 10%
More than 24 months but up to 36 months 50%
More than 36 months 100%
Net book value is defined in para 2(1)(xi) of the RBI Regulations:
a. In the case of hire purchase assets, the aggregate of overdue and future installments
receivable as reduced by the balance of unmatured finance charges and further
reduced by the provisions made as per paragraph 8(2)(i) of these directions.
b. In the case of leased asset, the aggregate of the capital portion of overdue lease
rentals accounted as receivables and the depreciated book value of the leased asset
as adjusted by the balance of the lease adjustment account.
The amount of caution money/margin money or value of any other security to which the
NBFC has valid recourse can be deducted against the additional provision (but not against
the basic provision made for overdues) and only the balance additional provision needs to
be made.
354
Part III
355
Investment Banking and Financial Services
c. The lessor usually provides the operating know-how, suppliers, the related services
and undertakes the responsibility of insuring and maintaining the equipment in
which case an operating lease is called a wet lease. An operating lease where the
lessee bears the costs of insuring and maintaining the leased equipment is called a
dry lease.
An operating lease does not shift the equipment related business and technological risks
from the lessor to the lessee. The lessor structuring an operating lease transaction has to
depend upon multiple leases or on the realization of a substantial resale value (on expiry of
the first lease) to recover the investment cost plus a reasonable rate of return thereon.
Therefore, specializing in operating leases calls for an indepth knowledge of the
equipments per se and the secondary (resale) market for such equipments. Of course, the
prerequisite is the existence of a resale market. Given the fact that the resale market for
most of the used capital equipments in our country lacks breadth, operating leases are not in
popular use. But then this form of lease ideally suits the requirements of firms operating in
the sunrise industries characterized by a high degree of technological risk.
29. The advantages of leasing are:
Flexibility
Equipment leasing is a flexible financing arrangement in the sense that the lease rentals can
be structured in a manner that squares with the cash flow pattern anticipated by the lessee.
If the lessee expects a constant net cash flow stream from the project in which the leased
assets are employed, the lease rentals can be evenly spread over the lease term. On the other
hand, if the lessee anticipates a steadily increasing stream of cash flows, the lease rentals
can be stepped up gradually. If the lease finance is availed for a project with a gestation
period, the lease rentals can be structured with a deferment period.
User-Oriented Variants
There are several variants of a lease transaction which are designed to meet the specific
requirements of the lessee. Examples of such innovative variants are the Upgrade Lease,
which helps in hedging the risk of obsolescence or the cross-border lease which reduces the
cost of the lease from the lessee’s point of view. There are also leases which provide all
services related to the usage and maintenance of the asset. For example, in a full service car
lease, the lessee pays a predetermined charge for the use of a car or a fleet of cars and he
gets the entire spectrum of services ranging from the provision of chauffeurs to breakdown
maintenance.
Less Paperwork and Expeditious Disbursement
Compared to the term loan arrangement, a lease arrangement requires (a) less of paperwork
to be done by the lessee and (b) involves a shorter lead time between the date of submitting
the proposal and the date of disbursement of funds.
Convenience
Convenience determines the decision to lease when a firm intends using an asset for a very
short period of time. For example, a firm which requires the use of a fleet of cars for a week
will find it easier to rent the fleet for a week than to buy it on Monday morning and sell it
on Saturday evening. Apart from convenience, it is also a financially sensible proposition
because the transaction costs associated with buying and selling like search costs, legal
charges, selling commissions, etc., will outweigh the rentals to be paid for the short-term
lease.
Hundred Percent Financing
The proponents of leasing often emphasize this feature of leasing as an advantage not
available with the other forms of equipment financing. For example, the Equipment
Finance Scheme of IFCI requires a borrower’s contribution of 25% of the equipment
cost. Most of the other financing plans including hire purchase call for down payments
varying between 15 to 25 percent. While it is true that equipment leasing does not call
for as high a margin as other financing schemes, the fact remains that where lease
rentals are payable say monthly in advance, the first installment amounts to a down
payment. For example, a lease contract which requires lease rentals to be paid at the
rate of Rs.25 ptpm (per thousand rupees per month) in advance can be viewed as a
contract which requires a down payment of 2.5% of the asset cost.
356
Part III
357
Investment Banking and Financial Services
distinguishing a true lease and financial lease, the treatment of tax laws have necessitated a
further look at the lease transaction because
• Several NBFCs of national repute and a number of financial institutions have
resorted to leasing as a tool for tax shelter.
• A lot of other players had joined the leasing, as there was no restriction on the
utilization of leasing against other income. This prompted companies to get into
leasing to avail these taxation benefits.
• The main purpose for the companies to get into the leasing to avail tax benefit is due
to the financial management decisions by the companies, which provides a better
look to the balance sheet of the company. For example, the tax shield earned by the
company can be shown as an income for that year, thus giving a better EPS,
dividend and net worth projections of the company for that year.
Sales Tax on Lease Transactions
Apart from the income tax, the lease transactions attract sales tax for the transactions entered
into by them. This fact is the greatest irritant of the leasing industry in India. Leasing is a
business which follows a ‘singularly revenue driven approach’ whereas the sales tax is
accompanied by a multi-point levy. This theoretical distinction itself is a sufficient justification
as to why there should not be any sales taxes on the lease transactions. Due to the presence of
sales tax, the players are tempted to underprice their transactions. There are some taxing
anomalies with respect to the leasing transactions. Many lease transactions are of interstate in
nature, and of course fall outside the tax laws for computation of sales taxes. But in practice,
such transactions are actually charged by the states. These non-clarity of the tax laws allows the
states to take advantage and the leasing companies tend to suffer.
Accounting Aspects of Leasing
The ICAI guideline 19 deals with the accounting treatment of the leasing transaction for
companies in India. However, internationally, companies were following the standard 17 of
the International Accounting Standard. The Indian companies are free to follow any of the
two directives depending on their expertise. Besides, there is hardly any difference between
the objective and accounting treatment as recommended by ICAI 19 and IAS 17. The
Institute of Chartered Accountants of India (ICAI) has issued Accounting Standard no.19
(AS 19) on accounting for leases which has been taken in response to the long-standing
demands of the leasing industry to the authorities to give a re-look at the existing
accounting standards. The apex institute in tax practices in India has finalized and released
the standards and made it applicable for all the assets leased during the accounting period
commencing from 1st April, 2001. Being an accounting standard, the new guideline is
applicable to all the lessors and their lessees; irrespective of the fact of their legal status viz.
they may be banks, NBFCs, companies or individuals. The law treats all the parties
uniformly. Since there is hardly anything to distinguish between a lease and a hire purchase
transaction, both practically and theoretically, the new guideline rightly makes it binding
for the hire purchase companies to adhere to the guidelines with equal honesty. To give
example of a significant shift in the policy for the hire purchase financiers the hire purchase
financiers traditionally had been following the straightline methods of depreciation in their
books of accounts. The new tax rule has made that method unnecessary; hence the hire
purchase financiers would not be able to recognize the revenue evenly or equally
throughout. They now have to charge the depreciation on the diminishing balance. The
accounting standard 19 states in detail as to the treatment of specific lease transactions in
the books of the lessor and the lessee.
32. The salient features of consumer credit transactions are as follows:
Number of Parties to the Transaction
The transaction can be either a bipartite one involving the dealer-cum-financier and the
borrower/customer or a tripartite one where the dealer and the financier are two distinct
entities. The tripartite transaction can be of the sales-aid type where the dealer arranges for
finance and does the necessary paperwork on behalf of the borrower. Under such
transactions, the credit granting decision lies with the dealer, of course subject to the
eligibility criteria stipulated by the finance company. Such transactions are structured with
recourse to the dealer. On the other hand, a tripartite transaction can be of the conventional
type where the customer approaches the finance company to avail the credit facility.
358
Part III
359
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Some credit bureaus also file details of all satisfactory credit transactions reported to them
by other users.
In the Indian context, there are no credit bureaus to aid the credit-granting decision. For the
credit evaluation of an individual borrower, the finance company calls for a copy of the
salary certificate and the name and address of the employer. For the credit evaluation of
business entities like sole proprietorships and partnerships, the finance company looks for
the financial statements for the last two years duly certified by a chartered accountant and
the addresses of the bankers with whom the business entity has credit facility. Thus,
checking with the employer and the banker seem to be the only ways of obtaining
independent reference information in India.
Since a finance company engaged in offering consumer credit has to assess the
creditworthiness of a large number of individual borrowers, it makes a lot of sense to use a
mechanical scoring system for a preliminary evaluation of the credit applicants.
A perusal of the below given questionnaire reveals that what we are trying to obtain is an
overall risk index for the loan applicant. The way to do it is to add-up the relevant
probabilities of default in different categories. In the example given in the question, if Mr.
Ramchandani gives the most unfavorable response to each question he will have a risk
index of 28 and if he gives all favorable responses he will have a risk index of 3. To
discriminate between the good and the bad risks, the finance company will have to define
its own acceptable risk index. For instance, it may decide that all loan applicants with a
credit risk index of more than 10 will be rejected.
Questionnaire for Evaluation of Loan Applicants with Default Rates
1. Do you have a telephone at residence?
Yes (0.7)
No (1.0)
2. Do you:
Own Your Home (0.7)
Rent a House (2.4)
Rent a Room (6.5)
3. How long have yoUSpent in your present job?
Less than 6 months (8.4)
7 to 24 months (3.2)
More than 24 months (0.2)
4. What is your take-home monthly pay?
Less than Rs.2,500 (8.8)
Between Rs.2,500 to Rs.4,500 (3.3)
Above Rs.4,500 (0.4)
5. How many members are there in your family?
One to Two (0.2)
Three to Five (0.7)
More than Five (2.0)
6. For how long do you require the loan?
12 months or less (1.3)
More than 12 months (0.8)
The reader must have observed that the method employed for separating the sheep from the
goats is conceptually weak because adding up the probabilities ignores the interactions
between the different factors. As an alternative, we can use the information provided by the
questionnaire to identify the factors relevant for credit rating and combine them using the
360
Part III
statistical technique of Multiple Discriminant Analysis. If only two such factors are
considered, one can also use the graphical approach. For example, if we consider the take-
home pay and the number of months spent on the present job as two relevant factors, then
the credit index can be defined as follows:
Z = aX1 + bX2
Where,
Z = index of creditworthiness
X1 = take-home monthly income (in rupees)
X2 = number of years spent on the present job.
Based on a sample drawn from the past data (consisting of both defaulters and non-
defaulters) a scatter diagram is plotted as shown below.
In this diagram Os represent the customers who have defaulted and Xs denote the customers
who have paid on time. A visual inspection of the scatter of points reveals a discriminating line
intercepting the X1-axis at 3.2 and X2-axis at 2.4 such that the two groups – the defaulters
and non-defaulters – are kept as far apart as possible. The equation is therefore
Z = 3X1 + 4X2
or Index = 3 (Take-home monthly pay in thousands of rupees) + 4 (Number of months spent on
the current job expressed as a fraction of the year)
Credit applicants with an index1 of 9.6 or more will be accepted and applicants with an index of
less than 9.6 will be rejected.
34. There are various forms of non-traditional mortgages, also known as Alternative Mortgage
Instruments (AMIs). Some of the popular forms of non-traditional mortgages are:
a. Graduated Payment Mortgages
The payments under Graduated Payment Mortgages (GPM) are not equal, with
payments starting at a relatively low level and rising for a specified number of years
and then become equal after the specified number of years. The frequency of
quantum of increase and the specified number of years after which the payment
becomes equal depends upon the plan indicated in the mortgage instrument.
GPMs are preferred by those whose current income is not sufficient to take a large
loan, but whose income is expected to increase rapidly in the near future. Since the
smaller payments in the initial years do not even cover the interest, initially the
mortgage balance increases for a short period. However, with the increase in
monthly payments, the mortgage balance decreases and eventually reaches zero by
the end of the term.
1
Note that the equation of the line is X1/3.2 + X2/2.4 = 1 or 3X1 + 4X2 = 9.6.
361
Investment Banking and Financial Services
362
Part III
v. The mortgage interest rate may not rise more than 2.5 percent (250 basis points)
higher than its initial level, no matter how much the index rises.
vi. Increases in the mortgage rate are optional on the part of the lender, but decreases
are mandatory.
vii. Within 90 days of any time the mortgage rate is increased, or at any time the
mortgage rate exceeds its initial level, the borrower may prepay the loan in whole or
in part without prepayment penalty.
viii. Whenever the mortgage rate is increased to a rate higher than its initial level, the
borrower may opt to keep his monthly payment constant by extending the maturity
of the mortgage. However, there is usually a limit up to which the extension of the
maturity period will be allowed. For example, a 30-year mortgage may give the
option to the borrower to extend the term by 10 years, which means that the total
term to maturity of the mortgage cannot exceed 40 years.
In spite of all these complexities, the ARM became popular due to the following reasons:
i. ARM reduces interest rate risk for the lender. Hence, for thrift institutions such as
the S & Ls, ARMs, in spite of the life time caps, offer obvious advantages.
ii. Borrowers accept ARMs because the lenders by offering lower initial rates express
their preference for ARMs. Depending on the competition and aggressiveness of the
lender the initial interest rate on ARM could be 1/2 percent to 2 percentage points or
more below the rates being quoted for fixed-rate mortgages. ARMs tend to be most
popular when interest rates are high and buyers hunt for arrangements that could
lower initial outflows.
36. Real estate transactions involve exchange of economic resources between a seller, buyer,
and normally, a financial entity. Investment in real estate is always found to be reliable in
hedging against inflation. Returns from real estate are not highly correlated with the returns
from shares and bonds. Therefore, by including real estate in the diversified portfolio of
investment, a diversification of risk and hence enhancing the risk-return characteristics,
may be achieved.
• Direct investment in real estate entails tax benefits through deductibility of
depreciation (on buildings). Also, any debt financing used could lead to tax losses
(as per US tax laws), which would be used to shelter other income;
• Real estate assets offer attractive total returns. Apart from the income stream of
rental, the prospects for growth in both rental and value are attractive when
compared to expected returns from financial assets.
Real Estate: Selection and Management
Office buildings, industrial warehouses and shopping centers are the three types of real
estate included in most institutional portfolios. In selecting a real estate one should take
care to analyze and inspect the property before making the purchase. A good real estate
manager is one who has the expertise to distinguish between a good and mediocre property.
Once the real estate is acquired, the management of the property becomes very important.
An important objective of property management is inflation hedging. Short-term leases are
probably ideal for investor protection. Another important property management objective is
to maximize a property’s current income. To add to the rentability and value of the real
estate, capital improvements should be made which make the building attractive and get the
highest possible rent. Professional property management is increasingly being recognized
by institutional owners of real estate.
37. Credit rating forms an integral part of the securitization deal. After identifying the
homogeneous pool of assets that are to constitute a securitization deal, rating is sought by
the originator to rate the securitization deal based on the tentative parameters on other parts
of the deal. The credit rating agency considers that part of assets that are to be securitized
without considering the assets in the balance sheet. By this, as mentioned above, there
exists a possibility of securitized assets having a higher rating than the rating of the
company itself. All the credit rating agencies rate securitized instruments. CRISIL, Duff
363
Investment Banking and Financial Services
and Phelps, CARE and ICRA have rated securitized deals. All such ratings will have a ‘SO’
suffixed to the deal to indicate that the rated instrument is a ‘Structured Obligation’, which
essentially means that the deal has met all the parameters of credit rating and has been
structured for the purpose of credit rating and marketing of the instruments.
Credit rating helps the investors to gauge the risk of investing in the deal. It also helps the
originator to beat its own company’s rating thereby enabling it to borrow funds at a cheaper
rate. These companies may securitize their pool of hire purchase receivables or any other
assets that have a stream of future cash flows which will give them a better rating for the
deal, thereby achieving liquidity and enabling cheaper borrowing.
The parameters considered by the credit rating agency while rating a securitized deal are
similar to the parameters used for rating any other similar borrowing instrument like the
fixed deposits. The variance will be in consideration with the pool of assets.
38. The sales tax aspects of hire purchase contracts have to be gleaned from the provisions of
the Constitution (Forty-Sixth Amendment) Act, 1982 and a maze of High Court and
Supreme Court rulings on the subject. The salient sales tax aspects are as follows:
a. Hire purchase transactions per se are liable to sales tax. The Forty-Sixth Amendment
Act clearly states that the “tax on the sale or purchase of goods includes a tax on the
delivery of goods on hire purchase or any other system of payment by installments”.
b. For the purpose of levying sales tax a sale is deemed to take place only when the
hirer exercises the option to purchase.
c. The amount of sales tax must be determined with reference to the depreciated value
of the goods at the time when the hirer exercises the purchase option. The
appropriate method for computing the depreciated value is to be determined by the
sales tax authorities.
d. The state in which the goods have been ‘delivered’ (to the hirer) is the state entitled
to levy and collect sales tax.
e. Sales tax on hire purchase will not be levied if the state in which the goods are
‘delivered’ has a single point levy system in respect of such goods and if the owner
(finance company) had purchased the goods within the same state.
f. Sales tax cannot be levied on hire purchase transactions structured by finance
companies provided these companies are not dealers in the class of goods let on hire.
g. There is no uniform rate of sales tax applicable to hire purchase transactions. The
rate varies from state to state.
h. Does the Central Sales Tax (CST) apply to hire purchase transactions?
As per Section 2(g) of the CST Act, transfer of goods on hire purchase or any other
system of payment by installments is included within the definition of ‘Sale’. But
then the statement of objects and reasons to the 46th Amendment Act clearly states
that a ‘Sale’ is deemed to take place only at the time of exercising the purchase
option. Since the interstate movement of goods would have occurred before the hirer
exercises the option to buy, no hire purchase transaction is likely to be subject to
central sales tax.
39. Factoring basically involves transfer of the collection of receivables and their related
bookkeeping functions from firm to a financial intermediary called the factor. In addition,
the factor often extends a line of credit against the receivables of the firm. Thus, factoring
provides the firm with a source of financing its receivables and facilitates the process of
collecting the receivables. Usually the factor immediately makes a part-payment to provide
liquidity to the client.
For rendering the services of collection and maintenance of sales ledger, the factor charges
commission up front. The factor charges interest at a rate that is marginally higher than the
rate of interest charged by banks on working capital advance for making an immediate part-
payment against the debts purchased. The interest charge is calculated for the period
between the date of advance payment and date of collection or the guaranteed payment
date.
364
Part III
40. The legal relationship between a factor and the client is governed by the provisions of the
factoring agreement or the master agreement. Some of the salient features of the agreement
are as follows:
a. The client gives an undertaking to sell its receivables and the factor agrees to
purchase the same subject to the terms and conditions mentioned in the agreement.
b. The client warranties that the debts are valid, enforceable, undisputed and
recoverable. The client also undertakes to settle problems of dispute, damage and
deductions relating to the bills assigned to the factor.
c. The client agrees that the bills purchased by the factor on a non-recourse basis
(called approved bills) will arise only from transactions specifically approved by the
factor or those falling within the credit limits authorized by the factor.
d. The client agrees to serve a notice of assignment in the prescribed form to all
customers whose receivables have been factored.
e. The client agrees to provide copies of all invoices, credit notes, etc., relating to the
factored accounts to the factor and to remit monies received by the client against the
factored invoices to the client.
f. The factor acquires the power of attorney to further assign the debts and to draw
negotiable instruments in respect of such debts.
g. The time-frame for the agreement and the mode of termination are specified.
As between the factor and the customer, the legal status of the factor is that of an assignee.
Therefore, the customer has the same set of defences against the factor as he would have
against the client. The customer whose account has been factored and has been notified of
the assignment is under a legal obligation to remit the money due directly to the factor.
Consequently, a customer who continues to make such payments directly to the client is not
discharged from his obligation to pay the factor until and unless the client remits the
amount to the factor.
41. The origin and concept of bill can be traced back to the 4th century B.C. when the Greeks
made use of bills. From times immemorial, banks and business houses have been using
‘Hundi’, the indigenous kind of bills of exchange. There were two kinds of hundis which
were in vogue. Of the two, ‘darshani hundi’ is similar to the bill of exchange of today with
respect to the purpose for which it is drawn. Its place of origin may be quite different from
the place of operation. The ‘muddati hundi’ is quite different. It is confined to local limits
in which it is drawn.
Section 5 of the Negotiable Instruments Act, 1881, defines Bill of Exchange as ‘an
instrument in writing containing an unconditional order, signed by the maker, directing a
certain person to pay a certain sum of money only to, or to the order of, a certain person or
to the bearer of the instrument’.
A bill attains the character of negotiability only if it contains the features of negotiable
instruments. The specific features of a negotiable instrument are as follows:
a. Parties to a bill of exchange – drawer, drawee and payee. The maker of the
instrument who directs to pay is the drawer, the person to whom the direction is
given is the drawee (when he accepts the bill, he becomes the acceptor) and the
person to whom payment is to be made is the payee. In some cases the drawer and
the payee may be the same person.
The drawer or the payee who is in possession of the bill is called the holder. When
the holder endorses it, he is called the endorser. The person to whom it is endorsed is
called the endorsee. When in the bill or any endorsement thereon the name of any
person is given in addition to the drawee (to be resorted to in case of need), such
person is called a drawee in case of need. Drawee in case of need can be resorted to
only when the bill is dishonored by non-acceptance or non-payment.
b. The instrument must be in writing.
c. It must contain an order to pay and not a request.
d. A bill of exchange cannot be drawn so as to be payable conditionally.
365
Investment Banking and Financial Services
366
Part III
c. Bills Accompanied with Letter of Credit (LC): (a) A seller supplies goods and
submits the bill to the buyer for the value of goods supplied, (b) the buyer accepts
the bill along with the goods supplied, (c) the buyer’s bank opens the LC in favor of
the seller, and (d) the seller receives the accepted bill along with the LC opened by
the buyer’s bank in favor of the seller and discounts the same with the seller’s bank.
d. Drawee Bills: (a) A seller supplies goods and submits the bill to the buyer for the
value of goods supplied, (b) the buyer accepts the bill along with the goods supplied,
and (c) the buyer’s bank discounts the bill for the account of the buyer.
44. In international trade transactions, forfaiting is a common form of financing export-related
receivables. Under this arrangement:
• The exporter sells the goods to the importer on a deferred payment basis spread over
3-5 years.
• The importer draws a series of promissory notes in favor of the exporter for the
payments to be made inclusive of interest charges.
• The promissory notes are avalled or guaranteed by a reputed international bank
which can also be the importer’s banker. (An aval is an endorsement on the
promissory notes by the guaranteeing bank that it covers any default of payment by
the buyer.)
• The exporter sells the avalled notes to a forfaiter (which can be the exporter’s
banker) at a discount and without recourse. The discount rate applied by the forfaiter
will depend upon the terms of the promissory notes, the currencies in which they are
denominated, the credit rating of the avalling bank, the country risk of the importer,
and the prevailing market rate of interest on medium-term loans.
• The forfaiter may hold these notes till maturity or sell them to groups of investors
interested in taking up such high-yielding unsecured paper.
The mechanics of forfaiting is graphically presented below.
Mechanics of Forfaiting
A. Promissory notes sent for avalling to the importer’s bank
B. Avalled notes returned to the importer
C. Avalled notes sent to exporter
D. Avalled notes sold at a discount to a fortfaiter on a non-recourse basis
E. Exporter obtains finance
F. Fortfaiter holds the notes till maturity or securitizes these notes and sells the short-
term paper either to a group of investors or to investors at large in the secondary
market.
45. Credit Cards: The Concept
This is the age of credit cards. People prefer credit cards to paper currency. The culture of
plastic money seems to be fast catching up in the country with more banks offering credit
card facility, more establishments willing to accept them in place of cash and more
consumers finding the concept a more convenient mode of making payments.
367
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Credit cards enable its holders to make purchases/avail the services at various designated
Member Establishments (MEs) like departmental stores, shops, star hotels, airlines,
railways, etc., who accept all valid credit cards in lieu of cash payment. As such, the
cardholder can avoid the risk of carrying cash.
The concept of the credit card was pioneered in the country by foreign banks like Citibank
who continues to be the biggest player both in the domestic and the international market.
Indian banks, though not far behind, have been less aggressive compared to the foreign
banks.
Credit cards are also issued to non-individual entities like corporate bodies and non-
corporate establishments. For instance, the Cancards issued to corporate bodies are called
Corporate cards and those issued to the non-corporate business establishments are called
Business Cards.
Uses of Credit Cards
Credit cards can be used for:
a. Cash withdrawals at any of the branches or ATMs of the issuer/member affiliate of
the issuer and
b. Purchasing/availing of the services at any of the MEs.
Cash Withdrawal Facility: Credit cardholders are normally permitted to draw cash at any
of the branches/offices of the issuer and at any branches/offices of member affiliates.
Usually the maximum amount that can be drawn on each occasion is fixed with reference to
the overall ceiling limit under the credit card. Usually there is a service charge for cash
withdrawals to cover the cost of funds drawn. And now with the advent of the ATM,
potential customers are being lured even more.
Automatic Teller Machines: The ATM makes standing in queues and spending time
unnecessarily at the banks, things of the past. By simply inserting a card into an ATM, the
cardholder can withdraw crisp new notes at anytime of the day or night.
Added Advantages of Credit Cards to Cardholders: In addition to the above uses, the cards
provide certain added privileges to the cardholders. Cancard-Visa issuer Canara Bank bears
premium for insurance cover of the cardholder to meet unforeseen circumstances.
Overdraft Facility: Some card issuers like Citibank provide overdraft facility whereby a
cardholder can spend more than he is entitled to. The amount depends on the individual
cardholder’s credit rating.
Benefits to Issuer/Affiliate and MEs: The reason for more and more banks jumping into
the bandwagon is the high profitability that the business of credit card offers. For instance,
banks charge a 2.5 percent commission from establishments selling goods and services
through credit cards. There are instances of banks charging as much as 7 percent for high
margin MEs like antique shops. Banks offer a credit period of 30 to 45 days to the
customers but charge about 2.5 percent on all outstandings. Thus, a single purchase
transaction through the credit card, assuming the customer does not pay within the
stipulated credit period, will fetch a commission of five percent to the bank which works
out at as much as 60 percent per annum, miles ahead of the prime lending rate of many
banks.
Benefits accrue to the member establishments from the larger number of customers that the
card brings. There is a general feeling that a credit card tempts one to over spend. Even the
MEs, especially the retail outlets, agree that a person with a credit card ends up spending
more than required, since he does not feel the pinch at the time of purchase.
Given the multiple advantages and conveniences of the plastic money, to all concerned,
fueled by aggressive marketing, the popularity of credit cards is growing and will
continue to grow by leaps and bounds in the future. Competition is going to hot up not
only amongst issuers but even amongst the member establishments.
From August 2001, all the charges levied by credit card companies in India will attract 5%
service tax, which will simply increase the costs to the cardholders.
368
Part IV
369
Investment Banking and Financial Services
d. Conversion
Part A of each debenture of face value of Rs.70 will be automatically and compulsorily
converted into one equity share of Rs.10 at a premium of Rs.60, on allotment of the
debentures.
Thus for every Part A of Rs.70 there will be a constructive receipt of Rs.70 by the
Company and constructive payment of the same amount by the debentureholder to the
Company towards the price of one fully paid-up equity share. Upon such conversion, the
face value of Part A of the debenture will be reduced to NIL.
e. Interest
Debentures will carry interest at the rate of 16% per annum on the outstanding principal
amount from time to time, payable annually, subject to deduction of income tax at source,
in accordance with the provisions of the Income Tax Act, 1961 and the Rules made
thereunder or any statutory modifications or re-enactments thereof. The first payment of
interest will be made 12 months after the date the issue closes.
f. Redemption
Part B of the debentures of face value Rs.70 will be redeemed in 3 installments of Rs.20,
Rs.20 and Rs.30 per debenture at the end of the 4th, 5th and 6th year respectively, from the
date the issue closes.
g. Arrangement for the Purchase of the Non-Convertible Portion of the Debenture. (Hereby
called the portion.)
The Company has finalized a scheme for buy-back of Part B of the debentures with the
Unit Trust of India, Life Insurance Corporation of India, LIC Mutual Fund, IDBI Mutual
Fund and National Insurance Corporation, for the benefit of allottees (the offer is also open
to NRIs/OCBs/FIIs, subject to RBI approval) who may not wish to retain the portion. The
Scheme has been confirmed vide their letters dated 20.12.20x1, 12.01.20x2, 10.01.20x2,
15.01.20x2, 01.01.20x2 respectively, whereby they have agreed to buy the Non-Convertible
Portion up to Rs.28.65 crore.
The principal terms and conditions of the Offer are as follows:
i. Applicants are entitled to offer for buy-back the portion relating to the debentures
allotted to them. The option to offer the portion for buy-back must be exercised for
ALL the debentures applied for by the applicants. In no event can the applicants
exercise this option for only a part of the debentures applied for.
ii. The non-convertible portion of the face value of Rs.70 each should be offered for sale
at a price of Rs.60.50 per portion (on fully paid-up basis and accrued interest, if any, is
included in the sale price). The above purchase price is no indication of the price at
which the portion will be quoted and traded on the floor of the Stock Exchange.
iii. The persons exercising the option to sell the portion will be doing so at an upfront
discount of Rs.9.50 on the face value of the portion. As a result, the effective cost
per equity share would be Rs.79.50 for the convertible Part A of each debenture
applied for and allotted. The sale will be on cum interest basis.
iv. Under the terms of the Issue, an amount of Rs.9.50 out of the amount payable on
application towards the debentures is appropriated towards the face value of the non-
convertible portion. The balance amount of Rs.60.50 towards the face value of the
portion would be paid as per the `Terms of Payment’ mentioned elsewhere in the
prospectus. In the event of the applicant opting to sell the portion, his liability to pay
the amount on allotment/call(s) towards the portion will stand reduced to nil as the
purchaser would arrange to make the payment of the balance amount to the company.
h. Principal Terms of Warrants
Each debenture will have one detachable warrant which can be freely and separately traded.
The warrant holder will have the right to apply for and seek allotment of one equity share of
Rs.10 for each warrant at 40% discount to the average of the daily high and low prices of
three months before exercise. The warrants, however, will be exercised at a minimum price
of Rs.70 per share, and a maximum price of Rs.90 per share.
370
Part IV
The warrant would be exercisable between the 6th month and the 24th month from
the date of allotment of the debentures. The warrant will come into existence only
on the allotment of the debenture. The Company has made applications to have the
warrants listed on the Mumbai, Ahmedabad and Delhi Stock Exchanges, where the
existing shares are listed.
i. Arrangement for Buy-back of Warrants
This is applicable to all investors including body corporates (excluding firm allottees).
For the benefit of the prospective investors in this issue, the Company has finalized
arrangements for the sale of the detachable tradeable warrants by the successful
allottees if they so wish. M/s Kartik Finance Limited (KFL), Mumbai and M/s Namco
Finance Limited (NFL), Mumbai have agreed to purchase the same at Rs.9.50 per warrant
vide their letters dated January 10, 20x2.
The scheme for disposal of warrants in particular, will work as under:
i. The offer for sale is purely voluntary in nature. The warrantholders are free to make
any other arrangement for disposal of the warrants.
ii. The above purchase price of Rs.9.50 is no indication of the price at which the
warrant will be quoted and traded on the floor of the Stock Exchange.
iii. The option to offer warrants for buy-back must be exercised for all the warrants
entitled to the applicants. In no event can the applicants exercise this option for only
a part of the warrants entitled to.
iv. The offer for sale of warrants is only exercisable at the time of making an
application in the issue.
v. The amount of Rs.9.50 received from M/s KFL or NFL under this scheme will be
deemed to have been paid by the warrantholder and appropriated towards moneys
due on allotment.
j. Under Section 48 of the Income Tax Act, the Long-term Capital Gains arising out of sale of
shares will be computed by deducting the indexed cost of acquisition/improvements from
the full value of the consideration. The Long-term Capital Gains would be charged to tax at
the flat rates, as under, plus surcharge if any:
Assessee Rate of Tax
Individuals 20% + 10% surcharge
Others 30% + 10% surcharge
k. Projected Profitability Statement
The projected financials of the Company have not been appraised and are in-house
estimates of the company. The following table gives the projected profitability based on
exercise of warrants in the FY20x3.
(Rs. crore)
Year ended 03/20x2 03/20x3 03/20x4
Turnover (inclusive of excise) 227.35 282.92 364.22
Other Income (including extraordinary items) 20.54 2.42 2.42
Profit before Interest, Depreciation and Tax 52.26 47.21 63.25
Interest 8.40 10.32 9.45
Depreciation 4.50 7.96 12.42
Profit Before Tax 39.36 28.93 41.38
Provision for Taxation 11.84 9.57 15.75
Profit After Tax 27.52 19.36 25.63
Paid-up Equity Capital 9.00 18.00 18.00
Reserves and Surplus 91.52 159.03 177.46
Earning per Share (Rs.) 30.57* 13.24** 14.24
Book Value (Rs.) 109.85 96.79 107.21
Dividend (%) 40 40 40
* Including extraordinary items
** On weighted average basis
371
Investment Banking and Financial Services
372
Part IV
GENERAL INFORMATION
Offer of Bonds
IDCC is offering the following categories of Unsecured Redeemable Bonds in the nature of
Promissory Notes for public subscription.
1. Deep Discount Bonds
2. Monthly Income Bonds
3. Money Back Plus Bonds
4. Regular Return Bonds.
Authority to issue
This issue of Bonds is being made pursuant to the Resolutions at the Board of Directors of IDCC,
passed at their meetings held on January 19, 20x5, July 17, 20x5 and March 13, 20x6 and Resolution
of the Committee of Directors of IDCC passed at their meeting held on March 23, 20x5. This is
within the overall borrowing limit set out in the Resolution passed under Section 293 (1)(d) of the
Act at the General Meeting of the Members of IDCC held on September 17, 20x3.
The Company has made an application to The Reserve Bank of India (RBI) vide its letter No.
RES/31394 dated January 4, 20x5 seeking approval that the present issue of Bonds is covered
under its exemption order DFC (COC) No.073.186.00-01 dated February 15, 20x4.
The present issue of the bonds is being made in accordance with the terms of the DFI Guidelines
and in accordance with terms prescribed in Clarification No. XIII regarding the Guidelines relating
to Book Building Process dated October 12, 1995 issued by SEBI to the extent applicable to DFIs.
Deep Discount Bond
The investor can choose either of the following options:
Option I
Each Deep Discount Bond of the face value of Rs.2,00,000 will be issued at a discounted price of
Rs.5,200 and will be redeemed at its face value of Rs.2,00,000 at the end of the 25th year from the
Deemed Date of Allotment.
Option II
A set of five Deep Discount Bonds of the face value of Rs.40,000 each (aggregating Rs.2,00,000)
will be issued at a discounted price of Rs.1,040 each (aggregating Rs.5,200 per set). Each Bond in
the set will be separately redeemed at its their face value at the end of 23rd, 24th, 25th, 26th and
27th year from the Deemed Date of Allotment. An application can be made for a minimum of one
set or in multiples thereof and no application can be made for an individual bond. Further, each
set will be listed and traded only as a set till the end of the 20th year from the Deemed Date of
Allotment. Thereafter (after the end of the 20th year from the Deemed Date of Allotment) each
bond under the set will be separately listed and traded.
Exercise of Option
The investors will have to clearly indicate their option at the time of making the application and no
change of option will be permitted.
Early Redemption at the Option of the Bondholders/ the Company
A Bondholder or the Company will have a right to exercise the option of Early Redemption of
Bonds (in case of Option I) or a set of Bonds (in case of Option II) at their deemed face value as
follows:
Exhibit I
Early Redemption period from the Deemed Face Value (in Rs.) for Option I &
Deemed Date of Allotment Option II*
5 years 11,000
10 years 24,000
15 years 50,000
20 years 1,00,000
* as a set of bonds
373
Investment Banking and Financial Services
374
Part IV
Notes:
1. Prior to the financial year 20x2, IDCC showed income and expenses net of write-offs and
recoveries in respect of bad debts as opposed to its current practice of disclosing write-offs
separately in the revenue account.
2. Project loan income includes interest, commitment charges and front end fees on project
loans.
3. Financial services income represents income from the leasing, asset credit, deferred credit
and installment sale businesses.
4. Capital gains are stated net of losses on the sale of investments and amounts written-off in
respect of investments (primarily holdings of equity and debenture securities).
5. Includes commissions from underwriting, guarantees and letter of credit activities. Also
includes fees from advisory and consultancy services and custodial and debenture
trusteeship activities.
6. Represents amounts earned primarily on unlent balances on the interbank deposit market.
7. The Income Tax Act provides for a 20.4% tax on interest income. This tax is separate from
corporate income tax.
8. Other expenses primarily include employment and overhead related expenses. Other
income primarily includes rental income from premises leased to subsidiaries, interest on
delayed refund of income tax and profits on the sale of leased assets.
9. Prior to March 20x3, there were no formal guidelines on provisioning norms for
bad/doubtful debts of Financial Institutions in India. Doubtful debts were either charged off
to revenue or a provision was created. Since the financial year 20x3, IDCC has followed the
policy established by the RBI to provide for bad/doubtful debts. Write-off amounts are
stated net of recoveries of amounts previously written-off.
10. Equity shares of face value Rs.100 each were subdivided into 10 shares of face value of
Rs.10 each in February 20x4. Consequently, the profit after tax per share, dividends per
share and weighted average shares outstanding data refer to the Rs.100 face value shares
prior to the financial year 20x4 and Rs.10 face value shares from financial year 20x4
onwards.
11. Does not include up to 3.45 crore shares that may be issued between 20x5 and 20x8 at a
price of Rs.15 per share upon conversion of the outstanding rupee denominated convertible
debt of IDCC. Also does not include up to 2.84 crore shares that may be issued at any time
up to March 20x7 at a price of Rs.239 per share (at an exchange rate of Rs.45 = US $1.00)
upon the conversion of the outstanding dollar denominated convertible debt of IDCC.
Balance Sheet Data
(in Rs. crore, except per share data)
As at 30th September
20x3 20x4
Assets
Loans (1)
Rupee loans 9317.00 11006.50
Foreign currency loans 2634.43 3226.30
Less: Provisions 107.92 155.42
Net loans 11843.51 14077.38
Investments
Equity 845.89 1453.09
Debentures 581.73 1430.52
Others 249.42 279.01
375
Investment Banking and Financial Services
As at 30th September
20x3 20x4
Current assets (2) 2965.72 3183.16
Leased assets 649.68 1082.48
Other fixed assets 53.87 237.29
Other balances (3) 16.95 14.00
Total assets 17206.77 21756.94
Liabilities
Current liabilities 1033.14 1580.38
Loans
Rupee loans guaranteed by government of India 2863.93 2863.93
Others 6882.17 9870.41
Foreign currency loans guaranteed by government 2748.03 2527.58
of India
Others 1936.84 2465.12
Total liabilities 15464.11 19307.42
Shareholders funds
Equity capital 254.62 301.30
Preference capital — 75.00
Reserves and surplus 1488.04 2073.22
Total 1742.66 2449.52
Total liabilities and shareholders funds 17206.77 21756.94
Notes:
1. Includes project loans, deferred credit and asset credit loans.
2. Principally includes cash and deposits with other banks and interest accrued but not
yet due at period end. Assets and liabilities in foreign currencies are translated into
rupees at the year-end or period-end rates. The differences in exchange arising on
such translation are held in various suspense accounts and included in current assets
or current liabilities, as appropriate.
3. In the financial year 20x3, expenses of Rs.17.93 crore relating to the US $ 200
million 2.5% Convertible Bonds issued in February 20x3 were capitalized and
included in other balances. This amount is being amortized over seven years.
Average Balance Sheets and Interest Rates
The following table shows average balances and interest rates of interest earning assets (excluding
leases and unlent balances) and interest bearing liabilities for the past two financial half years.
Average balances in this table are calculated based on balances at the beginning and end of each
period. Interest expense figures do not include interest tax. Loan fees are included in interest
income.
Six Months Ended 30th September
(in Rs. crore, except %)
20x3 20x4
Average Interest Average Average Interest Average
Balance Rate Balance Rate
Assets
Rupee
Project loans 7828.25 621.88 15.9% 9533.86 773.68 16.2%
376
Part IV
20x3 20x4
Average Interest Average Average Interest Average
Balance Rate Balance Rate
Financial services loans 1105.43 104.58 18.9 1217.26 106.99 17.6
Debentures 537.10 39.37 14.7 1217.49 92.78 15.2
Total rupee loan assets 9470.77 765.83 16.2 11968.62 973.46 16.3
Foreign currency loans 2605.46 144.03 11.1 3115.82 187.41 12.0
Liabilities
Rupee loans 9090.98 575.83 12.7 12061.01 775.75 12.9
Foreign currency loans 4933.32 146.93 6.0 4916.89 151.50 6.2
The following tables set forth certain financial ratios and credit quality data relating to ICICI for
the six months period ended 30th September, 20x3 and 20x4.
Financial Ratios
(in Rs. crore except %)
(Six Months Ended 30th September)
20x3 20x4
Average interest earning assets (2) 11977.99 14937.27
Interest income (3) 909.86 1160.87
Net interest income (4) 160.11 199.36
Gross yield (%) (5) 15.2 15.5
Net interest margin (%) (6) 2.7 2.7
Average cost of loan funds (%) (7) 10.7 11.3
Yield spread (%) (8) 4.5 4.2
Credit risk (9) 0.6 0.6
Net yield spread (10) 3.9 3.6
Profit before tax to:
Average total assets (%) 3.1 3.1
Average shareholders’ capital (%) 205.5 212.2
Average shareholders’ capital and reserves (%) 32.0 28.5
Profit after tax to:
Average total assets (%) 2.6 2.6
Average shareholders’ capital (%) 172.9 175.7
Average shareholders’ capital and reserves (%) 26.9 23.6
Average shareholders’ capital to assets (%) 1.5 1.5
Average shareholders’ capital and reserves to assets (%) 9.7 10.8
Cash dividends declared – –
Dividend pay-out ratio (%) – –
Notes:
1. In the case of a six-month ratio, results are annualized.
2. Interest earning assets consists of project loans, financial services loans and debentures (net
of provisions excluding unlent balances and leases).
3. Interest income consists of income from project loans, financial services loans and
debentures but excludes income from leases and treasury operations. Interest income is
presented without deducting interest tax.
377
Investment Banking and Financial Services
4. Net interest income consists of interest income for the period minus interest expense for
such period, including interest tax paid. Net interest income figures are understated in all
periods to the extent they reflect the cost of the interest bearing funds used for leases, equity
investments and other non-interest bearing assets such as office premises but not the
income generated from such non-interest earnings assets.
5. Gross yield equals interest income divided by average interest earning assets.
6. Net interest margin represents net interest income divided by average interest earning
assets.
7. Average cost of loan funds is the total interest expense (including interest tax) divided by
average interest bearing liabilities.
8. Yield spread represents the difference between gross yield and average cost of loan funds.
9. Credit risk represents write-offs and provisions charged against income during the
period divided by average interest earning assets.
10. Net yield spread represents yield spread less credit risk.
Case Study 3
Read the case carefully and answer the following questions.
You are provided, hereunder, with an abstract from the prospectus of a public issue of Mohanty
Fabrics Ltd. which opened for subscription on 8th July, 20x1. Some additional information is also
provided towards the end. Based on the information provided as well as your understanding of
public issues and merchant banking activities, you are required to answer the following questions:
1. The abstract makes a mention of minimum subscription of 90% of the issued amount
including the devolvement of underwriters. Subsequently, it also makes a mention of
allotment letters/refund orders:
a. Was it mandatory for the issuer to have a clause with respect to minimum
subscription and underwriting? Explain.
b. Briefly outline some of the key features with respect to underwriters and
underwriting arrangements.
c. State the present requirement with respect to the period of completion of allotment
activity and despatch of refund orders. What is the consequence of non-adherence?
2. The table on Capital Structure provides the details of the present issue as well as the earlier
paid-up capital and the authorized capital.
a. Distinguish between “Shares reserved for firm allotment” and “Shares reserved for
preferential allotment”.
b. Discuss the regulatory issues with respect to “firm allotment” as well as
“preferential allotment”.
c. i. Calculate the promoters’ contribution in the post-issue capital.
ii. Is it adequate as per the regulatory requirements? Explain.
iii. Does it endanger the minimum requirements of net offer to the public?
Explain.
iv. What is the minimum size of application for promoters’ contribution and
when should the contribution be brought into the company?
3. The terms of payment for issue give details of the amount of payment and the mode of
payment.
a. Is there any change in requirement with respect to the minimum application size by
the resident Indian Public? If yes, state the requirement and the reasons for the
change.
378
Part IV
b. Enumerate the essential features and guidelines for the usage of “stockinvest” as a
mode of payment for share application.
4. Are the issuer and the merchant bankers to the issue correct in making the issue at par?
Explain fully after considering the value of the share in terms of the
i. P/E approach
ii. Book value approach
iii. Dividend capitalization approach.
5. Briefly enumerate the key internal risk factors and the management’s perception of internal
risk factors that would have formed a part of the disclosure in the prospectus of this public
issue. What is the other category of risk factors that should form a part of the prospectus
and what does it usually pertain to?
Public Issue of 3,53,90,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 each for cash at par aggregating Rs.3539
lakh
I. GENERAL INFORMATION
Corporate Status
Mohanty Fabrics Ltd. was incorporated on November 27, 19x5 as a Public Limited
Company under certificate of incorporation issued by Registrar of Companies, New Delhi
and obtained certificate of commencement of business on 8th January, 19x6.
Acknowledgement Card
The company has obtained the Acknowledgement Card vide letter December 13, 19x8 from
the Securities & Exchange Board of India (SEBI).
Authority for the Present Issue
Authorization of the Shareholders of the Company under Section 81(1-A) of the Companies
Act, 1956 has been obtained for this Issue by a special resolution passed at the
Extraordinary General Meeting of the Company, held on July 19, 19x8.
Listing
Applications have been made to the Stock Exchanges at Delhi (the Regional Stock
Exchange), Mumbai and UP as well as NSE for permission to deal in and for an official
quotation of the equity shares being issued in terms of this prospectus.
Minimum Subscription
If the Company does not receive the minimum subscription of 90% of the issued amount
including devolvement of underwriters within 60 days from the date of closure of the issue,
the Company shall forthwith refund the entire subscription amount received. For a delay
beyond 78 days, from the opening of the issue, the Company and the Directors of the
Company shall be jointly and severely liable to repay the amount due by way of refund
with interest @ 15% p.a.
Allotment Letters/refund Orders
The Company shall ensure that the allotment letters/refund orders marked “Account Payee”
are issued within a period of 10 weeks from the closure of the issue. The Company shall
also ensure despatch of refund orders/unused stockinvests of value above Rs.1500 and
share certificate by Registered Post only. Refund orders of value up to Rs.1,500 will be
despatched under the Certificate of Posting. Adequate funds for the purpose will be made
available to the Registrar.
II. CAPITAL STRUCTURE
(Rs.)
SHARE CAPITAL NOMINAL VALUE
A. AUTHORIZED CAPITAL
9,00,00,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 each 90,00,00,000
B. ISSUED, SUBSCRIBED & PAID UP CAPITAL
70 Equity Shares of Rs.10 each 700
379
Investment Banking and Financial Services
380
Part IV
2. Application Forms duly completed as per the instructions contained therein together
with Cash/Cheque/Bank Draft/Stockinvest for the amount payable on application at
the rate prescribed should be lodged before the closure of Subscription List with the
Bankers to the Issue at their designated branches mentioned in the Application Form
and NOT to the Company or the Lead Managers, Co-Managers or Registrars to the
Issue. Applications not made so are liable to be rejected.
3. Payments should be made in cash or by cheque/bank draft/stockinvest drawn on any
bank (including a co-operative bank) which is situated at and is a member or sub-
member of the Banker’s Clearing House located at the center where the application
is submitted.
IV. PARTICULARS OF THE ISSUE
Objects of the Issue
The Company is setting up a 100% EOU for the manufacture of wide width cotton
sheetings and premium shirtings with an installed capacity of 25,200 spindles, 120
shuttleless looms (96 Airjet loom from Picanol, Belgium and 24 Projectile loom from
Sulzer, Switzerland) with necessary processing facilities.
The objects of the present issue are:
i. To raise a part of the finance required for setting up the project
ii. To meet the expenses of the issue and other incidental expenses
iii. To list the equity shares of the Company on the Stock Exchange(s).
Cost of Project
MFL’s project was appraised by IDBI in March 20x1 for the purpose of sanction of Foreign
Currency loans equivalent to Rs.4,700 lakh. The cost of the project was assessed at
Rs.14,350 lakh and the project was expected to commence commercial operations from
October 20x2.
A mid-term review of the project was taken up by IDBI in June 20x2 when the estimated
cost of the project was assessed at Rs.16,698 lakh. Out of the overall increase in the cost of
Rs.2,348 lakh, an amount of Rs.1,305 lakh is notional (due to foreign exchange rate
fluctuation) and the balance amount of Rs.1,043 lakh is accounted for by increase in the
cost of civil construction, miscellaneous fixed assets and preliminary and pre-operative
expenses. The plant was expected to go on stream in January 20x3. However, there was a
delay of three months in project implementation and the commercial production is now
expected to commence in April 20x3. Consequent increase in pre-operative
expenses/interest during the construction period of about Rs.250 lakh is proposed to be met
out of the contingency provision and hence the project is expected to be implemented
within the cost estimates.
The details of the cost of the project, estimated at Rs.16,698 lakh, are as under:
(Rs. lakh)
Land and Site Development 291
Buildings 1169
Plant and Machinery
– Imported 8932
– Indigenous 1395
Misc. Fixed Assets
– Imported 1305
– Indigenous 1631
Preliminary and Pre-operative Expenses 1270
Provision for contingencies 303
Margin Money for Working Capital 402
Total 16698
381
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Means of Finance
The cost of the project is proposed to be financed in the following manner:
(Rs. lakh)
Share Capital
– Promoters 3849
– Public Issue 3539 7388
Term Loan - Forex Loan
– IDBI 6005
– SBI 3290
9295
State Capital Subsidy 15
Total 16698
The foreign currency term loans have been tied-up with IDBI and SBI against their letter
dated 26/6/20x1 and dated 9/11/20x1 respectively.
The Company has already made application to State Govt. of Uttar Pradesh for sanction of
capital subsidy of Rs.15 lakh. In case the subsidy is not made available to the Company, it
proposes to arrange unsecured loans to meet the shortfall.
Up to 31st January, 20x3 the Company had incurred an expenditure of Rs.14,402 lakh
comprising Rs.266 lakh on land and site development, Rs.1,173 lakh on building and
advance to contractors and building materials, Rs.10,619 lakh on imported machinery,
Rs.731 lakh on misc. fixed assets, Rs.417 lakh on indigenous machinery and Rs.1,196 lakh
on security deposits, preliminary and pre-operative expenses, etc. The expenditure incurred
till date has been financed through the promoter’s equity/share application money of
Rs.3,850 lakh, FI loans of Rs.9,799 lakh (IDBI Rs.6,089 lakh and SBI Rs.3,710 lakh), and
balance Rs.528 lakh by way of unsecured loans and Rs.225 lakh from sundry creditors and
interest on deposits.
Working Capital
Working capital requirements have been calculated based on 2.5 months’ requirement of
raw materials, 3 months’ consumable stores/spares and 1 month’s finished goods. The
working capital requirement in the first full year of operation (20x3-20x4) is estimated at
Rs.1893 lakh which would be met through bank borrowings to the extent of Rs.1,491 lakh,
the balance of Rs.402 lakh has been provided in the project cost as margin money for
working capital. The Company has already approached SBI (its regular banker) for sanction of
working capital finance and is confident of obtaining the sanction at an early date.
Schedule of Implementation
PFL’s civil construction work is at an advanced stage of completion. All major imported
plant and machinery have been shipped and most of them have already arrived at the site;
the remaining are expected to reach the site by March 20x3. Orders for most of the
indigenous equipment have been placed and the same have started arriving at the site.
Erection of equipment have commenced from September 20x2. After installation of
plant and machinery and trial runs, the commercial production is expected to commence
by April 20x3.
The expected delay of about 3 months in implementation of the project as compared to the
projections made by IDBI in its revised appraisal was mainly due to delay in receipt of
imported machinery. Consequent increase in pre-operative expenses/interest of about
Rs.250 lakh during the construction period is proposed to be met through the contingency
provision. The company has incurred/committed substantial expenditure on the project.
Keeping in view the progress made on the project, the cost is expected to be contained
within the estimates. The management is reasonably confident of completing the project
within the revised schedule i.e. by April 20x3.
382
Part IV
Profitability
As per the appraisal done by IDBI in June 20x2, the abstract of projected financial
performance is as follows:
(Rs. lakh)
20x2 20x3 20x4
Year Ending March 31st
Expected Sales 7574 8584 9089
Other Income 142 161 170
Total Cost of Production 4367 4932 5224
Interest 1038 1041 930
Depreciation 1359 1371 1382
Preliminary Expenses written-off 42 42 42
Dividend (%) 8 10 15
Reserves and Surplus 452 1071 1642
V. The Company has not made any public/rights issue of capital since its incorporation.
The particulars pertaining to issue of capital by other listed companies in the group which
have made any public issue of capital in the last three years preceding the date of this
prospectus are as follows:
Mohanty Spinning and Weaving Mills Ltd.
Year of Issue 19x9
Type of Issue Rights Issue
Amount of Issue 23,53,948 PCDs of Rs.50 each for cash at par aggregating
Rs.11,76,97,400
Date of Closure 27.10.19x9
Objects of the To meet the initial expenditure relating to expansion project for
Issue installing spindles for manufacturing synthetic blended yarn
Rate of Dividend 19x9-20x0 – 25%
Paid 20x0-x1 – 25%
Promises vs.
Performance
(Rs. lakh)
Particulars 19x9-20x0 20x0-x1
Turnover PAT EPS Turnover PAT EPS
Projected 6728 657 20.53 6867 548 9.87
Actual 7437 434 13.50 9454 533 9.34
Mohanty Acrylon Ltd.
Year of Issue 19x9
Type of Issue Rights Issue
Amount of Issue 1,81,40,000 Equity Shares of Rs.10 each for cash at par
aggregating Rs.18,14,00,000
Date of Closure 15.11.19x9
Objects of the Issue To finance the expansion project by increasing the capacity
of acrylic fibers from 15,000 tpa to 18,000 tpa and also to
meet the working capital requirement
Rate of Dividend Paid 20x0-x1 - nil
20x1-x2 - nil
383
Investment Banking and Financial Services
(Rs. lakh)
Particulars 20x0-x1 20x1-x2
Turnover PAT EPS Turnover PAT EPS
Projected 16,114 781 1.52 16,873 14.91 2.35
Actual 14,023 (661) – 15,198 (231) –
The company had projected an income of Rs.16,873 lakh and PAT of Rs.1,491 lakh for the
year 20x1-x2 while the actual income was Rs.15,198 lakh and the Company incurred a loss
of Rs.231 lakh. Acrylic fiber industry as a whole is passing through a difficult time due to
competition from imports and also due to a steep rise in the prices of raw materials in the
international market, which resulted in an increase in cost of production.
Additional Information
1. The company may be placed in the industry titled as “Textiles – Composite/Cotton/
Blended/Fabric”.
2. The P/E ratios for the industry reported in capital market dated March 25, 20x3 are
as below:
i. Highest P/E 13.9
ii. Lowest P/E 4.0
iii. Composite P/E 9.4
3. It is expected that the company would be in a position to give a dividend at the rate
of 25% for the year ended 31st March, 20x3 at which the rate of dividend will
stabilize for the future period.
4. 364-day T-Bills rates (proxy for risk-free rate) are approximately 9% and the risk
premium per unit of risk is estimated to be 10%. The company’s beta is estimated at
1.30.
5. The company has chosen to avail the benefits u/s 10B of the Income Tax Act, 1961
with effect from the first year of operations itself.
Case Study 4
Read the case carefully and answer the following questions.
1. Calculate the price at which the company can issue shares to raise funds for financing the
project. Give justifications which should include justifications required as per the existing
SEBI guidelines. For justifying the premium, the funds raised by equity can be assumed to
be Rs.500 lakh.
2. Give qualitative reasons for the issue price arrived at (1) above.
3. If the company expects an increase of 80% in its earnings before interest and taxes and the
shareholders accept a dilution in EPS by 30%, calculate the debt-equity ratio for the funds
required for expansion. Assume that of the total funds required, Rs.315 can be sourced by
internal accruals and that equity is priced at the amount arrived at in (1) above.
4. State the various ways by which the company can raise equity funds. Discuss the pros and
cons of each method.
5. State whether investment can be made in such a company highlighting the risk factors
involved.
State assumptions, if any.
History and Business of the company:
Hi-Tech Enterprises Limited was incorporated as a private limited company during 19x1 and was
converted into a public limited company during 19x5.
Hi-tech, promoted by Shri Mohan Reddy and his associates, was incorporated as a Private Limited
Company on August 28, 19x1 under the name of Hi-Tech Enterprises Private Ltd., with the
objective of creating facilities for software development and its export thereof to global markets.
The Company commenced commercial operations in September 19x2.
384
Part IV
IDBI sanctioned start-up assistance of Rs.97 lakh under the Venture Capital Scheme in 19x1 for
the Company’s first project (costing Rs.122 lakh), envisaging creation of facilities for conversion
of paper based drawings into a Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD) and Geographical
Information System (GIS) formats and for developing other software packages. The project was
successfully completed in September 19x2. IDBI converted a portion of its loan amounting to
Rs.15 lakh into equity in 19x4. The company obtained a second loan of Rs.100 lakh from IDBI for
expansion of its facilities (the scheme costing Rs.150 lakh) in 19x4, which was successfully
completed in January 19x5. Having stabilized its operations and gaining a stable foothold in the
export market, Hi-Tech is now embarking on an expansion plan envisaging: (i) entry into
engineering consultancy for 3D modelling, (ii) expansion (by over 60%) of its CAD/GIS
conversion Capacity and (iii) doubling of capacity for handling Software projects and product
development.
Hi-Tech shares a fully functional 128 KBPS Satellite Link, provided by STP, Hyderabad and has
established its own home page on its World Wide Web Server on the INTERNET.
Identified Niche Areas and Product-Mix
Hi-Tech has well identified niche areas for software development in tune with its relative expertise
and skill. The basic thrust areas are: (i) Computer Aided Design and Drafting (CADD) and (ii)
Geographic Information System (GIS). The Company undertakes software development as well as
offers ‘Software Services’ in the above two selected areas.
Projects:
The projects Hi-Tech undertakes are under DOS, Windows and UNIX environments. Projects
executed included implementing OLÉ 2 functionally in CADKEY for Windows, enhancing the
functionality of CK Architect using CODe (CADKEY Object Developer) and developing a
Universal Post Processor for Cutting Edge Technologies, USA.
Recognized as ‘R&D’ Unit by Ministry of Science & Technology, Govt. of India:
Hi-Tech is a recognized ‘R&D Unit’ by the Department of Scientific & Industrial Research,
Ministry of Science & Technology, Government of India – which allows the Company the option
to write off the entire amount spent on R&D for IT purposes.
ISO 9000 Certification:
Hi-Tech was given the ISO 9002 certificate by BVQI, London for its CADD/GIS conversion
services. The Company has applied and is confident of obtaining the ISO 9001 certification for
`Software Development’ by June 20x2.
The Company exports it services/products mainly to USA, Europe, Japan, Australia and South-
East Asia, mainly through its Strategic Alliance partners located in USA, Germany, Australia and
Belgium. Hi-Tech has been getting regular orders from clients in UK, Malaysia and Singapore.
Promoters:
Hi-Tech is promoted by Shri BVR Mohan Reddy, Shri K Rajan Babu both technically qualified
computer professionals, and Smt. B Sucharitha (wife of Shri Mohan Reddy) Shri Mohan Reddy
(aged 46 years) has over twenty years of engineering and management experience. He was
awarded “Entrepreneur of the year” by Hyderabad Management Association for the year 1996.
Shri Reddy has two degrees in masters, one in Management Engineering from the University of
Michigan, Ann Arbor, USA (in 1977), the other in Industrial Engineering from the Indian Institute
of Technology, Kanpur (in 1975). His basic graduation was in Mechanical Engineering from
Andhra University (in 1971).
Shri Reddy started his career with the DCM Group in 1974 as a senior management trainee, was
with MICRO BOSCH (the German auto part giant) for three years as senior systems officer
(1977 to 1980) and with HCL (now the Hewlett Packard joint venture in India) as Regional
Manager (1980 to 1982). Within a short period Shri Reddy graduated from Management Trainee
to Regional Manager. Shri Mohan Reddy joined OMC Computers initially as Marketing Manager
(in 1982) and grew to be General Manager, President and then became the Managing Director of
OMC. Shri Reddy left OMC in June 1992.
385
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Shri Reddy was the President of Electronics Industries Association of Andhra Pradesh (ELIAP)
for two years (1990 and 1991) and has been the President of Hyderabad Software Exporters
Association (HYSEA) since 1993. He was also on the board of AP Electronics Development
Corporation in 1985.
Shri Rajan Babu (44 years) is an Engineering graduate from Osmania University (1974).
Smt. Sucharitha (44 years) is a post-graduate in Chemistry from Shri Venkateshwara University,
Tirupathi (in 1973). She has 3 years experience of working in computers/systems in Bhavani &
Co., Hyderabad, from 1988 till she became a promoter-director in Hi-Tech.
The Financial Highlights of the Company are as follows:
The profits of the company for the period 19x1-20x2 are set out hereunder after making
adjustments
(Rupees in lakh)
Particulars 31/03/x2 31/03/x1 31/03/x0
(estimated)
TOTAL INCOME 502.29 274.81 127.90
EXPENDITURE
Employees Remuneration & Benefits 103.04 57.96 34.07
Processing 153.99 94.58 46.32
Depreciation 26.70 13.43 8.02
Financial charges 24.77 16.41 11.21
Royalty 25.04 7.62 3.00
TOTAL 333.54 190.00 102.62
Net Profit for the year 168.75 84.81 25.28
Less: Provision for taxes 5.30 NIL 1.00
Profit after tax 163.45 84.81 24.28
Assets and Liabilities of the company as on 31st March 20x0, 31st March, 20x1 and 31st March,
20x2 (estimated) are set out below:
(Rs. lakh)
Particulars 31-03-x2 31-03-x1 31-03-x0
(estimated)
Fixed Assets
Gross Block 276.49 139.21 75.29
Less: Depreciation 50.73 24.23 10.80
Net Block 225.76 114.98 64.49
Subtotal (a) 225.76 114.98 64.49
INVESTMENT (b)
Add: Current Assets Loans and Advances: 277.78 201.60 108.40
Total (A) a + b 503.54 316.58 172.89
Less: Current Liabilities and Provisions
Current Liabilities 48.51 36.68 17.63
Provisions 5.30 Nil 1.40
Total (B) 53.81 36.58 19.03
386
Part IV
387
Investment Banking and Financial Services
Location:
The company’s present facilities are located at:
i. Ameerpet, Hyderabad - where the company has an area of 5044 sq.ft. taken on rental basis
from the Software Technological Park, Hyderabad. The current rental charges are @
Rs.13.70 per sq.ft.
ii. Punjagutta, Hyderabad - where the company has taken 6,878 sq.ft. (plinth area), from Smt. B
Sucharitha, the whole-time Director of the Company, on a monthly rent of Rs.50,000
(Rupees fifty thousand only). In addition, the Company was required to make an interest free
security deposit of Rs.3 lakh with the Lessor (being equivalent to six months rent). The
initial lease is for a period of 3 years, with the option for the Company to renew the lease
agreement for another period of 3 years, subject to a 20% increase in rent.
The additional facilities envisaged under the expansion scheme will initially be installed in
the 3rd floor of the Company’s premises at Punjagutta, where about 2,000 Sq.ft. of area is
available. The Company proposes to construct a seven storied building in an one acre plot
allotted to it by Andhra Pradesh Industrial Infrastructure Corporation Ltd. (APIIC) at
Madhapur Village near Jubilee Hills, at the outskirts of Hyderabad and shift all activities to
the new premises. Under the Allotment scheme a total land measuring 4840 sq. yards (1
acre) has been allotted to the company for a price of Rs.62.05 lakh. As per the scheme the
land will be developed by APIIC with metal roads, water supply assistance, telephone
connections, power connections, street lights, etc. The implementation is in progress.
Building and Civil Works:
The company envisages construction of a seven storied (including normal as well as stilts floor)
building, with about 50,000 Sq.ft. area. The building would be of RCC construction and would be
fully air-conditioned and furnished. The company has appointed KSA Consultants Pvt. Ltd.
(KSA), Hyderabad as architects and civil engineers. The company has taken possession of the land
from APIIC on February 5, 20x1. The company would shortly apply for obtaining the necessary
approvals for construction and is confident of obtaining the same well in time as per schedule.
Temporary Facilities and Shifting to New Premises
The company proposes to initially install its facilities at its existing sites and then shift them to its
new premises, once the construction is over. The same workstations (proposed under the scheme) are
initially proposed to be installed in the existing facilities and then are to be shifted to the new
premises. The cost of shifting will be very marginal and no special provision is required for the same.
Technology
For the CAD/GIS conversion services, Hi-Tech follows a unique process developed by it. This
`heads-up’ Interactive approach was developed and systematically refined based on the expertise
build-up over the years. This approach helps to maintain high accuracy levels (of 99.5% and
above) at predictable and manageable costs. The emphasis is on the process and extensive use of
software tools developed in-house to increase productivity and meet quality norms.
Utilities
The present contracted demand is 100 KVA at the Company’s private STP at Gayathri Hills. In
addition, a DG set of 35 KVA has been installed. UPS facility of capacity of 17 KVA has also
been provided. The peak load is 60 KVA. The additional requirement would be about 35 KVA
which can be taken care of with the existing contracted demand.
At its STP, Ameerpet, the contracted load is 60 KVA. The company has a share of 35 KVA out of
the 250 KVA DG set capacity installed at the STP by the Government. The Company has installed
the UPS system of capacity of 26 KVA. No addition to the capacity is envisaged.
The power requirement at the new premises, envisaged at Madhapur would be 500 KVA
(including additional miscellaneous facilities and future expansion), which is proposed to be met
from APSEB supply to the STP. Provision has been made to install a diesel generating set of 125
KVA capacity to take care of the power requirements in case of power failure. An uninterrupted
power supply systems of 50 KVA rating is proposed to be procured to take care of any tripping.
388
Part IV
The Company is yet to make arrangements to obtain sanction of power for its proposed new unit at
Madhapur. However, as per the project implementation schedule, full commercial operations
would commence at its existing sites, where it has enough sanctioned power limits.
Human Resources
The existing manpower and the future requirements are as under:
Existing Additional Total Requirements
Managerial Cadre 29 16 45
CAD/GIS Engineers, Software Engineers/ 274 193 467
Executives/Programmers
Adm. Staff & others 4 3 7
Total 307 212 519
Hi-Tech’s management is fully alive to the problem of turnover of skilled manpower in the
Information Technology Industry. In additional to having an on-going recruitment plan, based on
the turnover in the Company, Hi-tech proposes to tackle this problem by giving relatively high
compensation (based on productivity), opportunity to work in the latest technologies (with on-line
services through the dedicated lines) and providing a challenging and encouraging work
environment.
Environmental Aspects
The company falls under the non-polluting industry category and the software development
process does not involve generation of any effluents. However, the company would be required to
obtain formal clearance from the State Pollution Control Board of Andhra Pradesh. The company
has applied to the AP State Pollution Control Board for the necessary approvals and is confident of
obtaining the same in due course.
Implementation Schedule
As per the implementation schedule it is expected to complete the project and start commercial
operations at Madhapur by October, 20x2.
Assumptions:
1. Financial charges include interest on the existing debt.
2. Industry average P/E for medium/small computer software companies is 6.8.
Case Study 5
Read the case carefully and answer the following questions.
1. Justify the pricing of the share as per Malegam Committee Report.
2. Delineate a set of highlights and risk factors for this issue.
3. MCS Ltd. was appointed as Registrar to the Issue. What do you think was the role of MCS Ltd.
in this issue?
4. You are appointed as a consultant by the company to assist in its IPO. Discuss the
regulatory framework that you would keep in mind while designing the advertisement campaign.
5. Based on the forecasted figures, compute the market adjusted returns and state whether
issue is underpriced or overpriced. Give the implications of the same.
Public issue of 12,50,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each for cash at a premium of Rs.45 per share
aggregating Rs.6,87,50,000.
389
Investment Banking and Financial Services
390
Part IV
391
Investment Banking and Financial Services
392
Part IV
Human Resource Policy: Participation by consensus is the key success factor. The company,
therefore, invests in its people to build up high quality human assets. Staff is carefully selected,
intensively trained and appropriate growth paths are charted out for future advancement. Special
emphasis is placed on industry relevant skills and quality assurance. To achieve excellence in these
areas, the company has formal training and development plans for employees. The company also
plans to offer ESOP to its employees.
Financial Highlights
The key financial indicators of the company based on the audited accounts are given below:
Statement of Profit and Loss
(Rs. in lakh)
1.4.20x0 1.10.19x9 1.4.19x8 1.4.19x7 1.4.19x6
to to to to to
Particulars 1.3.20x1 31.3.20x0 30.9.19x9 31.3.19x8 31.3.19x7
(12m) (6m) (18m) (12m) (12m)
Software development
– On-site 704.54 173.54 33.17 – –
– Off-shore 91.12 – – – –
– Domestic 53.00 – 61.75 38.07 5.97
A. Total Sales 848.66 173.54 94.92 38.07 5.97
Y2K related revenue included in 123.11 32.71 1.79 – –
above
B. Other income from 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
operations
a. Total income 848.66 173.54 94.92 38.07 5.97
Expenditure
Cost of goods sold 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
Interest and finance charges 5.48 1.21 1.12 0.08 0.00
Lease Rental Charges 22.30 7.13 1.96 0.00 0.00
b. Total expenditure 27.78 8.34 3.08 0.08 0.00
c. Operating income 820.88 165.20 91.84 37.99 5.97
Operating expenses
Employee cost/on-site 502.46 109.71 35.24 18.27 3.02
expenses
Administrative expenses 64.20 28.42 34.69 13.59 2.76
Depreciation 26.84 2.33 2.87 0.05 0.00
Preliminary expenses 1.25 0.62 1.71 0.01 0.01
written off
Miscellaneous expenses 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00 0.00
written off
d. Total operating expenses 594.75 141.08 74.51 31.92 5.79
e. Profit from operations 226.13 24.12 17.33 6.07 0.18
f. Other income 2.03 1.17 0.62 0.08 0.05
g. Net profit before tax 228.16 25.29 17.95 6.15 0.23
h. Taxation 5.00 1.50 0.44 2.60 0.14
i. Profit after tax 223.16 23.79 17.51 3.55 0.09
Dividend rate 7.5% 7.5% Nil 10% 15%
j. Dividend 18.62 7.46 0.00 1.62 0.00
k. Corporate dividend tax 1.86 0.75 0.00 0.00 0.00
l. Transfer to general reserve 190.00 1.90 1.09 0.00 0.00
Profit and Loss B/F 32.21 18.53 2.11 0.18 0.09
m. Balance transferred to 44.89 32.21 18.53 2.11 0.18
balance sheet
393
Investment Banking and Financial Services
394
Part IV
taxation) increased from Rs.77.59 lakh in the financial year 19x9 to Rs.149.43 lakh in the financial
year 20x0 and Rs.622.53 lakh in the financial year 20x1. The company competes with similar
other software services companies on its strengths which include its successful track record,
professionally qualified and experienced personnel and their available skills. There have been no
unusual or infrequent events or transactions during the past accounting periods of three years. The
company’s business of software development is not seasonal. No significant general economic
changes have taken place in the past three accounting periods to materially affect the operations or
profitability of the company. No significant economic change is likely to materially affect the
income from continuing operations. No material changes in the future relationship between costs
and revenues are known as on date. No new product or entry into a new business segment has
been publicly announced since the date of the last financial statements. The five main clients of the
company during the financial year ended 31st March, 20x1 were Oakwood Technical Services
Limited – UK, Profund International Management Consulting – Germany, Softlines (UK) Limited,
Streamlines – Netherlands and ACS Consulting – USA. They contributed 83% of the total income
for the year. There were no special events, trends or any uncertainties that at any time adversely
affected the income from continuing operations. The management does not anticipate any adverse
changes taking place in the future also. Future changes in revenue are expected to arise primarily
from the company’s increased volume of activity.
Profitability forecast for financial year ending 31st March, 20x2
A forecast of operations and profit for the year ended 31st March, 20x2 along with the major
assumptions as estimated by the company and certified by K. P. Joshi and Company, the Auditors
of the company, to be arithmetically accurate and in accordance with the assumptions are:
Particulars (Rs. in lakh)
Sales and other income 1,598.44
Employee cost/On-site expenses 942.78
Administrative and Other expenses 87.92
Interest and financial charges 22.20
Miscellaneous expenses written off 8.75
Depreciation 40.04
Profit before tax 496.75
Tax 4.53
Profit after tax 492.22
Assumptions
The benefits from expansion and diversification project are expected to accrue during the second
half of the financial year. The revenue for on-site and off-shore services has been assumed on the
basis of 160 hours per man month working. It has also been assumed that there are 25 working
days in a month. Sales overheads are taken at the rate of 3% of revenue. Administrative overheads
are taken at the rate of 2% of the net revenue. Depreciation on fixed assets has been charged on
straight line method at the rates specified in the Companies Act, 1956. Revenue from on-site staff
has been taken for 11 months, whereas salary and allowance is taken for 12 months. Exchange
Rate for UK Pound is taken at Rs.70. Exchange rate for US Dollar is taken at Rs.42. Exchange rate
for Euro is taken at Rs.43. Tax has been calculated taking into consideration 80 HHE benefits
under Income Tax Act.
Company, management, the promoters and their background
The Promoters of Company and their brief background is outlined below: Mr. G S Chandrashekar,
Managing Director of the company, aged 45 years, is a Chartered Accountant, and has over 18
years experience in finance. Between 1977-88, he was with the Apte group of companies and his
last assignment was as Vice President (Finance) of Lakshmi Vishnu Textiles Limited. Before
joining the company, between 1989-1995, in his capacity as a Financial Consultant, he
implemented projects on turnkey basis for Simplex Mills Limited, Neha Proteins Limited and
Bagade India Engineering Limited. He has also handled a large software-exports project for
Twinstar Software Exports Limited, on a turnkey basis, including setting up of centers, marketing
395
Investment Banking and Financial Services
tie-ups, selection of hardware and software vendors and appointment of personnel. Mr. Sharad
Gupta, Director-Marketing, aged 43 years, B.Sc, MA with a Diploma in Marketing and Sales, has
over 15 years experience in Marketing and Sales of Computer Hardware and Software. He has
held marketing positions in companies like Birla Consultancy and Software Services Limited,
National Electronics Company Limited, Jumbo Electronics Limited, Datamatics Limited and Blue
Star Limited (Hewlett Packard, Motorola and Software Export Division). He has extensive
experience in international marketing of software, managing Indian operations, setting up
marketing teams, and has successfully developed business in the Far East, Middle East, Europe
and USA. Mr. Aniket Jathar, Director-Technical aged 36 years, with a Post-Graduate Diploma in
Software Technology and Computing Techniques from NCSDCT, has over 9 years experience in
the software development business. He was with OMC Computers Limited and then with Neo
Computers Private Limited before joining the company. He has been instrumental in the development
of the Impact Analysis and Conversion tool that is used for the software exports projects contracted
to the company. He oversees the training and development of the software professionals employed
by the company.
FUTURE BUSINESS STRATEGY
Business Streams
The five main business streams in the future would be:
Client-Server Development: The Company’s personnel have been trained to execute projects
using well-defined methodologies and quality procedures. With strong project management skills
and over 80 man-years of experience in the Company, it can undertake a variety of large and complex
client server developments right from system study to implementation.
IT Support for European Monetary Union (EMU): The impact on the IT systems due to the
single Euro-currency will be driven by the business decisions to be taken by the organization and
the respective country’s participation in the EMU. The company has developed a tool that detects
the currency field in a module and hence assists in EMU problem. The company’s services
include: Analysis of existing system to understand current business processes, Impact Analysis of
affected systems in view of the proposed changes, re-coding test suite design, test data generation
and implementation.
E-commerce Application Development: E-commerce activity is expected to exceed US$349
billion by the year 20x2. Business on the NET is booming and destroying old habits and creating
new opportunities. Keeping this in mind, the company has developed skills that can be provided to
end-users at competitive costs.
Impact Analysis and Conversion Tool: This is a tool that has been developed by the company.
The Y2K problem essentially revolves around locating all the date-fields throughout the length of
the source code (normally a few million lines per program). The Impact Analysis tool simplifies
the activity and reduces the time taken to modify the program and reduces possible oversights. The
company has successfully executed projects using this tool and has received repeat orders for the
same.
On-site Development: These are the current on-site activities that are being carried out by the
company. The company can provide personnel with any or all of the following skill set: Oracle,
Developer 2000, Designer 2000, Sybase, Powerbuilder, Visual C++, Visual Basic, Java,
Networking.
Competition: The company competes with other software services companies on its strengths
which include, successful track record, professionally qualified and experienced personnel and
their skills.
Growth Strategy
The company has consciously looked at the European market to begin with, instead of the US
where large numbers of Indian software companies operate focusing mainly on on-site consulting.
Having established itself in the European market, the company is now focusing on the following:
Direct contact with the end user: The company plans to start fully owned susidiaries in the UK,
Germany and USA with marketing and support staff, which will focus on off-shore projects and
direct contracting with end-users resulting in a high credibility of the company, enhancing its
marketing abilities for projects and on-site development activities.
396
Part IV
397
Investment Banking and Financial Services
As on 31.03.20x0, the bank was the largest private sector bank in terms of assets, deposits and net
profits. Further the Bank was ranked as `Best Bank’ by the Financial Express Survey among 86
nationalized, foreign and private sector banks.
Overview of the Bank’s Business
The Bank has a network of 20 fully computerized and automated branches covering 10 states and
2 Union Territories. All Branches are connected through the satellite to a Central Database
offering the facilities of `anywhere banking’ and instant funds transfer.
The bank has a deposit base of Rs.3093.10 cr. The Bank’s Certificate of Deposit Program has been
rated PR1+ by CARE for the last 3 consecutive years.
The total staff strength is 294. According to the Financial Express survey the bank has been ranked
No.1 in terms of business per employee and No.3 in terms of operating profit per employee.
Income Recognition and Loan Provisioning
Particulars Amount in Crore
Standard Assets 1887.64
Sub-standard Assets 46.79
Doubtful Assets 1.98
Loss Assets —
Total Assets 1936.41
Provisions as per RBI norms 8.75
Net Advances 1927.66
Net Non Performing Assets 40.02
NPAs to Net Advances 2.08%
Capital Adequacy Position of the Bank
(Rs. in crore)
Particulars 31.03.19x8 31.03.19x9 31.03.20x0
Risk Weighted Assets 488.28 1279.62 2165.91
Capital 161.67 232.77 279.46
Capital Adequacy Ratio 33.11% 18.19% 12.90%
Credit Deposit Ratio
Particulars Global Bank Industry
19x7-x8 72.03% 54.69%
19x8-x9 79.39% 58.31%
19x9-20x0 62.32% 54.91%
Estimated Profit Forecast for 20x0-x1
Particulars Amount in Crore
Interest Income 585.25
Other Income 146.31
Total Income 731.56
Interest Expended 449.18
Operating Expenses 79.58
Provisions & Contingencies 99.40
Total Expenses 628.16
Net Profit 103.40
398
Part IV
Case Study 7
Read the case carefully and answer the following questions.
1. Design a suitable instrument for XYZ Ltd. to mobilize funds from the public. The
instrument designed should meet the constraints given. Give reasons wherever necessary.
2. Determine the cost of the above instrument to XYZ Ltd.
3. What are the important areas focussed by a credit rating agency in assigning rating to a debt
instrument?
4. What is the role and responsibility of a debenture trustee in case of a debt issue?
5. The CEO has informed you that the company would like to offer the instrument designed
by you in demateralized form.
a. Explain the concept of dematerialization of securities.
b. What are the various benefits of dematerialization to the investors?
c. Is it mandatory to give the option of rematerilization to the investors?
Make suitable assumptions wherever necessary and state them clearly.
XYZ Company Limited (XYZ) is a profit making dividend-paying listed company engaged in
manufacture of synthetic ropes. It has technical collaboration with a major foreign company for its
existing product range. The company registered a sales turnover of Rs.5200 lakh and a net profit of
Rs.2089 lakh for the year ended March 31, 20x1.
399
Investment Banking and Financial Services
XYZ has taken up an expansion project to increase the capacities of existing products, in technical
and financial collaboration with the foreign company. The project was estimated to cost Rs.19000
lakh. The means of financing includes term loans of Rs.6500 lakh and Rs.2500 lakh from Indian
promoters, Rs.3500 lakh from the foreign collaborator in the form of equity, Rs.1500 lakh in the
form of internal accruals, and the balance Rs.5000 lakh from the public.
Performance
The financial performance of the company for the last five years is as follows:
(Rs. lakh)
Year ended March 31 19x7 19x8 19x9 20x0 20x1
Sales 400 700 825 2000 5200
PBIDT 125 180 190 875 2484
Financial Charges 30 30 15 120 300
Depreciation 15 18 18 40 95
PBT 80 132 157 715 2089
Tax 5 1 2 0 0
PAT 75 131 155 715 2089
Share capital 43 85 85 460 460
Reserves & surplus 116 239 375 1883 3382
Dividend (%) 10 12.50 16 18 30
Shareholding Pattern and price movements
The shareholding pattern of XYZ’s existing Share Capital of Rs.460 lakh is as follows:
Holding
Promoters 46.39%
FIIs & Public 53.61%
The price movement of the scrip on the Mumbai Stock Exchange since it is listed in July, 19x8 is
as under:
Share Price (in Rupees)
Month/Year High Low Average
19x9 (Average) 115.0 40.0 77.50
April, 20x0 115.0 85.0 100.00
May, 20x0 97.5 85.0 91.25
June, 20x0 100.0 90.0 95.00
July, 20x0 110.0 92.5 101.25
August, 20x0 90.0 82.5 86.25
September, 20x0 110.0 85.0 97.50
October, 20x0 113.0 89.0 101.00
November, 20x0 102.0 97.0 99.50
December, 20x0 138.0 97.0 117.50
January, 20x1 166.0 133.0 149.50
February, 20x1 204.0 143.0 173.50
March, 20x1 153.0 148.0 150.50
April, 20x1 150.0 101.0 125.50
May, 20x1 141.0 102.0 121.50
June, 20x1 125.0 114.0 119.50
July, 20x1 138.0 118.0 128.00
August, 20x1 135.0 118.0 126.50
September, 20x1 172.0 130.0 151.00
400
Part IV
The scrip is currently being quoted at Rs.109 at a P/E multiple of 2.4 times the EPS of 20x0-x1.
ABC Company Ltd. is the only other player in the market engaged in manufacture of ropes similar
to that of XYZ. For the year ending March 31, 20x1, ABC posted a turnover of Rs.120 crore and a
net profit of Rs.12.2 crore on an equity capital of Rs.20 crore. The scrip is being discounted at 5.9
times and currently quoted at Rs.36.
Future Profitability of XYZ
For the project
Year Ended March 31 20x3 (6 months) 20x4 20x5
Capacity Utilization (%) 60.00 70.00 80.00
Sales 2860.00 6674.00 7627.00
PBIDT 1193.00 2763.00 3144.00
G P Margin (%) 41.71 41.40 41.22
For the Company as a whole
Year Ended March 31 20x2 20x3 20x4 20x5
Sales 5591 8451 12265 13218
PBIDT 2298 3484 5046 5418
Interest 384 801 1171 922
Depreciation 163 1031 1898 1898
PAT 1485 1308 1800 2443
Implementation
The new project of XYZ is expected to commence operations by September end, 20x2.
Constraints in designing the instrument to mobilize funds from public:
• Straight equity issue is ruled out because of:
• bearish market conditions in the equity market, natural resistance to premium issues
• low pricing of equity is not acceptable to promoters
• dilution in equity would immediately affect the bottom line of the company, while the
project would generate cash flows only from October, 20x2.
Pure debt issue cannot be made as:
• The project cannot absorb interest expense before commencement of commercial production.
• Further leveraging the capital structure is not acceptable to financial institutions.
Additional Information
Research Reports by leading Investment Banks suggest that the market is expected to improve
significantly from the second quarter of 20x2.
Case Study 8
Read the case carefully and answer the following questions.
1. Compute the YTM/realized yield for the following bonds:
i. Encash bond assuming the investor opts for early redemption at the end of 5 years
and 6 months from the date of allotment.
ii. Money multiplier bond – Option III
iii. Tax saving bond – Option I. Assume the investor avails the benefit under Section 88
of the Income Tax Act, 1961.
iv. Tax saving bond – Option III:
a. Assume the investor is not availing the benefit under Section 54EC
b. Assume the entire investment is made out of the net sale proceeds of a long-
term asset and 60% of the investment is the capital gains realized on the sale of
the asset.
401
Investment Banking and Financial Services
2. Explain, with reasons, the types of investors to whom the regular income bond and the
money multiplier bond would appeal.
3. Explain, in detail, the concept of market making.
4. What are the dimensions involved while designing innovative financial products by
financial engineering?
5. Is it mandatory for ICICI to pay interest on the application money as mentioned in the case?
Give reasons.
6. Discuss the steps required to create a vibrant debt market in India.
Clearly state your assumptions.
ICICI has made a public issue of unsecured redeemable bonds in the nature of debentures
aggregating Rs.400 crore with a right to retain oversubscription up to Rs.400 crore.
TERMS OF THE ISSUE:
ENCASH BOND
Face Value : Rs.5000
Redemption : At face value i.e. Rs.5,000 at the end of 7 years from the Deemed Date of
Allotment.
Interest : Interest will be payable annually at the following rates:
402
Part IV
Option I II III
Tax Benefit under Sec. 88 88 54EC
Issue Price (Rs.) 5,000 5,000 5,000
Face Value (Rs.) 5,000 7,350 5,000
Redemption Period 3 years 3 years 3 months 7 years
Interest (%) (Payable annually) 12.50 @ Zero Coupon Bond 13.00
The bonds are redeemed at face value.
REGULAR INCOME BOND
Face Value : Rs.5,000
Redemption : At Face Value
The investors can choose any of the following three options in respect of payment of interest:
Option I II III
Minimum Application (Rs.) 15,000 10,000 5,000
Redemption Period (years) 5 5 5
Interest (%) 13.00 13.25 13.75
Interest Payable Monthly Half-Yearly Annually
MONEY MULTIPLIER BOND (in the nature of Deep Discount Bond)
Each Money Multiplier Bond in the nature of Deep Discount Bond will have different face values
under each option and will be issued at a discounted price of Rs. 4000 each.
Minimum Application: One Bond
The investors can choose any of the following options (as per the table below) in respect of the
Money Multiplier Bond.
Option I II III
Issue Price (Rs.) 4,000 4,000 4,000
Face Value/ Redemption Value (Rs.) 8,000 16,000 1,00,000
Redemption Period 5 years 4 months 10 years 7 months 24 years 5 months
Payment of Interest on Encash Bond and Options I, III and IV of Tax Saving Bond: Interest
will be paid on June 30 each year. The first interest payment will be made on June 30, 20x1 for the
period commencing from the Deemed Date of Allotment and the last interest payment will be
made at the time of Redemption of the Bond on a prorata basis.
Interest on Application Money: Interest on Application Money @ 5.00 percent p.a. on the
amount allotted for the period commencing from the 3rd day after the date of deposit of
application form with the bankers to the issue till a day prior to the Deemed Date of Allotment.
Such interest will be paid for the period commencing from the third day after the date of lodgment
of the Application Form at the bank branches listed in the Application Form till a day prior to the
Deemed Date of Allotment. The date of receipt of the Application Form as given by the bank
branch will be considered as final. An investor should not deduct the interest on application money
receivable by him from the amount payable on application. However, in case interest on
application money is less than or equal to Rs.25 then the same would be paid along with the first
interest payment/redemption, depending upon the instrument chosen, along with appropriate
interest. Investors applying through stockinvest will not be entitled to any interest on application
money. No interest on application money will be paid on the amount refunded, if any.
Market Making: ICICI is making arrangements for market making of these bonds.
Deemed Date of Allotment: The Deemed Date of Allotment for the issue has been fixed as 30
days from the date of closure of the issue or date of utilization of proceeds, whichever is earlier.
All benefits relating to the bonds will be available to the investors from the Deemed Date of
Allotment. The actual allotment may occur on a date other than the Deemed Date of Allotment.
Market Lot: The market lot will be one Bond (‘Market Lot’).
Ignore the time lag between the application date and allotment date.
Assume the deemed date of allotment to be January 1, 20x1 and the tax on interest in the hands of
the investors as nil.
403